advertisement
▼
Scroll to page 2
of 648
XC40 O W N ER' S MA N UA L VÄLKOMMEN! We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your passengers. Volvo strives to be one of the safest cars in the world. Your Volvo is also designed to meet applicable safety and environmental requirements. To increase your enjoyment of your Volvo, we recommend that you read the instructions and maintenance information in this owner's manual. The owner's manual is also available as a mobile app (Volvo Manual) and on the Volvo Cars support site (support.volvocars.com). We encourage everyone to always wear their seatbelt in this and other cars. Please do not drive if you are under the influence of alcohol or medication – or have an impaired ability to drive in some other way. TABLE OF CONTENTS OWNER INFORMATION YOUR VOLVO 16 Volvo ID 26 Safety 42 Owner's manual in centre display 17 Creating and registering a Volvo ID 26 Safety during pregnancy 42 Navigate in the owner's manual in the centre display 18 Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure 28 Whiplash Protection System 43 Owner's Manual in mobile devices 20 IntelliSafe-driver support 31 Seatbelts 44 Volvo Cars support site 20 Sensus - online connectivity and entertainment 32 Putting on and taking off seatbelts 45 Reading the owner's manual 21 Software updates 35 Seatbelt tensioner 46 The owner's manual and the environment 23 Recording data 35 Resetting the electric seatbelt tensioner* 47 Terms & Conditions for Services 36 Door and seatbelt reminder 47 Customer Privacy Policy 36 Airbags 49 Important information on accessories and auxiliary equipment 37 Driver airbags 49 Installation of accessories 37 Connection of equipment to the car's diagnostic socket 38 Showing the car's identification number Driver distraction 2 SAFETY Owner information Passenger airbag 50 Activating and deactivating passenger airbag* 52 Side airbags 54 39 Airbags 55 39 Safety mode 55 Starting and moving the car after safety mode 56 Child safety 57 Child seats 58 Upper mounting points for child seats 58 Lower mounting points for child seats 59 i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats 60 Child seat positioning 60 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Child seat mounting 62 Overview table for location of child seats 63 Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts 64 Table for location of i-Size child seats 66 Table for location of ISOFIX child seats 67 Instruments and controls in left-hand drive car 72 Instruments and controls in righthand drive car 73 Driver display 75 Driver display settings 77 Fuel gauge 77 Trip computer 78 Show trip data in the driver display 79 Resetting the trip meter 80 Show trip statistics in the centre display 80 Settings for trip statistics 81 Time and date 82 Outside temperature gauge 82 Indicator symbols in the driver display 83 Warning symbols in the driver display 85 License agreement for the driver display 86 Application menu in driver display 90 Handling the application menu in the driver display 90 Messages in the driver display 91 Managing messages in the driver display 93 Handling a message saved from the driver display 94 Overview of centre display 95 Managing the centre display 98 Activating and deactivating centre display 101 Navigating in the centre display's views 101 Managing tiles in centre display 105 Function view in centre display 108 Moving apps and buttons in centre display 110 Symbols in the centre display's status bar 110 Keyboard in centre display 112 Changing keyboard language in centre display 115 Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display 115 Changing the appearance in the centre display 117 Switching off and changing the volume of the system sound in the centre display 117 Changing system units 118 Changing system language 118 Opening settings in the centre display 118 Open contextual setup in the centre display 119 Changing settings in the centre display 120 Resetting user data for change of ownership 120 Resetting settings in the centre display 121 Setting types in the centre display 121 3 LIGHTING 122 Lighting control 134 Windows, glass and mirrors 148 Driver profiles 123 135 124 Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds 148 Selecting driver profile Adjusting light functions via the centre display Renaming a driver profile 125 Position lamps 135 Reset sequence for pinch protection 149 Resetting settings in the driver profiles 125 Daytime running lights 136 Power windows 149 Linking remote control key to driver profile 125 Dipped beam 137 Operating power windows 150 Using main beam 137 Rearview and door mirrors 151 Active main beam 138 Adjusting rearview mirror dimming 152 Managing messages in the centre display 127 Using direction indicators 139 Angling the door mirrors 153 Handling a message saved from the centre display 128 Active bending lights* 140 Panorama roof* 154 Voice recognition 128 Front fog lamps/cornering lights* 141 Operating the panorama roof* 156 Using voice recognition 129 Rear fog lamp 141 158 Controlling a telephone with voice recognition 130 Brake lights 142 Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's* sun blind Emergency brake lights 142 Using windscreen wipers 159 Voice control of radio and media 131 Hazard warning flashers 143 Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* 160 Settings for voice recognition 131 Using home safe lighting 143 Using the rain sensor 160 Approach light duration 144 Using the rain sensor's memory function 161 Interior lighting 144 Adjusting interior lighting 146 Message in centre display 4 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS Table showing centre display settings 126 Using windscreen and headlamp washers 162 Using the rear window wiper and washer 163 Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing 164 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL CLIMATE Manual front seat 166 Climate 178 Power front seat* 167 Climate zones 178 Activating and deactivating the heated steering wheel* 194 Adjusting the power front seat* 167 Climate control - sensors 179 194 Perceived temperature Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated steering wheel* Storing memory function in power operated front seat* 168 179 Controlling climate control with voice recognition Activating auto climate control 180 195 195 Air quality Activating and deactivating air recirculation Using stored memory in a powered front seat 169 Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in the front seat* 169 181 Clean Zone* 181 Activating and deactivating time setting for air recirculation 196 Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat 170 Clean Zone Interior Package* 182 Activating and deactivating max defroster 196 Interior Air Quality System* 182 198 Activating and deactivating the air quality sensor* 183 Activating and deactivating the heated windscreen* Lowering the backrests in the rear seat 171 Adjusting the head restraints in the rear seat 173 199 Passenger compartment filter 183 Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated windscreen* Steering wheel controls and horn 174 Air distribution 184 Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors 199 Steering lock Adjusting the steering wheel 175 Changing air distribution 185 Opening, closing and aiming the air vents 185 Table of air distribution options Activating and deactivating automatic starting of the heated rear window and door mirrors 200 175 187 Climate controls Regulating fan level for front seat 190 200 Activating and deactivating heated front seat* Regulating temperature for front seat 191 201 Synchronising temperature 202 Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated front seat* 192 Activating and deactivating air conditioning 202 Activating and deactivating heated rear seat* 192 Parking climate* 203 Preconditioning* 204 Activating and deactivating ventilated front seat* 193 Starting/stopping preconditioning* 204 Preconditioning time setting* 205 5 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM 6 Adding and editing time setting for preconditioning* 205 Lock confirmation 216 Lock indication setting 217 Locking and unlocking from inside the car 245 Activating and deactivating time setting for preconditioning* 207 Remote control key 217 Unlocking the tailgate from the inside of the car 246 Removing time setting for preconditioning* 207 Locking and unlocking with the remote control key 219 Activating and deactivating child safety locks 247 Climate comfort when parking* 208 Settings for remotely controlled and inside unlocking 220 Starting and switching off climate comfort when parking* Automatic locking when driving 248 208 Unlocking the tailgate with the remote control key 221 Opening and closing the power*operated tailgate 248 Symbols and messages for parking climate control* 210 Remote control key range 222 251 Heater* 211 Replacing the battery in the remote control key Programming maximum opening for power operated tailgate* 222 252 Parking heater* 212 Ordering more remote control keys Opening and closing the tailgate with foot movement* 226 Additional heater* 213 Red Key - restricted remote control key* Private locking 226 253 Activating and deactivating automatic start of auxiliary heater 213 Red Key settings* 227 Activating and deactivating private locking 253 Detachable key blade 227 Alarm* 255 Locking and unlocking with the detachable key blade 229 Activating and deactivating alarms* 256 Immobiliser 230 Type approval for the remote control key system 232 Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* 241 Keyless locking and unlocking* 242 Settings for Keyless entry* 243 Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* 243 Antenna locations for the start and lock systems 244 Reduced alarm level* 258 Double lock* 258 Temporarily deactivating double locks* 259 Detection of unknown car component* 259 DRIVER SUPPORT Driving support systems 262 Activating and starting Cruise Control 277 Speed-dependent steering force 262 Managing speed for the Cruise Control 278 Change between Cruise Control and Adaptive Cruise Control 292 Stability system Roll Stability Control 263 279 Electronic stability control 264 Deactivate Cruise Control and set it in standby mode Symbols and messages for Adaptive Cruise Control 294 Sport mode for electronic stability control 265 Reactivating Cruise Control from standby mode 279 Pilot Assist 296 Pilot Assist and Collision risk warning Activating/deactivating Sport mode in Electronic Stability Control 265 Deactivating Cruise Control 299 280 Activating and starting Pilot Assist Limitation for sport mode in Electronic Stability Control 266 Adaptive Cruise Control* 300 281 Managing speed for Pilot Assist 301 Adaptive Cruise Control and Collision risk warning 283 Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist Symbols and messages for electronic stability control 267 302 Activating and starting Adaptive Cruise Control 284 Deactivating/activating Pilot Assist 304 Overtaking assistance with Pilot Assist Speed Limiter 268 306 Activating and starting the Speed Limiter 269 306 Managing speed for the Speed Limiter 269 Deactivate the Speed Limiter and set it in standby mode Managing speed with Adaptive Cruise Control 285 Start overtaking assistance with Pilot Assist 286 Limitations for overtaking assistance with Pilot Assist 306 270 Setting time interval for Adaptive Cruise Control 287 Change the target with Pilot Assist 307 Reactivating the Speed Limiter from standby mode 271 Deactivating/reactivating Adaptive Cruise Control Automatic braking with Pilot Assist 307 Deactivating the Speed Limiter 289 271 Overtaking assistance with Adaptive Cruise Control Limitations for Speed Limiter 272 272 Starting overtaking assistance with Adaptive Cruise Control 289 Automatic Speed Limiter Activate/deactivate Automatic Speed Limiter 274 Limitations for overtaking assistance with Adaptive Cruise Control Changing the tolerance for the Automatic Speed Limiter Limitations for Automatic Speed Limiter Cruise Control Limitations of Pilot Assist 308 Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist* 309 Radar unit 311 290 Limitations for radar device 312 315 275 Changing target with Adaptive Cruise Control 290 Recommended radar device maintenance Type approval for radar device 316 275 Automatic braking with Adaptive Cruise Control 291 Camera unit 322 Limitations for Adaptive Cruise Control 292 Limitations for camera unit 323 276 7 Recommended camera device maintenance 326 City Safety™ 326 Parameters and subfunctions for City Safety 327 Setting the warning distance for City Safety 329 Detection of obstacles with City Safety 330 City Safety in cross traffic 332 Limitations for City Safety in cross traffic 333 City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are prevented 333 Limitations of City Safety 334 Messages for City Safety 337 Rear Collision Warning 338 Limitations of Rear Collision Warning 338 BLIS* 339 Activate/deactivate BLIS 348 Road Sign Information* 349 Activating/deactivating Road Sign Information 350 Road Sign Information and sign display 350 Road Sign Information and Sensus Navigation 352 Road Sign Information with Speed Warning and Settings 352 Activating/deactivating Speed warning in Road Sign Information 353 Road Sign Information with Speed Camera Information 354 Limitations of Road Sign Information 354 Driver Alert Control 355 Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control 356 357 Lane assistance symbols in the driver display 364 Steering assistance at risk of collision 365 Activating/deactivating Steering assistance in the event of a collision risk 365 Steering assistance upon risk of run-off 366 Steering assistance level in the event of a run-off risk 367 Activating/deactivating Steering assistance in the event of run-off risk 367 Limitations for steering assistance upon risk of running off the road 368 Steering assistance upon risk of head-on collision 369 Activating/deactivating Steering assistance in the event of a risk of a head-on collision 370 Limitations for steering assistance upon risk of head-on collision 370 Symbols and messages for steering assistance upon risk of collision 372 340 Select rest stop guidance in the event of a warning with Driver Alert Control Limitations of BLIS 341 Limitations of Driver Alert Control 357 Recommended maintenance for BLIS 341 Lane assistance 357 Park Assist* 373 343 Steering assistance with lane assistance 359 374 360 Park Assist Pilot front, rear and along the sides 360 Activating/deactivating Park Assist Pilot 375 Limitations of Parking assistance 375 Recommended Park Assist Pilot maintenance 376 Messages for BLIS 344 Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert 345 Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert 345 Select assistance option for lane assistance Recommended maintenance for Cross Traffic Alert 346 Cross Traffic Alert* 8 Messages for Cross Traffic Alert Limitations of Lane assistance 360 Symbols and messages for lane assistance 362 STARTING AND DRIVING Symbols and messages for Park Assist Pilot 377 Park assist camera* 378 Parking cameras' camera views 379 Park assist lines for parking camera 381 Sensor fields from Park Assist Pilot for parking camera 383 Starting the park assist camera 383 Limitations for park assist camera 384 Recommended parking camera maintenance 385 Starting the car 396 Auto braking after a collision 408 Switching off the car 397 Gearbox 409 Ignition positions 398 Gear positions for automatic gearbox 410 Selecting ignition mode 399 Changing gear with steering wheel paddles* 411 Gear selector inhibitor 412 Kick-down function 413 Gear shift indicator* 413 Alcohol lock* 399 Bypass of the alcohol lock* 400 Before starting the engine with the alcohol lock 400 Brake functions 401 All-wheel drive 413 Foot brake 401 Drive modes* 414 Brake assistance 402 Changing drive mode* 416 Braking on wet roads Symbols and messages for Park assist camera 386 402 Drive mode ECO 416 Park Assist Pilot* 387 Braking on gritted roads 403 418 Parking variants with Park Assist Pilot 387 Brake system maintenance 403 Activating and deactivating drive mode ECO with the function button Parking with Park Assist Pilot 388 Parking brake 403 Start/Stop function 419 Activating and deactivating the parking brake 404 Driving with start/stop function 419 420 Automatic parking brake activation setting 405 Deactivating the Start/Stop function temporarily Conditions for the Start/Stop function 421 Parking on a hill 406 Level control* and shock absorption 423 In the event of a fault in the parking brake 406 Low speed control* 425 Automatic braking when stationary 407 Activating and deactivating lowspeed driving* using a function button 425 Activating and deactivating the automatic brake at a standstill 407 Hill descent control* 426 Help when starting on a hill 408 Activating and deactivating hill descent control* with the function button 427 Leaving a car park with Park Assist Pilot Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* Recommended Park Assist Pilot maintenance Messages for Park Assist Pilot* 391 392 393 394 9 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET 10 Economical driving 428 Trailer stability assist* 449 Sound, media and Internet 464 Preparations for a long trip 428 Checking trailer lamps 450 Audio settings 464 465 Winter driving 429 Towbar-mounted bicycle rack* 451 Apps Driving in water 430 Towing 452 Downloading apps 466 Opening and closing the fuel filler flap 430 Fitting and removing the towing eye 453 Updating apps 467 Filling fuel 431 Recovery 455 Deleting apps 467 Handling of fuel 432 HomeLink®* 456 Radio 468 Petrol 432 Programming HomeLink®* 456 Start radio 468 Petrol particle filter 433 Using HomeLink 458 Changing radio band and radio station 469 Diesel 434 459 Searching for radio stations 470 Empty tank and diesel engine 435 Setting radio favourites 470 Settings for radio 471 Diesel particulate filter 436 Emission control with AdBlue® 436 Handling AdBlue® 437 Checking and filling with AdBlue® Type approval for HomeLink®* Compass* 459 Activating and deactivating the compass* 460 Calibrating the compass* 460 RDS radio 472 Digital radio* 473 438 Link between FM and digital radio* 474 Symbols and messages for AdBlue® 440 Media player 474 Overheating in the engine and drive system 442 Media playback 475 Overloading the starter battery 443 Controlling and changing media 476 Using jump starting with another battery 443 Searching media 477 Towbar* 444 Gracenote® 478 Specifications for towbar* 445 Video 478 Extendable and retractable towbar* 446 Driving with a trailer 448 Playing a video Playing back DivX® Settings for video 479 479 479 Media via Bluetooth® Connecting a device via 480 Bluetooth® 480 Media via USB port 480 Connecting a device via USB port 481 Switch between Bluetooth-connected phones 493 Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone 493 Managing phone calls 493 Managing text messages 494 Settings for text messages 495 Managing the phone book 496 Settings for phone 496 Settings for Bluetooth devices 497 TV* 481 Using the TV* 482 Settings for TV* 482 Apple® CarPlay®* 483 Using Apple® CarPlay®* 483 Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* Wireless phone charger* 497 485 Using the wireless telephone charger* Tips for using Apple® CarPlay®* 497 485 Internet-connected car* 498 Android Auto* 486 499 Using Android Auto* 487 Connecting the car to the Internet via a mobile device (Bluetooth) Settings for Android Auto* 487 500 Tips for using Android Auto* Connecting the car to the Internet via a mobile device (Wi-Fi) 488 Phone 488 Connect the car to the Internet via car modem (SIM card) 500 Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time 489 Settings for car modem 501 Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth automatically 491 Sharing Internet access from the car via a Wi-Fi hotspot 502 Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth manually No or poor Internet connection 492 503 Remove Wi-Fi network 503 Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone 492 Wi-Fi technologies and security 504 User terms and conditions and data sharing 504 Activating and deactivating data sharing 504 Compatible media formats 505 Technical specifications for USB devices 506 Storage space on hard disk 506 License agreement for audio and media 507 11 WHEELS AND TYRES Tyres 518 Emergency puncture repair kit 537 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Dimension designation for tyre 519 Using a puncture repair kit 538 Passenger compartment interior 544 520 Inflating tyres with the compressor from the puncture repair kit 542 Tunnel console 545 Using the cigarette lighter* 545 Dimension designation for wheel rim Tyres' rotation direction 521 Tread wear indicators on the tyres 521 Emptying the ashtray* 546 Checking tyre pressure 522 Electrical sockets 546 522 Using electrical sockets 547 523 Using the glovebox 548 Tyre pressure monitoring system* 524 Sun visors 549 Calibrate the system for tyre pressure monitoring* 525 Cargo area 550 Recommendations for loading See tyre pressure statue in the centre display* 550 527 Roof load and loading on load carriers 551 Action in the event of warning for low tyre pressure 528 Bag hooks 551 Load retaining eyelets 552 When changing wheels 529 Through-load hatch in the rear seat* 552 Tool kit 529 Folding up the cargo area floor 553 Jack* 529 Fitting and removing the safety net* 553 Wheel bolts 530 555 Removing a wheel 531 Removing and storing the parcel shelf in the car Fitting the wheels 533 First aid kit 556 Spare wheel* 534 Warning triangle 556 Taking out the spare wheel 535 Winter wheels 536 Snow chains 536 Adjusting tyre pressure Recommended tyre pressure 12 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Volvo service programme 560 Symbols on the batteries 583 Touching up minor paintwork damage 604 Data transfer between car and workshop via Wi-Fi 560 Fuses and central electrical units 584 Colour codes 605 Download Center 561 Replacing a fuse 585 Replacing the wiper blade, rear window 606 Managing system updates via the Download Centre 561 Fuses in engine compartment 586 Replacing windscreen wiper blades 607 Fuses under the left-hand front seat 590 Wiper blades in service position 608 Cleaning the interior 593 Filling washer fluid 609 Cleaning the centre display 593 Car status Book service and repair 562 562 Sending car information to a workshop 564 Raise the car 565 Opening and closing the bonnet Servicing the climate control system Engine compartment overview 567 568 569 Engine oil 570 Checking and filling with engine oil 571 Topping up coolant 572 Bulb replacement 573 Exterior lamp positions 574 Replacing the rear direction indicator bulb 575 Changing brake light bulb 576 Replacing the rear fog lamp bulb 577 Bulb specifications 578 Starter battery 579 Support battery 582 Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining 594 Cleaning the seatbelts 595 Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats 595 Cleaning leather upholstery 596 Cleaning the leather steering wheel 596 Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts 597 Cleaning the exterior 597 Polishing and waxing 598 Handwashing 598 Automatic car wash 600 High-pressure washing 601 Cleaning the wiper blades 601 Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components 602 Cleaning wheel rims 603 Rustproofing 603 Car paintwork 604 13 SPECIFICATIONS 612 Dimensions 615 Weights 617 Towing capacity and towball load 618 Engine specifications 620 Engine oil — specifications 621 Adverse driving conditions for engine oil 622 Coolant — specifications 623 Transmission fluid — specifications 623 Brake fluid — specifications 623 Fuel tank - volume 624 Tank capacity for 14 ALPHABETICAL INDEX Type designations AdBlue® 624 Air conditioning — specifications 624 Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions 626 Approved wheel and tyre sizes 628 Lowest permitted tyre load index and speed rating for tyres 629 Approved tyre pressures 630 Alphabetical Index 631 OWNER INFORMATION OWNER INFORMATION Owner information The car's centre display1 Owner's information is available in several different product formats, both digital and printed. The owner's manual is available in the car's centre display, as a mobile app and on the Volvo Cars support site. There is a Quick Guide and a supplement to the owner's manual available in the glovebox, with specifications and fuse information, amongst other things. A printed owner's manual can be ordered. In the centre display, drag down the top view and tap on Owner's manual. Available here are options for visual navigation with exterior and interior images of the car. The information is searchable and is also divided into categories. Mobile app In App Store or Google Play, search for "Volvo Manual", download the app to your smartphone or tablet and select the car. Available in the app are video tutorials and options for visual navigation with exterior and interior images of the car. It is easy to navigate between the different sections in the owner's manual and the content is searchable. Volvo Cars support site Go to support.volvocars.com and select your country. Here you can find owner's manuals, both online and in PDF format. On the Volvo Cars support site there are also video tutorials and further information and help regarding your Volvo and your car ownership. The page is available for most markets. 1A 16 complete printed manual is included with the car for markets without owner's manual in the centre display. Printed information There is a supplement to the owner's manual1 in the glovebox that contains information on fuses and specifications, as well as a summary of important and practical information. There is also a Quick Guide available in printed format that helps you to get started with the most commonly used functions in the car. Depending on equipment level selected, market, etc. additional owner's information may also be available in printed format in the car. A printed owner's manual and associated supplement can be ordered. Contact a Volvo retailer to order. IMPORTANT The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven safely in traffic and that applicable laws and regulations are followed. It is also important that the car is maintained and handled in accordance with Volvo's recommendations in the owner's information. If there should be a difference between the information in the centre display and the printed information then it is always the printed information that applies. OWNER INFORMATION NOTE Changing the language in the centre display may mean that some owner information is not compliant with national or local laws and regulations. Do not switch to a language that is difficult to understand as this may make it difficult to find your way back in the structure on screen. Related information • • • • Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17) Owner's Manual in mobile devices (p. 20) Volvo Cars support site (p. 20) Owner's manual in centre display A digital2 version of the owner's manual is available in the car's centre display. The digital owner's manual can be accessed from the top view, and in some cases the contextual owner's manual can also be accessed from the top view. The information in the owner's manual can be accessed directly via the owner's manual homepage or its top menu. Contextual owner's manual NOTE The digital owner's manual is not available while driving. Owner's manual Reading the owner's manual (p. 21) The contextual owner's manual is accessed from the top view. When the contextual owner's manual is available, it is shown to the right of Owner's manual in the top view. The owner's manual is accessed from the top view. To open the owner's manual - drag down the top view in the centre display and tap on Owner's manual. 2 Applies for most markets. Pressing the contextual owner's manual opens an article in the owner's manual that is related to the content that is shown on the screen. E.g. press Navigation Manual - an article that is related to navigation opens. This only applies to some of the apps in the car. For third party apps that are downloaded, it is not possible, for example, to access app-specific articles. }} 17 OWNER INFORMATION || Related information • Navigate in the owner's manual in the centre display (p. 18) • Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 101) • Downloading apps (p. 466) Navigate in the owner's manual in the centre display The digital owner's manual can be accessed from the centre display top view in the car. The content is searchable and it is easy to navigate between different sections. Opening the menu in the top menu – Press in the upper list in the owner's manual. > A menu containing various options for finding information opens: Homepage Tap on the symbol to go back to the start page in the owner's manual. Categories The articles in the owner's manual are structured into main categories and subcategories. The same article can be found in several appropriate categories in order to be found more easily. The owner's manual is accessed from the top view. – To open the owner's manual - drag down the top view in the centre display and tap on Owner's manual. There is a range of different options for finding information in the owner's manual. The options can be accessed from the owner's manual homepage and from the top menu. 1. Press Categories. > The main categories are shown in a list. 2. Tap on a main category ( ). > A list of subcategories ( ) and articles ( ) is shown. 3. Tap on an article to open it. To go back, press the back arrow. 18 OWNER INFORMATION Quick Guide Press the symbol to access a page with links to a selection of articles that can be particularly useful to read in order to get to know the most common functions of the car. The articles can also be accessed via categories, but are collected here for quick access. Tap on an article in order to read it in its entirety. Hotspots for exterior and interior Exterior and interior overview images of the car. Different parts are designated with hotspots that lead to articles about those parts of the car. 2. 3. Tap on a hotspot. > The title of the article about the area is shown. Tap on the title to open the article. Favourites Press the symbol to access the articles saved as favourites. Tap on an article in order to read it in its entirety. Saving or deleting articles as favourites Save an article as favourite by pressing at the top right when an article is open. When an article has been saved as a favourite the star is filled in: . Video Press Exterior or Interior. > Exterior or interior images are shown with so-called hotspots in place. The hotspot leads to articles about the corresponding part of the car. Swipe horizontally over the screen to browse among the images. Tap on the symbol to obtain information about which version of the owner's manual is available in the car as well as other useful information. To go back, press the back arrow. To remove an article as a favourite, press the star again in the current article. 1. Information Press the symbol to view brief instruction videos for various functions in the car. Using the search function in the top menu 1. in the top menu of the owner's Tap on manual. A keyboard appears in the lower part of the screen. 2. Type in a keyword, such as "seatbelt". > Suggestions for articles and categories are shown while letters are being entered. 3. Tap on the article or category to access it. Related information • • • Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17) Keyboard in centre display (p. 112) Reading the owner's manual (p. 21) 19 OWNER INFORMATION Owner's Manual in mobile devices The owner's manual is available as a mobile app3 from both the App Store and Google Play. The app is adapted for smartphones and tablets. in the owner's manual and the content is searchable. Volvo Cars support site More information on your car is available on the Volvo Cars website and support site. Support on the Internet Go to support.volvocars.com to visit the site. The support site is available for most markets. It contains support for functions such as webbased services and functions, Volvo On Call*, the navigation system* and apps. Videos and stepby-step instructions explain different procedures, e.g. how to connect the car to the Internet via a mobile phone. Downloadable information The owner's manual can be downloaded as a mobile app from the App Store or Google Play. The QR code provided here takes you directly to the app. Alternatively, you can search for "Volvo manual" in the App Store or Google Play. The app contains a video along with exterior and interior images where different parts of the car are highlighted with so-called hotspots, which lead to articles about the area in question. It is easy to navigate between the different sections 3 20 Maps For cars equipped with Sensus Navigation, there is the facility to download maps from the support page. The mobile app is available from both the App Store and Google Play. Related information • Reading the owner's manual (p. 21) Owner's manuals as PDF Owner's manuals are available for download in PDF format. Select car model and model year to download the manual as required. Contact The support site contains contact details to customer support and your nearest Volvo retailer. For certain mobile devices. * Option/accessory. OWNER INFORMATION Log in to Volvo Cars website Reading the owner's manual Options/accessories Create a personal Volvo ID and log in to www.volvocars.com. When you have logged in it is possible to get an overview of service, agreements and warranties, amongst other things. Here there is also information about accessories and software adapted for your car model. A good way of getting to know your new car is to read the owner's manual, ideally before your first journey. Reading the owner's manual is a good way to become familiar with new functions, get advice on how best to handle the car in different situations and learn how to make the best use of all the car's features. Please pay attention to the safety instructions contained in the owner's manual. In addition to standard equipment, the owner's manual also describes options (factory fitted equipment) and certain accessories (retrofitted extra equipment). Related information • Volvo ID (p. 26) The intention of this owner's information is to explain all of the possible features, functions and options included in a Volvo vehicle. It is not intended as an indication or guarantee that all of these features, functions and options are included in every vehicle. Some terminology used may not exactly match terminology used in sales, marketing and advertising materials. Development work is constantly underway in order to improve our product. Modifications may mean that information, descriptions and illustrations in the owner's manual differ from the equipment in the car. We reserve the right to make modifications without prior notice. Do not remove this manual from the car - if problems should arise then the necessary information about where and how to seek professional help will be missing. © Volvo Car Corporation All types of option/accessory are marked with an asterisk: *. The equipment described in the owner's manual is not available in all cars - they have different equipment depending on adaptations for the needs of different markets and national or local laws and regulations. In the event of uncertainty over what is standard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo retailer. Special texts WARNING Warning texts appear if there is a risk of injury. IMPORTANT "Important" texts appear if there is a risk of damage. NOTE NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate the use of e.g. features and functions. }} * Option/accessory. 21 OWNER INFORMATION || Footnote Warning of personal injury The owner's manual contains information in certain locations in the form of a footnote at the bottom of the page or at the end of a table. This information is an addition to the text that it refers to via a number. If the footnote refers to text in a table then letters are used instead of numbers for referral. White ISO symbols and white text/image on black or blue warning field and message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if the warning is ignored, may result in damage to property. Information Message texts There are displays in the car that show menu and message texts. In the owner's manual the appearance of these texts differs from the normal text. Examples of menu texts and message texts: Phone, New message. Decals The car contains different types of decal which are designed to convey important information in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the car have the following descending degree of importance for the warning/information. Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, white text/image on black message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if the warning is ignored, may result in serious personal injury or fatality. Risk of property damage White ISO symbols and white text/image on black message field. NOTE It is not intended that the decals illustrated in the owner's manual should be exact replicas of those in the car. They are included to show their approximate appearance and location in the car. The information that applies to your particular car is available on the respective decals for your car. 22 OWNER INFORMATION Procedure lists Procedures where action must be taken in a certain sequence are numbered in the owner's manual: When there is a series of illustrations for step-by-step instructions each step is numbered in the same way as the corresponding illustration. Lists of letters appear adjacent to the series of illustrations where the order of the instructions is not significant. Arrows appear numbered and unnumbered and are used to illustrate a movement. Arrows with letters are used to clarify a movement when the relative order is of no relevance. If there is no series of illustrations for step-bystep instructions then the different steps are numbered with normal numbers. Position lists Red circles containing a number are used in overview images where different components are pointed out. The number recurs in the position list featured in connection with the illustration that describes the item. Bulleted lists • • Coolant Engine oil Related information Related information refers to other articles containing closely associated information. Images Illustrations used in the owner's manual are sometimes schematic and are intended to provide an overall picture or example of a certain function. Illustrations may deviate from the car's appearance depending on equipment level and market. The owner's manual and the environment The Owner's Manual is printed on paper originating from controlled forests. The Forest Stewardship Council (FSC)® symbol shows that the paper pulp in a printed owner's manual comes from FSC®-certified forests or other controlled sources. To be continued }} This symbol is located furthest down to the right when an article continues on the following page. Continued from previous page || This symbol is located furthest up to the left when an article continues from the previous page. Related information • Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 28) Related information • • • Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17) Owner's Manual in mobile devices (p. 20) Volvo Cars support site (p. 20) A bulleted list is used when there is a list of points in the owner's manual. Example: 23 YOUR VOLVO YOUR VOLVO Volvo ID Volvo ID provides access to a wide range of personalized Volvo services1 online. Related information • • Creating and registering a Volvo ID (p. 26) Book service and repair (p. 562) It is possible to create a Volvo ID from the car, volvocars.com or Volvo On Call app2. Certain functions and services require that the car is registered to a personal Volvo ID. Registering the Volvo ID to the car makes a wide range of Volvo services available directly from the car. Examples of services: • Volvo On Call* - Volvo ID is used when logging in to the Volvo On Call app. • Send to Car - Makes it possible to send an address from an Internet map service directly to the car. • Book Service and Repair - Register your preferred workshop/retailer at volvocars.com to be able to book service directly from the car. Advantages of Volvo ID • • 1 2 3 26 One user name and one password to access online services, i.e. only one username and one password to remember. If the username/password for a service (e.g. Volvo On Call) is changed, then it is also changed automatically for other services. Creating and registering a Volvo ID It is possible to create a Volvo ID in different ways. If the Volvo ID is created at volvocars.com or with Volvo On Call app, the Volvo ID must also be registered to the car to enable use of the various Volvo ID services. Create a Volvo ID with the app 1. Download the Volvo ID app from Download Centre in the centre display's app view. 2. Start the app and register a personal email address. 3. Follow the instructions that are automatically sent to the specified email address. > A Volvo ID has now been created and automatically registered to the car. Volvo ID services can now be used. Create a Volvo ID on the Volvo Cars website 1. Go into www.volvocars.com and log in3 using the icon at the top right. Select Create Volvo ID. 2. Enter a personal email address. 3. Follow the instructions that are automatically sent to the specified email address. > A Volvo ID has now been created. Read below to learn how to register the ID to the car. The services available may vary over time and vary depending on equipment level and market. If you have Volvo On Call*. Available in certain markets. * Option/accessory. YOUR VOLVO Create a Volvo ID with the Volvo On Call app4 1. Download the latest version of the Volvo On Call app from a smartphone, via e.g. App Store, Windows Phone or Google Play. 3. 2. Related information 3. Choose to create a Volvo ID from the app's start page and enter a personal email address. Follow the instructions that are automatically sent to the specified email address. > A Volvo ID has now been created. Read below to learn how to register the ID to the car. • • • • Follow the instructions that are automatically sent to the email address linked to your Volvo ID. > Your Volvo ID is now registered to the car. Volvo ID services can now be used. Volvo ID (p. 26) Downloading apps (p. 466) Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 561) Internet-connected car* (p. 498) Registering your Volvo ID to the car If you created your Volvo ID via the web or the Volvo On Call app, register it to your car as follows: 1. If not done already, download the Volvo ID app from Download Centre in the app view. NOTE To download apps, the car must be connected to the Internet. 2. Start the app and enter your Volvo ID/your email address. 4 Cars with Volvo On Call*. * Option/accessory. 27 YOUR VOLVO Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure Volvo Car Corporation is constantly working on the development of safer and more efficient Environmental care is one of Volvo Cars’ core values and influences all operations. The environmental work is based on the whole life cycle of the car and takes into account the environmental impact it has, from design to scrapping and recycling. Volvo Cars' basic principle is that every new product developed must have less impact on the environment than the product it replaces. Volvo's environmental management work has resulted in the development of more effective and less polluting drivelines Drive-E. Personal environment is also important to Volvo - the air 28 products and solutions in order to reduce the negative impact on the environment. inside a Volvo is, for example, cleaner than the air outside thanks to the climate control system. Your Volvo complies with stringent international environmental standards. All Volvo's manufacturing units must be ISO 14001 certified, and this supports a systematic approach to the operation's environmental issues, which leads to continuous improvement with reduced environmental impact. Holding the ISO certificate also means that environmental laws and regulations in force are complied with. Volvo also requires that its partners must also meet these requirements. Fuel consumption Since a large part of a car's total environmental impact stems from its use, the emphasis of Volvo Cars' environmental work is on reducing fuel consumption, carbon dioxide emissions and other air pollutants. Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide. YOUR VOLVO Contributing to a better environment An energy-efficient and fuel-efficient car not only contributes to a reduced impact on the environment, but also means reduced costs for the owner of the car. As the driver, it is easy to reduce fuel consumption and thereby save money and contribute to a better environment here is some advice: • Plan for an effective average speed. Speeds above approx. 80 km/h (approx. 50 mph) and below 50 km/h (approx. 30 mph) lead to increased energy consumption. • Follow the Service and Warranty Booklet's recommended intervals for service and maintenance of the car. • Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the engine when stationary for longer periods. Pay attention to local regulations. • Plan the journey - a lot of unnecessary stops and uneven speed contribute to increased fuel consumption. • Use preconditioning* before starting in cold conditions - it improves starting capacity and reduces wear in cold weather. The engine reaches normal operating temperature more quickly, which decreases consumption and reduces emissions. Also remember to always dispose of environmentally hazardous waste, such as batteries and oil, in an environmentally safe manner. Consult a workshop in the event of uncertainty about how this type of waste should be discarded - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Efficient emission control Your Volvo is manufactured following the concept "Clean inside and out" – a concept that encompasses a clean interior environment as well as highly efficient emission control. In many cases the exhaust emissions are well below the applicable standards. Clean air in the passenger compartment An air filter helps prevent dust and pollen entering the passenger compartment via the air intake. The Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* ensures that the incoming air is cleaner than the air in the traffic outside. The system cleans the air in the passenger compartment from contaminants such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level ozone. If the outside air is contaminated then the air intake is closed and the air is recirculated. Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic, queues and tunnels for example. IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*, which also includes a function that allows the fan to start when the car is unlocked with the remote control key. Interior The material used in the interior of a Volvo is carefully selected and has been tested in order to be pleasant and comfortable. Some of the details are hand-made, such as the seams of the steering wheel that are sewn by hand. The interior is monitored in order not to emit strong odours or substances that cause discomfort in the event of e.g. high heat and bright light. Volvo workshops and the environment Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a long service life and low fuel consumption for your car. In this way you also contribute to a cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops are entrusted with the service and maintenance of your car it becomes part of Volvo's system. Volvo makes clear demands regarding the way in which workshop premises shall be designed in order to prevent spills and discharges into the environment. The workshop staff have the knowledge and the tools required to guarantee good environmental care. Recycling Since Volvo works from a life cycle perspective, it is also important that the car is recycled in an environmentally sound manner. Almost all of the car can be recycled. The last owner of the car is therefore requested to contact a retailer for referral to a certified/approved recycling facility. }} * Option/accessory. 29 YOUR VOLVO || Related information • Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 626) • • • Economical driving (p. 428) • 30 Starting/stopping preconditioning* (p. 204) The owner's manual and the environment (p. 23) Air quality (p. 181) * Option/accessory. YOUR VOLVO IntelliSafe-driver support IntelliSafe is the Volvo Cars concept for car safety. IntelliSafe comprises a number of systems, both standard and optional, whose purpose is to make a car journey safe, to prevent injuries and to protect passengers and other road users. Support IntelliSafe includes driver support functions such as Adaptive cruise control* which helps the driver to maintain an even speed combined with a preselected time interval to the vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist5 helps the driver to drive the car between the lane's edge markings using steering assistance as well as to maintain an even speed, combined with a preselected time interval to the vehicle ahead. Park Assist Pilot* helps the driver to park in or leave a parking space. Other examples of systems that can help the driver are the Active main beam, Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* and Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* systems. Prevention City Safety is a function that can contribute to preventing accidents. The function can prevent or mitigate a collision with pedestrians, cyclists, larger animals or vehicles. Visual, acoustic and 5 brake pulse warnings are given in the event of a risk of collision to help the driver act in time. If the driver does not react to the warning and the risk of collision is assessed as imminent then City Safety can automatically brake the car. • • • Seatbelts (p. 44) Airbags (p. 49) Whiplash Protection System (p. 43) Lane assistance (LKA) is another example of a function that can help prevent accidents by helping the driver - on motorways and similar larger roads - to reduce the risk of the car accidentally leaving its own lane. The function Steering aid during increased collision risk can help the driver reduce the risk of the car leaving its lane unintentionally and/or colliding with another vehicle or obstacle by actively steering the car back into its lane and/or swerving. Protection With the aim of protecting the driver and passengers, the car is equipped with seatbelt tensioners which can tension the seatbelts in critical situations and in collisions. The car also has airbags and inflatable curtains, as well as Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS), which protects against whiplash injuries. Related information • • • Driving support systems (p. 262) Active main beam (p. 138) Safety (p. 42) This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market. * Option/accessory. 31 YOUR VOLVO Sensus - online connectivity and entertainment Information when it is needed, where it is needed Sensus makes it possible to surf the Internet, use different types of apps and make the car a Wi-Fi hotspot. The different displays in the car provide information at the right time. The information is shown in different locations based on how it should be prioritised by the driver. This is Sensus Sensus offers an intelligent interface and online connectivity with the digital world. An intuitive navigation structure makes it possible to receive relevant support, information and entertainment when it is necessary, without distracting the driver. Sensus covers all solutions in the car that are connected with entertainment, online connectivity, navigation* and the user interface between driver and car. It is Sensus that makes communication possible between you, the car and the outside world. 32 * Option/accessory. YOUR VOLVO Different types of information are shown in different displays depending on how the information should be prioritised. Driver display The driver display shows information on speed and e.g. incoming calls or song tracks being played. The display is operated via the two steering wheel keypads. Centre display Driver display6. 6 The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. }} 33 YOUR VOLVO || Many of the main functions of the car are controlled from the centre display, a touch screen which reacts to touch. The number of physical buttons and controls in the car is therefore minimal. The screen can even be operated while wearing gloves. From here, for example, you can control the climate control system, the entertainment system and seat position*. The information that is shown in the centre display can be acted on by the driver or someone else in the car when the opportunity arises. Voice recognition system The voice recognition system can be used without the driver needing to take his/her hands off the steering wheel. The system can understand natural speech. Use voice recognition to, for example, play back a song, call someone, increase the temperature or read out a text message. Related information • • • • • 34 Driver display (p. 75) Overview of centre display (p. 95) Voice recognition (p. 128) Internet-connected car* (p. 498) Sharing Internet access from the car via a Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 502) * Option/accessory. YOUR VOLVO Software updates Recording data So that you as a Volvo customer get the best experience of your car, Volvo continuously develops the systems in the cars and the services that you are offered. As part of Volvo's safety and quality assurance, certain information about the vehicle's operation, functionality and incidents are recorded in the car. You can update the software in your Volvo to the latest version when your car is serviced at an authorised Volvo dealer. The latest software update gives you access to new functions and improvements, as well as previous improvements included with previous software updates. This vehicle is equipped with an "Event Data Recorder" (EDR). Its primary purpose is to register and record data related to traffic accidents or collision-like situations, such as times when the airbag deploys or the vehicle strikes an obstacle in the road. The data is recorded in order to increase understanding of how vehicle systems work in these types of situations. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short time, usually 30 seconds or less. For more information about released updates and answers to frequently asked questions, please go to support.volvocars.com. NOTE Functionality after updating may vary depending on market, model, model year and options. Related information • Sensus - online connectivity and entertainment (p. 32) • Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 561) The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record data related to the following in the event of traffic accidents or collision-like situations: • • How the various systems in the car worked Whether the driver and passenger seatbelts were fastened/tensioned • The driver's use of the accelerator or brake pedal • The travel speed of the vehicle This information can help us better understand the circumstances in which traffic accidents, injuries and damage occur. The EDR only records data when a non-trivial collision situation occurs. The EDR does not record any data during normal driving conditions. Similarly, the system never registers who is driving the vehicle or the geographic location of the accident or near-miss situation. However, other parties, such as the police, could use the recorded data in combination with the type of personally identifiable information routinely collected after a traffic accident. Special equipment and access to either the vehicle or the EDR is required to be able to interpret the registered data. In addition to the EDR, the car is equipped with a number of computers designed to continually check and monitor the function of the car. They can record data during normal driving conditions, but in particular register faults affecting the vehicle's operation and functionality, or upon activation of the vehicle's driver support function (e.g. City Safety and the auto brake function). Some of the recorded data is required to enable service and maintenance technicians to diagnose and remedy any faults that occurred in the vehicle. The registered information is also needed to enable Volvo to satisfy legal requirements laid out in laws and by government authorities. Information registered in the vehicle is stored in its computer until the vehicle is serviced or repaired. In addition to the above, the registered information can be used in aggregate form for research and product development with the aim of continuously improving the safety and quality of Volvo cars. }} 35 YOUR VOLVO Volvo will not contribute to the above-described information being disclosed to third parties without the vehicle owner's consent. To comply with national legislation and regulations, Volvo may be forced to disclose information of this nature to the police or other authorities who may assert a legal right to access such. Special technical equipment which Volvo and workshops that have entered into agreements with Volvo have access to is required to be able to read and interpret the recorded data. Volvo is responsible that the information, which is transferred to Volvo during servicing and maintenance, is securely stored and managed and that its management complies with relevant legal requirements. For further information - contact a Volvo retailer. Terms & Conditions for Services Customer Privacy Policy Volvo offers services so that you can drive your Volvo as safely and as comfortably as possible. These services include everything from assistance in emergencies to navigation and various maintenance services. Volvo respects and safeguards the personal integrity of everyone visiting our website. This policy regards to the handling of customer data and personal information. The purpose is to give current, past and potential customers a general understanding of: Before using the services, it is important for you to read the Terms & Conditions for Services at support.volvocars.com. Related information • Customer Privacy Policy (p. 36) • • • • The circumstances in which we gather and process your personal data. The types of personal data we gather. The reason we gather your personal data. How we handle your personal data. This policy can be read in its entirety at support.volvocars.com. Related information 36 • User terms and conditions and data sharing (p. 504) • • Terms & Conditions for Services (p. 36) Recording data (p. 35) YOUR VOLVO Important information on accessories and auxiliary equipment The incorrect connection and installation of accessories and extra equipment can negatively affect the car's electronic system. We strongly recommend that Volvo owners only install Volvo approved original accessories, and that installation of accessories is only carried out by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians. Certain accessories only function when associated software is installed in the car's computer system. The equipment described in the owner's manual is not available in all cars - they have different equipment depending on adaptations for the needs of different markets and national or local laws and regulations. Options or accessories described in this manual are marked with an asterisk. In the event of uncertainty over what is standard or an option/ accessory, contact a Volvo retailer. WARNING The driver always bears the ultimate responsibility that the car is used safely and that laws and regulations in force are followed. It is also important that the car has maintenance and service according to Volvo's recommendations, the owner's information and the service and warranty booklet. If the on-board information differs from the printed owner's manual then the printed information always has precedence. Installation of accessories We strongly recommend that Volvo owners only install Volvo approved original accessories, and that installation of accessories is only carried out by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians. Certain accessories only function when associated software is installed in the car's computer system. • Volvo original accessories are tested to ensure that they function with the car systems for performance, safety and emissions control. In addition, a trained and qualified Volvo service technician knows where accessories may or may not be safely installed in your Volvo. Always seek the advice of a trained and qualified Volvo service technician before installing any accessories in or on your car. • Accessories that are not approved by Volvo may not have been specifically tested for use with your car. • Some of the car's performance or safety systems can be negatively affected if you install accessories that have not been tested by Volvo, or if you permit someone without experience of the car to install accessories. • Damage that is caused by accessories installed in a non-approved or incorrect way is not covered by any new car warranty. More warranty information can be found in the service and warranty booklet. Volvo does not accept Related information • • • Installation of accessories (p. 37) Connection of equipment to the car's diagnostic socket (p. 38) Reading the owner's manual (p. 21) }} 37 YOUR VOLVO any liability for deaths, personal injury or costs arising as a result of the installation of non-original accessories. || Related information • Important information on accessories and auxiliary equipment (p. 37) Connection of equipment to the car's diagnostic socket Incorrect connection and installation of software or diagnostic tools may have a negative effect on the car's electronic system. We strongly recommend that Volvo owners only install Volvo approved original accessories, and that installation of accessories is only carried out by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians. Certain accessories only function when associated software is installed in the car's computer system. Data link connector (On-board Diagnostic, OBDII) is under the instrument panel on the driver's side. 38 NOTE Volvo Cars accepts no liability for the consequences if unauthorised equipment is connected to the On-board Diagnostic socket (OBDII). This socket should only be used by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians. Related information • Important information on accessories and auxiliary equipment (p. 37) YOUR VOLVO Showing the car's identification number When contacting a Volvo retailer concerning your Volvo On Call subscription, for example, you will need the car's identification number (VIN7). 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Continue to System System Information Vehicle Identification Number. > The car's identification number is shown. Driver distraction Your new Volvo is, or can be, equipped with content-rich entertainment and communications systems. This could be mobile phones with handsfree, navigation systems and audio systems with lots of functions. You may also have other portable electronic devices for your own convenience. Used correctly, in a safe way they can enrich the driving experience. If they are used in the wrong way they could distract you. We wish to give the following warnings regarding such systems, to indicate Volvo's concern for your safety. Never use a device or function in the car in such a way that it will distract you from the task of driving safely. Distractions can lead to serious accidents. Apart from these general warnings, we offer the following advice regarding the new functions that may be in the car: 7 WARNING The driver is responsible for doing everything possible to ensure the safety of themselves, their passengers and other road users. Part of this responsibility is avoiding distractions such as carrying out an activity that is not related to operating the car in a driving environment. • Never use a hand-held mobile phone while driving. In some areas it is forbidden for the driver to use a mobile phone while the car is moving. • If the car is equipped with a navigation system you must only set and change the itinerary when the car is parked. • Never program the audio system while the car is moving. Program the radio's presets when the car is parked and then use the programmed presets for faster and simpler use of the radio. • Never use laptops or hand-held computers while the car is moving. Related information • Sound, media and Internet (p. 464) Vehicle Identification Number 39 SAFETY SAFETY Safety WARNING The vehicle is equipped with several safety systems that work together to protect the vehicle's driver and passengers in the event of an accident. If the warning symbol remains illuminated or is switched on during driving and the message SRS airbag Service urgent Drive to workshop is shown in the driver display, it means that part of one of the safety systems does not have full functionality. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted as soon as possible. The car is equipped with a number of sensors that react in the event of an accident and activate different safety systems, such as different types of airbags and seatbelt tensioners. Depending on the specific accident situation, such as collisions at different angles, roll-over or driving off the road, the systems react in different ways to provide the best protection. 42 Seatbelt WARNING If the specific warning symbol is broken then the general warning symbol is illuminated instead and the driver display shows the same message. The car's safety mode may be activated after a collision if an important function in the car has been damaged. The warning symbol is illuminated in the driver display when the car's electrical system is set in ignition position II. The symbol is extinguished after approx. 6 seconds if the car's safety system is fault-free. It is important that the seatbelt is used correctly during pregnancy, and that pregnant drivers adjust their seating position. Never modify or repair the car's various safety systems yourself. Defective work in one of the systems can cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted. There are also mechanical safety systems such as Whiplash Protection System. The car is also constructed so that a large part of the force of a collision is distributed to beams, pillars, floor, roof and other parts of the body. Warning symbol in driver display Safety during pregnancy Related information • • • • • • Safety during pregnancy (p. 42) Seatbelts (p. 44) Airbags (p. 49) Whiplash Protection System (p. 43) Safety mode (p. 55) Child safety (p. 57) The diagonal section should wrap over the shoulder then be routed between the breasts and to the side of the abdomen. The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and as low as possible under the abdomen. – It must never be allowed to ride upward. Remove the slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as close to the body as possible. In addition, check that there are no twists in the seatbelt. Seating position As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers must adjust the seat and steering wheel such that they can easily maintain control of the vehi- SAFETY cle as they drive (which means that they must be able to easily operate the foot pedals and steering wheel). The aim should be to position the seat with as large a distance as possible between abdomen and steering wheel. Related information • • • • Safety (p. 42) Seatbelts (p. 44) Manual front seat (p. 166) Power front seat* (p. 167) Whiplash Protection System Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) reduces the risk of whiplash injuries. The system consists of energy absorbing backrests and seat cushion, as well as a specially designed head restraint in the front seats. WHIPS is deployed in the event of a rear-end collision, where the angle and speed of the collision and the nature of the colliding vehicle all have an influence. When WHIPS is deployed, the front seat backrests are lowered backward and the seat cushions move downward to change the seating position of the driver and front seat passenger. Its movement helps to absorb some of the forces that can arise and cause whiplash. WARNING WHIPS is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt. WARNING Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted. If the front seats have been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the seats must be replaced. Some of the seats' protective properties may have been lost even if they do not appear damaged. Do not leave any objects on the floor behind or under the front seats or in the rear seat that may prevent WHIPS from functioning. WARNING Do not squeeze rigid objects between the rear seat cushion and the front seat's backrest. If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered then any load must be secured to prevent it from sliding up to the front seat backrest in the event of a collision. WARNING If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered or a rear-facing child seat is used in the rear seat, the corresponding front seat must be moved forward so that it does not make contact with the lowered backrest or child seat. }} * Option/accessory. 43 SAFETY || Seating position Seatbelts For optimum protection from WHIPS the driver and passenger must have the correct seating position and make sure that the system's function is not obstructed. Heavy braking can have serious consequences if the seatbelts are not used. It is important that the seatbelt lies against the body so it can provide maximum protection. Do not lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal seating position. Set the correct seating position in the front seat before driving starts. Driver and front seat passenger should sit in the centre of the seat with as little space as possible between the head and the head restraint. WHIPS and child seats The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by WHIPS. Related information • • • • 44 Safety (p. 42) Manual front seat (p. 166) Power front seat* (p. 167) WARNING Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted. If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective properties may have been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt must be type-approved and designed for installation at the same location as the replaced seatbelt. WARNING Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt to hooks or other interior fittings, as this prevents the belt from tightening properly. WARNING The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision. Related information • • • • Safety (p. 42) Seatbelt tensioner (p. 46) Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 45) Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 47) Rear Collision Warning (p. 338) * Option/accessory. SAFETY Putting on and taking off seatbelts Make sure that all passengers have fastened their seatbelts before starting to drive. 3. In the front seats the seatbelt can be adjusted for height. Putting on seatbelts 1. Pull out the seatbelt slowly and make sure it is not twisted or damaged. NOTE The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn: • • • 2. if it is pulled out too quickly The seatbelt must pass over the shoulder (not down over the arm). during braking and acceleration if the car leans heavily. Lock the belt by inserting the locking tab in the intended buckle. > A loud "click" indicates that the belt has locked. 4. Press together the seat mounting and move the seatbelt up or down. Tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the shoulder. Position the belt as high as possible without it chafing against your throat. WARNING Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into the buckle on the correct side. The seatbelts and buckles would otherwise possibly not function as intended in the event of a collision. There is a risk of serous injury. The hip strap must be positioned low down (not over the abdomen). }} 45 SAFETY || WARNING Each seatbelt is designed for only one person. WARNING Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt to hooks or other interior fittings, as this prevents the belt from tightening properly. WARNING Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor insert any foreign objects into a buckle. The seatbelts and buckles would then possibly not function as intended in the event of a collision. There is a risk of serous injury. Taking off seatbelts 1. Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle and then let the belt retract. 2. If the seatbelt does not retract fully, feed it in by hand so that it does not hang loose. Related information • • • 46 Seatbelts (p. 44) Seatbelt tensioner (p. 46) Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 47) Seatbelt tensioner The car is fitted with standard seatbelt tensioners and electric* seatbelt tensioners that can tension the seatbelts in critical situations and collisions. sioner are restored automatically, but they can also be restored manually. IMPORTANT If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger side will also be deactivated. Standard seatbelt tensioner All the seatbelts are equipped with a standard seatbelt tensioner. WARNING The seatbelt tensioner tensions the seatbelt in the event of a collision with sufficient force in order to more effectively restrain the occupant. Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted. Electric seatbelt tensioner* If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective properties may have been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt must be type-approved and designed for installation at the same location as the replaced seatbelt. The driver and front passenger seatbelts are equipped with an electric seatbelt tensioner. The seatbelt tensioners work together and can be activated together with the driver support systems City Safety and Rear Collision Warning. In critical situations, such as panic braking, driving off the road (e.g. the car rolls into a ditch, lifts off the ground or hits something in the terrain), skidding, or risk of collision, the seatbelt can be tensioned by the seatbelt tensioner's electric motor. Related information The electric seatbelt tensioner helps to adjust the occupant to a better position, reducing the risk of striking the car's interior and improving the effect of safety systems, such as the car's airbags. • • • When the critical situation has come to an end, the seatbelt and the electric seatbelt preten- • Seatbelts (p. 44) Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 45) Resetting the electric seatbelt tensioner* (p. 47) Activating and deactivating passenger airbag* (p. 52) * Option/accessory. SAFETY • • City Safety™ (p. 326) Rear Collision Warning (p. 338) Resetting the electric seatbelt tensioner* The electric seatbelt tensioner is designed to be reset automatically, but the seatbelt tensioner can be reset manually if the belt remains extended. 1. Stop the car at a safe place. 2. Door and seatbelt reminder The system reminds unbelted occupants to wear a seatbelt, and also warns about an open door, bonnet, tailgate or fuel filler flap. Driver display graphics Unfasten the seatbelt and then refasten it. > The seatbelt and electric seatbelt tensioner are reset. WARNING Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted. If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective properties may have been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt must be type-approved and designed for installation at the same location as the replaced seatbelt. Related information • • Seatbelt tensioner (p. 46) Seatbelts (p. 44) Graphics in the driver display with different types of warnings. The warning colour on the door and tailgate is dependent on the vehicle's speed. The driver display's graphics show which seats in the car are occupied by belted and unbelted passengers. The same graphic also shows if the bonnet, tailgate, fuel filler flap or any door is open. The graphic can be acknowledged by pressing the O button on the right-hand steering wheel keypad. }} * Option/accessory. 47 SAFETY || Seatbelt reminder Visual reminder in the roof console. A visual reminder is given in the roof console and by means of the warning symbol in the driver display. The acoustic reminder is dependent on speed, driving time and distance. The belt status of the driver and passengers is shown in the driver display graphics when a belt is buckled or unbuckled. Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt reminder system. Front seat A visual and acoustic reminder remind the driver and front seat passenger to use a seatbelt if either of them is not wearing one. 48 Rear seat The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two subfunctions: • Provides information on which seatbelts are being used in the rear seat. The driver display's graphics are shown when the seatbelts are in use. • Reminding that a seatbelt in the rear seat is unfastened during a journey by means of a visual and acoustic reminder. The reminder will cease once the seatbelt has been put on again. Reminder for doors, bonnet, tailgate and fuel filler flap If the bonnet, tailgate, fuel filler flap or a door is not closed properly, the driver display's graphics show what is open. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the source of the warning. If the car is driven at a speed lower than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then the driver display's information symbol illuminates. If the car is driven at a speed higher than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then the driver display's warning symbol illuminates. Related information • • Seatbelts (p. 44) Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 45) SAFETY Airbags Deployed airbags Driver airbags The car is equipped with airbags and inflatable curtains for driver and passengers. If any of the airbags have deployed, the following is recommended: As a supplement to the seatbelts, the car is equipped with steering wheel airbag and knee airbag1 on the driver's side. NOTE The detectors react differently depending on the nature of the collision and whether or not the seatbelts are fastened. Applies to all belt positions. It is therefore possible that only one (or none) of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The detectors sense the force of the collision on the vehicle and the action is adapted accordingly so that none, one or more airbags are deployed. • Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not drive with deployed airbags. • Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo workshop to handle the replacement of components in the car's safety systems. • Always contact a doctor. WARNING Never drive with deployed airbags. They can make steering difficult. Other safety systems may also be damaged. The smoke and dust created when the airbags are deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/injury after intensive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid deployment sequence and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin burns. WARNING The airbag system's control module is located in the centre console. If the centre console is drenched with water or other liquid, disconnect the cables to the starter battery. Do not attempt to start the car since the airbags may deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo workshop. 1 The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets. Related information • • • • • Safety (p. 42) Driver airbags (p. 49) Passenger airbag (p. 50) Side airbags (p. 54) Airbags (p. 55) Steering wheel airbag and knee airbag1 on the driver's side in the front seat. In the event of a frontal collision, the airbags help to protect the head, neck, face and chest of the driver as well as the knees and legs. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the airbag/airbags is inflated. The airbag cushions the initial collision impact for the occupant. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. When this occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is completely normal. The entire process, including inflation and deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of a second. }} 49 SAFETY || WARNING The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision. Related information • • Airbags (p. 49) Passenger airbag (p. 50) Passenger airbag As a supplement to the seatbelts, the vehicle is equipped with an airbag on the passenger side in the front seat. To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and backs against the backrest. WARNING Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted for repair. Defective work in the airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury. Steering wheel airbag location This airbag is fitted into the centre of the steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked AIRBAG. Knee airbag1 location The airbag is folded up in the lower part of the instrument panel on the driver's side. Its cover panel is marked AIRBAG. WARNING Do not place or attach any object on the top or front of the panel where the knee airbag is stowed. 1 The 50 car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets. Front passenger airbag in front seat. In the event of a frontal collision, the airbag helps to protect the head, neck, face and chest of the passenger as well as the knees and legs. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the airbag is inflated. The airbag cushions the initial collision impact for the occupant. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. When this occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is completely normal. The entire process, including inflation and deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of a second. SAFETY WARNING Label for passenger airbag WARNING The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision. If the car is not equipped with a switch to activate/deactivate the passenger airbag, the airbag will always be activated. To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and backs against the backrest. WARNING Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat. Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated. WARNING Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted for repair. Defective work in the airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury. Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury. Passenger airbag location Related information The airbag is folded up into a compartment above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked AIRBAG. • • • WARNING Do not put objects in front of or above the dashboard where the passenger airbag is located. Front-facing passengers (children and adults) must never sit on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is deactivated. Label on the passenger side's sun visor. Airbags (p. 49) Driver airbags (p. 49) Activating and deactivating passenger airbag* (p. 52) Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label becomes visible when the passenger door is opened. The warning label for the passenger airbag is positioned as shown above. * Option/accessory. 51 SAFETY Activating and deactivating passenger airbag* The passenger airbag can be deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch, Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch (PACOS). WARNING Activating passenger airbag If the car is not equipped with a switch to activate/deactivate the passenger airbag, the airbag will always be activated. Switch The switch for the passenger airbag is located on the passenger end of the instrument panel and is accessible when the passenger door is open. Check that the switch is in the required position. Pull the switch outward and turn from OFF (B) to ON (A). > The driver display shows the message Passenger airbag on Please acknowledge. NOTE ON - the airbag is activated and all front-facing passengers (children and adults) can sit safely on the passenger seat. If the passenger airbag has been activated/ deactivated with the car in ignition position I or lower, a message is shown in the driver display and the following indicator in the roof console approx. 6 seconds after the car's electrical system has been set in ignition position II. OFF - The airbag is deactivated and children in rear-facing child seats can sit safely on the passenger seat. 52 * Option/accessory. SAFETY 2. Confirm the message by pressing the righthand steering wheel keypad's O button. > A text message and a warning symbol in the roof console indicate that the airbag for the front passenger seat is activated. WARNING Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat when the airbag is activated. The passenger airbag must always be activated when front-facing passengers (children and adults) are sitting in the front passenger seat. Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury. Deactivating passenger airbag Pull the switch outward and turn from ON (A) to OFF (B). > The driver display shows the message Passenger airbag off Please acknowledge. NOTE If the passenger airbag has been activated/ deactivated with the car in ignition position I or lower, a message is shown in the driver display and the following indicator in the roof console approx. 6 seconds after the car's electrical system has been set in ignition position II. 2. Confirm the message by pressing the righthand steering wheel keypad's O button. > A text message and a symbol in the roof console indicate that the airbag for the front passenger seat is deactivated. WARNING Front-facing passengers (children and adults) must never sit on the passenger seat when the airbag is deactivated. Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury. IMPORTANT If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger side will also be deactivated. }} 53 SAFETY || Related information • • Seatbelt tensioner (p. 46) Child seats (p. 58) Side airbags WARNING The side airbags on the driver's and passenger seats act to protect the chest and hips in the event of a collision. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted for repair. Defective work in the side airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury. WARNING Do not put objects in the area between the outside of the seat and the door panel, since this area is required by the side airbag. Volvo recommends the use only of car seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side airbags. WARNING The side airbags are fitted in the outer backrest frames of the front seats and help to protect the driver and passengers in the front seat. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag inflates between the occupant and the door panel and thereby cushions the initial impact. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. The side airbag is normally only deployed on the side of the collision. 54 Side airbags are a supplement the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt. Side airbags and child seats The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the side airbag. Related information • Airbags (p. 49) SAFETY Airbags WARNING The inflatable curtain, Inflatable Curtain (IC), helps to prevent the driver and passengers from striking their heads on the inside of the car during a collision. Never hang or attach heavy items onto the handles in the roof. The hooks are only designed for light coats and jackets (not for solid objects such as umbrellas). Do not screw or install anything onto the car's headlining, door pillars or side panels. This could compromise the intended protection. Volvo recommends only using Volvo genuine parts that are approved for fitting within these areas. WARNING Leave 10 cm (4 inches) space between the load and the side windows if the car is loaded to above the top edge of the door windows. Otherwise, the intended protection of the inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the headlining, may be compromised. The inflatable curtain is mounted along both sides of the headlining and helps protect the driver and outer seat passengers of the car. The panels are labelled with IC AIRBAG. WARNING The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the inflatable curtain is inflated. WARNING Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted for repair. Defective work in the inflatable curtain system can cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury. Safety mode Safety mode is a protective state that is triggered when a collision may have damaged any of the car's vital functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors for any of the safety systems, or the brake system. If the car has been in a collision, the message Safety mode See Owner's manual may be shown on the driver display with a warning symbol as long as the display is not damaged and the car's electrical system is still in working order. This message means that the car has reduced functionality. WARNING Never, under any circumstances, attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the Safety mode See Owner's manual message is shown in the driver display. Leave the car at once. If the car is in safety mode, it is possible to attempt to reset the system in order to start and move the car for a short distance, if in a dangerous traffic situation for example. Related information • Airbags (p. 49) }} 55 SAFETY || WARNING Never attempt to repair your car or reset the electronics yourself if the car has been in safety mode. This could result in personal injury or the car not functioning as normal. Volvo recommends that engaging an authorised Volvo workshop to check and restore the car to normal status after Safety mode See Owner's manual has been shown. Starting and moving the car after safety mode If the car is in safety mode, it is possible to attempt to reset the system in order to start and move the car for a short distance, if in a dangerous traffic situation for example. Starting the car after safety mode 1. WARNING Check the general damage situation of the car and whether any fuel has been leaking. There must be no smell of fuel either. If there is only minor damage and a check has revealed no fuel leaks, starting can be attempted. If the car is in safety mode it must not be towed. It must be transported from its location. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo workshop. WARNING Related information • • • Safety (p. 42) Starting and moving the car after safety mode (p. 56) Recovery (p. 455) 3. Never, under any circumstances, attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the Safety mode See Owner's manual message is shown in the driver display. Leave the car at once. 2. Switch off the car. Then try to start the car. > The car's electronics carry out a systems check and then try to resume normal status. IMPORTANT If the message Safety mode See Owner's manual is still shown on the display the car must not be driven or towed but a vehicle recovery service must then be used instead. Even if the car appears to be driveable, hidden damage may make the car impossible to control once moving. Moving the car after safety mode 1. If the driver display shows the message Normal mode The car is now in normal mode after a start attempt, the car can be carefully moved if standing in a dangerous position. 2. Do not move the car further than necessary. WARNING If the car is in safety mode it must not be towed. It must be transported from its location. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo workshop. 56 SAFETY Related information • • • Safety mode (p. 55) Starting the car (p. 396) Recovery (p. 455) Child safety Children must always sit secure while travelling in the car. Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats and attachment devices) which is designed for fitting in this particular car. Using Volvo's child safety equipment, you obtain the optimum conditions for a child to travel safely in the car. In addition, the child safety equipment fits in well and is simple to use. NOTE When using child safety equipment, it is important to read the installation instructions included. In the event of questions when fitting child safety equipment, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions. The equipment that should be used is selected taking account of the weight and size of the child. Children of all ages and sizes must always sit correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child to sit on the knee of a passenger. Volvo recommends that children travel in a rearfacing child seat until as late an age as possible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and then in a front-facing child seat until the child is 140 cm (4 feet 7 inches) tall. • • • Related information Safety (p. 42) Child seats (p. 58) Activating and deactivating child safety locks (p. 247) NOTE Legal provisions about the type of child seat that must be used for children of different ages and heights vary from country to country. Check what does apply. 57 SAFETY Child seats • Suitable child seats should always be used when children are travelling in the car. Children should sit comfortably and safely. Make sure that the child seat is positioned, mounted and used correctly. • • Look in the installation instructions for the child seat for the correct fitting. NOTE When using child safety equipment, it is important to read the installation instructions included. i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats (p. 60) Upper mounting points for child seats Child seat positioning (p. 60) The car is equipped with upper mounting points for child seats on the rear seat's outer seats. The upper mounting points are primarily intended for use with front-facing child seats. Activating and deactivating passenger airbag* (p. 52) Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the upper mounting points. The location of the mounting points In the event of questions when fitting child safety equipment, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions. NOTE Never leave a child seat loose in the car. Always secure it according to the instructions for the child seat, even when it is not in use. Related information • • • 58 Child safety (p. 57) Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 58) Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols on the rear of the backrest. The mounting points are located on the rear of the rear seat's outer seats. Lower mounting points for child seats (p. 59) * Option/accessory. SAFETY WARNING The child seat's upper straps must be routed through the hole in the head restraint leg before they are tensioned at the mounting point. If this is not possible, follow the recommendations from the child seat manufacturer. NOTE Fold the head restraints in order to facilitate fitting this type of child seat in cars with folding head restraints on the outer seats. Lower mounting points for child seats The car is equipped with lower mounting points for child seats in the front seat* and the rear seat. The lower mounting points are designed to be used in conjunction with certain rear-facing child seats. Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the lower mounting points. The location of the mounting points The mounting points in the rear seat are located on the rear section of the front seat's floor rails. Related information • • Child seats (p. 58) Lower mounting points for child seats (p. 59) • i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats (p. 60) • Overview table for location of child seats (p. 63) • Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts (p. 64) Mounting point locations in the rear seat. Related information • • • Mounting point locations in the front seat. Child seats (p. 58) Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 58) i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats (p. 60) • Overview table for location of child seats (p. 63) • Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts (p. 64) The mounting points in the front seat are located on the sides of the passenger seat's legroom. The mounting points in the front seat are only mounted if the vehicle is equipped with a switch to activate/deactivate the passenger airbag*. * Option/accessory. 59 SAFETY i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats The car is equipped with i-Size/ISOFIX2 mounting points for child seats in the rear seat. i-Size/ISOFIX is a fixture system for car child seats that is based on an international standard. Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points. Lift the covers in order to access the mounting points. Related information • • • • Child seats (p. 58) Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 58) It is important to position the child seat in the right place in the car and this depends, amongst other things, on the type of child seat and whether the passenger airbag is activated. Lower mounting points for child seats (p. 59) Overview table for location of child seats (p. 63) • Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 66) • Table for location of ISOFIX child seats (p. 67) The location of the mounting points Child seat positioning Rear-facing child seat and airbag are not compatible. Always fit rear-facing child seats in the rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated. If a child is sitting on the front passenger seat then he/she could suffer serious injury if the airbag deploys. Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols2 on the upholstery of the backrest. The mounting points for i-Size/ISOFIX are located behind covers in the lower section of the rear seat's backrest, in the outer seats. 2 60 Names and symbols change depending on market. If the passenger airbag is deactivated then rearfacing child seats can be fitted on the front passenger seat. SAFETY NOTE Label for passenger airbag Regulations regarding the placement of children in cars vary from country to country. Check what does apply. Related information • • • Child seats (p. 58) Child seat mounting (p. 62) Overview table for location of child seats (p. 63) • Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat. Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts (p. 64) • Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated. Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 66) • Table for location of ISOFIX child seats (p. 67) WARNING Front-facing passengers (children and adults) must never sit on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is deactivated. Label on the passenger side's sun visor. Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury. Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label becomes visible when the passenger door is opened. The warning label for the passenger airbag is positioned as shown above. 61 SAFETY Child seat mounting NOTE It is important to remember a number of things when a child seat is mounted and used, which depend on where the child seat is positioned. Never leave a child seat loose in the car. Always secure it according to the instructions for the child seat, even when it is not in use. WARNING Booster cushions/child seats with steel braces or some other design that could rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally. Do not secure the straps for the child seat into the seat's horizontal adjustment bar or in springs, rails or beams under the seat. Sharp edges may damage the straps. Do not allow the upper section of the child seat to rest against the windscreen. • When fitting rear-facing child seats, check that the passenger airbag is deactivated. • When fitting front-facing child seats, check that the passenger airbag is activated. • Only use child seats that are recommended by Volvo, are universally approved or are semi-universal, and where the car is included on the manufacturer's vehicle list. • ISOFIX child seats can only be fitted when the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console3 accessory. When using child safety equipment, it is important to read the installation instructions included. • In the event of questions when fitting child safety equipment, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions. Installation in the rear seat • • 62 The accessory range varies depending on market. Varies depending on market. The outer seats are equipped with the ISOFIX fixture system and are approved for iSize4. • The outer seats are equipped with upper mounting points. Volvo recommends that child seat's upper straps should be pulled through the hole in the head restraint before being tensioned at the mounting point. If this is not possible, follow the recommendations from the child seat manufacturer. • If the child seat is equipped with lower straps, never adjust the position of the seat in front after the straps have been fitted in the lower mounting points. Always remember to remove the lower straps when the child seat is not installed. Installation in the front seat NOTE 3 4 • If the child seat is equipped with lower straps, Volvo recommends that the lower mounting points are used with these3. Only use child seats that are recommended by Volvo, are universally approved or are semi-universal, and where the car is included on the manufacturer's vehicle list. A child seat with support legs must not be fitted in the centre seat. Related information • • Child seat positioning (p. 60) Overview table for location of child seats (p. 63) • Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts (p. 64) • Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 66) • Table for location of ISOFIX child seats (p. 67) SAFETY Overview table for location of child seats The table gives an overview of the types of child seats suitable for the car's seats. Seat positionB A B i-Size child seats Universally approved child seats secured using the car's seatbelt Other child seat categoriesA 3.5 2, 3, 4, 5 2, 3, 5 For more information, contact the child seat manufacturer. According to the numbering above. Related information Seat positions in left-hand drive cars. • • • Child seat positioning (p. 60) Child seat mounting (p. 62) Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts (p. 64) • Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 66) • Table for location of ISOFIX child seats (p. 67) Seat positions in right-hand drive cars. 63 SAFETY Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts The table gives a recommendation for which child seats suit which locations, and for what size of child. Weight Group 0 max 10 kg Group 0+ max 13 kg Group 1 9-18 kg Group 2 15-25 kg 64 NOTE Always read the owner's manual section on installing a child seat before installing one in the car. Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child seats) Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child seats) Outer rear seat Centre rear seat UA, B X UB UB UA, B X UB UB LC UFA, D UD, LC UD LC UFA, E UE, LC UE SAFETY Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child seats) Group 3 22-36 kg Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child seats) Outer rear seat Centre rear seat UE UE UFA, E X U: Suitable for universal category restraints approved for use in this mass group. UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats. L: Suitable for particular child restraints. These restraints may be of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. X: The seat is not suitable for children in this mass group. A B C D E Adjust the seat to a more elevated position. Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat (type approval E1 04301146). Volvo recommends: Volvo rear-facing seat (type approval E5 04212). Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group. Volvo recommends: Booster cushion with and without back (type approval E5 04216); Volvo booster seat (type approval E1 04301312). WARNING • Seatbelts (p. 44) Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated. Related information • • • Child seat positioning (p. 60) Child seat mounting (p. 62) Overview table for location of child seats (p. 63) • Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 66) • Table for location of ISOFIX child seats (p. 67) 65 SAFETY Table for location of i-Size child seats The child seat must be approved in accordance with UN Reg R129. The table gives a recommendation for which iSize child seats suit which locations, and for what size of child. Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rearfacing child seats) Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child seats) Outer rear seat Centre rear seat i-Size child seats X X i-UA, B X i-U: Suitable for i-Size "universal" child seat, front-facing and rear-facing. X: Not suitable for universally approved child seats. A B Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group. Volvo recommends: BeSafe iZi Kid X2 i-Size (type approval E4-129R-000002). Related information • • • 66 NOTE Always read the owner's manual section on installing a child seat before installing one in the car. Child seat positioning (p. 60) Child seat mounting (p. 62) Overview table for location of child seats (p. 63) • Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts (p. 64) • Table for location of ISOFIX child seats (p. 67) • i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats (p. 60) SAFETY Table for location of ISOFIX child seats The table gives a recommendation for which ISOFIX child seats suit which locations, and for what size of child. Weight Group 0 max 10 kg Group 0+ max 13 kg Size classA Type of child seat E Rear-facing infant seat E Rear-facing infant seat C Rear-facing child seat D Rear-facing child seat The child seat must be approved in accordance with UN Reg R44 and the car model must be included in the manufacturer's vehicle list. NOTE Always read the owner's manual section on installing a child seat before installing one in the car. Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child seats)B Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child seats)B Outer rear seat Centre rear seat ILB, C, XD X ILC X ILB, C, E, XD X ILC X }} 67 SAFETY || Weight Size classA Group 1 9-18 kg Type of child seat A Front-facing child seat B Front-facing child seat B1 Front-facing child seat C Rear-facing child seat D Rear-facing child seat Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child seats)B Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child seats)B Outer rear seat Centre rear seat X ILB, E, F, XD ILF, IUFF X ILB, E, XD X IL X IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems. These child restraint systems are those of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group. X: Not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems. A B C D E F For child seats with the ISOFIX fixture system there is a size classification to help users choose the right type of child seat. The size class can be read on the child seat's label. Works for the installation of ISOFIX child seats that are semi-universally approved (IL) if the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console accessory (the accessory range varies depending on market). There are no upper mounting points for child seats here. Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat secured using the ISOFIX fixture system (type approval E1 04301146). Applicable if the car is not fitted with an ISOFIX bracket. Adjust the backrest so that the head restraint does not interfere with the child seat. Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group. WARNING Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated. NOTE NOTE If an i-Size/ISOFIX child seat has no size classification, the car model must be included on the vehicle list for the child seat. Volvo recommends contacting an authorised Volvo dealer for information about which iSize/ISOFIX child seats Volvo recommends. Related information • • 68 Child seat positioning (p. 60) Child seat mounting (p. 62) SAFETY • Overview table for location of child seats (p. 63) • Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts (p. 64) • • Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 66) i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats (p. 60) 69 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Instruments and controls in lefthand drive car The overviews show where the displays and controls near the driver are located. Steering wheel and instrument panel Horn Centre and tunnel console Left-hand steering wheel keypad Display lighting, unlocking/opening*/closing* of tailgate Roof console Centre display Start button Hazard warning flashers, defrosting, media, drive mode button* Position lamps, daytime running lights, dipped beam, main beam, direction indicators, front fog lamps/cornering lights*, rear fog lamp, resetting the trip meter Front reading lamps and interior lighting Electrical socket, USB port, wireless phone charger* Panorama roof* Gear selector Steering wheel paddles* for manual gear changing in an automatic gearbox Display in roof console Parking brake Driver display Manual dimming of interior rearview mirror Automatic braking when stationary Wipers and washing, rain sensor* Right-hand steering wheel keypad Steering wheel adjustment 72 * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Driver's door Instruments and controls in righthand drive car The overviews show where the displays and controls near the driver are located. Steering wheel and instrument panel Horn Steering wheel adjustment Left-hand steering wheel keypad Roof console Memory for settings for power front seat*, door mirrors Central locking, power windows, door mirrors, electric child safety locks* Bonnet opening Adjusting front seat Related information • • • • • • • • Manual front seat (p. 166) Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 167) Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 175) Position lamps, daytime running lights, dipped beam, main beam, direction indicators, front fog lamps/cornering lights*, rear fog lamp, resetting the trip meter Steering wheel paddles* for manual gear changing in an automatic gearbox Driver display Lighting control (p. 134) Wipers and washing, rain sensor* Starting the car (p. 396) Driver display (p. 75) Display lighting, unlocking/opening*/closing* of tailgate Overview of centre display (p. 95) Right-hand steering wheel keypad Front reading lamps and interior lighting Panorama roof* Display in roof console Manual dimming of interior rearview mirror Gearbox (p. 409) }} * Option/accessory. 73 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Centre and tunnel console Driver's door Centre display Memory for settings for power front seat*, door mirrors Start button Central locking, power windows, door mirrors, electric child safety locks* Hazard warning flashers, defrosting, media, drive mode button* Bonnet opening Electrical socket, USB port, wireless phone charger* Gear selector Parking brake Automatic braking when stationary 74 Adjusting front seat Related information • • • • • • • • Manual front seat (p. 166) Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 167) Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 175) Lighting control (p. 134) Starting the car (p. 396) Driver display (p. 75) Overview of centre display (p. 95) Gearbox (p. 409) * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Driver display The driver display shows information about the car and driving. The driver display contains gauges, indicators and indicator and warning symbols. The content of the driver display depends on the car's equipment, settings and which functions are active at that time. The driver display is activated as soon as a door is opened, i.e. in ignition position 0. The driver display extinguishes after a while if it is not used. To reactivate it, proceed with one of the following: • • Depress the brake pedal. Activate ignition position I. • Open one of the doors. WARNING In the event of a fault in the driver display the information on e.g. brakes, airbags or other safety systems may not be shown. In which case, the driver cannot check the status of the car's systems or receive current warnings and information. WARNING If the driver display should extinguish, not illuminate on activation/start or be fully or partially illegible, the car must not be used. You should visit a workshop immediately. Volvo recommends an authorised Volvo workshop. Driver display1. Location in the driver display: 1 On the left In the middle On the right Speedometer Indicator and warning symbols Tachometer/ECO gaugeA Trip meter Outside temperature gauge Gear shift indicator OdometerB Clock Drive mode Cruise control and speed limiter information Messages, in some cases with graphics Fuel gauge Road Sign Information* Door and seatbelt information Status of the Start/Stop function – Media player Distance to empty tank The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. }} * Option/accessory. 75 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || A B On the left In the middle On the right – Navigation map* Instantaneous fuel consumption – Phone App menu (activated via steering wheel keypad) – Voice recognition – – CompassA – Depends on drive mode selected. Accumulated mileage. • • Dynamic symbol The dynamic symbol in its basic form. The centre of the driver display contains a dynamic symbol that changes appearance for different types of message. An amber or red marker around the symbol indicates the degree of severity of a control or warning message. With an animation, the basic shape can be turned into a larger image in order to graphically indicate where a problem is situated or to clarify information. 76 Messages in the driver display (p. 91) Handling the application menu in the driver display (p. 90) Examples of indicator symbol. Related information • • Driver display settings (p. 77) Warning symbols in the driver display (p. 85) • Indicator symbols in the driver display (p. 83) • Trip computer (p. 78) * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Driver display settings Settings for the driver display's display options can be made in the driver display's application menu and in the centre display's settings menu. Settings in the driver display's app menu In the app menu, you can choose which information is shown on the driver display from: • • • • Selecting theme 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Tap on My Car Themes 3. Select a theme (appearance) for the driver display: • • • • Trip computer media player phone navigation system*. Settings in the centre display Selecting information type 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Press My Car Displays Display Information. 3. Select what should be shown in the background: media • Show navigation even if no route is set. Display Glass Minimalistic Performance Chrome Rings. Selecting language 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Driver • Show no information in background • Show information for current playing Displays Tap on System System Languages and Units System Language to select language. > A change will affect the language in all displays. These settings are personal and are saved automatically to the active driver profile. Related information • • • Fuel gauge The fuel gauge in the driver display shows the fuel level in the tank. Driver display (p. 75) The beige zone in the fuel gauge indicates the quantity of fuel in the tank. When the fuel level is low and it is soon time to refuel, the fuel pump symbol illuminates and changes to amber colour. The trip computer also indicates the distance to empty tank. Related information • • • Driver display (p. 75) Filling fuel (p. 431) Fuel tank - volume (p. 624) Handling the application menu in the driver display (p. 90) Changing settings in the centre display (p. 120) * Option/accessory. 77 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Trip computer The car's trip computer records and calculates vales such as e.g. distance, fuel consumption and average speed whilst driving. In order to facilitate fuel-efficient driving, information is recorded about both instantaneous and average fuel consumption. The information from the trip computer can be shown in the driver display. • • Distance to empty tank Distance to empty tank Tourist - alternative speedometer The trip computer calculates the remaining mileage with the fuel available in the tank. Units for distance, speed, etc. can be changed via system settings in the centre display. Trip meter There are two trip meters, TM and TA. TM can be reset manually and TA is reset automatically if the car is not used for at least four hours. The following information is registered while driving: • • • • Mileage The following meters are included in the trip computer: • • • 2 78 Trip meter Odometer Instantaneous fuel consumption The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. When the gauge shows "----", there is not enough fuel left to be able to calculate the remaining mileage. Refuel as soon as possible. NOTE There may be a slight deviation if the driving style has been changed. Driving time Average speed Average fuel consumption. The values apply from the trip meter's latest reset. Examples of trip computer information in the driver display.2 The calculation is based on the average fuel consumption over the last 30 km (20 miles) and the remaining drivable fuel quantity. Odometer The odometer records the car's total mileage. This value cannot be reset to zero. Instantaneous fuel consumption This gauge shows the fuel consumption that the car has at the moment. The value is updated approximately every second. An economic driving style generally results in a longer driving distance. Tourist - alternative speedometer The alternative digital speedometer makes it easier to drive in countries where speed limit signs are in a different unit than that shown in the car's instruments. The digital speed is then shown in the opposite unit to that shown in the analogue speedometer. If the analogue speedometer is graduated in mph, the digital speedometer shows the corresponding speed in km/h and vice versa. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Related information • • • Resetting the trip meter (p. 80) • Driver display (p. 75) Show trip data in the driver display (p. 79) Show trip statistics in the centre display (p. 80) Show trip data in the driver display 1. The trip computer's recorded and calculated values can be shown in the driver display. The values are saved in a trip computer app. Via the app menu, you can choose which information is shown on the driver display. Open and navigate in the app menu using the righthand steering wheel keypad. App menu Left/right Up/down Confirm Open the app menu in the driver display by pressing (1). (It is not possible to open the app menu while there is an unacknowledged message in the driver display. The message must first be acknowledged before the app menu can be opened.) 2. Navigate to the trip computer app to left or right with (2). > The top four menu rows show measured values for trip meter TM. The next four menu rows show measured values for trip meter TA. Scroll up or down in the list with (3). 3. Scroll down to the option buttons to select which information to show in the driver display: • • • Distance to empty tank Odometer Mileage for trip meter TM, TA, or no display of mileage • Instantaneous fuel consumption, average consumption for TM or TA, alternatively, no display of fuel consumption • Tourist (alternative speedometer). Select or deselect an option with the O button (4). The change is made immediately. }} 79 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Related information • • Trip computer (p. 78) Resetting the trip meter (p. 80) Resetting the trip meter Reset the trip meter using the left-hand stalk switch. Show trip statistics in the centre display Trip statistics from the trip computer are displayed graphically in the centre display and provide an overview that facilitates more fuel-efficient driving. Open the Driver performance app in app view in order to show the trip statistics. – Reset all information in trip meter TM (i.e. mileage, average consumption, average speed and driving time) with a long press on the RESET button on the left-hand stalk switch. A short press on the RESET button resets only the mileage. The trip meter TA can only be reset automatically when the car has not been used for four or more hours. Related information • 80 Trip computer (p. 78) Each bar in the diagram symbolises a distance of 1, 10 or 100 km, alternatively miles. The bars are filled in from the right as driving progresses. The bar on the far right shows the value for the current distance. The average fuel consumption and total driving time are calculated since the last time the trip statistics were reset. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Settings for trip statistics • Resetting the trip meter (p. 80) Reset or adjust settings for trip statistics. Trip statistics from the trip computer3. 1. Open the Driver performance app in app view in order to show the trip statistics. 2. Press Preferences to Related information • • Settings for trip statistics (p. 81) Trip computer (p. 78) • change graph scale. Select resolution 1, 10 or 100 km/miles for the bar. • reset data after every trip. Performed when the car has been stationary for more than 4 hours. • reset data for the current trip. Trip statistics, calculated average consumption and total driving time are always reset simultaneously. Units for distance, speed, etc. can be changed via system settings in the centre display. Related information 3 • Show trip statistics in the centre display (p. 80) • Trip computer (p. 78) The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. 81 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Time and date The clock is shown in both the driver display and the centre display. Clock location Automatic time for cars with GPS When the car is equipped with a navigation system, Auto Time can be selected. The time zone is then adjusted automatically based on the location of the car. For certain types of navigation systems, the current location (country) must also be set to obtain the right time zone. If Auto Time is not selected, time and data are adjusted with arrow up or arrow down on the touch screen. Outside temperature gauge The outside temperature is shown in the driver display. A sensor detects the temperature outside of the car. Summer time In certain countries, it is possible to select automatic setting of summer time with Auto. For other countries, summer time can be set with On or Off. Related information Clock location in driver display. In the centre display, the clock is located at the top right of the status bar. In certain situations, messages and information may cover the clock in the driver display. Settings for time and date – Select Settings System Date and Time in the centre display's top view to change settings for time and date format. Adjust time and date by pressing the up or down arrow on the touch screen. 82 • • Driver display (p. 75) Changing settings in the centre display (p. 120) If the car has been stationary, the gauge may display a temperature reading that is too high. When the outside temperature is within the range -5 °C to +2 °C (23 till 36 °F) a snowflake symbol is also shown in the driver display as a warning for potentially slippery conditions. Change the unit for the temperature gauge via system settings in the centre display top view. Related information • • Driver display (p. 75) Changing system units (p. 118) DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Indicator symbols in the driver display The indicator symbols alert the driver that a function is activated, that a system is operating, or that a fault or abnormal condition exists. Symbol Specification Information, read display text When one of the car's systems does not behave as intended, this information symbol illuminates and a text appears on the driver display. The information symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols. Fault in brake system The symbol lights up when there is a fault in the parking brake. ABS fault If this symbol illuminates then the system is not working. The car's regular brake system continues to work, but without the ABS function. Automatic brake on The symbol illuminates when the function is activated and the foot brake or parking brake is acting. The brake holds the car stationary when it has stopped. Symbol Specification Symbol Specification Tyre pressure system Position lamps The symbol illuminates when tyre pressure is too low. If there is a fault in the tyre pressure system, the symbol will flash for approx. 1 minute and then illuminate with a constant glow. This may be because the system cannot detect or warn of low tyre pressure as intended. The symbol lights up when the position lamps are switched on. Emissions system Active main beam on If the symbol illuminates after the engine has been started then it may be due to a fault in the car's emissions system. Drive to a workshop for checking. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted. The symbol lights up blue when the automatic main beam is on. Left and right-hand direction indicator The symbols flash when the direction indicators are used. Fault in the headlamp system The symbol illuminates if a fault has occurred in the ABL function (Active Bending Lights) or if another fault has occurred in the headlamp system. Active main beam off The symbol lights up white when the automatic main beam is off. Main beam On The symbol illuminates when main beam is on and with main beam flash. Active main beam on The symbol lights up blue when active main beam is on. Position lamps are switched on. }} 83 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Symbol Specification Specification Symbol Specification Active main beam off Stability system Lane assistance and rain sensor The symbol lights up white when active main beam is off. Position lamps are switched on. A flashing symbol indicates that the stability system is operating. If the symbol illuminates with constant glow then there is a fault in the system. White symbol: Lane assistance is on and road lines are detected. Rain sensor is on. Main beam On The symbol lights up when main beam and the position lamps are switched on. Front fog lamps on This symbol illuminates when the front fog lamp is switched on. Rear fog lamp on This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lamp is switched on. Rain sensor on This symbol illuminates when the rain sensor is on. Preconditioning on The symbol illuminates when the engine block and passenger compartment heater/air conditioning are preconditioning the car. 84 Symbol Grey symbol: Lane assistance is on but road lines are not detected. Rain sensor is on. Stability system, sport mode The symbol illuminates when the sport mode is activated. Sport mode allows for a more active driving experience. The system then detects whether the accelerator pedal, steering wheel movements and cornering are more active than in normal driving and then allows controlled skidding of the rear section up to a certain level before it intervenes and stabilises the car. Lane assistance White symbol: Lane assistance is on and road lines are detected. Grey symbol: Lane assistance is on but road lines are not detected. Amber symbol: Lane assistance warns/intervenes. AdBlue systemA The symbol illuminates when the AdBlue level is low or in the event of a fault in the AdBlue system. A Applies to cars with diesel engines. Related information • • Driver display (p. 75) Warning symbols in the driver display (p. 85) DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Warning symbols in the driver display Specification Symbol Specification Fault in brake system Alternator not charging If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level may be too low. Visit the nearest authorised workshop to have the brake fluid level checked and rectified. This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault has occurred in the electrical system. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted. The red warning symbol illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety and/or drivability of the car. An explanatory text is shown on the driver display at the same time. The warning symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols. Parking brake applied Collision risk This symbol illuminates with a constant glow when the parking brake is applied. City Safety warns of a risk of collision with other vehicles, pedestrians, cyclists or large animals. Seatbelt reminder Low oil pressure This symbol illuminates or flashes if someone in a front seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone in a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt. If this symbol illuminates during driving then the engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the engine immediately and check the engine oil level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illuminates and the oil level is normal, contact a workshop. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted. The warning symbols alert the driver that an important function is activated or that a serious fault or condition exists. Symbol Symbol Specification Warning Airbags If the symbol remains illuminated or illuminates while driving, a fault has been detected in one of the car's safety systems. Read the message in the driver display. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted. A flashing symbol means that a fault has arisen. Read the message in the driver display. Related information • • Indicator symbols in the driver display (p. 83) Driver display (p. 75) 85 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL License agreement for the driver display A license is an agreement for the right to operate a certain activity or the right to use someone else's entitlement according to the terms and conditions in the agreement. The following text is Volvo's agreement with the manufacturer or developer. Freetype Project License 3rd Party Software Disclaimers and License Agreements Confidential ID 06-00004-004 39 / 75 Revision 06.00A, 2015-06-09 2006-Jan-27 Copyright 1996-2002, 2006 by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. Introduction The FreeType Project is distributed in several archive packages; some of them may contain, in addition to the FreeType font engine, various tools and contributions which rely on, or relate to, the FreeType Project. This license applies to all files found in such packages, and which do not fall under their own explicit license. The license affects thus the FreeType font engine, the test programs, documentation and makefiles, at the very least. This license was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG (Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which all encourage inclusion and use of free software in commercial and freeware products alike. As a consequence, its main points are that: o We don't promise that this software works. However, we will be interested in any kind 86 of bug reports. (`as is' distribution) o You can use this software for whatever you want, in parts or full form, without having to pay us. (`royalty-free' usage) o You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use it, or only parts of it, in a program, you must acknowledge somewhere in your documentation that you have used the FreeType code. (`credits') We specifically permit and encourage the inclusion of this software, with or without modifications, in commercial products. We disclaim all warranties covering The FreeType Project and assume no liability related to The FreeType Project. Finally, many people asked us for a preferred form for a credit/disclaimer to use in compliance with this license. We thus encourage you to use the following text: "Portions of this software are copyright © <year> The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved." Please replace <year> with the value from the FreeType version you actually use. Legal Terms 0. Definitions – Throughout this license, the terms `package', `FreeType Project', and `FreeType archive' refer to the set of files originally distributed by the authors (David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg) as the `FreeType Project', be they named as alpha, beta or final release. `You' refers to the licensee, or person using the project, where `using' is a generic term including compiling the project's source code as well as linking it to form a `program' or `executable'. This program is referred to as `a program using the FreeType engine'. This license applies to all files distributed in the original FreeType Project, including all source code, binaries and documentation, unless otherwise stated in the file in its original, unmodified form as distributed in the original archive. If you are unsure whether or not a particular file is covered by this license, you must contact us to verify this. The FreeType Project is copyright (C) 1996-2000 by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights reserved except as specified below. 1. No Warranty – THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED `AS IS' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT. ' 2. Redistribution – This license grants a worldwide, royalty-free, perpetual and irrevocable right and license to use, execute, perform, compile, display, copy, create derivative works of, distribute and sublicense the FreeType Project (in both source and object code forms) and derivative works thereof for any purpose; and to DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL authorize others to exercise some or all of the rights granted herein, subject to the following conditions: o Redistribution of source code must retain this license file (`FTL.TXT') unaltered; any additions, deletions or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation. The copyright notices of the unaltered, original files must be preserved in all copies of source files. o Redistribution in binary form must provide a disclaimer that states that the software is based in part of the work of the FreeType Team, in the distribution documentation. We also encourage you to put an URL to the FreeType web page in your documentation, though this isn't mandatory. These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the FreeType Project, not just the unmodified files. If you use our work, you must acknowledge us. However, no fee need be paid to us. 3. Advertising – Neither the FreeType authors and contributors nor you shall use the name of the other for commercial, advertising, or promotional purposes without specific prior written permission. We suggest, but do not require, that you use one or more of the following phrases to refer to this software in your documentation or advertising materials: `FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine', `FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'. As you have not signed this license, you are not required to accept it. However, as the FreeType Project is copyrighted material, only this license, or another one contracted with the authors, grants you the right to use, distribute, and modify it. Therefore, by using, distributing, or modifying the FreeType Project, you indicate that you understand and accept all the terms of this license. 4. Contacts – There are two mailing lists related to FreeType: o [email protected]. Discusses general use and applications of FreeType, as well as future and wanted additions to the library and distribution. If you are looking for support, start in this list if you haven't found anything to help you in the documentation. o [email protected]. Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, design issues, specific licenses, porting, etc. Our home page can be found at http://www.freetype.org HarfBuzz / UCDN License Copyright © 2010,2011,2012 Google, Inc. • • • • • • • • • Copyright © 2012 Mozilla Foundation Copyright © 2011 Codethink Limited Copyright © 2008,2010 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies) Copyright © 2009 Keith Stribley Copyright © 2009 Martin Hosken and SIL International Copyright © 2007 Chris Wilson • Copyright © 2004,2007,2008,2009,2010 Red Hat, Inc. • Copyright © 1998-2004 David Turner and Werner Lemberg For full copyright notices consult the individual files in the package. Permission is hereby granted, without written agreement and without license or royalty fees, to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose, provided that the above copyright notice and the following two paragraphs appear in all copies of this software. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE AND ITS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE SOFTWARE PROVIDED HEREUNDER IS ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER HAS NO OBLIGATION TO PROVIDE MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT, UPDATES, ENHANCEMENTS, OR MODIFICATIONS. Copyright © 2006 Behdad Esfahbod Copyright © 2005 David Turner }} 87 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Libunibreak License This library is released under an open-source licence, the zlib/libpng licence. Please check the file LICENCE for details. Apart from using the algorithm, part of the code is derived from the data provided under http://www.unicode.org/ Public. And the Unicode Terms of Use may apply: URL:http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html LICENSE: • Copyright (C) 2008-2012 Wu Yongwei <wuyongwei at gmail dot com> • Copyright (C) 2012 Tom Hacohen <tom dot hacohen at samsung dot com> This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the author be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software. Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions: 88 1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgement in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required. 2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original software. 3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution. Unicode Inc. License Agreement EXHIBIT 1 UNICODE, INC. LICENSE AGREEMENT - DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE Unicode Data Files include all data files under the directories http://www.unicode.org/Public/, http://www.unicode.org/reports/, and http:// www.unicode.org/cldr/data/ . Unicode Software includes any source code published in the Unicode Standard or under the directories http:// www.unicode.org/Public/, http:// www.unicode.org/reports/, and http:// www.unicode.org/cldr/data/. NOTICE TO USER: Carefully read the following legal agreement. BY DOWNLOADING, INSTALLING, COPYING OR OTHERWISE USING UNICODE INC.'S DATA FILES ("DATA FILES"), AND/OR SOFTWARE ("SOFTWARE"), YOU UNEQUIVOCALLY ACCEPT, AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY, ALL OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE, DO NOT DOWNLOAD, INSTALL, COPY, DISTRIBUTE OR USE THE DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE. COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE Copyright © 1991-2010 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data files and any associated documentation (the "Data Files") or Unicode software and any associated documentation (the "Software") to deal in the Data Files or Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software, and to permit persons to whom the Data Files or Software are furnished to do so, provided that (a) the above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear with all copies of the Data Files or Software, (b) both the above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in associated documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in each modified Data File or in the Software as well as in the documentation associated with the Data File(s) or Software that the data or software has been modified. THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in these Data Files or Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder. ZLIB Data Compression Library License Agreement (C) 1995-2010 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software. Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions: 1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required. 2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original software. 3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution. Jean-loup Gailly Mark Adler [email protected] [email protected] If you use the zlib library in a product, we would appreciate *not* receiving lengthy legal documents to sign. The sources are provided for free but without warranty of any kind. The library has been entirely written by Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler; it does not include third-party code. If you redistribute modified sources, we would appreciate that you include in the file ChangeLog history information documenting your changes. Please read the FAQ for more information on the distribution of modified source versions. GLEW Licence (Modified BSD Licence) The OpenGL Extension Wrangler Library • Copyright (C) 2002-2008, Milan Ikits <milan.ikits@ieee org> • Copyright (C) 2002-2008, Marcelo E. Magallon <[email protected]> • Copyright (C) 2002, Lev Povalahev All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. * The name of the author may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Related information • Driver display (p. 75) 89 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Application menu in driver display App Functions Application menu (app menu) in the driver display provides quick access to commonly used functions for certain apps. Trip computer Selection of trip meter, selection of what to show in the driver display, etc. Media player Selection of active source for the media player. Phone Calling a contact from the call list. Navigation Guide to destination, etc. Handling the application menu in the driver display The application menu (the app menu) in the driver display is operated with the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. Related information The app menu in the driver display can be used instead of using the centre display. The figure is schematic - the layout may vary. The app menu is shown in the driver display and is controlled using the steering wheel's righthand keypad. The app menu makes it easier to switch between different apps or functions within the apps without having to let go of the steering wheel. App menu functions Different apps give access to different types of functions. The following apps and their associated functions can be controlled from the app menu: 90 • • • Driver display (p. 75) Overview of centre display (p. 95) Handling the application menu in the driver display (p. 90) The app menu and the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. Open/close Left/right Up/down Confirm DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Opening/closing the app menu Messages in the driver display – The driver display can show messages to inform or assist the driver in the event of different events. Press on open/close (1). (It is not possible to open the app menu while there is an unacknowledged message in the driver display. The message must first be acknowledged before the app menu can be opened.) > The app menu opens/closes. The app menu closes automatically after a period of inactivity or after certain options have been selected. Navigating and selecting in the app menu 1. Navigate between the different apps that are available by tapping on left or right (2). > Functions for previous/next app are shown in the app menu. 2. Browse through the functions for the selected app by tapping on up or down (3). 3. Confirm or highlight an option for the function by pressing on confirm (4). > The function is activated and for some options the app menu then closes. If the app menu is opened again, the functions of the most recently selected app are shown first. Related information • • Application menu in driver display (p. 90) Messages in the driver display (p. 91) Message in the driver display4. Message in the driver display5. The driver display shows messages that are of high priority for the driver. The messages can be shown in different parts of the driver display depending on what other information is currently being displayed. After a while, }} 91 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || or when the message has been acknowledged/ action taken if required, the message disappears from the driver display. If a message needs to be saved, it is placed in the Car status app, which is opened from the app view in the centre display. Message composition may vary and they can be shown together with graphics, symbols or buttons for acknowledging the message or accepting a request, for example. 4 5 92 Specification Stop safelyA Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of damage - consult a workshopB. Turn off engineA Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of damage - consult a workshopB. Service urgent Drive to workshopA Contact a workshopB to check the car immediately. With 8-inch driver display. With 12-inch driver display. Specification Related information Service requiredA Contact a workshopB to check the car as soon as possible. • Managing messages in the driver display (p. 93) • Handling a message saved from the driver display (p. 94) Regular maintenance Time for regular service contact a workshopB. Shown before the next service date. • Message in centre display (p. 126) Book time for maintenance Service messages Shown below is a selection of important service messages and their meanings. Message Message Regular maintenance Time for maintenance Regular maintenance Maintenance overdue Temporarily offA A B Time for regular service contact a workshopB. Shown at the next service date. Time for regular service contact a workshopB. Shown when the service date has passed. A function has been temporarily switched off and is reset automatically while driving or after starting again. Part of message, shown together with information on where the problem has arisen. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Managing messages in the driver display For messages without buttons: – Messages in the driver display are handled using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. Message in the driver display7 and the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. Left/right Message in the driver right-hand keypad. display6 Confirm and the steering wheel's Some messages in the driver display contain one or more buttons for acknowledging the message or accepting a request, for example. Close the message by pressing on confirm (2), or allow the message to close automatically after a while. > The message disappears from the driver display. If a message needs to be saved, it is placed in the Car status app, which is opened from the app view in the centre display. The message Car message stored in Car Status application is shown in the centre display in conjunction with this. Related information • • • Messages in the driver display (p. 91) Handling a message saved from the driver display (p. 94) Message in centre display (p. 126) Managing a new message For messages with buttons: 6 7 1. Navigate between the different buttons that are available by tapping on left or right (1). 2. Confirm the selection by pressing on confirm (2). > The message disappears from the driver display. With 8-inch driver display. With 12-inch driver display. 93 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Handling a message saved from the driver display Reading a saved message To read a saved message immediately: Whether saved from the driver display or the centre display, messages are managed in the centre display. – To book service for a saved message: – Press the button to the right of the Car message stored in Car Status application message in the centre display. > The saved message is shown in the Car status app. To read a saved message later: 1. Open the Car status app from the app view in the centre display. > The app is opened in the bottom tile of the home view. 2. Select the Messages tab in the app. > A list of saved messages is shown. Saved messages can be seen in the Car Status app. 3. Messages that are shown in the driver display and that need to be saved are added in the Car status app in the centre display. The message Car message stored in Car Status application is shown in the centre display in conjunction with this. Tap on a message to expand/minimise. > More information on the message is shown in the list and the image to the left in the app shows information about the message graphically. Managing a saved message In maximised mode, some messages have two buttons available to book service or read the owner's manual. With Call to make Appointment: The phone app is initiated and calls a service centre to book service and repair work. To read the owner's manual for a saved message: – 94 Market dependent. Volvo ID and selected workshop also need to be registered. In maximised mode for the message, press Owner's manual to read about the message in the owner's manual. > The owner's manual opens in the centre display and shows information linked to the message. Saved messages in the app are deleted automatically each time the engine is started. Related information • • • 8 In maximised mode for the message, press Request appoint.Call to make Appointment8 for help in booking service. > With Request appoint.: The Appointments tab opens in the app and creates a request to book service and repair work. Messages in the driver display (p. 91) Managing messages in the driver display (p. 93) Message in centre display (p. 126) DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Overview of centre display Many of the car's functions are controlled from the centre display. Presented here is the centre display and its options. }} 95 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Three of the centre display's basic views. Swipe right or left to access the function or app view respectively9. Function view - car functions that are activated or deactivated with a press. Certain 9 96 The views are reversed for right-hand drive cars. functions are also so-called trigger functions, which means they open a window with set- DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL ting options. Examples of these include Camera. Extra tile - recently used apps or car functions that do not belong in any of the other tiles. Tap on the tile to expand it. Home view - the first view that is shown when the screen is started. Climate row - information and direct interaction to set temperature and seat heating for example*. Tap on the symbol in the centre of the climate row in order to open the climate view with more setting options. Application view (app view) - apps that have been downloaded (third-party apps) and apps for embedded functions, such as FM radio. Tap on an app icon to open the app. Status bar - the activities in the car are shown right at the top of the screen. Network and connection information is shown on the left-hand side of the status bar, while mediarelated information, the clock and indication about on-going background activity are shown on the right. Top view - drag the tab down in order to access the top view. Settings, Owner's manual, Profile and the car's saved messages are accessed from here. In some cases contextual settings (e.g. Navigation Settings) and the contextual owner's manual (e.g. Navigation Manual) can also be accessed in the top view. Navigation - leads to map navigation, with e.g. Sensus Navigation*. Tap on the tile to expand it. Media - recently used apps associated with media. Tap on the tile to expand it. Phone - the phone function can be reached from here. Tap on the tile to expand it. • Changing the appearance in the centre display (p. 117) • • • • Changing system language (p. 118) Changing system units (p. 118) Cleaning the centre display (p. 593) Message in centre display (p. 126) Related information • • • • • Managing the centre display (p. 98) Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 101) Function view in centre display (p. 108) Apps (p. 465) Symbols in the centre display's status bar (p. 110) • Opening settings in the centre display (p. 118) • Open contextual setup in the centre display (p. 119) • • • • • Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17) Media player (p. 474) Phone (p. 488) Climate controls (p. 190) Switching off and changing the volume of the system sound in the centre display (p. 117) * Option/accessory. 97 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Managing the centre display ing apps can be performed by touching the screen in different ways. Many of the car's functions are controlled and regulated from the centre display. The centre display is a touch screen that reacts to touch. Using the touch screen functionality in the centre display The screen reacts differently depending on whether you press, drag or swipe across it. Actions such as browsing between different views, marking objects, scrolling in a list and movProcedure 98 An infrared light curtain just above the surface of the screen enables the screen to detect a finger that is just in front of the screen. This technology makes it possible to use the screen even with gloves on. Two people can interact with the screen at the same time, e.g. to adjust the climate for the driver and passenger side respectively. IMPORTANT Do not use sharp objects on the screen as they may scratch it. The table below presents the different procedures for operating the screen: Execution Result Press once. Highlights an object, confirms a selection or activates a function. Press twice in quick succession. Zooms in on a digital object, such as the map*. Press and hold. Grabs an object. Can be used to move apps or map points on the map*. Press and hold your finger against the screen and at the same time drag the object to the desired location. Tap once with two fingers. Zooms out from a digital object, such as the map*. * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Procedure Execution Result Drag Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Hold depressed and drag in order to move apps or map points on the map*. Drag horizontally or vertically across the screen. Swipe/drag quickly Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Drag horizontally or vertically across the screen. Note that touching the upper section of the screen may cause the top view to open. Drag apart Zooms in. Drag together Zooms out. }} * Option/accessory. 99 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Returning to home view from another view 1. 2. Briefly press the home button below the centre display. > The last position of the home view is shown. NOTE The scroll indicator appears in the centre display when it is possible to scroll in the view. Using the controls in the centre display Scrolling in a list, article or view When a scroll indicator is visible in the screen, it is possible to scroll downward or upward in the view. Swipe downwards/upwards anywhere in the view. Temperature control. The control is used for many of the car's functions. Regulate e.g. temperature by means of one of the following: 100 drag the control to the desired temperature, • tap on the desired temperature on the control. tap on + or − in order to raise or lower the temperature gradually, or Related information Briefly press again. > All tiles of the home view are set to their default mode. In home view standard mode - briefly press the home button. An animation that describes access to the different views is shown on the screen. • • • Activating and deactivating centre display (p. 101) • Moving apps and buttons in centre display (p. 110) • Keyboard in centre display (p. 112) DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Activating and deactivating centre display 1. The centre display can be dimmed and reactivated using the home button beneath the screen. 2. Give a long press on the physical home button below the screen. > The screen goes dark except for the climate row, which continues to be shown. All functions connected to the screen are still running. Reactivate the screen - briefly tap on the home button. > The view that was displayed before the screen was switched off will be shown again. NOTE The screen cannot be deactivated when a prompt to perform an action is shown on the screen. Home button for the centre display. The effect of using the home button that the screen dims and the touchscreen no longer reacts to touch. The climate row will still be shown. All functions connected to the screen are still running, such as climate, audio, guidance* and apps. When the centre display is dimmed, it is a good opportunity to clean the screen. The dimming function can also be used to fade the screen so that it does not disturb while driving. NOTE The centre display deactivates automatically when the engine is off and the driver's door is opened. Related information • • • Cleaning the centre display (p. 593) Changing the appearance in the centre display (p. 117) Navigating in the centre display's views There are five different basic views in the centre display: home view, top view, climate view, application view (app view) and function view. The screen is started automatically when the driver's door is opened. Home view Home view is the view that is shown when the screen is started. It consists of four tiles: Navigation, Media, Phone and an extra tile. An app or car function selected from the app or function view starts in the respective tile of the home view. For example FM radio starts in the Media tile. The extra tile contains the last used app or car function that is not associated with any of the other three areas. The tiles show brief information about each different app. NOTE When the car is started, the home view's various sub-views show information on the current status of apps. Overview of centre display (p. 95) }} * Option/accessory. 101 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || NOTE In home view standard mode - briefly press the home button. An animation that describes access to the different views is shown on the screen. Status bar The activities in the car are shown at the top of the screen. Network and connection information is shown on the left-hand side of the status bar, while media-related information, the clock and indication that background activity is in progress are shown on the right. Top view pressing on the tab or by dragging/swiping from the top downwards across the screen. In the top view, access is always available to: • Settings • Owner's manual • Profile • The car's saved messages. In the top view, access is given to the following in some cases: • Contextual setting (e.g. Navigation Settings). Change settings directly in the top view when an app (e.g. navigation) is running. • Contextual owner's manual (e.g. Navigation Manual). Gain access directly in the top view to articles in the digital owner's manual that are related to the content displayed on screen. Climate view The climate row is always visible at the bottom of the screen. The most common climate settings can be made directly there, such as setting temperature and seat heating*. Press the symbol in the centre of the climate row to open the climate view and gain access to more climate settings. Press the symbol to close the climate view and return to the previous view. Exit the top view - press outside the top view, on the home button or at the bottom of the top view and drag upward. The underlying view is then visible and available for use again. NOTE Top view dragged down. A tab is located in the centre of the status bar at the top of the screen. Open the top view by 102 The top view is not available during starting/ shutdown or when a message is shown on the screen. It is also not available when climate view is shown. * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Application view app view, such as the number of unread text messages for Messages. Function view Tap on an app to open it. It then opens in the tile to which it belongs, such as Media. You can scroll down in the app view, depending on the number of apps. Do this by swiping/dragging from the bottom and up. Go back to the home view again by swiping from left to right10 across the screen, or by pressing the home button. Application view with the car's apps. left10 Swipe from right to across the screen in order to access the application view (app view) from the home view. Apps that have been downloaded (third-party apps) and apps for embedded functions, such as FM radio, are found here. Certain apps show brief information directly in the 10 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction. The function view with buttons for different car functions. Swipe from left to right10 across the screen in order to access the function view from the home view. From here you can activate or deactivate different car functions, e.g. BLIS*, Lane Keeping Aid* and Park Assist*. }} * Option/accessory. 103 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Depending on the amount of functions, it is also possible here to scroll downward in the view. Do this by swiping/dragging from the bottom and up. Unlike in app view, where an app is opened with a press, a function is activated or deactivated by pressing the relevant function button. Some functions (trigger functions) open in a new window when pressed. Go back to the home view again by swiping from right to left10 across the screen, or by pressing the home button. Related information • • • Opening settings in the centre display (p. 118) • Open contextual setup in the centre display (p. 119) • • • • • • Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17) 10 104 Managing tiles in centre display (p. 105) Symbols in the centre display's status bar (p. 110) Driver profiles (p. 123) Climate controls (p. 190) Apps (p. 465) Function view in centre display (p. 108) Overview of centre display (p. 95) Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Managing tiles in centre display Home view consists of four tiles: Navigation, Media, Phone and an extra tile. These views can be expanded. }} 105 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Expanding a tile from default mode Standard mode and expanded mode of a tile in the centre display. 106 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Expanding a tile: – For tiles Navigation, Media and Phone: Tap anywhere on the tile. When a tile is expanded, the extra tile in the home view is temporarily forced away. The other two are minimised and only certain information is shown. When the extra tile is tapped, the other three tiles are minimised and only certain information is displayed. The expanded view provides access to the basic functions of the app. In expanded mode, open the app in full screen - press on the symbol. Related information • • • Managing the centre display (p. 98) Activating and deactivating centre display (p. 101) Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 101) Press on the symbol to go back to the expanded mode, or press the home button at the bottom of the screen. Closing an expanded tile: – The tile can be closed in three different ways. • Tap on the upper part of the expanded tile. • Tap on another tile (that tile will then open in expanded mode instead). • Briefly press the physical home button below the centre display. Opening or closing a tile in full screen mode The extra tile11 and the tile for Navigation can be opened out in full screen mode, with even more information and more setting options. When a new tile is opened in full-screen mode, no information from the other tiles is shown. 11 Home button for the centre display. There is always the option to go back to home view by pressing the home button. Go back to the home view's standard view from full screen mode - press twice on the home button. Does not apply to all apps or car functions opened via the extra tile 107 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Function view in centre display All the buttons for car functions are located in the function view, one of the centre display's basic views. Navigate to the function view from home view by swiping from left to right across the screen12. Different types of buttons There are three different types of buttons for car functions; see below: Type of button Property Affects car function Function buttons Have on/off positions. Most buttons in function view are function buttons. When a function is running, an LED indicator illuminates to the left of the icon for the button. Press the button to activate/deactivate a function. Trigger buttons Do not have on/off positions. When a trigger button is depressed, a window for the function is opened. For example, it may be a window to change seat position. Parking buttons Have on, off and scan modes. Similar to the function buttons but with an extra position for parking scanning. 12 108 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction. • Camera • Headrest Fold • Park In • Park Out DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL The buttons' different modes When the LED indicator illuminates in green on a function or parking button, the function is activated. When a function is activated, extra text with an explanation for certain functions is shown. The text is shown for a few seconds and then the button is shown with the LED indicator illuminated. The function is deactivated when the LED indicator is extinguished. For Lane Keeping Aid, the text Works only at certain speeds is shown, for example, when the button is depressed. Press the button once briefly to activate or deactivate the function. When a warning triangle is shown in the righthand section of the button there is something not working as intended. Related information • • Managing the centre display (p. 98) Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 101) 109 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Moving apps and buttons in centre display NOTE Hide the apps that you rarely or never use by moving them to the bottom, off the visible screen. This way it will be easier to find the apps you use more often. The apps and buttons for car functions in the app view and function view respectively can be moved and organised as desired. 1. Swipe from right to left13 to access the app view, or swipe from left to right13 to access the function view. 2. 3. Tap on an app or button and hold it down. > The app or button changes size and becomes slightly transparent. It is then possible to move it. Drag the app or button to a vacant space in the view. The maximum number of rows available for use in order to position apps or buttons is 48. To move an app or button outside the visible view, drag it to the bottom of the view. New rows are then added, where the app or button can be located. NOTE Apps and car function buttons cannot be added to locations that are already occupied. Related information • • • Function view in centre display (p. 108) Apps (p. 465) Managing the centre display (p. 98) An app or button can thus be located further down and is then not visible in the normal mode for the view. Swipe across the screen to scroll up or down in the view. Symbols in the centre display's status bar Overview of the symbols that can be shown in the centre display's status bar. The status bar shows activities in progress and, in some cases, their status. Not all symbols are shown all the time due to the limited space in the status bar. Symbol Specification Connected to the Internet. Connection to the Internet failed. Roaming activated. Signal strength in mobile phone network. Bluetooth device connected. Bluetooth activated but no device connected. Information sent to and from GPS. Connected to Wi-Fi network. 13 110 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Symbol Specification Related information Tethering activated (Wi-Fi hotspot). The car then shares the available connection. • Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 101) • Message in centre display (p. 126) Car modem activated. USB sharing active. Process in progress. Timer for preconditioning active. Audio source being played back. Audio source stopped. Phone call in progress. Audio source muted. News is received from the radio channel. Traffic information is received. Clock. 111 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Keyboard in centre display The centre display keyboard makes it possible make entries using keys. It is also possible to "draw in" letters and characters on the screen by hand. The keyboard can be used to enter characters, letters and numbers, e.g. to write text messages from the car, enter passwords or search for articles in the digital owner's manual. The keyboard is only shown when entries can be made on the screen. 112 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL The image shows an overview of some of the buttons which may be shown in the keyboard. The appearance varies depending on language settings and the context in which the keyboard is being used. }} 113 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Row of suggested words or characters14. The suggested words are adjusted as new letters are being entered. Browse among the suggestions by pressing on the right and left arrows. Tap on a suggestion to select it. Note that this function is not supported by all language selections. If not available, the row will not be shown on the keyboard. The characters available on the keyboard depend on which language was selected (see point 7). Tap on a character to enter it. The button works in different ways, depending on the context in which the keyboard is used - either to enter @ (when an email address is entered) or to create a new row (for normal text input). Hides the keyboard. If this is not possible, the button is not shown. Used to enter capital letters. Press again to enter one capital letter and then continue with lower-case letters. Another press makes all letters capital letters. The next press restores the keyboard to lower-case letters. In this mode, the first letter after a full stop, exclamation mark or question mark is a capital letter. The first letter in the text field is also a capital letter. In text fields intended for names or addresses, each word automatically starts with a capital letter. In text fields for password, web address or email address 14 114 Applies to Asiatic languages. entry, all letters are automatically lower case unless otherwise set with the button. Variants of a letter or character Number entry. The keyboard (2) is then shown with numbers. Press , which in number mode is shown instead of , to to return to the letter keyboard, or open the keyboard with special characters. Changes text input language, e.g. EN. The available characters and word suggestions (1) vary depending on the selected language. To make it possible to change languages for the keyboard, the languages must first be added under Settings. Space. Undoes entered text. Pressing briefly deletes one character at a time. Hold the button depressed to delete characters more quickly. Changes keyboard mode to write letters and characters by hand instead. Pressing the confirmation button above the keypad (not visible in the illustration) confirms the entered text. The appearance of the button differs depending on context. Variants of a letter or character, e.g. é or è, can be entered by holding down the letter or character. A box is displayed showing possible variants of letters or characters. Press the required variant. If no variant is selected, the original letter/ character is entered. Related information • Changing keyboard language in centre display (p. 115) • Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display (p. 115) • • Managing the centre display (p. 98) Managing text messages (p. 494) DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Changing keyboard language in centre display Switching between different languages in the keyboard When a number of languages have been selected in Settings, the button in the keyboard is used to switch between the different languages. To make it possible to switch between different languages for the keyboard, the languages must first be added under Settings. Adding or deleting languages in settings The keyboard is automatically set to the same languages as the system language. The keyboard language can be manually adapted without affecting the system language. 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press System System Languages and Units Keyboard Layouts. 3. Select one or more languages from the list. > It is now possible to switch between the selected languages directly from the keyboard for text input. If no languages have been actively selected under Settings, the keyboard retains the same language as the car's system language. To change keyboard language with list: 1. Give a long press on the button. > A list opens. 2. Select the required language. If more than four languages have been selected under Settings, it is possible to scroll in the list from the keyboard. > The keyboard is adapted to the selected language and other word suggestions are given. – • • Applies to certain system languages. The centre display keyboard allows you to enter characters, letters and words on the screen by "drawing" by hand. Press the button on the keyboard to change from typing with the keys to entering letters and characters by hand. To change the keyboard language without displaying the list: One short press of the button. > The keyboard is adapted to the next language in the list without displaying the list. Related information 15 Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display Changing system language (p. 118) Keyboard in centre display (p. 112) Area for writing characters/letters/words/ parts of word. The text field where the characters or word suggestions15 appear as they are written on screen (1). }} 115 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Suggestions for characters/letters/word/ part of word. It is possible to scroll through the list. || Space. A space can also be created by entering a dash (-) in the area for hand-written letters (1). See the heading "Entering a space in the free text field with handwriting recognition" below. Undo entered text. Press briefly to delete one character/one letter at a time. Wait a moment before pressing again to delete the next character/letter, etc. Return to the keyboard with regular character input. Switch off/on sound when entering. Hide the keyboard. If this is not possible, the button is not shown. Change text input language. 16 116 Writing characters/letters/words by hand 1. Write a character, a letter, a word or parts of a word in the area for hand-written letters (1). Write a word or parts of a word above each other or on a line. > A number of suggested characters, letters or words is shown (3). The most likely choice is found at the top of the list. Deleting/changing characters/letters written by hand IMPORTANT Do not use sharp objects on the screen as they may scratch it. 2. Enter the character/letters/word by waiting a moment. > The character/letter/word at the top of the list is entered. It is also possible to select a different character by pressing the required character, letter or word in the list. For Arabic keyboard - swipe in the opposite direction. Swiping from right to left creates a space. Delete all characters in the text field (2) by swiping across the handwriting field (1). – There are several options for deleting/ changing characters/letters: • Press the intended letter or word in the list (3). • Press the text undo button (5) to delete the letter and begin again. • Swipe horizontally from right to left16 over the area for handwritten letters (1). Delete multiple letters by swiping over the area several times. • Pressing the X in the text field (2) deletes all of the entered text. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Changing row in the free text field with handwriting Changing the appearance in the centre display The appearance of the screen in the centre display can be changed by selecting a theme. 1. Press Settings in the top view. Change row by hand by drawing the above character in the handwriting field17. Entering a space in the free text field with handwriting recognition 2. Press My Car Themes. 3. Then select a theme, e.g. Minimalistic or Chrome Rings. Displays Display As a supplement to these appearances, it is possible to choose between Normal and Bright. With Normal, the screen background is dark and the text is light. This alternative is the default for all themes. A light variant can also be selected, in which the background is light and the text is dark. This alternative can be useful in e.g. strong daylight. This alternative is always available for the user and is not affected by the surrounding lighting. Switching off and changing the volume of the system sound in the centre display The centre display can be used to change the volume of the system sound or switch off the system sound altogether. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press Sound 3. Under Touch Sounds, drag the control to change the volume/switch off screen touch sounds. Drag the control to the desired volume. System Volumes. Related information • • Overview of centre display (p. 95) • Audio settings (p. 464) Changing settings in the centre display (p. 120) Related information Enter a space by drawing a dash from left to right18. Related information • 17 18 Keyboard in centre display (p. 112) • Opening settings in the centre display (p. 118) • Activating and deactivating centre display (p. 101) • Cleaning the centre display (p. 593) For Arabic keyboards - draw the same character, but reversed. For Arabic keyboard - draw the dash from right to left. 117 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Changing system units Changing system language Units settings are defined in the centre display's Settings menu. Language settings are defined in the centre display menu Settings. 1. NOTE Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Continue to System System Languages and Units Units of Measurement. 3. Select from the following unit standards: Celsius. Celsius. • US - miles, gallons and degrees Fahren- heit. > The units in the driver display and centre display are changed. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Continue to System and Units. 3. Select System Language. Languages that support voice recognition have a voice recognition symbol. > The language in the driver display and centre display are changed. Related information 118 • • Overview of centre display (p. 95) • Changing settings in the centre display (p. 120) • Changing system language (p. 118) Opening settings in the centre display (p. 118) Settings and information for many of the car's functions can be managed in the centre display. Changing the language in the centre display may mean that some owner information is not compliant with national or local laws and regulations. Do not switch to a language that is difficult to understand as this may make it difficult to find your way back in the structure on screen. • Metric - kilometres, litres and degrees • Imperial - miles, gallons and degrees Opening settings in the centre display System Languages Top view with button for Settings. 1. Open the top view by pressing on the tab or by dragging/swiping from the top downwards across the screen. 2. Press Settings to open the settings menu. 3. Press one of the categories shown and navigate to subcategories and respective settings by pressing again. 4. Press Back to go back in the settings menu. Related information • • Overview of centre display (p. 95) • Changing settings in the centre display (p. 120) • Changing system units (p. 118) Opening settings in the centre display (p. 118) Press Close to close the settings menu. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Related information • • • • Overview of centre display (p. 95) Changing settings in the centre display (p. 120) Setting types in the centre display (p. 121) Table showing centre display settings (p. 122) Open contextual setup in the centre display Press Close or the physical home button beneath the centre display to close setup view. It is possible to use contextual setup for most of the car's basic apps so that you can change settings directly in the top view in the centre display. Most of the car's basic apps have this contextual setting option, but not all. Third party apps Third party apps are not included in the car's system from the beginning, but are the type that can be downloaded e.g. Volvo ID. Here the settings are always made inside the app and not from the top view. Related information Top view with button for contextual setting. The apps installed in the car from the beginning, e.g. FM radio and USB, are a part of Sensus and are part of the car's embedded functions. Settings for these apps can be changed directly in the top view in the centre display. • Opening settings in the centre display (p. 118) • • Overview of centre display (p. 95) • Downloading apps (p. 466) Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 121) When contextual setup is available: 1. Drag down top view when an app is in expanded mode, e.g. Navigation. 2. Press Navigation Settings. 3. Change settings as desired and confirm the selections. 119 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Changing settings in the centre display You can change Settings and information for many of the car's functions via the centre display. 1. Open the top view by pressing on the tab or by dragging/swiping from the top downwards across the screen. 2. Press Settings to open the settings menu. 3. Press on one of the categories and subcategories to navigate to the required setting. 4. Change one or more settings. Different types of setting are changed in different ways. > The changes are saved immediately. Related information • • • • Overview of centre display (p. 95) Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 121) Setting types in the centre display (p. 121) Table showing centre display settings (p. 122) Resetting user data for change of ownership In the event of a change of ownership, user data and system settings should be restored to factory settings. The settings in the car can be reset at different levels. Restore all user data and system settings to the original factory settings in the event of a change of ownership. In the event of a change of ownership it is also important to change the owner of the Volvo On Call* service. Related information • Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 121) A subcategory in the settings menu with different types of settings (here, a multi-selector button and radio buttons). 120 * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Resetting settings in the centre display 4. It is possible to reset the defaults for all settings defined in the centre display settings menu. Two types of reset There are two different types of resets for settings in the settings menu: Press OK to confirm the reset. Setting types in the centre display For Reset Personal Settings, the reset must be confirmed by pressing Reset for the active profile or Reset for all profiles. > Selected settings are reset. Different types of setting are changed in different ways. See the table for a description of the various types of setting. Related information Setting type Description Opening settings in the centre display (p. 118) Trigger function Starts an app or separate view for more advanced settings through a press on the text, e.g. to connect a device with Bluetooth®. Radio button Select a setting from several options by pressing the required radio button, e.g. to select a system language. Multiselector button Select a level for something by pressing the required part of the button, e.g. to select a sensitivity level for City Safety. Checkbox Activate/deactivate a function by pressing on the box to select/ deselect it, e.g. to select automatic start of seat heating. • Factory reset - clears all data and files and • • Overview of centre display (p. 95) • Reset Personal Settings - clears personal • Changing settings in the centre display (p. 120) • Table showing centre display settings (p. 122) resets all settings to their default values. data and resets personal settings to their default values. Resetting settings Follow these instructions to reset your settings. Setting types NOTE Factory reset is only possible when the car is stationary. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Continue to System 3. Select the required reset type. > A pop-up window is shown. Factory reset. }} 121 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Setting type Description Slider Select a level for something within an interval by pressing and dragging the slider, e.g. to select volume level. Display of information No actual setting. Shows information about something, e.g. the car's identification number. Related information • Overview of centre display (p. 95) Table showing centre display settings Subcategories The settings menu in the centre display has a number of main categories and subcategories where settings and information for many of the car's functions are collected. Parking Brake and Suspension Locking Wipers There are seven main categories: My Car, Sound, Navigation, Media, Communication, Climate and System. Sound In turn, each category contains a number of subcategories and setting options. The tables below show the first level of subcategories. The setting options for a function or area are described in more detail in the corresponding section of the owner's manual. Tone Subcategories Balance System Volumes Navigation Some settings are personal, which means that they can be saved to Driver Profiles. Other settings are global, which means they are not linked to a driver profile. Subcategories My Car Traffic Map Route and Guidance Subcategories Displays Media IntelliSafe Subcategories Drive Preferences/Individual Drive Mode* AM/FM radio Lights and Lighting DAB* Mirrors and Convenience 122 * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Subcategories Gracenote® TV* Video System Subcategories Driver Profile Date and Time System Languages and Units Communication Subcategories Phone Text Messages Android Auto* Apple CarPlay* Bluetooth Devices Wi-Fi Car Wi-Fi Hotspot Car Modem Internet* Volvo On Call* Privacy and data Keyboard Layouts Voice Control* Factory reset System Information Related information • • Overview of centre display (p. 95) • Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 121) Changing settings in the centre display (p. 120) Driver profiles Many of the settings made in the car can be adapted according to the driver's personal preferences and can be saved in one or more driver profiles. The personal settings are automatically saved in the active driver profile. Each key can be linked to a driver profile. When the linked key is used, the car is adapted to the settings of that specific driver profile. What settings are saved in the driver profiles? In the car, the settings defined are either personal or global. Only personal settings are saved in driver profiles. Settings that can be saved in a driver profile include, amongst other things, screens, mirrors, front seats, navigation*, audio and media system, language and voice control. Some settings, referred to as global settings, can be changed but are not saved to a specific driver profile. Changes to global settings affect all profiles. Volvo Service Networks Climate The main category Climate has no subcategories. }} * Option/accessory. 123 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Global settings The global settings and parameters are not changed when changing between driver profiles. They remain the same regardless of which driver profile is active. Keyboard layout settings are an example of global settings. If driver profile X is used to add additional languages to the keyboard, these remain available for use even if driver profile Y is used. The keyboard layout settings are not saved to a specific driver profile - the settings are global. Personal preferences If driver profile X was used to e.g. set centre display brightness, driver profile Y is not affected by this setting. It has been saved to driver profile X the brightness setting is a personal setting. Option 1: 1. Tap on the name of the driver profile shown in the top of the centre display when the display has been started. > A list of selectable driver profiles is shown. Related information 2. Select the driver profile required. 3. Press Confirm. > The driver profile is selected and the system loads the settings for the new driver profile. • • • 124 Selecting driver profile When the centre display has been started, the selected driver profile is shown at the top of the screen. The driver profile last used is the one that will be active next time the car is unlocked. It is possible to change to another driver profile after the car has been unlocked. However, if the remote control key has been linked to a driver profile then this is what is selected when the car is started. There are two options for changing to another driver profile. Selecting driver profile (p. 124) Renaming a driver profile (p. 125) Resetting settings in the driver profiles (p. 125) • Linking remote control key to driver profile (p. 125) Option 2: • Table showing centre display settings (p. 122) 1. Drag down the top view in the centre display. 2. Press Profile. > The same list as for Option 1 is shown. 3. Select the driver profile required. 4. Press Confirm. > The driver profile is selected and the system loads the settings for the new driver profile. Related information • • Driver profiles (p. 123) • • Renaming a driver profile (p. 125) Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 101) Linking remote control key to driver profile (p. 125) DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Renaming a driver profile It is possible to change the name of the different driver profiles used in the car. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press System Linking remote control key to driver profile Settings that have been saved to one or more driver profiles can be reset if the car is stationary. It is possible to link your key to a driver profile. The driver profile along with all of its settings will then be automatically selected every time the car is used with that specific remote control key. NOTE Driver Profiles. 3. Select Edit Profile. > A menu opens, where the profile can be edited. 4. Tap in the box Profile Name. > A keyboard appears, and it is possible to change the name. Tap on to close the keyboard. 5. Resetting settings in the driver profiles Save the name change by pressing Back or Close. > The name has now been changed. NOTE A profile name cannot start with a space, as the profile name will not then be saved. Factory reset is only possible when the car is stationary. 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press System Factory reset Personal Settings. 3. Select one of the options Reset for the active profile, Reset for all profiles or Cancel. Reset Related information • • Driver profiles (p. 123) Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 121) The first time the remote control key is used, it is not linked to any specific driver profile. When the car is started, the Guest profile will automatically be activated. A driver profile can be selected manually without linking it to the key. When the car is unlocked, the last active driver profile is activated. Once the key has been linked to a driver profile, a driver profile does not need to be selected when that specific key is used. Linking a remote control key to a driver profile First select the profile to be linked to the key, if the profile to be linked is not already active. The active profile can then be linked to the key. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press System 3. Select the desired profile. The display returns to the home view. The Guest profile cannot be linked to a key. Related information • • Selecting driver profile (p. 124) Keyboard in centre display (p. 112) Driver Profiles. }} 125 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || 4. 5. Drag down the top view again and tap on Settings System Driver Profiles Edit Profile. Select Connect key to link the profile with the key. It is not possible to link a driver profile to a different key than the one currently being used in the car. If there are multiple keys in the car, the message More than one key is found, put the key you want to connect on backup reader will be displayed. 6. Press OK. > This key is now linked to the driver profile and will remain linked as long as the Connect key box is not unticked. Message in centre display The centre display can show messages to inform or assist the driver in the event of different events. Related information • • • Driver profiles (p. 123) Renaming a driver profile (p. 125) Remote control key (p. 217) Message in the centre display's top view. The centre display shows messages that are of lower priority for the driver. The backup reader's location in the storage compartment. > When the message Profile connected to key is shown, the key and the driver profile are linked. 126 Most messages are shown above the centre display's status bar. After a while, or when any required action related to the message has been taken, the message disappears from the status bar. If a message needs to be saved, it is positioned in the top view in the centre display. Message composition may vary and they can be shown together with graphics, symbols or a button for activating/deactivating a function linked to the message. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Pop-up messages In some cases, a message is shown in the form of a pop-up window. Pop-up messages have higher priority than messages shown in the status bar and require acknowledgement/action before they disappear. Messages that need to be saved are positioned in the top view in the centre display. Managing messages in the centre display Messages in the centre display are handled in centre display views. Managing messages in the centre display (p. 127) • Handling a message saved from the centre display (p. 128) • Messages in the driver display (p. 91) – Close the message by tapping on it, or allow the message to close automatically after a while. > The message disappears from the status bar. If a message needs to be saved, it is positioned in the top view in the centre display. Related information • For messages without buttons: Related information • • • Message in centre display (p. 126) Handling a message saved from the centre display (p. 128) Messages in the driver display (p. 91) Message in the centre display's top view. Some messages in the centre display have a button (or several buttons in pop-up messages) for e.g. activating/deactivating a function linked to the message. Managing a new message For messages with buttons: – Press the button to perform the action or allow the message to close automatically after a while. > The message disappears from the status bar. 127 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Handling a message saved from the centre display Whether saved from the driver display or the centre display, messages are managed in the centre display. Managing a saved message Some messages have a button for e.g. activating/ deactivating a function linked to the message. – Press the button to perform the action. Saved messages in the top view are deleted automatically when the car is switched off. Related information • • • Message in centre display (p. 126) Managing messages in the centre display (p. 127) Messages in the driver display (p. 91) Voice recognition19 The driver can use voice recognition to control certain functions in the media player, Bluetoothconnected phone, climate system and Volvo's navigation system*. Voice commands offer additional convenience and assist the driver to not be distracted so that he or she can concentrate on driving, the road and the traffic situation. WARNING The driver always holds overall responsibility for driving the vehicle in a safe manner and complying with all applicable rules of the road. Saved messages and possible options in the top view. Messages that are shown in the centre display that need to be saved are added in the top view of the centre display. Reading a saved message 1. Open the top view in the centre display. > A list of saved messages is shown. Messages with an arrow to the right can be maximised. 2. 128 Tap on a message to expand/minimise. > More information on the message is shown in the list and the image to the left in the app shows information about the message graphically. Voice control system microphone Voice control is done in dialogue form with the user saying commands and receiving verbal * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL responses from the system. The voice recognition system uses the same microphone as Bluetoothconnected devices, and the voice recognition system's responses are given via the car's speakers. In some cases, a text message is also shown in the driver display. Functions are controlled from the right-hand steering wheel keypad. Settings are made via the centre display. System updating The voice recognition system is continuously improved. Download updates for optimal performance from support.volvocars.com. Using voice recognition20 Depress the steering wheel button for voice recognition to activate the system and initiate a dialogue using voice commands. Remember the following: • • Related information • • • • • Using voice recognition (p. 129) Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 130) Voice control of radio and media (p. 131) Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 180) Settings for voice recognition (p. 131) • Speak after the tone with a normal voice at a normal tempo. Press , say "Call [Forename] [Surname] [number category]" - dials the selected contact from the phone book. If the contact has several phone numbers (e.g. home, mobile, work), the right category must be referred to. So press Mobile". Commands/phrases • Avoid background noise in the passenger compartment by having the doors, windows and panoramic roof* closed. • • by saying "Cancel". with a long press on the voice recognition . button on the steering wheel and say "Call Robin Smith The following commands are always available for use: Do not speak while the system is replying (the system cannot understand commands during this time). Voice recognition can be deactivated as follows: • • Example of voice recognition control "Repeat" - repeats the last voice instruction in the ongoing dialogue. "Cancel" - discontinue the dialogue. "Help" - starts a help dialogue. The system replies with the commands available in the current situation, a prompt or an example. Commands for specific functions such as phone and radio are described in specific sections. To speed up communication and skip the prompts from the system, press the steering wheel button for voice recognition when the system voice is speaking and say the next command. 19 20 Applies to certain markets. Applies to certain markets. }} * Option/accessory. 129 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Digits The number commands are stated differently depending on the function to be controlled: • • • Phone numbers and postcodes must be spoken individually, number by number, e.g. zero three one two two four four three (03122443). House numbers can be spoken individually or in groups, e.g. two two or twenty-two (22). For English and Dutch, several groups can be said in sequence, e.g. twenty-two twentytwo (22 22). For English, double or triple can be used, e.g. double zero (00). Numbers can be given within the range 0-2300. Frequencies can be spoken as ninety eight point eight (98.8), a hundred and four point two or hundred four point two (104.2). Related information • • • • • 21 22 130 Voice recognition (p. 128) Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 130) Controlling a telephone with voice recognition21 Call a contact, have messages read aloud or dictate brief messages with voice control commands to a Bluetooth connected telephone. To specify a contact in the phone book, the voice recognition command must include contact information that is entered in the phone book. If a contact, e.g. Robyn Smith, has several phone numbers then the number category can also be stated, e.g. Home or Mobile: "Call Robin Smith Mobile". Press mands: "Call [contact]" - dials the selected contact from the phone book. • "Call [phone number]" - dials the phone number. Voice control of radio and media (p. 131) Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 180) Settings for voice recognition (p. 131) • • • • • • • Voice recognition (p. 128) Using voice recognition (p. 129) Voice control of radio and media (p. 131) Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 180) Settings for voice recognition (p. 131) Internet-connected car* (p. 498) and say one of the following com- • • • Related information "Recent calls" - displays the call list. "Read message" - message is read out. If there are several messages - select which message should be read out. "Message to [contact]" users are requested to say a brief message. The message is then repeated aloud and the user can choose to send22 or revise the message. For this function to work, the car must be connected to the Internet. Applies to certain markets. Only certain phones can broadcast messages from the car. For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com. * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Voice control of radio and media23 Commands for radio and media player device control are shown below. Tap on and say one of the following commands: • "Media" - starts a dialogue for media and radio and shows examples of commands. • "Play [artist]" - plays back music by the selected artist. • "Play [song title]" - plays back the selected song. • "Play [song title] from [album]" - plays back the selected song from the selected album. • "Play [TV channel name]" - starts the selected TV channel*24. • "Play [radio station]" - starts playing back the selected radio channel. • "Tune to [frequency]" - starts the selected radio frequency in the current frequency band. If no radio source is active, the FM band is started by default. • "Tune to [frequency] [wavelength]" starts the selected radio frequency in the selected frequency band. • "Radio" - starts FM radio. 23 24 25 Applies to certain markets. Applies to certain markets. Applies to certain markets. • • • • • • • • "Radio FM" - starts FM radio. Settings for voice recognition25 "Radio AM" - starts AM radio. Settings for the voice control system are selected here. "DAB " - starts DAB radio*. "TV" - starts playback from TV*24. "USB" - starts playback from USB. "iPod" - starts playback from iPod. "Bluetooth" - starts playback from a Bluetooth-connected media source. "Similar music" — plays back music similar to the music currently playing back from USB devices. Related information • • • Voice recognition (p. 128) Using voice recognition (p. 129) Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 130) • Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 180) • Settings for voice recognition (p. 131) Settings System Voice Control Settings can be made within the following areas: • Repeat Voice Command • Gender • Speech Rate Audio settings Select audio settings under: Settings Sound Voice Control System Volumes Language settings Voice recognition is not possible for all languages. Languages available for voice recognition are marked with an icon in the language list . Changing the language also affects menu, message and help texts. Settings System System Languages and Units System Language }} * Option/accessory. 131 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Related information • • • • • • • 132 Voice recognition (p. 128) Using voice recognition (p. 129) Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 130) Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 180) Voice control of radio and media (p. 131) Audio settings (p. 464) Changing system language (p. 118) LIGHTING LIGHTING Lighting control The different lighting controls are used to control both exterior and interior lighting. The left-hand stalk switch activates and adjusts the exterior lighting. The interior brightness is adjusted using a thumbwheel on the instrument panel. Exterior lighting Position Specification Position Daytime running lights. Specification Daytime running lights and position lamps in daylight. Main beam flash can be used. Dipped beam and position lamps in weak daylight or darkness, or when the front fog lamp* and/or rear fog lamp are activated. Daytime running lights and position lamps. Position lamps when the car is parked.A The Active main beam function can be activated. Main beam flash can be used. Main beam can be activated when dipped beam is switched on. Dipped beam and position lamps. Main beam can be activated. Main beam flash can be used. Main beam flash can be used. Active main beam on/off. A If the car is stationary but running, the rotating ring can be moved to position from another position to switch on only the position lamps instead of other lighting. Rotating ring in the left-hand stalk switch. When the car's electrical system is in ignition position II or when the car is running, the following functions are available in the rotating ring's different positions. Volvo recommends that when the vehicle is driven. mode is used WARNING The car's audio system is not able to determine when daylight is too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in fog and rain, in all situations. The driver is always responsible for ensuring that the car is driven with a beam pattern suitable for the traffic situation and in accordance with applicable traffic regulations. 134 * Option/accessory. LIGHTING Thumbwheel in instrument panel Adjusting light functions via the centre display Several light functions can be adjusted and activated via the centre display, such as active main beam, home safe lighting and approach lighting. 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press My Car 3. Select Exterior Lights or Interior Lighting. Position lamps Position lamps can be used so that other road users can see the car if it stops or is parked. The position lamp is switched on with the rotating ring on the stalk switch. Lights and Lighting. Related information Thumbwheel (to left) for adjusting interior brightness. Related information • Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 135) • • • • • • • • • • • Interior lighting (p. 144) Position lamps (p. 135) Using direction indicators (p. 139) Using main beam (p. 137) Dipped beam (p. 137) Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 141) Rear fog lamp (p. 141) Active bending lights* (p. 140) Brake lights (p. 142) Emergency brake lights (p. 142) Hazard warning flashers (p. 143) • • • • • • • Lighting control (p. 134) Active main beam (p. 138) Using home safe lighting (p. 143) Approach light duration (p. 144) Using direction indicators (p. 139) Opening settings in the centre display (p. 118) Function view in centre display (p. 108) Stalk switch rotating ring in position lamps position. Turn the rotating ring to the position - the position lamps are switched on (number plate lighting is switched on at the same time). If the car's electrical system is in ignition position II or the car is running then the daytime running lights are switched on instead of the front position lamps. When the rotating ring is in this position, the position lamps are switched on regardless of the ignition position of the car's electrical system. If the car is stationary but running, the rotating ring can be moved to the position lamp }} * Option/accessory. 135 LIGHTING || position from another position to switch on only the position lamps instead of other lighting. When driving for more than 30 seconds at max. 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), or if the speed exceeds 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), the daytime running lights are switched on. The driver should . turn to a position other than If the tailgate is opened when it is dark outside, the rear position lamps come on (if not already switched on) to warn road users approaching from behind. This takes place irrespective of the position of the rotating ring or the ignition position of the car's electrical system. Daytime running lights The car has sensors that detect the light conditions in the surroundings. The daytime running lights are switched on when the rotating ring on , or the stalk switch is in position as well as when the car's electrical system is in ignition position II or when the car is running. In position , the headlamps change automatically to dipped beam in weak daylight or darkness. WARNING This system help to save energy - it cannot determine in all situations when daylight is too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist and rain. The driver is always responsible for ensuring that the car is driven with the correct beam pattern for the traffic situation and in accordance with applicable traffic regulations. Related information • • • Related information • • takes place if the front fog lamp* and/or rear fog lamp are activated. Lighting control (p. 134) Ignition positions (p. 398) Lighting control (p. 134) Ignition positions (p. 398) Dipped beam (p. 137) Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position. If the stalk switch rotating ring is in the position, the daytime running lights (DRL1) are switched on when the car is driven in daylight. The car automatically changes lighting from daytime running light to dipped beam in weak daylight or darkness. Changing to dipped beam also 1 136 Daytime Running Lights * Option/accessory. LIGHTING Dipped beam When driving with the stalk switch's rotating ring position, dipped beam is activated in the automatically in weak daylight or darkness, when the car's electrical system is in ignition position II or when the car is running. Tunnel detection The car detects when it is driven into a tunnel and switches from daytime running lights to dipped beam. Note that the rotating ring in the left-hand stalk mode for tunnel detecswitch must be in tion to work. Using main beam Main beam is operated with the left-hand stalk switch. Main beam is the car's strongest lighting and should be used when driving in the dark for better visibility, as long as it does not dazzle other road users. Related information • • • Lighting control (p. 134) Ignition positions (p. 398) Daytime running lights (p. 136) Steering wheel stalk switch with rotating ring. Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position. With the stalk switch's rotating ring in position, dipped beam is also activated automatically if: • • • Main beam flash Move the stalk switch backwards slightly to main beam flash position. Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is released. the front fog lamps* are activated the rear fog lamp is activated the front and rear fog lamps are activated Dipped beam is always switched on when the rotating ring on the stalk switch is in position when the car's electrical system is in ignition position II or when the car is running. }} * Option/accessory. 137 LIGHTING || Active main beam Main beam Main beam can be activated when the steering wheel stalk switch's rotating ring is in 2 or . Activate main position beam by moving the stalk switch forwards. Deactivate by moving the stalk switch backwards. Active main beam is a function which uses a camera sensor at the top edge of the windscreen to detect the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in front, and then switches from main beam to dipped beam. When main beam has been activated the symbol illuminates in the driver display. Lighting control (p. 134) Active main beam is activated with the rotating ring on the stalk switch in position . The function can also take streetlights into account. Main beam is reactivated when the camera sensor no longer sees any oncoming vehicles or vehicles ahead. 138 When active main beam is activated, the symbol illuminates with a white glow in the driver display. Car with LED3 headlamps* If the active main beam has the on/off functionality4 then the lighting returns to main beam about a second after the camera sensor no longer detects the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front. Active main beam (p. 138) 2 When dipped beam is activated. 3 LED (Light Emitting Diode) 4 Depending on the car's equipment If active main beam is deactivated while main beam is on, the lighting is immediately reset to dipped beam. When main beam is activated, the symbol shines blue. Related information • • The function can start while driving in the dark when the car's speed is approx. 20 km/h (approx. 12 mph) or higher. The lighting returns to full main beam about a second after the camera sensor no longer detects the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front. level. * Option/accessory. LIGHTING Limitations for active main beam The camera sensor on which the function is based has limitations. If this symbol is shown in the driver display, together with the message Active High Beam Temporarily unavailable, then switching between main and dipped beam must be performed manually. The rotating ring on the stalk switch can still position. The symbol extinbe in the guishes when these message are shown. Related information • • • Lighting control (p. 134) Using main beam (p. 137) Limitations for camera unit (p. 323) Using direction indicators The car's direction indicators are operated with the left-hand stalk switch. The direction indicator lamps flash three times or continuously, depending on how far up or down the stalk switch is moved. The same applies if this symbol is shown together with the message Windscreen sensor Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual. Active main beam may be temporarily unavailable e.g. in situations with dense fog or heavy rain. When active main beam becomes available again, or the windscreen sensors are no longer blocked, symbol illuthe message goes out and the minates. WARNING Active main beam is an aid for using the optimum beam pattern when conditions are favourable. Direction indicators. Short flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to the first position and release. The direction indicator lamps flash three times. The function can be activated/deactivated via the centre display. The driver always bears responsibility for manually switching between main and dipped beam when traffic situations or weather conditions so require. }} 139 LIGHTING NOTE Active bending lights* • This automatic flashing sequence can be stopped by moving the stalk switch immediately in the opposite direction. • If the symbol for direction indicators in the driver display flashes more quickly than normal - see the message in the driver display. Active bending lights are designed to provide maximum illumination in bends and junctions. Cars with LED5 headlamps* can have active bending lights, depending on the car's equipment level. || The function is only active in weak daylight or darkness and only when the car is moving and dipped beam is switched on. Deactivating/activating the function The function is activated when the car is supplied from the factory and can be deactivated/activated via the centre display's function view. Press the Active Bending Lights button. Continuous flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to its end position. The stalk switch remains in its position and is moved back manually, or automatically by the steering wheel movement. Related information Related information • • • Hazard warning flashers (p. 143) Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 135) Replacing the rear direction indicator bulb (p. 575) Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) and activated (right) respectively. • Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 135) • Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 141) Active bending lights follow steering wheel movements to provide maximum illumination in bends and junctions and can thereby provide the driver with improved visibility. The function is activated automatically when the car is started. In the event of a fault in the funcsymbol illuminates in the driver tion, the display at the same time as the driver display shows an explanatory text. 5 140 LED (Light Emitting Diode) * Option/accessory. LIGHTING Front fog lamps/cornering lights* NOTE The front fog lamps emit a stronger beam than dipped beam and are therefore additionally effective in fog. Regulations on the use of fog lamps vary from country to country. Cornering lights* Rear fog lamp The rear fog lamp is considerably stronger than the normal rear lights and should only be used in reduced visibility due to fog, snow, smoke or dust so that other road users have an early warning of a vehicle ahead. The front fog lamps can include the cornering lights function, which temporarily illuminates the area diagonally in front of the car in the direction the steering wheel is turned on a sharp bend, or in the direction shown by the direction indicators. Button for front fog lamps. The front fog lamps can only be switched on when ignition position II is active or the car is running and the rotating ring on the stalk switch is in position , or . Press the button to activate and deactivate. The symbol in the driver display illuminates when the front fog lamps are switched on. The front fog lamps switch off automatically when the start knob it turned clockwise to switch off the car or the stalk switch rotating ring is set to position. the The function is activated in weak daylight or darkness when the stalk switch's rotating ring is in or position and the speed of the the car is lower than approx. 30 km/h (approx. 20 mph). In addition, both cornering lights are switched on as a supplement to the reversing lamp during reversing. Button for rear fog lamp. The function is activated when the car is supplied from the factory and can be activated and deactivated via the centre display. The rear fog lamp is a lamp at the rear of the car, on the driver's side. Related information • ignition position II is active or the car is running and the stalk switch's rotating ring is in position or • the stalk switch's rotating ring is in position and the front fog lamps are switched on. • • • • • The rear fog lamp can only be switched on when: Lighting control (p. 134) Ignition positions (p. 398) Rear fog lamp (p. 141) Active bending lights* (p. 140) Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 135) }} * Option/accessory. 141 LIGHTING || Press the on/off button. The symbol in the driver display illuminates when the rear fog lamp is switched on. Brake lights Emergency brake lights The brake light automatically comes on during braking. Emergency brake lights are activated to alert vehicles behind about heavy braking. The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically when: The brake light is switched on when the brake pedal is depressed. It is also switched on when the car is braked automatically by one of the driver support systems. The function means that the brake light flashes instead of - as in normal braking - shining with a constant glow. The emergency brake lights are activated during heavy braking or if the ABS system is activated at high speeds. • the start knob is turned clockwise to switch off the car or the stalk switch rotating ring is set to the position • the stalk switch's rotating ring is in position and the front fog lamps are switched off. NOTE Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps vary from country to country. Related information • • • • 142 Lighting control (p. 134) Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 141) Ignition positions (p. 398) Related information • • • Emergency brake lights (p. 142) Brake functions (p. 401) Changing brake light bulb (p. 576) After the driver brakes to a low speed and then releases the brake, the brake light returns to normal glow. The car's hazard warning flashers are activated at the same time. These flash until the driver accelerates the car to a higher speed again or switches off the hazard warning flashers. Related information • • • Brake lights (p. 142) Foot brake (p. 401) Hazard warning flashers (p. 143) Replacing the rear fog lamp bulb (p. 577) * Option/accessory. LIGHTING Hazard warning flashers Hazard warning flashers warn other road users by means of all of the car's direction indicators being activated simultaneously. The function can be used to give a warning in the event of traffic hazards. NOTE Regulations for the use of hazard warning flashers may vary between countries. Related information • • Using home safe lighting Some of the exterior lighting can be kept switched on to work as home safe lighting after the car has been locked. To activate the function: Emergency brake lights (p. 142) 1. Switch off the car. Using direction indicators (p. 139) 2. Move the left-hand stalk switch forward toward the instrument panel and release. 3. Get out of the car and lock the door. When the function is activated, a symbol illuminates in the driver display and position lamps, exterior handle lighting* and number plate lighting are switched on. The length of time that home safe lighting remains on can be set via the centre display. Button for hazard warning flashers. Press the button to activate the hazard warning flashers. The hazard warning flashers are automatically activated when the car brakes so powerfully that the emergency brake lights are activated and the speed is low. The hazard warning flashers start to flash after the emergency brake lights have stopped flashing and are then deactivated automatically when the car drives away again or are deactivated if the button is depressed. Related information • Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 135) • Approach light duration (p. 144) * Option/accessory. 143 LIGHTING Approach light duration Interior lighting Approach lighting is switched on when the car is unlocked and is used to switch on the car's lighting at a distance. The interior is equipped with several different types of lighting to improve the experience. This includes, reading lamps, glovebox lighting and ground lighting. All lighting in the passenger compartment can be switched on and off manually at least 5 minutes from when: The function is activated when the remote control key is used for unlocking. At which point, position lamps, exterior handle lighting*, number plate lighting, interior roof lamps, floor lamps and cargo area lighting are switched on. If a door is opened within the activation time, the time for the lighting in the outside handles* and the interior lighting will be extended. The function can be activated and deactivated via the centre display. • the car has been switched off and its electrical system is in ignition position 0 • the car has been unlocked but it has not been started. Front roof lighting Related information • Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 135) • • Using home safe lighting (p. 143) Remote control key (p. 217) Auto function for passenger compartment lighting Reading lamp, right-hand side Reading lighting The reading lamps on the right and left-hand sides can be turned on and off by briefly pressing the buttons in the roof console. Brightness is adjusted by holding the button pressed in. Passenger compartment lighting The floor lighting and interior roof lighting are switched on or off with a short press on the button in the roof console. Auto function for passenger compartment lighting The automatic function is activated by a short press on the AUTO button in the roof console. With the automatic system activated, the light indicator in the button illuminates and the passenger compartment lighting is switched on and off according to the following. Passenger compartment lighting: • illuminates when the car is unlocked and when it is switched off • extinguishes when the car is started and when it is locked Reading lamp, left-hand side • comes on and goes off, respectively, when a side door is opened or closed Passenger compartment lighting • remains on for 2 minutes if one of the side doors is open. Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps and passenger compartment lighting. 144 * Option/accessory. LIGHTING Rear roof lighting* The rear area of the car has reading lighting, which is also used as passenger compartment lighting. The reading lamps are switched on or off by briefly pressing the button on the lamp. Brightness is adjusted by holding the button pressed in. ning. The ambience light can be adapted in the centre display and also precisely adjusted using the thumbwheel in the instrument panel. Glovebox lighting Lighting in storage compartments in doors Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respectively when the lid is opened or closed. Sun visor mirror lighting* The lighting for the mirror in the sun visor is switched on and off respectively when the cover is opened or closed. Ground lighting* The ground lighting is switched on and off when the corresponding door is opened or closed. Reading lamps above the rear seat. Lighting in the cargo area The lighting in the cargo area is switched on and off respectively when the tailgate is opened or closed. Decor lighting The ambient light is switched on when you open the doors and is switched off when the car is locked. The intensity of the decor lighting can be adapted in the centre display and also precisely adjusted using the thumbwheel in the instrument panel. The lighting in the storage compartments in the doors is switched on when you open the doors and is switched off when the car is locked. The brightness can be precisely adjusted using the thumbwheel in the instrument panel. Lighting in front cup holders in tunnel console The lighting in the front cup holders is switched on when the car is unlocked and is switched off when the car is locked. The brightness can be precisely adjusted using the thumbwheel in the instrument panel. Related information • • • • Adjusting interior lighting (p. 146) Lighting control (p. 134) Ignition positions (p. 398) Passenger compartment interior (p. 544) Ambience lights* In cars with panorama roof* there are two lamp units, one on each side of the roof. The car is equipped with a number of LEDs that make it possible to change the colour of the light. These lights are switched on when the car is run- * Option/accessory. 145 LIGHTING Adjusting interior lighting The lamps inside the car come on differently depending on the ignition position used. The interior lighting can be adjusted with a thumbwheel in the instrument panel, and certain light functions can also be adjusted via the centre display. The thumbwheel, on the instrument panel by the steering wheel, is used to adjust the brightness of the display light, control light, ambient light and ambience light* Changing the brightness of the lights 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting. 3. Under Interior Mood Light Intensity, select from Off, Low and High. Changing the colour of the light 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting. 3. Choose between By Temperature and By Colour in order to change the colour of the light. Adjusting ambient decor illumination 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting Interior Lighting. 3. Choose between the following settings: • Under Ambient Light Intensity, select from Off, Low and High. • Under Ambient Light Level, select from Reduced and Full. Adjusting ambience light* The car is equipped with a number of LEDs that make it possible to change the colour of the light. These lights are switched on when the car is running. 146 With the By Temperature option, the light changes according to the set passenger compartment temperature. With the By Colour option, the Theme Colours subcategory can be used to adjust further. Related information • • • Interior lighting (p. 144) Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 135) Ignition positions (p. 398) * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS Windows, glass and mirrors The car contains controls for windows, glass and mirrors. Some of the windows in the car are laminated. • Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors (p. 199) Laminated glass The windscreen and panorama* roof have laminated glass. The glass is reinforced, which provides better protection against break-ins and improved sound insulation in the passenger compartment. Laminated glass is available as an option for certain other glass surfaces. The symbol is shown on the windows where the glass is laminated1 Related information • Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds (p. 148) • • • • • Panorama roof* (p. 154) • 1 148 Power windows (p. 149) Rearview and door mirrors (p. 151) Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds All windows and sun blinds* controlled electrically have pinch protection which is deployed if they are blocked by any object when opening or closing. In the event of blocking, the movement stops and then reverses automatically to approx. 50 mm (approx. 2 inches) from the blocked position (or to full ventilation position). If the pinch protection has deployed then it is still possible to operate once more in the same direction without pinch protection, if this is done within 10 seconds after pinch protection deployment. In other words, it is possible to force pinch protection when closing has been cancelled, e.g. when ice is formed, by continuing to press the control until fully closed. WARNING If the starter battery is disconnected, the automatic opening and closing function must be reset to work properly. A reset must take place for pinch protection to work. Using windscreen wipers (p. 159) Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 162) Activating and deactivating the heated windscreen* (p. 198) Does not apply to the windscreen or panorama roof* which are always laminated and thus do not have this symbol. * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS Related information • Reset sequence for pinch protection (p. 149) • • Operating power windows (p. 150) Panorama roof* (p. 154) Reset sequence for pinch protection If any fault arises with the electrical functions of the power windows, a reset sequence can be tested. Power windows The power windows are operated using the control panels in each respective door. The driver's door has controls for operating all windows and also to activate the child safety locks. WARNING If the starter battery is disconnected, the automatic opening and closing function must be reset to work properly. A reset must take place for pinch protection to work. If the problem persists, or if it concerns the panoramic roof or sunroof, contact a workshop.2 Reset the power window 1. Start with the window in closed position. 2. Then operate it in the manual position 3 times upwards to closed position. > The system is initiated automatically. Related information • Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds (p. 148) • Operating power windows (p. 150) Driver's door control panel. Electric child safety locks* that deactivate the controls in the rear doors to prevent doors or windows from being opened from the inside. Controls for rear windows. Controls for front windows. The power windows are equipped with pinch protection. If any fault arises with the pinch protection, a reset sequence can be tested. 2 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. }} * Option/accessory. 149 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS || WARNING Children, other passengers or objects may be trapped by the moving parts. • • • • • Always operate the windows with caution. Do not allow children to play with the controls. Never leave children alone in the car. Remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by setting the car's electrical system in ignition position 0, and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car. Never put an object or part of the body through the windows, even if the car's electrical system is fully disconnected. Related information • • • Operating power windows Using the driver's door control panel, all power windows can be operated - using the control panels in the other doors operates the power window in the individual door. The power windows are equipped with pinch protection. If any fault arises with the pinch protection, a reset sequence can be tested. WARNING Children, other passengers or objects may be trapped by the moving parts. • • • • Operating power windows (p. 150) Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds (p. 148) Reset sequence for pinch protection (p. 149) • Always operate the windows with caution. Do not allow children to play with the controls. Never leave children alone in the car. Remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by setting the car's electrical system in ignition position 0, and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car. Never put an object or part of the body through the windows, even if the car's electrical system is fully disconnected. Operating the power windows. Operating without auto. Move one of the controls gently up or down. The power windows move up or down as long as the control is held in position. Operating with auto. Move one of the controls up or down to the end position and release it. The window runs automatically to its end position. In order for the power windows to be used, the ignition position must be I or II. The power windows can be operated for a few minutes after the car has been switched off and after the ignition has been switched off - although not after a door has been opened. Only one control panel can be operated at a time. It can also be operated using the remote control key, keyless opening* with the door handle or the central locking button. 150 * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS WARNING Check that children or other passengers are not at risk of crushing when all the windows are closed with: • • • keyless closing* central locking button remote control key. NOTE • • Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 219) Locking and unlocking from inside the car (p. 245) Rearview and door mirrors The rearview mirrors and door mirrors are used to give the driver better visibility to the rear. Interior rearview mirror The interior rearview mirror is adjusted easily by angling it manually. The interior rearview mirror can be fitted with HomeLink*, automatic dimming* and compass*. Door mirrors One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise when the rear windows are open is to also open the front windows slightly. WARNING Both mirrors are bent to provide optimal vision. Objects may appear to be further away than they actually are. NOTE The windows cannot be opened at speeds above approx. 180 km/h (approx. 112 mph), but they can be closed. The driver always bears responsibility for following traffic regulations in force. The door mirror positions are adjusted with the joystick in the driver's door control panel. There are also a number of automatic settings that can be linked to the memory function buttons for the power seat*. Related information Related information • • Power windows (p. 149) • • Reset sequence for pinch protection (p. 149) Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds (p. 148) • • • • HomeLink®* (p. 456) Compass* (p. 459) Adjusting rearview mirror dimming (p. 152) Angling the door mirrors (p. 153) Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 242) }} * Option/accessory. 151 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS • • Storing memory function in power operated front seat* (p. 168) Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors (p. 199) Adjusting rearview mirror dimming Automatic dimming* Bright light from behind could be reflected in the rearview mirrors and dazzle the driver. Use dimming when disturbed by light from behind. Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed by the interior rearview and door mirrors. Automatic dimming is always active while driving, apart from when gearbox reverse position is selected. Manual dimming The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed with a control in the mirror's lower edge. NOTE When sensitivity is changed there is no immediately noticeable change in dimming, but the change will be complete after a while. Dimming sensitivity will affect both the interior rearview mirror and the door mirrors. Control for manual dimming. 1. Use dimming by moving the control in towards the passenger compartment. 2. Return to normal mode by moving the control towards the windscreen. The control for manual dimming is not available on mirrors with automatic dimming. 152 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press My Car 3. Under Rearview Mirror Auto Dimming, select Normal, Dark or Light. Mirrors and Convenience. The interior rearview mirror contains two sensors - one forward facing and one rearward facing that work together to identify and eliminate dazzling light. The forward facing sensor detects ambient light, while the rearward facing sensor detects the light from vehicle headlights behind. For the door mirrors to be equipped with automatic dimming, the interior rearview mirror must also be equipped with automatic dimming. * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS NOTE If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking permits, transponders, sun visors or objects in the seats or in the cargo area in such a way that light is prevented from reaching the sensors, then the dimming function of the interior rearview and door mirrors is reduced. Angling the door mirrors Resetting to neutral To ensure better visibility to the rear, the door mirrors need to be set to the preferences of the driver. There are a number of automatic settings that can also be linked to the memory function buttons for the power seat*. Mirrors that have been moved out of position by an external force must be reset electrically to the neutral position for electric retracting/extending to work correctly. 1. Fold in the door mirrors by pressing down the L and R buttons simultaneously. 2. Fold them out again by pressing the L and R buttons simultaneously. Rearview and door mirrors (p. 151) 3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary. Angling the door mirrors (p. 153) The mirrors are now reset in neutral position. Using controls for door mirrors Related information • • Folding in rearview mirrors electrically* The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving in narrow spaces. Controls for door mirrors. The door mirror positions are adjusted with the joystick in the driver's door control panel. 3 Only in combination with power seat with memory buttons*. 1. Press the L button for the left-hand door mirror or the R button for the right-hand door mirror. The light in the button illuminates. 2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the centre. 3. Press the L or R button again. The light should no longer be illuminated. 1. Depress the L and R buttons simultaneously (ignition position must be at least I). 2. Release them after approximately 1 second. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully retracted position. Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully extended position. Angling during parking3 The door mirror can be angled down for the driver to view the side of the road when parking for example. }} * Option/accessory. 153 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS || – Engage reverse gear and press the L or R button. Note that the button may need to be pressed twice, depending on whether it was already preselected. The button flashes when the door mirror is angled down. When reverse gear is disengaged, the door mirror automatically starts to return after approx. 3 seconds and then reaches its original position after approx. 8 seconds. Automatic angling during parking3 With this setting, the door mirror is automatically angled down when reverse gear is selected. The folded position is preset and cannot be adjusted. You can make the door mirror return to its original position by pressing the L or R button twice. 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Press My Car 3. Under Exterior Mirror Tilt at Reverse, select Off, Driver, Passenger or Both to activate/deactivate and to select which review mirror should be angled. When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote control key the door mirrors are automatically retracted/extended. 154 Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Press My Car 3. Select Fold Mirror When Locked to activate/deactivate. Mirrors and Convenience. Related information • • • • Rearview and door mirrors (p. 151) Adjusting rearview mirror dimming (p. 152) Storing memory function in power operated front seat* (p. 168) Panorama roof* The panorama roof is divided into two glass sections. The front section can be opened vertically at the rear edge (ventilation position) or horizontally (open position). The rear section is fixed roof glass. The panoramic roof has a wind deflector and a sun blind made of perforated fabric and located under the glass roof to provide extra protection from factors such as strong sunlight. Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors (p. 199) Mirrors and Convenience. Automatic retraction when locking* 3 Only 1. The panoramic roof and sun blind are operated with a control located in the roof. It can also be operated using the remote control key, keyless opening* with the door handle or the central locking button. in combination with power seat with memory buttons*. * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS In order that the panoramic roof and the sun blind can be operated, the car's electrical system must be in ignition position I or II. WARNING Children, other passengers or objects may be trapped by the moving parts. • • • • • Always operate the windows with caution. • • • Remove ice and snow before opening the panoramic roof. Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 219) • • Do not operate the panoramic roof if it has frozen closed. Locking and unlocking from inside the car (p. 245) Wind deflector Do not allow children to play with the controls. Never leave children alone in the car. Remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by setting the car's electrical system in ignition position 0, and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car. Never put an object or part of the body through the windows, even if the car's electrical system is fully disconnected. IMPORTANT • IMPORTANT Do not open the panoramic roof when load carriers are fitted. Do not place any heavy objects on the panoramic roof. The panorama roof has a wind deflector that is raised when the panorama roof is in the open position. Related information • • Operating the panorama roof* (p. 156) Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's* sun blind (p. 158) • Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds (p. 148) • Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 242) * Option/accessory. 155 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS Operating the panorama roof* The panoramic roof and sun blind are operated with a control in the roof panel and both are equipped with pinch protection. WARNING Children, other passengers or objects may be trapped by the moving parts. • • • • • Always operate the windows with caution. Do not allow children to play with the controls. Never leave children alone in the car. Remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by setting the car's electrical system in ignition position 0, and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car. Never put an object or part of the body through the windows, even if the car's electrical system is fully disconnected. IMPORTANT 4 156 • Do not open the panoramic roof when load carriers are fitted. • Do not place any heavy objects on the panoramic roof. IMPORTANT • Remove ice and snow before opening the panoramic roof. • Do not operate the panoramic roof if it has frozen closed. In order that the panoramic roof and the sun blind can be operated, the car's electrical system must be in ignition position I or II. It can also be operated using the remote control key, keyless opening* with the door handle or the central locking button. WARNING Check that children or other passengers are not at risk of crushing when all the windows are closed with: • • • The movement of the roof is stopped if the control is released during manual operation, or when the glass reaches the comfort position4 or the maximum opening or closing position. The movement of both panoramic roof and sun blind are also stopped if the roof control is operated again in the opposite direction to the current direction of movement. The panoramic roof and the sun blind are also equipped with pinch protection. NOTE For manual opening, the sun blind must be fully open before the panoramic roof can be opened. When the procedure is reversed, the panoramic roof must be fully closed before the sun blind can be fully closed. keyless closing* central locking button remote control key. IMPORTANT Check that the panoramic roof is properly closed when closing. Comfort position is a position where wind noise and resonance noise are at a comfortably low level while driving. * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS Open and close ventilation position Fully open and close the panoramic roof using the roof control Ventilation position, vertically at the rear edge. Open by pressing the control upward once. Close by pressing the control downward once. When the ventilation position is selected the front glass cover is raised at its rear edge. If the sun blind is fully closed when ventilation position is selected, then it opens automatically approx. 50 mm (approx. 2 inches). Operation, manual mode Operation, automatic mode Manual operation 1. To open the sun blind - press the control backwards to the position for manual opening. Automatic operation 1. Open the sun blind to maximum position press the control backward to the position for automatic opening and release. 2. Open the panoramic roof to comfort position - press the control backwards a second time to the position for automatic opening and release. 3. Open the panoramic roof to maximum position - press the control backwards a third time to the position for automatic opening and release. Close by repeating the preceding procedure in reverse order - press the control forward/downward to the automatic closing position instead. Automatic operation - rapid opening or closing The panoramic roof and sun blind can be opened or closed simultaneously: – To open - press the control rearward to the automatic operation position twice and release. To close - press the control forward/downward to the automatic operation position twice and release. 2. Open the panoramic roof to comfort position - press the control backwards a second time to the position for manual opening. – 3. Open the panoramic roof to maximum position - press the control backwards a third time to the position for manual opening. Related information The sun blind follows automatically if the panoramic roof is closed from ventilation position. Close by repeating the preceding procedure in reverse order - press the control forward/downward to the manual closing position instead. • • Panorama roof* (p. 154) Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's* sun blind (p. 158) }} * Option/accessory. 157 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS • • • • Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds (p. 148) Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's* sun blind • Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 242) With this function, the sun blind is closed automatically 15 minutes after the car has been locked if it is parked in hot weather. This is in order to lower the passenger compartment temperature and protect the car's upholstery from sun-fading. The function is deactivated when the car is supplied from the factory and can be activated or deactivated in the centre display. • • Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 219) Locking and unlocking from inside the car (p. 245) 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press My Car • Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds (p. 148) Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 242) Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 219) Locking and unlocking from inside the car (p. 245) Locking. Select Auto Close Sunroof Curtain to activate/deactivate. NOTE The sun blind is also closed when all windows are closed with: • • • keyless closing* central locking button remote control key. Related information • • 158 Panorama roof* (p. 154) Operating the panorama roof* (p. 156) * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS Using windscreen wipers Intermittent wiping The windscreen wiper cleans the windscreen. Different settings for the windscreen wiper are made with the right-hand steering wheel stalk switch. Set the number of sweeps per time unit with the thumbwheel when intermittent wiping is selected. Continuous wiping Raise the stalk switch for the wipers to sweep at normal speed. Raise the stalk switch further for the wipers to sweep at high speed. IMPORTANT • • Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 160) • Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 163) • • • • Filling washer fluid (p. 609) Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 161) Wiper blades in service position (p. 608) Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 607) Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 606) Before activating the wipers - ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any snow or ice on the windscreen and rear window is scraped away. Right-hand stalk switch. IMPORTANT Thumbwheel, used to set rain sensor sensitivity and wiper swipe frequency. Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers are cleaning the windscreen. The windscreen must be wet when the windscreen wipers are operating. Single sweep Lower the stalk switch and release to make one sweep. Windscreen wipers off Move the stalk switch to position 0 to switch off the windscreen wipers. Related information • • • Using the rain sensor (p. 160) Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 162) Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 164) * Option/accessory. 159 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* Using the rain sensor The washer nozzles are heated automatically in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid from freezing. The rain sensor automatically starts the windscreen wipers based on how much water it detects on the windscreen. Rain sensor sensitivity can be adjusted with the thumbwheel on the right-hand stalk switch. Related information • • Using the rain sensor (p. 160) Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 162) • Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 164) • Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 161) • Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 163) • • • • Filling washer fluid (p. 609) • Using windscreen wipers (p. 159) Wiper blades in service position (p. 608) Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 607) Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 606) Press the stalk switch down for the wipers to make an extra sweep. Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensitivity and downward for lower sensitivity. An extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned upward. Deactivating the rain sensor Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the rain or moving the stalk switch sensor button up to another wiper program. The rain sensor is deactivated automatically in ignition position 0 or when the engine is switched off. Right-hand stalk switch. Rain sensor button The rain sensor is deactivated automatically when wiper blades are set in service position. The rain sensor is reactivated when service mode has been deactivated. Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency When the rain sensor is activated, the rain sensor is shown in the driver display. symbol Activating the rain sensor When activating the rain sensor, the car must be running or the electrical system in ignition position I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk switch must be in position 0 or in the position for a single sweep. 160 Activate the rain sensor by pressing the rain sen. sor button IMPORTANT The windscreen wipers could start and be damaged in an automatic car wash. Deactivate the rain sensor while the car is running or when the car's electrical system is in ignition position I or II. The symbol in the driver display extinguishes. * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS Related information • Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 162) • Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 164) • • Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 160) • Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 163) • • • • Filling washer fluid (p. 609) • Using windscreen wipers (p. 159) Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 161) Wiper blades in service position (p. 608) Using the rain sensor's memory function The rain sensor automatically starts the windscreen wipers based on how much water it detects on the windscreen. Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 607) • Using windscreen wipers (p. 159) Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 606) Activating/deactivating the memory function The memory function for the rain sensor can be activated in such a way that the rain sensor button does not need to be depressed each time the car is started: 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press My Car 3. Select Rain Sensor Memory to activate/ deactivate the memory function. Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 607) Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 606) • • Wipers. Related information • • Using the rain sensor (p. 160) Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 162) • Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 164) • • Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 160) • • Filling washer fluid (p. 609) Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 163) Wiper blades in service position (p. 608) * Option/accessory. 161 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS Using windscreen and headlamp washers Windscreen and headlamp washers clean the windscreen and headlamps. Windscreen and headlamp washers are started using the righthand stalk switch. Starting windscreen and headlamp washers IMPORTANT Avoid activating the washer system when it is frozen or the washer reservoir is empty, otherwise there is a risk of damaging the pump. Headlamp washing* To save fluid, the headlamps are washed automatically at a defined interval when the headlamps are switched on. • • • • Filling washer fluid (p. 609) • Using windscreen wipers (p. 159) Wiper blades in service position (p. 608) Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 607) Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 606) Reduced washing If only approx. 1 litre (1 qt) of washer fluid remains in the reservoir and the message Washer fluid Level low, refill, together with the symbol, is shown in the driver display, then the supply of washer fluid to the headlamps is switched off. This is to prioritise cleaning the windscreen and the visibility through it. The headlamps are only washed if main or dipped beam is switched on. Washing function, right-hand stalk switch. – 162 Move the right-hand stalk switch toward the steering wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp washers. > The windscreen wipers will make several more sweeps once the stalk switch has been released. Related information • • Using the rain sensor (p. 160) Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 164) • • Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 160) • Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 163) Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 161) * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS Using the rear window wiper and washer Rear window wiper and washer clean the rear window. Washing/wiping is started and settings are changed by means of the right-hand steering wheel stalk switch. • • • Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 607) • Using windscreen wipers (p. 159) Wiper blades in service position (p. 608) Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 606) Activating the rear window wiper and washer NOTE The rear window wiper is equipped with overheating protection which means that the motor is switched off if it overheats. The rear window wiper works again after a coolingdown period. Select for intermittent wiping with the rear window wiper. – Select for continuous speed with the rear window wiper. Move the right-hand steering wheel stalk switch forward to start rear window washing and wiping. Related information • • Using the rain sensor (p. 160) Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 162) • Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 164) • • Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 160) • Filling washer fluid (p. 609) Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 161) * Option/accessory. 163 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen wipers are on initiates rear window wiping. The function stops when reverse gear is disengaged. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press My Car 3. Select Auto Rear Wiper to activate/deactivate wiping when reversing. Wipers. If the rear window wiper is already on at continuous speed, no change is made. Related information • • 164 Using the rain sensor (p. 160) Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 162) • • Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 160) • Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 163) • • • • Filling washer fluid (p. 609) • Using windscreen wipers (p. 159) Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 161) Wiper blades in service position (p. 608) Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 607) Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 606) * Option/accessory. SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL Manual front seat The car's front seats have different setting options for optimum seating comfort. Adjust the seat forward/backward by lifting the handle and adjusting the distance to the steering wheel and pedals. Check that the seat is locked after the position has been adjusted. 166 Storing memory function in power operated front seat* (p. 168) Change the backrest inclination by turning the control knob. • Using stored memory in a powered front seat (p. 169) • Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in the front seat* (p. 169) • Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 170) WARNING Adjust the position of the driver's seat before setting off, never while driving. Make sure that the seat is in locked position in order to avoid personal injury in the event of heavy braking or an accident. Raise/lower the front edge of the seat cushion* by pumping up/down1. 1 • You can manually adjust the height of the head restraints by pressing in the button. Change the length* of the seat cushion by pulling the lever up and moving the seat cushion forward/backward by hand. Change the lumbar support* by pressing the button upward/downward/forward/back. Raise/lower the seat by means of pumping the lever up/down. Related information • • Power front seat* (p. 167) Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 167) Only applies to the driver's seat. * Option/accessory. SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL Power front seat* The car's front seats have different setting options for optimum seating comfort. The power seat can be moved forwards/backwards and upwards/downwards, and the backrest inclination can be changed. The lumbar support can be adjusted upwards/downwards/forwards/ backwards. Seat cushion length is adjusted manually*. • Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 170) Adjusting the power front seat* Set to desired sitting position using the control on the front seat's seating section. Activate and use the lumbar support control by pressing the four-way button. The power seats have overload protection which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an object. If this happens, remove the object and then operate the seat again. The seat can be adjusted for a period of time after unlocking the door without the engine running. Seat adjustment can always be performed when the engine is running. Adjustment can also be performed for a period of time after the engine has been switched off. Related information • • • Manual front seat (p. 166) Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 167) Storing memory function in power operated front seat* (p. 168) • Using stored memory in a powered front seat (p. 169) • Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in the front seat* (p. 169) Activate and use the lumber support control by pressing the button upwards/downwards/ forwards/backwards. Raise/lower the seat cushion front edge by adjusting the control up/down. Raise/lower the seat by means of adjusting the control up/down. Move the seat forward/backward by adjusting the control forward/backward. Change the backrest inclination by adjusting the control forward/backward. Only one movement (forward/back/up/down) can be made at a time. }} * Option/accessory. 167 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL || The backrests of the front seats cannot be lowered fully forward. Storing memory function in power operated front seat* 3. The memory function stores settings for the seat and door mirrors*. It is possible to store two different settings with the memory function. The memory function's* keypad is located on the driver's door. Within three seconds, press and hold the 1 or 2 button. > When the position has been stored in the selected memory button an acoustic signal sounds and the light indicator in the M button extinguishes. If none of the memory buttons is depressed within three seconds then the M button extinguishes and no storing takes place. The seat must be adjusted again before a new memory can be set. Related information • • • • You can manually adjust the height of the head restraints by pressing in the button. Related information • • • 168 Manual front seat (p. 166) Power front seat* (p. 167) Button M for storing settings. Storing memory function in power operated front seat* (p. 168) • Using stored memory in a powered front seat (p. 169) • Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in the front seat* (p. 169) • Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 170) Memory button Memory button Manual front seat (p. 166) Power front seat* (p. 167) Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 167) Using stored memory in a powered front seat (p. 169) • Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in the front seat* (p. 169) • Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 170) Store setting 1. Adjust seat and door mirrors to the desired position. 2. Press and hold the M button depressed. The light indicator in the button illuminates. * Option/accessory. SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL Using stored memory in a powered front seat WARNING The memory function stores settings for the seat and the door mirrors*. Using a stored setting A stored setting can be used with the front door either open or closed: Open front door – Depress one of the memory buttons 1 or 2 with a short press. Seat and door mirrors move and then stop at the positions stored in the selected memory button. • Because the driver's seat can be adjusted with the ignition off, children should never be left unattended in the vehicle. • Movement of the seat can be STOPPED at any time by pressing any button on the power seat control panel. • • Do not adjust the seat while driving. Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in the front seat* For increased comfort, you can adjust the length of the seat cushion*. Adjusting the seat cushion Seat cushion length can be adjusted by using the control on the front of the seat. Make sure there is nothing under the seats when they are being adjusted. Related information Closed front door – Hold one of the memory buttons 1 or 2 depressed until seat and door mirrors stop in the positions that are stored in the selected memory button. • • • • If the memory button is released, the movement of the seat and door mirrors will be stopped. • Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in the front seat* (p. 169) • Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 170) Manual front seat (p. 166) Power front seat* (p. 167) Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 167) Storing memory function in power operated front seat* (p. 168) Control for seat cushion adjustment. 1. Grip the handle on the front of the seat and pull upwards. 2. Adjust the length of the seat cushion. 3. Release the handle and make sure that the seat cushion has reached the correct position. Related information • • Manual front seat (p. 166) Power front seat* (p. 167) }} * Option/accessory. 169 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL • • Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 167) • Using stored memory in a powered front seat (p. 169) • Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 170) Storing memory function in power operated front seat* (p. 168) Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat 2. Press the front section of the four-way button to increase lumbar support. To adjust lumbar support, the four-way control* on the seat can be used. 3. Press the rear section of the four-way button to decrease lumbar support. Related information • • • • Manual front seat (p. 166) Power front seat* (p. 167) Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 167) Storing memory function in power operated front seat* (p. 168) • Using stored memory in a powered front seat (p. 169) • Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in the front seat* (p. 169) Four-way control, located on the side of the seat's seating section. 4-way lumbar support provides options to adjust the lumbar support. Use it by pressing the fourway button located on the side of the seat's seating section. The lumbar support can be adjusted forwards/backwards and upwards/downwards. Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat To adjust the lumbar support: 1. 170 Press the four-way button (round) upwards/ downwards to move the lumbar support upwards/downwards. * Option/accessory. SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL Lowering the backrests in the rear seat The rear seat's backrest is divided into two parts. The two parts can be folded forward individually. IMPORTANT The armrest* for the centre seat must be raised before lowering the seat. If the car has private locking, the tailgate must be closed before lowering the seat. WARNING • Adjust the seat and fix it before driving away. Take care when adjusting the seat. Uncontrolled or careless adjustment can lead to trapping injuries. • When loading long objects, they must always be strapped in securely to avoid injury and damage during sudden braking. • Always switch off the engine and apply the parking brake when loading and unloading the car. • NOTE The front seats may need to be pushed forwards, and/or the backrests adjusted upwards, in order that the rear backrests can be fully folded forward. Lowering the backrest Car with electronic folding For cars with automatic gearbox, set the gear selector in P to prevent it from being moved by mistake. IMPORTANT There must be no objects on the rear seat when the backrest is to be folded down. The seat belts must not be connected either. Otherwise there is a risk of damaging the rear seat upholstery. cargo area. The backrests can also be lowered manually. WARNING Pay attention that people are not at risk of being trapped during the automatic folding of the rear seat. Since this takes place automatically on the press of a button, no one must be on or too close to the rear seat. To facilitate folding of the rear seat, the car must be stationary and the tailgate open. For electronically controlled folding of backrests: 1. Ensure that there are no occupants or objects in the rear seat. 2. Lower the centre seat's head restraint manually. 3. Hold the button for folding depressed. The buttons are marked L and R for left and right-hand backrest sections respectively. 4. The backrests are lowered automatically to horizontal position. The head restraints are also lowered automatically. To lower the backrest manually: If the car is equipped with electronic folding of the rear seat* there are buttons located in the }} * Option/accessory. 171 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL || WARNING Check that the backrests and head restraints in the rear seat are locked properly after being folded up. The head restraints of the outer seats must always be raised when there are passengers on any of the rear seats. Raising the backrest Raising the backrest to upright position is carried out manually: 1. Lower the centre head restraint manually 2. Pull the handles located in the car's left and right-hand rear seat backrests forward . 3. The backrest disengages from the lock and is automatically lowered to the horizontal position. Car without electronic folding The rear seat consists of two parts: • • 172 The right-hand seat and centre seat are folded as one unit. The left-hand seat is folded separately. . 1. Lower the centre head restraint manually 2. Pull the handles located in the car's left and right-hand rear seat backrests forward . 3. . The backrest disengages from the lock and needs to be lowered manually to the horizontal position. Raising takes place in reverse order. WARNING When the backrest has been raised, the red indicator should no longer be showing. If it is still showing then the backrest is not locked in place. 1. Move the backrest up/down manually. 2. Press the backrest until the lock engages. 3. The head restraint is raised manually. 4. If necessary, raise the centre seat's head restraint. Related information • Adjusting the head restraints in the rear seat (p. 173) SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL Adjusting the head restraints in the rear seat Electrical lowering of the rear seat's outer head restraints* Adjust the centre seat head restraint according to the height of the passenger. Fold down the outer seat head restraints* to improve rearward visibility. Adjust the centre seat head restraint according to the height of the passenger. Adjusting the head restraint, centre seat To lower the head restraint, the button (see illustration) must be depressed while the restraint is carefully moved down. WARNING The centre seat head restraint must be in its lowest position when the centre seat is not used. When the centre seat is used, the head restraint must be correctly adjusted to the height of the passenger so that it covers the whole of the back of the head if possible. The outer head restraints can be retracted via the centre display's function view. You can lower the head restraints in ignition position 0. The centre seat's head restraint must be adjusted according to the passenger's height so that, if possible, the whole of the back of the head is covered. Slide it up manually as required. }} * Option/accessory. 173 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL Press the Headrest Fold button to activate/deactivate lowering. || Steering wheel controls and horn Horn The steering wheel houses the horn and controls for e.g. the driver support systems and voice recognition. Move the head restraint back manually until a click is heard. WARNING Do not lower the outer head restraints if there are passengers in any of the outer rear seats. The horn is located in the centre of the steering wheel. WARNING The head restraint must be in locked position after being folded up. Related information • Lowering the backrests in the rear seat (p. 171) Related information Keypads and paddles* in the steering wheel. • • Steering lock (p. 175) Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 175) Controls for driver support systems2. Paddle shifter* for manual gear changing in an automatic gearbox. Controls for voice recognition and menu, message and phone handling. 2 174 Speed Limiter*, Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control*, Distance Warning* and Pilot Assist*. * Option/accessory. SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL Steering lock Adjusting the steering wheel The steering lock makes steering difficult if the car is e.g. taken unlawfully. A mechanical noise can be perceived when the steering lock locks or unlocks. The steering wheel can be adjusted in different positions. Activating the steering lock The steering lock is activated when the car is locked from the outside and the engine is switched off. If the car is left unlocked then the steering lock will lock automatically after a while. Deactivating the steering lock The steering lock is deactivated when the car is unlocked from outside. If the car is not locked, the steering lock will deactivate if the remote control key is inside the passenger compartment and the car is started by turning the start knob clockwise to unlock the steering lock. Related information • • Steering wheel controls and horn (p. 174) Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 175) Lever for steering wheel adjustment. The steering wheel can be adjusted for height and for depth. WARNING Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before driving away. The steering wheel must never be adjusted while driving. With speed related power steering the level of steering force can be adjusted. Steering force is regulated according to the car's speed in order to give the driver enhanced road responsiveness. 1. Push the lever forwards to release the steering wheel. 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that suits you. 3. Pull the lever back to fix the steering wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the steering wheel lightly at the same time as you move the lever back. Related information • • Steering lock (p. 175) Steering wheel controls and horn (p. 174) 175 CLIMATE CLIMATE Climate Climate zones The car is equipped with manual or electronic* climate control. The climate control system cools or heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger compartment. All climate control system functions are controlled from the centre display and physical buttons in the centre console. The number of climate zones that the car is divided into governs the options for setting different temperatures for different parts of the passenger compartment. 2-zone climate* 1-zone climate Some functions for the rear seat can also be controlled from the climate controls* at the rear of the tunnel console. Related information • • • • • • • • • 178 Climate zones (p. 178) Climate zones with 2-zone climate. Climate control - sensors (p. 179) With 2-zone climate, the temperature in the passenger compartment can be set separately for the left and right-hand sides. Perceived temperature (p. 179) Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 180) Parking climate* (p. 203) Heater* (p. 211) Air quality (p. 181) Climate zones with 1-zone climate. Related information • Climate (p. 178) With 1-zone climate, the temperature in the passenger compartment is set jointly for the left and right-hand sides. Air distribution (p. 184) Climate controls (p. 190) * Option/accessory. CLIMATE Climate control - sensors The climate control system has a number of sensors to help control the climate in the car. With the Interior Air Quality System* there is also an air quality sensor that is fitted into the climate control system air intake. Sensor location Related information Moisture sensor - in the casing by the interior rearview mirror. Outside temperature sensor - in the righthand door mirror. • • Climate (p. 178) Interior Air Quality System* (p. 182) Perceived temperature The climate control system regulates the climate in the passenger compartment based on the perceived temperature, not on actual temperature. The temperature you select in the passenger compartment corresponds to the physically perceived temperature as affected by factors such as the ambient temperature, air speed, humidity, solar radiation, etc. in and around the car at the time. The system includes a sun sensor which detects on which side the sun is shining into the passenger compartment. This means that the temperature can differ between the right and left-hand side's air vents despite the controls being set for the same temperature on both sides. Related information • Climate (p. 178) Sun sensor - on the upper side of the instrument panel. Temperature sensor for the passenger compartment - by the physical buttons in the centre console. NOTE Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects. * Option/accessory. 179 CLIMATE Controlling climate control with voice recognition1 • "Air condition on"/"Air condition off" activates/deactivates the air conditioning. Voice recognition commands for the climate control system to e.g. change temperature, activate a heated seat* or change fan level. Press and say one of the following commands: • "Recirculation on"/"Recirculation off" activates/deactivates the air circulation. • "Turn on defroster "/"Turn off defroster" - activates/deactivates defrosting of windows and door mirrors. • • "Turn on max defroster"/"Turn max defroster off" - activates/deactivates the max defroster. • "Set temperature to X degrees" - sets the desired temperature. • • "Raise temperature"/"Lower temperature" - raise/lower the temperature setting one step. "Turn on electric defroster"/"Turn off electric defroster" - activates/deactivates the heated windscreen*. • • "Sync temperature" - synchronises the temperature for all climate zones in the car with the temperature set for the driver's side. "Turn on rear defroster"/"Turn off rear defroster" - activates/deactivates the heated rear window and door mirrors. • • "Air on feet"/"Air on body" - opens the desired air flow. "Turn steering wheel heat on"/"Turn steering wheel heat off" - activates/deactivates the heated steering wheel*. • "Air on feet off"/"Air on body off" - closes the desired air flow. • • "Set fan to max"/"Turn off fan" - changes the air flow to Max/Off. "Raise steering wheel heat"/"Lower steering wheel heat" - raises/lowers the setting for the heated steering wheel* one step. • "Raise fan speed"/"Lower fan speed" raises/lowers the fan level one step. • "Turn on seat heat"/"Turn off seat heat" - activates/deactivates the heated seat*. • "Turn on auto" - activates automatic climate regulation. • "Raise seat heat"/"Lower seat heat" raises/lowers the setting for the heated seat* one step. 1 180 "Climate" - starts a dialogue for climate control and shows examples of commands. • "Turn on seat ventilation"/"Turn off seat ventilation" - activates/deactivates the seat ventilation*. • "Raise seat ventilation"/"Lower seat ventilation" - raises/lowers the setting for the ventilated seat* one step. Related information • • • • Climate (p. 178) Voice recognition (p. 128) Using voice recognition (p. 129) Settings for voice recognition (p. 131) Applies to certain markets. * Option/accessory. CLIMATE Air quality The materials selected for the passenger compartment and the air cleaning system ensure that the air quality in the passenger compartment is high. • • • Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 182) Clean Zone* Interior Air Quality System* (p. 182) The Clean Zone function checks and indicates whether or not all conditions have been met for good air quality in the passenger compartment. Passenger compartment filter (p. 183) Materials in the passenger compartment The interior of the passenger compartment is designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even for people with contact allergies and for asthma sufferers. Tested materials have been developed in order to minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger compartment and to contribute to making the passenger compartment easier to keep clean. The carpets in both the passenger compartment and the cargo area are removable and easy to remove and clean. Use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo to clean the interior. Air cleaning system In addition to the passenger compartment filter, Clean Zone Interior Package* and the Interior Air Quality System* also help to maintain high air quality in the passenger compartment. Related information • • Climate (p. 178) Clean Zone* (p. 181) The indicator is visible in the climate view in the centre display. The indicator is visible in the climate row when the climate view is not open. If the conditions have not been met then the Clean Zone text is white. When all conditions have been met, this is indicated by the text changing colour to blue. Conditions that are checked: • • That all doors and the tailgate are closed. • That the air quality system Interior Air Quality System* is activated. That all side windows and the panorama roof* are closed. }} * Option/accessory. 181 CLIMATE || • • That the ventilation fan is activated. Clean Zone Interior Package* Interior Air Quality System* That the air recirculation is deactivated. Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) comprises a series of modifications that keep the passenger compartment even clearer from allergy and asthma-inducing substances. Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) is a fully automatic air quality system that separates gases and particles to reduce the levels of odours and contaminants in the passenger compartment. IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) and cleans the air in the passenger compartment from contaminants such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and groundlevel ozone. NOTE Clean Zone does not indicate that the air quality is good. It only indicates that the conditions for good air quality have been met. The following is included: • Related information • • • • Air quality (p. 181) Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 182) Interior Air Quality System* (p. 182) Passenger compartment filter (p. 183) • An enhanced fan function that means that the fan starts when the car is unlocked with the remote control key. The fan fills the passenger compartment with fresh air. The function starts when required and is disengaged automatically after a time or when one of the passenger compartment doors is opened. The amount of time the fan runs is reduced gradually due to reduced need up until the car is 4 years old. If the air quality sensor senses that the outside air is contaminated, the air intake is closed and air recirculation is activated. NOTE The air quality sensor must always be enabled to ensure the best air in the passenger compartment. The fully automatic air quality system Interior Air Quality System (IAQS). In a cold climate recirculation is limited so as to prevent misting. Related information • • • • Air quality (p. 181) In the event of misting, the defrost functions for windscreen, side windows and rear window should be used. Clean Zone* (p. 181) Interior Air Quality System* (p. 182) Passenger compartment filter (p. 183) Related information 182 • Activating and deactivating the air quality sensor* (p. 183) • • Air quality (p. 181) Clean Zone* (p. 181) * Option/accessory. CLIMATE • • Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 182) Passenger compartment filter (p. 183) Activating and deactivating the air quality sensor* The air quality sensor is part of the fully automatic air quality system Interior Air Quality System (IAQS). It is possible to set whether the air quality sensor should be activated/deactivated. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press Climate. 3. Select Air Quality Sensor to activate/deactivate the air quality sensor. Passenger compartment filter All air entering the car's passenger compartment is cleaned with a filter. Replacing the passenger compartment filter To maintain high climate system performance, the filter must be changed at regular intervals. Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the recommended replacement intervals. If the car is used in a severely contaminated environment, it may be necessary to replace the filter more often. NOTE Related information • There are different types of passenger compartment filter. Make sure that the correct filter is fitted. Interior Air Quality System* (p. 182) Related information • • • • Air quality (p. 181) Clean Zone* (p. 181) Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 182) Interior Air Quality System* (p. 182) * Option/accessory. 183 CLIMATE • Air distribution Table of air distribution options (p. 187) The climate control system distributes the incoming air via a number of different vents in the passenger compartment. Automatic and manual air distribution With auto-regulated climate control2 running the air distribution takes place automatically. If necessary, the air distribution can be controlled manually. Adjustable air vents Some of the air vents in the car are adjustable, which means that you can open/close the vent to aim the air flow. Location of adjustable air vents in the passenger compartment. With 1-zone climate - four on the instrument panel. Addition with 2-zone climate* - two at the rear of the tunnel console. NOTE At low ambient temperatures, no air is distributed from the adjustable air vents on the rear of the tunnel console. Related information • • • 2 184 Climate (p. 178) Changing air distribution (p. 185) Opening, closing and aiming the air vents (p. 185) Not available with manual climate control. * Option/accessory. CLIMATE Changing air distribution The air distribution can be changed manually if required. Related information • • Air distribution (p. 184) • Table of air distribution options (p. 187) Opening, closing and aiming the air vents (p. 185) Opening, closing and aiming the air vents Some air vents in the passenger compartment can be opened, closed and aimed individually. If the car's outer vents are aimed at the side windows then misting can be eliminated. If the car's outer vents are aimed inwards then, in a hot climate, a comfortable environment is obtained in the passenger compartment. Opening and closing the air vents The air distribution buttons in the climate view. Air distribution - windscreen defroster vents Air distribution - air vents in instrument panel and centre console Air distribution - air vents in the floor 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. 2. Press one or more of the air distribution buttons in order to open/close the corresponding air flow. > The air distribution is changed and the buttons illuminate/extinguish. 3 The illustration is schematic - nozzle design varies depending on location. Air vent knob3. – Turn the knob in order to open/close the air flow from the vent. The air flow is at maximum when the marking on the knob is in vertical position. }} 185 CLIMATE || Aiming the air vents The air vent's lever3. – Move the lever sideways/vertically in order to aim the air flow from the nozzle. Related information • • • 3 186 Air distribution (p. 184) Changing air distribution (p. 185) Table of air distribution options (p. 187) The illustration is schematic - nozzle design varies depending on location. CLIMATE Table of air distribution options The air distribution can be changed manually if required. The following options are available for setting. Air distribution Purpose If all air distribution buttons are deselected in manual mode, the climate control system returns to automatically regulated climate control. With manual climate control it is not possible to deselect all air distribution buttons. Main air flow from the defroster vents. Some air flows from other air vents. Counteracts misting and icing in a cold and humid climate (to achieve this, fan level must not be low). Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel. Some air flows from other air vents. Provides efficient cooling in a hot climate. Main air flow from the air vents at the floor. Some air flows from other air vents. Provides heat or cooling to the floor. }} 187 CLIMATE || 188 Air distribution Purpose Main air from the defroster vents and air vents in the instrument panel. Some air flows from other air vents. Provides good comfort in hot and dry climates. Main air flow from the defroster vents and air vents at the floor. Some air flows from other air vents. Provides good comfort and good demisting in a cold or humid climate. Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel and air vents at the floor. Some air flows from other air vents. Provides good comfort in sunny weather with cool outdoor temperatures. Main air flow from the defroster vents, from the air vents in the instrument panel and air vents at the floor. Gives balanced comfort in the passenger compartment. CLIMATE Related information • • Air distribution (p. 184) • Changing air distribution (p. 185) Opening, closing and aiming the air vents (p. 185) 189 CLIMATE Climate controls The climate control system's functions are controlled from physical buttons in the centre console, the centre display and the climate controls at the rear of the tunnel console*. Physical buttons in centre console Climate row with 2-zone climate. Climate row with 1zone climate has some differences regarding the location of the controls. Temperature controls for driver and passenger side4. Button for heated windscreen* and max defroster. Button for heated rear window and door mirrors. Button for access to the climate view. The graphic on the button shows activated climate settings. Climate row in centre display Climate view in centre display The most common climate functions can be regulated from the climate row. Main climate In addition to the climate row's functions, other main climate functions can also be controlled in the Main climate tab. 4 5 190 Controls for heated* and ventilated* driver and front passenger seat, as well as heated steering wheel*5. Max, Electric, Rear - Controls for defrosting the windows and door mirrors. AC - Controls for air conditioning. Recirc - Controls for air recirculation. Controls for air distribution. With 1-zone climate, the control is to the right of the centre button. With manual climate control, the set temperature is not shown, simply a scale. With 1-zone climate, the buttons are located to the far left and right in the climate row. * Option/accessory. CLIMATE Fan control for front seat (with 2-zone climate, the control is shared with the rear seat). AUTO - Auto regulating the climate6. Parking climate* The car's parking climate control can be regulated in the Parking climate tab. Climate controls at rear of tunnel console* If the car is equipped with heated rear seats* there are physical buttons at the rear of the tunnel console for controlling them. • Activating and deactivating max defroster (p. 196) Activating and deactivating heated front seat* • Activating and deactivating the heated windscreen* (p. 198) • Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors (p. 199) The seats can be heated in order to increase comfort for driver and passengers when it is cold. • • • Regulating fan level for front seat (p. 200) Synchronising temperature (p. 202) Activating and deactivating air conditioning (p. 202) Related information • • Climate (p. 178) Activating and deactivating heated front seat* (p. 191) • Activating and deactivating heated rear seat* (p. 192) • Activating and deactivating ventilated front seat* (p. 193) • Activating and deactivating the heated steering wheel* (p. 194) • • Activating auto climate control (p. 195) 6 7 Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row7. 1. Press the left or right-hand side's steering wheel and seat button in the climate row in the centre display in order to open the controls for seat and steering wheel. If the car is not equipped with ventilated seats or heated steering wheel, the button for heated seats is immediately available in the climate row. Activating and deactivating air recirculation (p. 195) Not available with manual climate control. With 1-zone climate, the buttons are located to the far left and right in the climate row. }} * Option/accessory. 191 CLIMATE || 2. Repeatedly press the button for heated seats in order to change between the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low. > The level changes and the button shows the set level. WARNING Heated seats must not be used by people who find it difficult to perceive an increase in temperature due to a lack of sensation or who otherwise have problems operating the controls for the heated seats. Otherwise they may suffer burn injuries. Related information • • Climate controls (p. 190) Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated front seat* Activating and deactivating heated rear seat* The seats can be heated in order to increase comfort for driver and passengers when it is cold. It is possible to set whether automatic start of heated seats should be activated/deactivated when the engine is started. With automatic start activated, heating will start in the event of low ambient temperature. The seats can be heated in order to increase comfort for driver and passengers when it is cold. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press Climate. 3. Select Auto Driver Seat Heating Level and Auto Passenger Seat Heating Level to activate/deactivate automatic start of heated driver's and passenger seat. 4. Select Low, Medium or High to select level after the function has been activated. Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated front seat* (p. 192) Related information • • 192 Climate controls (p. 190) Activating and deactivating heated front seat* (p. 191) Activating and deactivating the heated rear seat from the rear seat Buttons for heated seats at the rear of the tunnel console. – Press repeatedly on the left or right-hand side's physical buttons for heated seats at the rear of the tunnel console to switch between the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low. > The level changes and the LEDs in the button show the set level. * Option/accessory. CLIMATE WARNING Heated seats must not be used by people who find it difficult to perceive an increase in temperature due to a lack of sensation or who otherwise have problems operating the controls for the heated seats. Otherwise they may suffer burn injuries. Related information • Climate controls (p. 190) Activating and deactivating ventilated front seat* The seats can be ventilated to provide increased comfort in a hot climate, for example. The ventilation system consists of fans in the seats and backrests that draw air through the seat upholstery. The cooling effect increases the cooler the passenger compartment air becomes. The system can be activated when the engine is running. Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row8. 1. Press the left or right-hand side's steering wheel and seat button in the climate row in the centre display in order to open the controls for seat and steering wheel. If the car is not equipped with heated seats or heated steering wheel, the button for ventilated seats is immediately available in the climate row. 2. Repeatedly press the button for ventilated seats in order to change between the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low. > The level changes and the button shows the set level. Related information • 8 Climate controls (p. 190) With 1-zone climate, the buttons are located to the far left and right in the climate row. * Option/accessory. 193 CLIMATE Activating and deactivating the heated steering wheel* 2. The steering wheel can be heated in order to increase comfort for the driver when it is cold. Repeatedly press the button for heated steering wheel in order to change between the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low. > The level changes and the button shows the set level. Related information • • Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate 1. Climate controls (p. 190) Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated steering wheel* (p. 194) 194 The steering wheel can be heated in order to increase comfort for the driver when it is cold. It is possible to set whether automatic start of heated steering wheel should be activated/deactivated when the engine is started. With automatic start activated, heating will start in the event of low ambient temperature. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press Climate. 3. Select Auto Steering Wheel Heating Level to activate/deactivate automatic start of heated steering wheel. 4. Select Low, Medium or High to select level after the function has been activated. row9. Press the driver's side steering wheel and seat button in the climate row of the centre display in order to open the controls for seat and steering wheel. If the car is not equipped with heated seats or ventilated seats, the button for heated steering wheel is immediately available in the climate row. 9 Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated steering wheel* Related information • Activating and deactivating the heated steering wheel* (p. 194) With 1-zone climate, the buttons are located to the far left and right in the climate row. * Option/accessory. CLIMATE Activating auto climate control10 NOTE With auto climate control activated, multiple climate functions are controlled automatically. Temperature and fan speed can be changed without deactivating the automatically-regulated climate control system. The automaticallyregulated climate control system is deactivated when the air distribution is changed manually or when maximum defroster is activated. Activating and deactivating air recirculation Air recirculation shuts out bad air, exhaust gases, etc. from outside the car by the climate control system reusing the air in the passenger compartment. Related information • Climate controls (p. 190) Auto-regulation button in the climate view. 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. 2. Give a short or long press on AUTO. The air recirculation button in the climate view. • 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. 2. Press Recirc. > Air recirculation is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes. Short press - air recirculation, air conditioning and air distribution are controlled automatically. • Long press - air recirculation, air conditioning and air distribution are controlled automatically, temperature and fan speed are changed to standard settings: 22 °C (72 °F) and level 3. > Auto-regulation of the climate is activated and the button illuminates. 10 Not available with manual climate control. IMPORTANT If the air in the car is recirculated for too long then there is a risk of misting on the insides of the windows. }} 195 CLIMATE || NOTE It is not possible to activate air recirculation when max defroster is activated. Related information • • Climate controls (p. 190) Activating and deactivating time setting for air recirculation (p. 196) Activating and deactivating time setting for air recirculation Activating and deactivating max defroster Air recirculation shuts out bad air, exhaust gases, etc. from outside the car by the climate control system reusing the air in the passenger compartment. It is possible set whether the air recirculation timer should be activated/deactivated. When the timer is activated, air recirculation is automatically switched off after 20 minutes. Max defroster is used to quickly remove mist and ice from windows. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press Climate. 3. Select Recirculation Timer to activate/ deactivate the air recirculation timer. Activating and deactivating max defroster from centre console There is a physical button in the centre console for quick access to max defroster. With heated windscreen* the max defroster can only be activated individually from the climate view in the centre display. Related information • Activating and deactivating air recirculation (p. 195) Physical button in the centre console. Cars without heated windscreen: – 196 Press the button. > Max defroster is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes. * Option/accessory. CLIMATE Cars with heated windscreen: – Press the button repeatedly in order to switch between the three levels: • • Activating and deactivating max defroster from centre display Related information • Climate controls (p. 190) Activated heated windscreen Activated heated windscreen and max defroster • Deactivated. > Heated windscreen and max defroster are activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes. NOTE Max defroster starts with a certain delay in order to avoid a short increase in fan level if the heated windscreen is deactivated by two quick presses of the button. Max defroster button in the climate view. 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. 2. Press Max. > Max defroster is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes. Max defroster deactivates auto-regulation of the climate and air recirculation, activates air conditioning and changes the fan level to 5 and the temperature to HI. When max defroster is deactivated, the climate control system returns to the previous settings. NOTE Changing the fan level to 5 increases the noise level. 197 CLIMATE Activating and deactivating the heated windscreen* Activating and deactivating heated windscreen from centre display NOTE The heated windscreen may affect the performance of transponders and other communication equipment. A heated windscreen is used to quickly remove mist and ice from the window. Activating and deactivating heated windscreen from centre console NOTE In the centre console is a physical button for rapid access to the heated windscreen. If the heated windscreen is activated when the Start/Stop function has auto-stopped the engine then the engine will be restarted. Related information The button for heated windscreen in the climate view. Physical button in the centre console. – Press the button repeatedly in order to switch between the three levels: • • Activated heated windscreen Activated heated windscreen and max defroster 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. 2. Press Electric. > Heated windscreen is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes. • • Climate controls (p. 190) Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated windscreen* (p. 199) NOTE A triangular area at the end of each side of the windscreen is not electrically heated, where de-icing may take longer. • Deactivated. > Heated windscreen and max defroster are activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes. 198 * Option/accessory. CLIMATE Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated windscreen* Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors A heated windscreen is used to quickly remove mist and ice from the window. It is possible to set whether automatic start of heated windscreen should be activated/deactivated when the engine is started. With automatic start activated, heating will start when there is a risk of ice or misting on the windscreen/window. The heating switches off automatically when the windscreen/window is sufficiently warm and the ice or misting is gone. The heated rear window and door mirrors are used to quickly remove mist and ice from the windows and mirrors. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press Climate. 3. Select Auto Front Defroster to activate/ deactivate automatic start of heated windscreen. Activating and deactivating heated rear window and door mirrors from centre display Activating and deactivating heated rear window and door mirrors from centre console In the centre console is a physical button for rapid access to the heated rear window and door mirrors. The button for heated rear window and door mirrors in the climate view. 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. 2. Press Rear. > Heated rear window and door mirrors are activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes. Related information • Activating and deactivating the heated windscreen* (p. 198) Related information Physical button in the centre console. – Press the button. > Heated rear window and door mirrors are activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes. • • Climate controls (p. 190) Activating and deactivating automatic starting of the heated rear window and door mirrors (p. 200) * Option/accessory. 199 CLIMATE Activating and deactivating automatic starting of the heated rear window and door mirrors Regulating fan level for front seat11 The heated rear window and door mirrors are used to quickly remove mist and ice from the windows and mirrors. It is possible to set whether automatic start of heated rear window and door mirrors should be activated/deactivated when the engine is started. With automatic start activated, heating will start when there is a risk of ice or misting on the windscreen/window. The heating switches off automatically when the windscreen/window is sufficiently warm and the ice or misting is gone. Fan control buttons in the climate view. 2. Press Climate. 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. 3. Select Auto Rear Defroster to activate/ deactivate automatic start of heated rear window and door mirrors. 2. Tap on the desired fan level, Off, 1-5 or Max. > Fan level is changed and the buttons for the selected level illuminate. 11 12 13 200 • Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. • Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors (p. 199) For 2-zone climate, also rear seat. Only with electronic climate control. Only with electronic climate control. The climate control system automatically adjusts the air flow within the selected fan level based on requirements. This means that the fan speed may change even though the fan level is the same.13 Related information 1. Related information NOTE The fan can be set to several different automatically controlled12 fan speeds for the front seat. IMPORTANT If the fan is fully switched off then the air conditioning is not engaged, which results in a risk of misting on the insides of the windows. Climate controls (p. 190) CLIMATE Regulating temperature for front seat14 Related information • Climate controls (p. 190) The temperature can be set to the desired number of degrees15 for the front seat's climate zones. Temperature control17, 15. 2. Regulate the temperature by either of the following: • Temperature buttons in the climate 1. row16, 15. Press the left or right-hand side temperature button in the centre display's climate row to open the controls. drag the control to the desired temperature, or • press +/− to raise/lower the temperature gradually. > The temperature changes and the button shows the set temperature15. NOTE Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by selecting a higher or lower temperature than the actual desired temperature. 14 15 16 17 For 2-zone climate, also rear seat. With manual climate control, the set degrees are not shown, simply a scale. With 1-zone climate, the temperature button is to the right of the centre button. With 1-zone climate, the control is horizontal instead of vertical. 201 CLIMATE Synchronising temperature18 The temperature in the car's different climate zones can be synchronised with the temperature set on the driver's side. Synchronisation button on the driver's side temperature controls. 1. Press the driver's side temperature button in the centre display's climate row in order to open the controls. 2. Press Synchronise temperature. > The temperature for all zones in the car is synchronised with the temperature set for the driver's side and the synchronisation symbol is shown adjacent to the temperature button. The synchronisation is stopped by means of a further press on Synchronise temperature or 18 202 Not available with 1-zone climate. by means of changing the temperature settings for a climate zone other than the driver's. Activating and deactivating air conditioning Related information The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies incoming air as required. • Climate controls (p. 190) The air conditioning button in the climate view. 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. 2. Press AC. > The air conditioning is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes. When the air conditioning is activated, the climate control system automatically controls starting and switching off as required. CLIMATE NOTE Close all side windows and the panoramic roof* for air conditioning to work optimally. Parking climate* The climate of the car's passenger compartment can be preconditioned or maintained while the car is parked. • • Climate comfort when parking* (p. 208) Symbols and messages for parking climate control* (p. 210) NOTE It is not possible to activate the air conditioning when the fan control is in Off position. Related information • Climate controls (p. 190) Preconditioning and climate comfort retention are controlled from the Parking climate tab in the centre display's climate view. Related information • • Climate (p. 178) Preconditioning* (p. 204) * Option/accessory. 203 CLIMATE Preconditioning* Starting/stopping preconditioning* Preconditioning of the car before driving can reduce wear and energy needs during a journey. Preconditioning can use direct start or be set via the timer. Preconditioning warms the passenger compartment and engine or airs the passenger compartment before driving. The function can use direct start from the centre display or a mobile phone. The function utilises several systems in different cases: • The parking heater*, in a cold climate, warms up both the passenger compartment and the engine. • When it is warm, the ventilation cools the passenger compartment by blowing in air from outside the car. Starting/stopping from the centre display NOTE During preconditioning of the passenger compartment, the car works to reach comfort temperature and not the temperature set in the climate control system. Related information • • • 204 Preconditioning button in the Parking climate tab in the climate view. 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. Starting/stopping preconditioning* (p. 204) 2. Select the Parking climate tab. Preconditioning time setting* (p. 205) 3. Press Preconditioning. > Preconditioning is started/switched off and the button is illuminated/extinguished. Parking climate* (p. 203) NOTE The car's doors and windows should be closed during the preconditioning of the passenger compartment. WARNING Do not use preconditioning if the car is equipped with a heater*: • In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater starts. • In locations with combustible or flammable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite. • When there is a risk that the heater’s exhaust line may be blocked. For example, deep snow under the front part of the car can obstruct the heater’s ventilation. Remember that the preconditioning can be started by a timer that has been set for a long time in advance. Starting from the app* Start of preconditioning and information about the selected settings can be managed from a device that has the Volvo On Call* app. Preconditioning heats the passenger compartment to a comfortable temperature or ventilates the passenger compartment by blowing in air from outside. * Option/accessory. CLIMATE The passenger compartment can also be preconditioned with the car remote start function (Engine Remote Start - ERS)19 via the Volvo On Call* app. Related information • • • Parking climate* (p. 203) Preconditioning* (p. 204) Preconditioning time setting* (p. 205) Preconditioning time setting* The timer can be set so that the preconditioning is finished at a predetermined time. The timer can handle up to 8 different settings for: • • Adding and editing time setting for preconditioning* The timer for preconditioning can manage up to 8 time settings. Adding a time setting A time on a single date A time on one or more days of the week, with or without repetition. Related information • • 19 Certain markets. Preconditioning* (p. 204) Adding and editing time setting for preconditioning* (p. 205) • Activating and deactivating time setting for preconditioning* (p. 207) • Removing time setting for preconditioning* (p. 207) The button to add a time setting in the Parking climate tab in the climate view. 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. 2. Select the Parking climate tab. }} * Option/accessory. 205 CLIMATE || 3. Press Add timer. > A pop-up window is shown. WARNING Do not use preconditioning if the car is equipped with a heater*: NOTE It is not possible to add a time setting if there already are 8 settings entered for the timer. Delete a time setting in order to be able to add a new one. 4. Tap on Date to set the time for a single date. • In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater starts. • In locations with combustible or flammable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite. • When there is a risk that the heater’s exhaust line may be blocked. For example, deep snow under the front part of the car can obstruct the heater’s ventilation. Tap on Days to set the time for one or more days of the week. 6. 7. 206 With Date: Select the date for preconditioning by scrolling the date list with the arrows. Editing a time setting 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. With Days: Select the days of the week for preconditioning by tapping on the buttons for the days of the week. 2. Select the Parking climate tab. 3. Press the time setting that is to be changed. > A pop-up window is shown. 4. Edit the time setting in the same way as described in "Adding a time setting" above. Set the time when the preconditioning should be finished by scrolling with the arrows. Tap on Confirm in order to add the time setting. > The time setting is added to the list and is activated. Removing time setting for preconditioning* (p. 207) Remember that the preconditioning can be started by a timer that has been set for a long time in advance. With Days: Activate/deactivate repetition by ticking/unticking the box for Repeat weekly. 5. • Related information • • • Preconditioning* (p. 204) Preconditioning time setting* (p. 205) Activating and deactivating time setting for preconditioning* (p. 207) * Option/accessory. CLIMATE Activating and deactivating time setting for preconditioning* WARNING Do not use preconditioning if the car is equipped with a heater*: A time setting in the timer for preconditioning can be activated or deactivated based on need. • In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater starts. • In locations with combustible or flammable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite. • When there is a risk that the heater’s exhaust line may be blocked. For example, deep snow under the front part of the car can obstruct the heater’s ventilation. Remember that the preconditioning can be started by a timer that has been set for a long time in advance. The timer buttons in the Parking climate tab in the climate view. 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. 2. Select the Parking climate tab. 3. Activate/deactivate a time setting by tapping on the timer button to the right of the setting. > The time setting is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes. Removing time setting for preconditioning* The button for editing the list/deleting the time setting in the tab Parking climate in the climate view. 1. Related information • • • • Preconditioning* (p. 204) Preconditioning time setting* (p. 205) Adding and editing time setting for preconditioning* (p. 205) Removing time setting for preconditioning* (p. 207) Open the climate view in the centre display. 2. Select the Parking climate tab. 3. Press Edit list. 4. Press the delete icon to the right in the list. > The icon changes to the text Delete. 5. Press Delete to confirm. > The time setting is removed from the list. Related information • • Preconditioning* (p. 204) Preconditioning time setting* (p. 205) }} * Option/accessory. 207 CLIMATE • • Adding and editing time setting for preconditioning* (p. 205) Activating and deactivating time setting for preconditioning* (p. 207) Climate comfort when parking* The climate in the car's passenger compartment can be maintained while the car is parked, e.g. if the engine needs to be switched off but the driver or passenger(s) wants to remain in the car and maintain the level of climate comfort. Starting climate comfort retention is only possible via direct start. Starting and switching off climate comfort when parking* Climate comfort retention maintains the climate in the passenger compartment after driving. The function can use direct start from the centre display. The function utilises several systems in different cases: • Residual heat from the engine, in a cold climate, heats the passenger compartment to comfort temperature. • When it is warm, the ventilation cools the passenger compartment by blowing in air from outside the car. NOTE Climate comfort retention is switched off when the car is locked from the outside to avoid using residual heat unnecessarily. Use of the function is intended to maintain climate comfort when driver or passengers remain inside the car. Related information • • 208 Button for climate comfort retention in the Parking climate tab in the climate view. 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. 2. Select the Parking climate tab. 3. Press Keep climate comfort. > Climate comfort retention is started/ switched off and the button illuminates/ extinguishes. Parking climate* (p. 203) Starting and switching off climate comfort when parking* (p. 208) * Option/accessory. CLIMATE NOTE It is not possible to start climate comfort retention if there is not enough residual heat in the engine to maintain the passenger compartment climate, or if the outside temperature is above approx. 20°C (68°F). NOTE Climate comfort retention is switched off when the car is locked from the outside to avoid using residual heat unnecessarily. Use of the function is intended to maintain climate comfort when driver or passengers remain inside the car. Related information • Climate comfort when parking* (p. 208) * Option/accessory. 209 CLIMATE Symbols and messages for parking climate control* A number of symbols and messages regarding parking climate control can be shown in the driver display. Symbol This symbol illuminates in the driver display when the parking heater is active. Message Specification Parking climate Parking climate control is disengaged. Contact a workshopA to check the function as soon as possible. Service required Parking climate Temporarily unavailable Parking climate Unavailable Fuel level too low Parking climate Unavailable Charge level too low A Parking climate control is temporarily disengaged. If the problem persists for some time, contact a workshopA to check the function. Parking climate control cannot be activated when the fuel level is too low to start the parking heater*. Filling the vehicle's normal fuel tank. Parking climate control cannot be activated if the charge level of the starter battery is too low to start the parking heater*. Charging the battery. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • 210 Parking climate* (p. 203) * Option/accessory. CLIMATE Heater* The heater helps the engine and passenger compartment reach the correct temperature before and during driving. The heater has two subfunctions: • • Parking heater - heats the engine and passenger compartment, if necessary, when the parking climate control's preconditioning* is activated. NOTE NOTE Make sure that there is enough charge in the battery if the heater needs to be used. Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's normal fuel tank if the heater needs to be used. Fuel and refuelling WARNING Fuel which spills out could be ignited. Switch off the fuel-driven heater before starting to refuel. Additional heater - heats the passenger compartment and engine, if necessary, during driving. Check in the driver display that the heater is switched off. This symbol is lit when it is working as a parking heater. The heater is fuel-driven and is fitted inside the engine compartment. Related information NOTE When the heater is running, smoke may be emitted from under the front part of the car and a low hum may be heard. A ticking sound from the fuel pump may also be heard from the rear section of the car. This is perfectly normal. Battery and charging The heater is powered by the car's starter battery. If the charge level of the starter battery is too low, then the heater is switched off automatically and the driver display shows a message. Warning label on fuel filler flap. The heater uses fuel from the car's normal fuel tank. • • • Climate (p. 178) Parking heater* (p. 212) Additional heater* (p. 213) If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of the car should point downhill to ensure that there is a supply of fuel to the heater. If the level in the fuel tank is too low then the heater is switched off automatically and the driver display shows a message. * Option/accessory. 211 CLIMATE Parking heater* NOTE The parking heater heats the passenger compartment as necessary before driving if the car's preconditioning is activated. Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's normal fuel tank if the parking heater needs to be used. The parking heater is one of two subfunctions of the car's heater. The heater is fitted inside the engine compartment. Make sure that there is enough charge in the starter battery if the parking heater needs to be used. This symbol illuminates in the driver display when the parking heater is active. NOTE When the heater is running, smoke may be emitted from under the front part of the car and a low hum may be heard. A ticking sound from the fuel pump may also be heard from the rear section of the car. This is perfectly normal. WARNING Do not use preconditioning if the car is equipped with a heater*: IMPORTANT Repeated use of the parking heater combined with short journeys may discharge the battery and impair starting. In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater starts. • In locations with combustible or flammable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite. • When there is a risk that the heater’s exhaust line may be blocked. For example, deep snow under the front part of the car can obstruct the heater’s ventilation. Remember that the preconditioning can be started by a timer that has been set for a long time in advance. If the heater is used on a regular basis, then the car should be driven for the same amount of time that the heater is used in order to ensure that the car's battery is recharged with the same amount of energy as consumed by the parking heater. The parking heater is used for a maximum of 30 minutes each time. WARNING If there is a smell of fuel, unusual amounts of smoke, black smoke, or unusual sounds coming from the parking heater, switch off the heater and, if possible, pull out its fuse. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted for repair. The parking heater starts automatically if the parking climate's preconditioning* is activated and the passenger compartment needs to be heated up. It switches off automatically when a set timer time or the heater's maximum run time expires, or if the car is restarted. • Related information • • Heater* (p. 211) Additional heater* (p. 213) The heater's maximum running time is 40 minutes. 212 * Option/accessory. CLIMATE Additional heater* The auxiliary heater helps to heat the passenger compartment and engine while driving. The additional heater is one of two subfunctions of the car's heater. The heater is fitted inside the engine compartment. NOTE When the heater is running, smoke may be emitted from under the front part of the car and a low hum may be heard. A ticking sound from the fuel pump may also be heard from the rear section of the car. This is perfectly normal. • Activating and deactivating automatic start of auxiliary heater (p. 213) Activating and deactivating automatic start of auxiliary heater The auxiliary heater helps to heat the passenger compartment and engine while driving. It is possible to set whether automatic start for the additional heater should be activated/deactivated. 1. 2. Press Climate. 3. Select Additional Heater to activate/deactivate automatic start of the additional heater. NOTE Volvo recommends that the automatic start for the additional heater should be switched off for short driving distances. The additional heater starts and is controlled automatically when heating is required while the car is being driven. It switches off automatically when the car is switched off. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. Related information • Additional heater* (p. 213) NOTE Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's normal fuel tank if the auxiliary heater needs to be used. Related information • • Heater* (p. 211) Parking heater* (p. 212) * Option/accessory. 213 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Lock confirmation Lock and alarm indicator When the car is locked or unlocked the direction indicators confirm that locking or unlocking was correctly performed. Indication in lock buttons Front door Exterior indication Locking • The car's hazard warning flashers indicate locking by flashing and retracting the door mirrors1. Unlocking • The car's hazard warning flashers indicate unlocking by two flashes and extending the door mirrors1. All doors, tailgate and bonnet must be closed to indicate the car is locked. If locking is performed with only the driver's door closed2, the car will be locked but lock indication with hazard warning flashers will only occur after all doors, tailgate and bonnet have been closed. 1 2 216 The lock and alarm indicator on the instrument panel show the status of the alarm system. Long flash indicates locking of the car. When the car is locked, this will be indicated by short, pulsating flashes. Other indication The home safe lighting and approach light functions also provide indication of locking and unlocking. Lock buttons with indicator lamp in the front door. An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button of either front door indicates that all doors are locked. If any door is opened, the lamp will extinguish in both doors. Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors. Does not apply to cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*). * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM In rear door* Lock indication setting Remote control key It is possible to select how the car confirms locking and unlocking in the centre display settings menu. The remote control key locks and unlocks the doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap. The remote control key needs to be inside the car for it to be started. 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Press My Car 3. Tap on Visible Locking Feedback to select when the car should give a visible response: at Lock, Unlock, Both, or to switch off the function. Locking. Indication with retractable door mirrors* An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button for one of the doors indicates that the door in question is locked. If any door is unlocked, its lamp will extinguish while the others will continue to illuminate. 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Press My Car Related information 3. Select Fold Mirror When Locked to activate or deactivate the function. • • • 3 Lock indication setting (p. 217) Approach light duration (p. 144) Using home safe lighting (p. 143) The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. Mirrors and Convenience. Related information • Lock confirmation (p. 216) Remote control key3, on left, and button-less key (Key Tag)*, on right. The remote control key is not physically used when starting since the car is equipped with support for keyless starting (Passive Start) as standard. The key must be in the front part of the passenger compartment, e.g. in the driver's pocket or the runnel console cup holder, for it to be possible to start the car. }} * Option/accessory. 217 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || Keyless locking and unlocking of doors, tailgate (Passive Entry*) is also available as an option. The key then has a range extending in a semicircle with a radius of approx. 1.5 metres (5 feet) out from the driver's door and approx. 1 metre (3 feet) out from the tailgate respectively. Remote control key buttons matically when the button is held depressed. The tailgate is also closed with a long press acoustic warning signals sound. Panic function – Used to attract attention in an emergency. Press and hold the button for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within 3 seconds to activate the direction indicators and the horn. The function can be turned off with the same button once it has been active for at least 5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches off automatically after 3 minutes. With keyless starting and keyless locking and unlocking, the remote control key can be located anywhere in the passenger compartment or the cargo area and maintain the functionality to start the car. Each one of the remote control keys included with the car can be linked to a driver profile with unique settings for the car. When a key with a certain profile is used, the car's settings are adapted according to the profile. Button-less key (Key Tag) For cars equipped with keyless locking and unlocking*, a slightly smaller, lighter and buttonless key (Key Tag) is supplied. It works the same way as the normal remote control key when it comes to keyless starting and locking and unlocking4. It has no detachable key blade and the battery cannot be replaced. The remote control key has four buttons - one on the left-hand side and three on the right-hand side3. Locking - Pressing the button locks the doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap and also arms the alarm*. WARNING If anyone is left in the car, make sure the power windows and panoramic roof* are deenergised by always taking the remote control key with you when you leave the car. Press and hold to close all of the windows and the panorama roof* simultaneously. Unlocking - Pressing the button unlocks the doors and tailgate and also disarms the alarm. A longer press opens all windows simultaneously5. Tailgate - Unlocks the tailgate only and disarms its alarm. On cars with power operated tailgate*, the tailgate is opened auto- 4 3 5 218 The key is waterproof to a depth of approx. 10 metres (30 feet) for up to 60 minutes, which makes it suitable for use in activities in and around water. The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. The total airing function can be used, for example, to quickly air the car in hot weather. * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM NOTE NOTE Be aware of the risk of locking the remote control key/Key Tag in the car. When the remote control key is positioned in the backup reader, make sure that there are no car keys, metal objects or electronic apparatus nearby (e.g. mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers). Several car keys close to one another in the storage compartment may cause interference with each other. A remote control key/Key Tag left in the car will be deactivated when the car is locked and the alarm is armed using another valid key. The "Double lock" function is also deactivated. The deactivated key is reactivated when the car is unlocked. Interference Remote control key functions for keyless starting and keyless locking and unlocking* can be disrupted by electromagnetic fields and screening. NOTE Avoid storing the remote control key close to metal objects or electronic apparatus, e.g. mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers preferably no closer than 10-15 cm (4-6 inches). The buttons on the remote control key can be used to lock and unlock all doors, the tailgate and the fuel filler flap simultaneously. Locking with the remote control key Related information • • • • • • Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 219) Remote control key range (p. 222) Replacing the battery in the remote control key (p. 222) Detachable key blade (p. 227) Red Key - restricted remote control key* (p. 226) Immobiliser (p. 230) If there is still interference - use the remote control key's detachable key blade to unlock and then place the key in the backup reader in the storage compartment to disarm the car. 6 7 Locking and unlocking with the remote control key The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. If the car is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking then all side doors must be closed. Remote control key6. – Press the remote control key lock. button to The driver's door must be closed in order for the lock sequence to be activated7. If any of the other doors or the tailgate is open, then these are not locked and their alarms armed* until they are closed. The alarm's movement detectors* are activated when all the doors and the tailgate are closed and locked. }} * Option/accessory. 219 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || NOTE Be aware of the risk of locking the remote control key/Key Tag in the car. A remote control key/Key Tag left in the car will be deactivated when the car is locked and the alarm is armed using another valid key. The "Double lock" function is also deactivated. The deactivated key is reactivated when the car is unlocked. When the remote control key does not work NOTE Always try moving closer to the car and making another unlock attempt. If it is not possible to lock or unlock with the remote control key, the battery may be discharged - in which case, lock or unlock the driver's door with the detachable key blade. NOTE • Settings for remotely controlled and inside unlocking (p. 220) If the car has been locked while the tailgate is open, be careful not to leave the remote control key in the cargo area when the tailgate is closed and the car is completely locked8. • Unlocking the tailgate with the remote control key (p. 221) • • Remote control key (p. 217) Unlocking with the remote control key • Locking and unlocking with the detachable key blade (p. 229) Press the remote control key unlock. It is possible to select different sequences for remotely controlled unlocking. 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Press My Car Locking Interior Unlock. 3. Select option: button to Replacing the battery in the remote control key (p. 222) Automatic relocking Remote and • All Doors - unlocks all doors simultaneously. Related information Locking when the tailgate is open – Settings for remotely controlled and inside unlocking • Single Door - unlocks the driver's door. Unlocking all of the doors requires two presses on the remote control key's unlock button. The settings made here also affect central unlocking via opening handles from the inside. Related information • Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 219) • Locking and unlocking from inside the car (p. 245) If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within two minutes of unlocking, they are locked automatically. This function prevents the car from being left unlocked unintentionally. 8 220 If the car is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking and the key is detected inside the car, the tailgate will not lock when it is closed.* * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Unlocking the tailgate with the remote control key 1. It is possible to unlock just the tailgate by pressing a button on the remote control key. button. Press the remote control key's > The lock and alarm indicator on the instrument panel extinguishes in order to show that the alarm is not armed for the whole of the car. Related information • Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 219) • Opening and closing the power*-operated tailgate (p. 248) The alarm's level and movement sensors and the sensors for opening the tailgate are disconnected. The tailgate is unlocked, but remains closed while the doors remain locked and their alarm functions armed. To open the tailgate, grip the rubber pressure plate beneath the tailgate handle and open the tailgate. Use the remote control key tailgate and disable the alarm9. If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutes then it is relocked and the alarm is re-armed. button to unlock the 2. With the power operated tailgate option* Long press (approx. 1.5 seconds) on the button remote control key's > The tailgate is unlocked and opened, while the doors remain locked and their alarm functions armed. 9 The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. * Option/accessory. 221 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Remote control key range In order for the remote control key to work properly it needs to be within a certain distance from the car. (5 feet) on both long sides and approx. 1 metre (3 feet) from the tailgate. NOTE The remote control key's functions for e.g. locking/unlocking that are activated by pressing on or have a range that extends approx. 20 metres (65 feet) from the car. If the car does not verify a button being pressed move closer and try again. If the remote control key is removed from the car For keyless use10 If the remote control key is removed from the car when the engine is running, the warning message Car key not found Removed from car is shown in the driver display and an acoustic reminder sounds when the last door is closed. The message extinguishes when the key is returned to the car, followed by a press of the right-hand keypad's O button, or when the last door is closed. Related information 10 222 The battery in the remote control key needs to be replaced when it has become discharged. NOTE The remote control key functions may be disrupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, topographical conditions, etc. The car can always be locked/unlocked with the key blade. For manual use For keyless use, a remote control key or the button-less key (Key Tag) must be within a semicircular area with a radius of approx. 1.5 metres Replacing the battery in the remote control key • • Remote control key (p. 217) • Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* (p. 241) Antenna locations for the start and lock systems (p. 244) All batteries have a limited service life and must eventually be replaced (does not apply to Key Tag). The service life of the battery varies depending on how often the vehicle/key is used. The battery for the remote control key should be replaced if: the information symbol illuminates and the message Car key battery low See Owner's manual is shown in the driver display and/or • the locks repeatedly do not react to signals from the remote control key within 20 metres (65 feet) of the car. NOTE Always try moving closer to the car and making another unlock attempt. Only applies to cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking option (Passive Entry*). * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM The battery in the button-less key11 (Key Tag) cannot be replaced - a new key can be ordered from an authorised Volvo workshop. Opening the key and changing the battery IMPORTANT A discharged Key Tag must be handed over to an authorised Volvo workshop. The key must be deleted from the car since it is still possible to use it to start the car via back-up start. Hold the remote control key with the front visible and the Volvo logo facing the right way - slide the button at bottom edge by the key ring to the right. Slide the front side's shell a few millimetres upwards. Turn the key, move the button to the side and slide the back shell a few millimetres upwards. The shell will then come free and can be lifted off the key. The shell will then come free and can be lifted off the key. 11 This key is supplied with a car equipped with the keyless locking/entry option (Passive Entry*). }} * Option/accessory. 223 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || Use a screwdriver or similar to turn the battery cover anticlockwise until the markings meet at the OPEN text. Carefully lift away the battery cover by pressing e.g. a fingernail into the recess. Then prize the battery cover upwards. The battery (+) side is facing upwards. Then carefully prize loose the battery as illustrated. IMPORTANT Avoid touching new batteries and their contact surfaces with your fingers as this may impair their function. Install a new battery with the (+) side up. Avoid touching the remote control key's battery contacts with your fingers. Place the battery in the holder with the edge down. Then slide the battery forwards so that it fastens under the two plastic catches. Press the battery down so that it fastens under the upper black plastic catch. NOTE Use batteries with the designation CR2032, 3 V. 224 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM NOTE Volvo recommends that the batteries to be used in the remote control key fulfil UN Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III, subsection 38.3. Batteries fitted in the factory or replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop fulfil the above criteria. Reposition the rear side's shell and press it down until a clicking sound can be heard. Turn the remote control key over and refit the front side's shell by pressing it down until a clicking sound can be heard. Then slide the shell back sedan. > A further click will indicate that the shell is properly positioned and securely attached. Then slide the shell back sedan. > A further click will indicate that the shell is securely attached. IMPORTANT Refit the battery cover and turn it clockwise until the marking aligns with the CLOSE text. Make sure that exhausted batteries are disposed of in a manner which is kind to the environment. Related information • Remote control key (p. 217) 225 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Ordering more remote control keys The car is supplied with two remote control keys. A button-less key is supplied if the car is equipped with keyless locking and unlocking*. Additional keys can be ordered. A total of twelve keys can be programmed and used for one single car. If additional keys are ordered, additional driver profiles are added - one per new remote control key. This also applies for the key tag. Red Key - restricted remote control key* A Red Key makes it possible for the car's owner to set limitations for certain of the car's properties. The limitations are intended to encourage the car to be driven in a safe manner, e.g. when being loaned out. The restrictions are intended to act as measures to reduce the risk of accidents, thereby making it feel safer to hand over the car to e.g. young drivers, valet parking or a workshop. The holder of a Red Key cannot change settings defined for it – a regular remote control key is required for this. Related information • • Red Key settings* (p. 227) Remote control key (p. 217) Loss of a remote control key If you lose a remote control key then a new one can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The remaining remote control keys must be taken to the workshop. The code of the missing key must be erased from the system as a theft prevention measure. The current number of keys registered to the car can be checked via driver profiles in the centre display's top view, select Settings System Driver Profiles. Related information • Remote control key (p. 217) For a Red Key, it is possible to define the car's maximum speed, set speed reminders and determine the loudspeaker system's maximum volume. In addition, some of the car's driver support systems will always be active. Other functions of the key are the same as those of a normal remote control key. One or more Red Keys can be ordered from a Volvo retailer. A total of eleven keys with restrictions can be programmed and used for a single car - at least one must be a normal remote control key. 226 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Red Key settings* The holder of a regular remote control key can define settings for Red Key. Certain driver support functions are always active. 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Press System Driver Profiles Red Key. > The following settings can be defined: • Set Time Gap For Adaptive Cruise Control • Reduced Maximum Volume • Max Speed Limit • Speed Limit Warning Adaptive cruise control*: • Setting at first use: Longest intervals Reduced max. volume (On/Off): • Setting at first use: On Speed limiter (On/Off): • Setting interval: 50-250 km/h (30-160 mph) • Setting during first use is 120 km/h (75 mph) • Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph) Speed reminder (On/Off): • Setting interval: 0-250 km/h (0-160 mph) • Setting during first use is: 50, 70 and 90 km/h (30, 45 and 55 mph) • • Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph) Max. number of simultaneous reminders: 6 Driver support functions The following driver support functions will always be active for the user of a Red Key: • • • • • • Detachable key blade The remote control key contains a detachable key blade of metal with which a number of functions can be activated and some operations carried out. The key blade's unique code is provided by authorised Volvo workshops, which are recommended when ordering new key blades. Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* Lane assistance (LKA)* Distance Warning* City Safety Driver Alert Control (DAC)* Road Sign Information* Related information • Red Key - restricted remote control key* (p. 226) The driver display shows the symbol and message Red key Speed limitation cannot be exceeded. }} * Option/accessory. 227 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || The key blade's application areas Detaching the key blade Using the remote control key's detachable key blade: • the left-hand12 front door can be opened manually if central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key. • • all doors are emergency-locked. the rear doors' mechanical child safety locks can be activated and deactivated. The button-less key13 (Key Tag) does not have a detachable key blade. If necessary, use the detachable key blade from the normal remote control key. Return the key blade to its intended position in the remote control key after use. Hold the remote control key with the front visible and the Volvo logo facing the right way - slide the button at bottom edge by the key ring to the right. Guide the front side's shell a few millimetres upwards. Refit the shell by pressing it downward until a clicking sound is heard. Then slide the shell back. > A further click will indicate that the shell is securely attached. The shell will then come free and can be lifted off the key. Related information • Locking and unlocking with the detachable key blade (p. 229) • Remote control key (p. 217) Detach the key blade by angling it up. 12 13 228 This applies whether the car is left-hand drive or right-hand drive. Supplied with cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking option (Passive Entry*). * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Locking and unlocking with the detachable key blade 5. Amongst other things, the detachable key blade can be used to unlock the car from the outside e.g. if the remote control key's battery has become discharged. Locking will be performed in the same way, but with an anticlockwise turn 45 degrees instead of clockwise in step (3). Unlocking Pull out the handle. > The door opens. Switching off the alarm* NOTE When the door is unlocked using the key blade and is then opened, the alarm is triggered. Deactivate the alarm as follows: 1. Place the remote control key on the key symbol in the backup reader in the tunnel console's storage compartment. 2. Press the start button. > The control automatically returns to its starting position - the alarm signal stops and the alarm switches off. Locking It is also possible to lock the car with the remote control key's detachable key blade e.g. in the event of a loss of power or if the key's battery has become discharged. The left-hand front door can be locked with its lock cylinder and the detachable key blade. Other doors have no lock cylinders and instead have a lock switch on the end of each door which must be depressed using the key blade - they are then mechanically locked/blocked to prevent them being opened from outside. Pull out the front door handle on the lefthand side14 to its end position so that the lock cylinder become visible. Insert the key in the lock cylinder. The doors can still be opened from the inside. Turn clockwise 45 degrees so that the key blade is pointing straight back. Turn the key back 45 degrees to its starting position. Remove the key from the lock cylinder and release the handle so that the rear section of the handle is resting against the car again. 14 This applies whether the car is right-hand drive or left-hand drive. The backup reader's location in the storage compartment. }} * Option/accessory. 229 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM NOTE Immobiliser • A door's lock reset only locks that particular door - not all doors simultaneously. • A manually locked rear door with activated manual or electric child safety locks cannot be opened from either the outside or the inside. A rear door that is locked in this way can only be unlocked with the remote control key or central locking button. The electronic immobiliser is a theft protection system that prevents an unauthorised person from starting the car. The car can only be started with the correct remote control key. || Manual locking of the door. Not to be mixed up with the child safety locks. – Remove the detachable key blade from the remote control key. Insert the key blade in the hole for lock reset and press the key in until the key bottoms, approx. 12 mm. The door can be opened from both the outside and the inside. The door is blocked against opening from the outside. To return to position A, the inner door handle must be opened. The doors can also be unlocked with the unlock button on the remote control key or with the central locking button on the driver's door. 15 230 Related information • • • Activating and deactivating alarms* (p. 256) • Remote control key (p. 217) Detachable key blade (p. 227) Replacing the battery in the remote control key (p. 222) The following error message in the driver display is related to the electronic immobiliser: Symbol Message Specification Car key not found Error reading the remote control key during starting place the key on the key symbol in the storage compartment and try again. See Owner's manual Remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking system15 The car is fitted with a system which makes it possible to track and locate the car and to remotely activate the immobiliser, which prevents starting the engine. Contact your nearest Volvo dealer for more information and assistance with activating the system. Only certain markets and together with Volvo On Call*. * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM The following error message in the driver display is related to the remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking system: Symbol Message Specification Remotely immobilised The remote-controlled immobiliser with tracking system is activated. The car cannot be started. Contact Volvo On Call Service Centre. Car not possible to start Related information • • Remote control key (p. 217) Ordering more remote control keys (p. 226) 231 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Type approval for the remote control key system Type approval for the car's remote key system can be seen in the following tables. Lock system keyless start (Passive Start) and keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*) For more information about type approval, see support.volvocars.com. CEM marking for the remote control key system. For supplementary type approval numbers, see following tables. Country/Area Type approval Europe Delphi Deutschland GmbH, 42367 Wuppertal hereby declares that this CV1-134TRX conforms to the essential property requirements and other relevant provisions contained in directive 2014/53/EU (RED). The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be found at support.volvocars.com. 232 Jordan TRC/LPD/2014/250 Serbia P1614120100 Argentina CNC ID: C-14771 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Country/Area Type approval Brazil MT-3245/2015 Indonesia Nomor: 38301/SDPPI/2015 Malaysia RAAT/37A/0315/S(15-0663) Mexico IFETEL: RLVDEVO15-0396 Russia The United Arab Emirates ER37847/15 DA0062437/11 }} 233 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || Country/Area Type approval Namibia TA-2016-02 South Africa TA-2014-1868 Remote control key Country/Area Type approval Europe Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG hereby declares that this type of radio equipment HUF8423 conforms to directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be found at support.volvocars.com. Wavelength: 433.92 MHz Maximum radiated transmission power: 10 mW Manufacturer: Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG, Steeger Str. 17, 42551 Velbert, Germany Jordan 234 TRC/LPD/2015/104 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Country/Area Type approval Morocco AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC Numéro d’agrément: MR 10668 ANRT 2015 Date d’agrément: 24/07/2015 Mexico IFETEL Marca: HUF Modelo (s): HUF8423 NOM-121-SCT1-2009 La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada. Namibia TA-2015-102 }} 235 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || Country/Area Oman Serbia 236 Type approval KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Country/Area Type approval South Africa TA-2015-432 The United Arab Emirates Key Tag Country/Area Type approval Europe Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG hereby declares that this type of radio equipment HUF8432 conforms to directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be found at support.volvocars.com. Wavelength: 433.92 MHz Maximum radiated transmission power: 10 mW Manufacturer: Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG, Steeger Str. 17, 42551 Velbert, Germany Jordan TRC/LPD/2015/107 }} 237 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || Country/Area Type approval Morocco AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC Numéro d’agrément: MR 10667 ANRT 2015 Date d’agrément: 24/07/2015 Mexico IFETEL Marca: HUF Modelo (s): HUF8432 NOM-121-SCT1-2009 La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada. Namibia 238 TA-2015-103 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Country/Area Type approval Oman Serbia }} 239 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || Country/Area Type approval South Africa TA-2015-414 The United Arab Emirates Related information • 240 Remote control key (p. 217) KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* If the car is equipped with keyless locking and unlocking, it is sufficient to have the remote control key in the vicinity e.g. in a pocket or a bag, making it more convenient to open the car if your hands are full. NOTE It is important that only one touch-sensitive surface is activated at a time. Gripping the handle while touching the lock surface risks giving double commands. This means that the requested activity (locking/unlocking) will not be executed, or will be executed with a delay. Related information • • Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 242) Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* (p. 243) Touch-sensitive surfaces Door handle The outside of the door handles contains a recess for locking, while the inside contains a touch-sensitive surface for unlocking. Touch-sensitive recess for locking Touch-sensitive surface for unlocking Tailgate The tailgate handle has a rubberised pressure plate that is only used for unlocking. NOTE Be aware that the system may be activated in connection with car washing if the remote control key is in range. * Option/accessory. 241 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Keyless locking and unlocking* open when locking the car with a side door handle. The car is locked and unlocked from the outside using the door or tailgate handles if the car is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry)*. – Rubberised pressure plate on the tailgate used for unlocking only. NOTE Touch-sensitive recess for locking Touch-sensitive surface for unlocking One of the car's remote control keys must be within range for locking and unlocking to work. NOTE Be aware that the system may be activated in connection with car washing if the remote control key is in range. Touch the marked surface towards the rear on the outside of a door handle after the door has been closed, or press the lock16 button on the bottom edge of the tailgate before closing it. > The lock indicator in the windscreen starts to flash to indicate the car is locked. To close all side windows and the panoramic roof* simultaneously - place a finger against the touch-sensitive recess on the outside of the door handle and hold it there until all of the side windows and the panoramic roof have been closed. Locking when the tailgate is open NOTE If the car has been locked while the tailgate is open, be careful not to leave the remote control key in the cargo area when the tailgate is closed and the car is completely locked17. Keyless locking All side doors must be closed to be able to lock the car. The tailgate, on the other hand, can be 16 17 242 Applies with power operated tailgate*. If the key is detected inside the car, the tailgate will not lock when it is closed. * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Keyless unlocking Settings for Keyless entry* Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* – It is possible to select different sequences for Keyless entry. For keyless unlocking of the tailgate, all you have to do is have the remote control key in a pocket or bag, for example. The tailgate is held closed by an electrical lock. Grasp a door handle or press the rubberised pressure plate beneath the tailgate handle to unlock the car. > The lock indicator in the windscreen extinguishes to confirm the car is unlocked open the doors or tailgate as usual. 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Tap on My Car Unlock 3. Select option: Automatic relocking If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within two minutes of unlocking, they are locked automatically. This function prevents the car from being left unlocked unintentionally. Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* (p. 241) To open the tailgate: 1. • Single Door - unlocks selected door. Press gently on the rubberised pressure plate beneath the tailgate handle. > The lock is released. NOTE - unlocks all doors simultaneously. Settings for Keyless entry* (p. 243) Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* (p. 243) Keyless • All Doors Related information • • • Locking One of the car's remote control keys must be within range behind the car for unlocking to work. Related information • • Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 242) 2. Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* (p. 241) Lift by the outside handle in order to fully open the tailgate. IMPORTANT • Minimal force is required to release the rear hatch lock - just gently press the rubberised panel. • Do not place the lift force on the rubber panel when opening the rear hatch - lift the handle. Using too much force may damage the electrical contacts on the rubber panel. }} * Option/accessory. 243 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || It is also possible to unlock the tailgate handsfree with a foot movement under the rear bumper, see separate section. WARNING Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car through the cargo area. Antenna locations for the start and lock systems WARNING People with pacemaker operations should not come closer than 22 cm (9 inches) to the keyless system's antennas with their pacemaker. This is to prevent interference between the pacemaker and the keyless system. The car is equipped with a keyless start and lock system18 and therefore has a number of built-in antennas positioned at different locations in the car. Related information Related information • • • • Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 242) Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* (p. 241) • Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* (p. 241) • Remote control key range (p. 222) Remote control key range (p. 222) Opening and closing the tailgate with foot movement* (p. 252) In the storage compartment in the tunnel console In the upper front section of the left-hand rear door19 In the upper front section of the right-hand rear door19 In the cargo area19 18 19 244 The keyless lock system only applies to cars equipped with keyless locking and unlocking (Passive Entry*). Only in cars equipped with keyless locking and unlocking (Passive Entry*). * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Locking and unlocking from inside the car Alternative unlocking method Locking using a button in the front door – The doors and tailgate can be locked and unlocked from inside using the central locking controls in the front doors. The lock controls* on the rear doors each lock their own rear door. Press the button - both front doors must be closed. > All doors and the tailgate are locked. A long press on the button closes all side windows and the panorama roof* simultaneously. Central locking Locking using a button in the rear door* Opening handle for alternative unlocking in the side door21. – Locking and unlocking button with indicator lamp in the front door. Unlocking using a button in the front door – Press the button to unlock all side doors and the tailgate. Pull the opening handle on one of the side doors and release. > Depending on the settings in the remote control key, either all doors will be unlocked or only the selected door will be unlocked and opened. To change this setting, tap on Settings My Car Locking Remote and Interior Unlock in the centre display's top view. A long press on the button opens all the side windows simultaneously20. 20 21 The total airing function can be used, for example, to quickly air the car in hot weather. The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. Locking button with indicator lamp in the rear door. The rear door lock buttons only lock their respective rear door. Unlocking the rear door – Pull the opening handle. > The rear door is unlocked and opened. }} * Option/accessory. 245 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || Related information • Settings for remotely controlled and inside unlocking (p. 220) • Unlocking the tailgate from the inside of the car (p. 246) • Activating and deactivating child safety locks (p. 247) Unlocking the tailgate from the inside of the car The tailgate can be unlocked from the inside by pressing a button on the instrument panel. 1. Related information • Locking and unlocking from inside the car (p. 245) • Opening and closing the power*-operated tailgate (p. 248) Brief press on the button on the instrument panel. > The tailgate can be unlocked and opened from the outside by grasping the rubberised pressure plate. With the power operated tailgate option* 2. 246 Long press on the button on the instrument panel. > The tailgate opens. * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Activating and deactivating child safety locks 2. The child safety locks prevent children from being able to open a rear door from the inside. There is an electric* and a manual lock. Activating and deactivating electrically* The electric child safety locks can be activated and deactivated in all ignition positions higher than 0. Activation and deactivation can be performed up to 2 minutes after switching off the engine, provided that no door is opened. Press the button in the driver's door control panel. > The driver display shows the message Rear child lock Activated and the button's lamp illuminates - the locks are active. Symbol When the electric child safety lock is active then the rear: • windows can only be opened with the driver's door control panel • doors cannot be opened from inside. Message Specification Rear child lock Activated Child safety locks are activated. Rear child lock Deactivated Child safety locks are deactivated. Activating and deactivating manually To deactivate the locks: – Button for electric activation and deactivation. 1. Start the engine or choose an ignition position higher than 0. Press the button in the driver's door control panel. > The driver display shows the message Rear child lock Deactivated and the button's lamp goes out - the locks are deactivated. The current setting is stored when the engine is switched off - if the child safety locks are activated at engine shutdown, the function will remain activated the next time the engine is started. Manual child safety locks. Not to be mixed up with manual door locks. – Use the remote control key's detachable key blade to turn the knob. The door is blocked against opening from the inside. The door can be opened from both the outside and the inside. }} * Option/accessory. 247 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM NOTE Automatic locking when driving • A door's knob control only blocks that particular door - not both rear doors simultaneously. The doors and tailgate are locked automatically when the car starts to move. To change this setting: • Cars with an electric child safety lock do not have a manual child lock. || Related information 248 • Locking and unlocking from inside the car (p. 245) • Detachable key blade (p. 227) 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Press My Car 3. Select Auto Lock Doors While Driving to deactivate or activate this function. Locking. Related information • Opening and closing the power*operated tailgate The car's tailgate can be opened and closed electrically. Opening the power operated tailgate Choose one of the following options to open the tailgate: – Long press on the remote control key's button. Keep it depressed until the tailgate starts to open. Locking and unlocking from inside the car (p. 245) * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM – Long press on the instrument panel's button. Keep it depressed until the tailgate starts to open. – Foot movement* under the rear bumper. – Closing the power operated tailgate – Light press on the tailgate handle. Press the button on the underside of the tailgate to close. > The tailgate closes automatically - the tailgate remains unlocked. Choose one of the following methods to close22 the tailgate: NOTE The button is active 24 hours after the hatch has been left open. Thereafter, it must be closed manually. – 22 A car with keyless locking and unlocking (Passive Entry*) has one button for closing and one button for closing and locking. Long press on the button on the remote control key. > The tailgate closes automatically and acoustic signals sound - the tailgate remains unlocked. }} * Option/accessory. 249 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || – Long press on the button on the instrument panel. > The tailgate closes automatically and acoustic signals sound - the tailgate remains unlocked. – Foot movement* under the rear bumper. > The tailgate closes automatically and acoustic signals sound - the tailgate remains unlocked. Closing and locking22 the power operated tailgate – Press the button on the underside of the tailgate to close it and simultaneously lock the tailgate and doors (all doors must be closed for locking). > The tailgate closes automatically - the tailgate and doors are locked, and the alarm* is armed. NOTE 22 250 IMPORTANT During manual tailgate operation, open or close it slowly. Do not use force to open/ close it if there is resistance. It may be damaged and stop working correctly. Cancel opening or closing Cancel opening or closing in one of the following ways: • • • Press the button on the instrument panel. • Press the rubberised pressure plate beneath the outside handle. • Using a foot movement*. and the tailgate returns to the programmed max. position. WARNING Observe the risk of trapping when opening/ closing. Before starting opening/closing, check that there is nobody near to the tailgate as trapping may have serious consequences. Always operate the tailgate with caution. Pre-tensioned springs Press the remote control key's button. Press the closing button on the underside of the tailgate. The tailgate's movement is interrupted and stops. The boot lid can then be operated manually. Pinch protection • One of the car's remote control keys must be within range for locking and unlocking to work. If something with sufficient resistance prevents the tailgate from opening or closing then the pinch protection is activated. • When using keyless* locking or closing, three signals will sound if the key is not detected sufficiently close to the tailgate. • During opening - movement is interrupted, the tailgate stops and a long acoustic signal sounds. • During closing - movement is interrupted, the tailgate stops, a long acoustic signal sounds The pre-tensioned springs for the power operated tailgate. A car with keyless locking and unlocking (Passive Entry*) has one button for closing and one button for closing and locking. * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM WARNING Do not open the pre-tensioned springs for the power operated tailgate. They are pre-tensioned with high pressure and can cause injury if opened. Related information • Programming maximum opening for power operated tailgate* (p. 251) • Opening and closing the tailgate with foot movement* (p. 252) • Remote control key range (p. 222) Programming maximum opening for power operated tailgate* NOTE • Adapt the tailgate's opening position to low roof height. To adjust max. opening: 1. Open the tailgate - stop it in the open position. NOTE If the system has been operating continuously for a long time, it is switched off to avoid overload. It can be used again after about 2 minutes. Related information • Opening and closing the power*-operated tailgate (p. 248) It is not possible to program an opening position lower than half-open tailgate. 2. button on the underside of Press the the tailgate for at least 3 seconds. > Two short acoustic signals sound to indicate that the set position has been saved. To reset max. opening: – Manually move the tailgate to its highest possible position - press the button on the tailgate for at least 3 seconds. > Two acoustic signals sound to indicate that the set position has been cleared. The tailgate will then assume its max. position when opened. * Option/accessory. 251 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Opening and closing the tailgate with foot movement* Opening and closing with foot movement To facilitate the operation of the tailgate when your hands are occupied, it can be opened and closed by means of a forward kicking motion under the rear bumper. If the car is equipped with keyless locking and unlocking* then you can unlock the tailgate with a foot movement. The function with both opening and closing of the tailgate is also available when the car is equipped with power operated tailgate*. NOTE The foot-operated tailgate function is available in two versions: • • Opening and closing with foot movement Only unlocking with foot movement (lift up the tailgate manually to open it) Note that the function for opening and closing with foot movement requires power operated tailgate*. The sensor is located on left of centre in the bumper. One of the car's remote control keys must be within range behind the car (approx. 1 metre (3 feet)) for opening and closing to be possible. This also applies to an already unlocked car in order to avoid accidental opening e.g. in a car wash. Kicking motion within the detector's valid activation area. – Make one slow, forward kicking motion under the left part of the rear bumper. Then take a step back. The bumper must not be touched. > A short acoustic signal sounds when opening or closing is activated - the tailgate is opened/closed. If the tailgate is in open position then it is always closed23 on activation via foot movement. If several kicking motions take place without an approved remote control key being located behind the car, opening will not be possible until after a certain delay. 23 252 Applies to cars with power operated tailgate*. * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Do not leave your foot positioned under the car during the kicking motion. This could cause activation to fail. Cancelling opening or closing with foot movement – Make one slow forward kicking motion when opening or closing is in progress in order to stop the movement of the tailgate. Private locking The tailgate can be locked, so-called private locking which prevents it from being opened, e.g. when the car is taken in for service, left at a hotel or similar. The private locking function button is located in the centre display function view. Depending on the current status of the lock, Private Locking Unlocked or Private Locking Locked is shown. The remote control key does not have to be in the vicinity of the car to cancel opening or closing. NOTE There is a risk of reduced function, or no function, if the rear bumper is loaded with large amounts of ice, snow, dirt or similar. For this reason, make sure you keep it clean. Related information • Activating and deactivating private locking (p. 253) Activating and deactivating private locking Private locking is activated with a function button in the centre display and an optional PIN code. NOTE The car needs to be in ignition mode I as a minimum for the private locking function to be activated. Enter the security code before using for the first time A security code needs to be selected during the first time the function is used. It can then be used to deactivate private locking if the selected PIN code has been lost or forgotten. The security code acts as a PUK code for all subsequent PIN codes set for the private locking function. Save the security code in a safe place. NOTE Pay attention to the possibility that the system may be activated in a car wash or similar if the remote key is within range. To create a security code: 1. Press the button for private locking in the function view. Related information • Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* (p. 241) • Opening and closing the power*-operated tailgate (p. 248) • Remote control key range (p. 222) > A pop-up window is shown. }} * Option/accessory. 253 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || 2. Enter the desired security code. > The security code is saved. The private locking function is now ready for activation. Deactivate private locking 1. Press the button for private locking in the function view. Related information • Private locking (p. 253) If the system has been reset then the above procedure needs to be repeated. Activate private locking 1. Press the button for private locking in the function view. > A pop-up window is shown. 2. > A pop-up window is shown. 2. Enter the code to be used in order to unlock the tailgate after locking and tap on Confirm. > The tailgate is locked. Confirmation of locking takes place by means of a green indicator being shown by the button in the function view. Enter the code that was used for locking and tap on Confirm. > The tailgate is unlocked. Confirmation of unlocking takes place by means of the green indicator by the button in the function view extinguishing. NOTE If the PIN code has been lost/forgotten, or if the wrong PIN code has been entered more than three times, the security code can be used to deactivate the private locking. NOTE If private locking is activated and the car is unlocked via Volvo On Call* or the Volvo On Call* app, private locking will be deactivated automatically. 254 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Alarm* Alarm indicator The alarm provides audible and visual warnings if anyone enters the car without a valid remote control key or manipulates the starter battery or alarm siren. When armed, the alarm is triggered if: • • a movement is detected in the passenger compartment (if fitted with a movement detector*) the car is raised or towed away (if fitted with a tilt detector*) • • the starter battery's cable is disconnected the siren is disconnected. Alarm signals When the alarm has been triggered, the following happens: • A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the alarm is switched off. • The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes or until the alarm is switched off. If the cause of alarm activation is not rectified, the alarm cycle is repeated up to 10 times25. 24 25 To avoid this: a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened24 • Applies to certain markets. Applies to certain markets. The movement sensor triggers an alarm in the event of movement in the passenger compartment - air currents are also registered. For this reason the alarm is triggered if the car is left with a window or the panoramic roof* open or if the passenger compartment heater is used. A red LED on the instrument panel indicates the alarm system's status: • • LED not lit – alarm not armed. • After the alarm has been disarmed, the LED flashes rapidly for a maximum of 30 seconds or until ignition position I has been selected by turning the start knob clockwise and releasing it - the alarm has been triggered. The LED flashes once every other second – alarm is armed. Movement and tilt sensors* Movement and tilt sensors react to movements inside the car, if the window is broken or if anyone tries to steal the wheels or tow the vehicle away. • Close the window and panoramic roof when leaving the car. • If the passenger compartment or parking heater is to be used – direct the airflow from the air vents so that they do not point upwards in the passenger compartment. Alternatively, use a reduced alarm level to temporarily deactivate the movement and tilt sensors. Also switch off the movement and tilt sensors when the car is being transported on a ferry or train as these movements may affect the car and trigger the alarm. In the event of an alarm system fault If there is a fault in the alarm system, the driver display shows the symbol and the message Alarm system failure Service required. In which case, contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. }} * Option/accessory. 255 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || NOTE Do not attempt to repair or alter components in the alarm system yourself. Any such attempts may affect the terms of the insurance. Related information • • • Activating and deactivating alarms* (p. 256) Activating and deactivating alarms* Deactivate the alarm The alarm is armed when the car is locked. Unlock and disarm the car alarm as follows: Arming the alarm • press the remote control key's unlock button • grip one of the door handles or press on the tailgate's rubberised pressure plate26. Lock and arm the car alarm as follows: • press the remote control key's lock button • touch the marked surface on the outside of the door handles or the tailgate's rubberised pressure plate26. Reduced alarm level* (p. 258) Double lock* (p. 258) If the car is equipped with both keyless locking/ unlocking* and a power-operated tailgate*, the button on the underside of the tailgate can also be used to lock the car and arm the car alarm. A red LED on the instrument panel flashes once every two seconds when the car is locked and the alarm is armed. 26 256 Only applies to a car with keyless locking and unlocking* (Passive Entry). * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Deactivate the alarm without a functioning remote control key The car can be unlocked and disarmed even if the remote control key does not work, e.g. if the remote control key's battery is dead. 1. Open the driver's door with the detachable key blade. > The alarm is triggered. 2. Switching off a triggered alarm – Press the remote control key's unlock button or set the car in ignition position I by pressing the start button. 3. Select Passive Arming Deactivation to deactivate the function temporarily. Related information • Alarm* (p. 255) NOTE • Remember that the alarm is activated when the car is locked. • If any of the doors are opened from the inside then the alarm is triggered. Automatic arming and rearming of the alarm Automatic rearming of the alarm prevents the car being left with the alarm disarmed unintentionally. If the car is unlocked with the remote control key (which disarms the alarm) but none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within two minutes, then the alarm is automatically re-armed. The car is relocked at the same time. Place the remote control key on the key symbol in the backup reader in the tunnel console's storage compartment. 3. Press the start button. > The alarm is deactivated. In certain markets, the alarm is armed automatically after a certain delay after the driver's door has been opened and closed without being locked. To change this setting: 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Press My Car Locking. * Option/accessory. 257 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Reduced alarm level* Double lock* A reduced alarm level means that the movement and tilt sensors are temporarily switched off. Switch off the movement and tilt detectors in order to avoid accidental triggering of the alarm e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or during transport on a car train or car ferry. Double lock means that all opening handles are disengaged mechanically, which prevents door opening from the inside when the car is locked from the outside. Double locks are activated with the remote control key and in keyless locking (Passive Entry)*. Double locks are activated with a delay of about 10 seconds after the doors have locked. Press the Reduced Guard button in the centre display function view to switch off the movement and tilt sensors when subsequently locking the car. If a door is opened within the delay time then the sequence is interrupted and the alarm is deactivated. • If the car is unlocked and then locked again, the reduced alarm level must be reactivated. Remember that the alarm is activated when the car is locked. • If any of the doors are opened from the inside then the alarm is triggered. • • Alarm* (p. 255) Double lock* (p. 258) Related information • Temporarily deactivating double locks* (p. 259) • Alarm* (p. 255) NOTE At the same time, the double lock function is deactivated, i.e. unlocking from inside is possible. Related information WARNING Do not allow anyone to remain in the car without first deactivating the double lock in order to avoid the risk of anyone being locked in. The car can only be unlocked with the remote control key, keyless unlocking or the Volvo On Call* app when double locks are activated. The front left door can also be unlocked with the detachable key blade. If the car is unlocked with the detachable key blade, the alarm will be triggered. 258 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Temporarily deactivating double locks* Detection of unknown car component* If someone is going to stay in the car but the doors must be locked from the outside, then the double lock function should be deactivated, to allow unlocking from the inside. The "Foreign Component Detection" function can detect whether an unknown car component has been connected to the car. Press the Reduced Guard button in the centre display's function view in order to deactivate the double lock function temporarily. This also means that the alarm's movement and tilt detectors* are switched off. Each LED headlamp* is designed for the car. If an unknown headlamp is connected, the driver display shows a message Unknown car part. Service required, unknown car part found. Volvo recommends contacting an authorised Volvo workshop. Related information • Volvo service programme (p. 560) After this, Reduced Guard is shown in the centre display and double locks are temporarily deactivated in the subsequent locking of the car. In conventional locking, the electrical sockets are deactivated immediately, but when double locks are temporarily deactivated, they will be active for a maximum of 10 minutes after locking. If the car is unlocked and then locked again, the double lock function must be deactivated again. The system is reset the next time the engine is started. Related information • • Double lock* (p. 258) Alarm* (p. 255) * Option/accessory. 259 DRIVER SUPPORT DRIVER SUPPORT Driving support systems The car is equipped with different driver support systems which can assist the driver in different situations, either actively or passively. The systems can, for example, help the driver to hold a set speed or a certain time interval to the vehicle in front, prevent a collision by warning the driver and brake the car or help the driver to park. Some of the systems are fitted as standard, while others are options. This also varies depending on market. Related information • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 262 Speed-dependent steering force (p. 262) Electronic stability control (p. 264) Stability system Roll Stability Control (p. 263) Rear Collision Warning (p. 338) Speed Limiter (p. 268) Cruise Control (p. 276) • • • • • • Driver Alert Control (p. 355) Speed-dependent steering force Lane assistance (p. 357) Speed related power steering causes the steering wheel force to increase with the speed of the car in order to give the driver enhanced sensitivity. Steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 365) Park Assist* (p. 373) Park assist camera* (p. 378) Park Assist Pilot* (p. 387) On motorways the steering feels firmer. When parking and at low speed steering is light and requires only a slight effort. NOTE In certain situations the power steering may become too hot and then needs to be temporarily cooled - during this time the power steering operates with reduced power and turning the steering wheel may then be perceived to be slightly heavier. In parallel with the temporarily reduced steering assistance, the driver display shows a message as well as a STEERING WHEEL symbol. Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 281) Pilot Assist (p. 296) Radar unit (p. 311) Camera unit (p. 322) City Safety™ (p. 326) BLIS* (p. 339) Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 344) Road Sign Information* (p. 349) * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT WARNING While the power steering is working at reduced power, the driver support functions with steering assistance are not available. In such a situation, the driver display shows the Power steering failure or Power Steering Assist Temporarily Reduced message, combined with a STEERING WHEEL symbol. Change the steering force level* To select the steering force level, go to the "Drive modes" section and see the description at the alternative INDIVIDUAL under the heading "Selectable drive modes". For the car models without a drive mode control with its INDIVIDUAL option, the selection of steering force is instead made via the centre display's top view and the following search path: Settings My Car Steering force • Steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 365) Stability system Roll Stability Control • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 387) The stability system RSC1 minimises the risk of overturning, for example during a sudden evasive manoeuvre or if the car skids. The RSC system registers if and how much the car's lateral inclination changes. This information is used to calculate the risk of the car overturning. If the car is at risk, its electronic stability control system engages, the engine torque is reduced and one or more wheels are braked until the car has regained its stability. WARNING Under normal driving conditions, the RSC system improves the car's road safety, but this must not be taken as a reason to increase speed. Always follow the normal precautions for safe driving. Drive Modes Steering force selection cannot be accessed during a turn if the speed exceeds 10 km/h (6 mph). Related information • • • 1 Drive modes* (p. 414) Pilot Assist (p. 296) Lane assistance (p. 357) Roll Stability Control * Option/accessory. 263 DRIVER SUPPORT Electronic stability control Electronic Stability Control (ESC2) helps the driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's traction. The driver display shows this symbol when the ESC system is engaged. WARNING • The stability system ESC is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • ESC is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. Braking from the ESC system may be heard as a pulsing sound, and the car may accelerate more slowly than expected when applying the throttle. The ESC system consists of the following subfunctions: • • • • Stability function3 Spin control and traction control system Engine Drag Control Trailer stability assist 264 Engine Drag Control (EDC4) prevents involuntary wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or engine braking when driving in low gear on slippery road surfaces. Involuntary wheel locking while driving can, amongst other things, impair the driver's ability to steer the car. Trailer stability assist*5 Trailer stability assist (TSA6) stabilises a car towing a trailer in situations where they begin snaking. Also see section "Trailer stability assist" for more information. Stability function3 NOTE The function checks the driving and brake force of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the car. Spin control and traction control system The function is active at low speed and brakes the drive wheels that spin so that additional traction shall be transferred from the drive wheels that are not spinning. The function also prevents the driving wheels from spinning against the road surface during acceleration. 2 Electronic Stability Control 3 Also known as Active Yaw Control. 4 Engine Drag Control 5 Trailer stability assist is included when 6 Trailer Stability Assist Engine Drag Control The TSA function is deactivated if ESC Sport Mode is activated. Related information • Sport mode for electronic stability control (p. 265) • Activating/deactivating Sport mode in Electronic Stability Control (p. 265) the Volvo genuine towbar is installed. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT • Limitation for sport mode in Electronic Stability Control (p. 266) Sport mode for electronic stability control Activating/deactivating Sport mode in Electronic Stability Control • Symbols and messages for electronic stability control (p. 267) The ESC7 system is always activated — it cannot be switched off. However, the driver can select ESC Sport Mode, which allows for a more active driving experience. The ESC9 system is always activated — it cannot be switched off. However, the driver can select sport mode, which allows for a more active driving experience. The Sport mode is activated/ deactivated in the centre display's function view. With the ESC Sport Mode subfunction selected, intervention from ESC is reduced and the car is allowed to skid more and greater control than normal is thus transferred to the driver. When ESC Sport Mode is selected, ESC can be considered as deactivated, despite helping the driver in many cases. – NOTE With the ESC Sport Mode function selected, Trailer Stability Assist (TSA8) is deactivated. ESC Sport Mode also provides maximum traction if the car has become bogged down or is driving on a loose surface, such as in sand or deep snow. Related information • • 7 8 9 Tap on the ESC Sport Mode button in the function view. > Sport mode is activated/deactivated - a green/grey indicator is displayed in the button. The driver display indicates activated ESC Sport Mode by displaying this symbol with a constant glow until the function is deactivated or the engine is switched off. The next time the engine is started, the ESC system is back in its normal mode again. Related information • Electronic stability control (p. 264) Electronic stability control (p. 264) Towbar* (p. 444) Electronic Stability Control Trailer Stability Assist Electronic Stability Control * Option/accessory. 265 DRIVER SUPPORT Limitation for sport mode in Electronic Stability Control There are certain limitations associated with the ESC10 system's subfunction ESC Sport Mode being activated. The ESC Sport Mode function cannot be selected when one of the following functions is activated: • • • • Speed limiter Cruise control Adaptive cruise control Pilot Assist. Related information • 10 266 Electronic stability control (p. 264) Electronic Stability Control DRIVER SUPPORT Symbols and messages for electronic stability control Control -ESC) can be shown on the driver display. The following table shows some examples. A number of symbols and messages regarding electronic stability control (Electronic Stability Symbol Message Specification Constant glow for approx. 2 seconds. System check when the engine is started. Flashing light. ESC system is being activated. Constant glow. Sport mode is selected. NOTE: The ESC system is not deactivated in this mode — it is partly reduced. ESC Temporarily off ESC system has been temporarily reduced due to excessive brake temperature - the function is reactivated automatically when the brakes have cooled. See the message in the driver display. ESC ESC system disengaged. Service required • • A text message can be cleared by briefly pressbutton, located in the centre of the ing the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again. Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • Electronic stability control (p. 264) 267 DRIVER SUPPORT Speed Limiter : Reduces stored maximum speed A speed limiter (SL11) can be likened to a reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a preselected/set maximum speed by the speed limiter. Marker for stored max speed The car's current speed Stored maximum speed WARNING • • Buttons and symbols for functions12. : Activates the speed limiter from standby mode and resumes stored maximum speed : Increases the stored maximum speed : From standby mode - activates the speed limiter and stores current speed • The Speed Limiter function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. The driver must always pay attention to traffic conditions and take action if the Speed Limiter is not maintaining a suitable speed. The Speed Limiter is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. : From active mode - deactivates/ changes the speed limiter to standby mode 11 12 268 Speed Limiter NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. Related information • • Limitations for Speed Limiter (p. 272) Activating and starting the Speed Limiter (p. 269) • Managing speed for the Speed Limiter (p. 269) • Deactivate the Speed Limiter and set it in standby mode (p. 270) • Reactivating the Speed Limiter from standby mode (p. 271) • • • Deactivating the Speed Limiter (p. 271) Automatic Speed Limiter (p. 272) Limitations for Automatic Speed Limiter (p. 275) • Activate/deactivate Automatic Speed Limiter (p. 274) • Changing the tolerance for the Automatic Speed Limiter (p. 275) DRIVER SUPPORT Activating and starting the Speed Limiter mum speed that can be stored is 30 km/h (20 mph). Managing speed for the Speed Limiter The speed limiter function (SL13) must first be selected and activated in order to be able to regulate the speed. – The speed limiter (SL14) can be set to different speeds. When the speed limiter is in standby mode symbol is shown - press the and the steering wheel button (2). > The Speed Limiter starts and the current speed is stored as the maximum speed. Set the speed limiter in standby mode Setting/changing the stored speed Related information • NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. – Press ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to browse to the sym(4). bol/function for speed limiter > Symbol (4) is shown and the speed limiter is set in standby mode. Start the Speed Limiter The speed limiter cannot be activated until after the engine has been started. The lowest maxi13 14 Speed Limiter Speed Limiter Speed Limiter (p. 268) NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. – Change the set speed with short or long (1) or presses on steering wheel button (3): • Short press: Each press changes the speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph). • Press and hold: Release the button when the set speed indicator (4) has moved to the desired speed. }} 269 DRIVER SUPPORT || • The speed set after the last button press is stored in the memory. Related information • Speed Limiter (p. 268) Deactivate the Speed Limiter and set it in standby mode Temporary deactivation with the accelerator pedal The speed limiter (SL15) can be temporarily deactivated and set in standby mode. The speed limiter can also be temporarily deactivated and overridden with the accelerator pedal without the speed limiter first having to be set in standby mode - e.g. to be able to quickly accelerate the car out of a situation. In which case, proceed as follows: NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. To deactivate the Speed Limiter and set it in standby mode: – 15 270 Speed Limiter Press the steering wheel button (2). > The speed limit markings and symbols in the driver display change colour from WHITE to GREY - the speed limiter is now temporarily deactivated and the driver can exceed the maximum speed setting. 1. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and release it to interrupt acceleration when the desired speed has been reached. > In this mode, the speed limiter is still activated and the driver display's symbol is therefore WHITE. 2. Fully release the accelerator pedal when the temporary acceleration is finished. > The car is then braked automatically below the last stored maximum speed. Related information • Speed Limiter (p. 268) DRIVER SUPPORT Reactivating the Speed Limiter from standby mode – The speed limiter (SL16) can be reactivated after having been temporarily deactivated and placed in standby mode. Press the steering wheel button (2). > The Speed Limiter indicators and symbols in the driver display change colour from GREY to WHITE — the car will now apply its current speed as the maximum speed. Deactivating the Speed Limiter The speed limiter (SL17) can be deactivated. Related information • Speed Limiter (p. 268) NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. 1. To reactivate the Speed Limiter from standby mode: (2). Press the steering wheel button > The speed limiter is set in standby mode. 2. Press the steering wheel button ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to change to another function. > The driver display's symbol and indicator for speed limiter (4) are switched off which deletes the set/stored maximum speed. 3. Press the steering wheel button again. > Another function is activated. – Press the steering wheel button (1). > The driver display's speed limit markings change colour from GREY to WHITE - the car's speed is then limited again by the last stored maximum speed. or 16 17 Speed Limiter Speed Limiter (2) }} 271 DRIVER SUPPORT || Related information • Speed Limiter (p. 268) Limitations for Speed Limiter Automatic Speed Limiter On steep downhill gradients the speed limiter’s braking effect may be inadequate and hence the stored maximum speed may be exceeded. In this case, the driver is alerted by the message Speed limit exceeded in the driver display. The Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL18) function helps the driver to adapt the car's maximum speed to the speed shown on the road signs. NOTE A text message that the maximum speed is exceeded will be activated if the speed has been exceeded by at least 3 km/h (approx. 2 mph). Related information • 18 19 20 272 Automatic Speed Limiter Speed Limiter Road Sign Information – RSI Speed Limiter (p. 268) The Speed Limiter function (SL19) can be changed to Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL). The automatic speed limiter uses speed information from the Road Sign Information20 function to automatically adapt the car's maximum speed. DRIVER SUPPORT WARNING • • • • The ASL function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. Is SL or ASL active? Symbols in the driver display show which speed limiter function is active: Symbol See also the heading "Limitations for Road Sign Information". ASL Meaning Greenish yellow ASL is active Grey ✓ Even if the driver clearly sees the speedrelated road sign, the speed information from the Road Sign Information (RSI) function to ASL may be incorrect – in such cases the driver must intervene him/herself and accelerate or brake to a suitable speed. ASL is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. SL Colour of sign symbol ✓ Amber/Orange A ✓ Sign symbolB after "70" = ASL is activated. A B ASL has been set in standby mode ASL is in temporary standby mode - e.g. due to a traffic sign not being read. Related information • Speed Limiter (p. 268) WHITE symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby mode. See the following heading "ASL symbol" regarding the meaning of the symbol's colour. The ASL symbol The sign symbol (displayed alongside the stored speed, "70", in the centre of the speedometer) can be shown in three colours with the following meanings: 273 DRIVER SUPPORT Activate/deactivate Automatic Speed Limiter The automatic speed limiter function (ASL21) can be activated and deactivated as a supplement to the speed limiter (SL22). Activate ASL The Speed Sign Assist button is located in the function view of the centre display. To activate the automatic speed limiter: 1. 2. 21 22 274 Press the Speed Sign Assist button. > ASL is set in standby mode, a green indicator appears on the button, and the driver display shows a sign symbol in the centre of the speedometer. Press the steering wheel button . > ASL is activated with the car’s current speed. Automatic Speed Limiter Speed Limiter NOTE • If the Automatic Speed Limiter function is activated, road sign information is shown in the driver display even if RSI is not activated. • To remove road sign information from the driver display, you must deactivate both Automatic Speed Limiter and RSI. • When the Automatic Speed Limiter function is activated but RSI is deactivated, no warnings are given from RSI. In this situation, settings for RSI cannot be adjusted either - to be able to adjust settings as well as receive warnings, RSI must be activated. Deactivate ASL To deactivate the automatic speed limiter: – Tap on the Speed Sign Assist button in the function view. > ASL is deactivated and the button's indication becomes GREY - SL is activated instead. WARNING After switching from ASL to SL the car will no longer follow the signed speed limit but only the maximum speed stored in memory. Related information • Speed Limiter (p. 268) DRIVER SUPPORT Changing the tolerance for the Automatic Speed Limiter – The Automatic Speed Limiter function (ASL23) can be set for different tolerance levels. It is possible to increase/decrease the signed speed limit. If, for example, the car follows a signed speed limit of 70km/h (43 mph) the driver can instead choose to allow the car to maintain 75 km/h (47 mph). Press the steering wheel button (1) until 70 km/h (43 mph) in the centre of the speedometer (4) changes to 75 km/h (47 mph). > After which, the car uses the selected tolerance 5 km/h (4 mph) as long as signs passed are showing 70 km/h (43 mph). The tolerance is followed until a road sign with a lower or higher speed is passed then the car follows the new signed speed limit instead and the tolerance is deleted from the memory. If the Road Sign Information* function is activated, the signed speed limit will then be shown with a RED indicator on the speedometer. The tolerance is adjusted in the same way as the speed setting is in the speed limiter. Limitations for Automatic Speed Limiter Automatic speed limitation takes place using speed information from the RSI25 function - not from the speed limit road signs that the car passes. If RSI25 cannot interpret and provide speed information to the ASL, then the ASL is set in standby mode and changes over to SL. In such cases the driver must intervene and brake to a suitable speed. The ASL will be reactivated when the RSI25 function can once again interpret and provide speed information to the ASL. See also the section "Limitations for Road Sign Information". Related information • Speed Limiter (p. 268) NOTE Buttons and symbols for The maximum selectable tolerance is +/- 10 km/h (5 mph). functions24. Related information • 23 24 25 Speed Limiter (p. 268) Automatic Speed Limiter NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. Road Sign Information - RSI * Option/accessory. 275 DRIVER SUPPORT Cruise Control The cruise control (CC26) helps the driver maintain an even speed, resulting in more relaxed driving on motorways and long, straight roads in regular traffic flows. Overview : Reduces stored speed WARNING Marker for stored speed • The cruise control function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system (see the list of links at the end of this article). • Cruise control is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. The car's current speed Stored speed NOTE In cars equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control*, it is possible to switch between cruise control and Adaptive Cruise Control – see the heading "Switch between CC and ACC". Buttons and symbols for functions27. : Activates cruise control from standby mode and resumes stored speed • Activating and starting Cruise Control (p. 277) : From standby mode - activates cruise control and stores current speed • Managing speed for the Cruise Control (p. 278) : From active mode - deactivates/ changes cruise control to standby mode • Deactivate Cruise Control and set it in standby mode (p. 279) : Increases the stored speed 26 27 276 Related information Cruise Control NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT • Reactivating Cruise Control from standby mode (p. 279) Activating and starting Cruise Control • Deactivating Cruise Control (p. 280) The cruise control function (CC28) must first be selected and activated in order to be able to regulate the speed. Activating/starting cruise control In order to start the Cruise control from the standby mode, the car's current speed must be 30 km/h (20 mph) or higher. The lowest speed that can be stored is 30 km/h (20 mph). To start the cruise control: – With the symbol/function displayed, press the steering wheel button (2). > Cruise Control starts and the current speed becomes the stored speed. NOTE Cruise Control cannot be enabled at speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph). NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. Related information • Cruise Control (p. 276) Set cruise control in standby mode To set cruise control in standby mode: – Press ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to browse to the symbol/function (4). > The symbol is shown and the cruise control can then be activated. 28 Cruise Control 277 DRIVER SUPPORT Managing speed for the Cruise Control • Cruise control (CC29) can be set to different speeds. If the driver increases the car's speed using the accelerator pedal before pressing the steering wheel button (1), the speed stored will be the car's speed when the button is depressed, provided the driver's foot is on the accelerator pedal at the moment when the button is depressed. Setting/changing the stored speed The speed set after the last button press is stored in the memory. A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released. Using engine braking instead of the foot brake Change the set speed with short or long (1) or presses on steering wheel button (3): With Cruise Control, speed is regulated with less frequent application of the foot brake. On a downhill gradient it may sometimes be desirable to start moving a little faster and limit the acceleration by engine braking. In this case the driver can temporarily disable foot brake application by Cruise Control. • To do so, proceed as follows: NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. – • 29 30 278 Short press: Each press changes the speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph). Press and hold: Release the button when the speed indicator (4) has moved to the desired speed Cruise Control See supplementary information in the section "Drive modes". – Depress the accelerator pedal about halfway down and release. > Cruise Control will disengage its automatic foot braking and then uses engine braking only. Cruise control dependence on drive mode The cruise control's way of maintaining a speed may vary depending on the selected drive mode30. Cruise control Eco Cruise In ECO drive mode the cruise control's accelerations and decelerations become smoother compared to other drive modes to optimise fuel and environmental economy. This can cause the car's speed to be temporarily above or below the set speed. See supplementary information in "ECO drive mode" under "Cruise control Eco Cruise". Cruise control Dynamic Cruise In Dynamic drive mode, the cruise control's accelerations and decelerations are felt more strongly and seem more direct compared to other modes. Related information • Cruise Control (p. 276) DRIVER SUPPORT Deactivate Cruise Control and set it in standby mode Cruise control (CC31) can be temporarily deactivated so that it is set in the standby mode and can be reactivated later. Deactivate Cruise Control and set in standby mode Standby mode on driver intervention The cruise control is temporarily deactivated and set in standby mode if: • • • the foot brake is used • the driver maintains a speed higher than the stored speed for longer than 1 minute. the gear selector is moved to N position the clutch pedal is held depressed for longer than 1 minute Reactivating Cruise Control from standby mode Cruise control (CC32) can be temporarily deactivated so that it is set in the standby mode and can be reactivated later. Reactivating cruise control from standby mode The driver must then control the speed himself/ herself. A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released. NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. To set cruise control in standby mode: – 31 32 Press the steering wheel button (2). > The cruise control markings and symbols in the driver display change colour from WHITE to GREY - cruise control is now temporarily deactivated and the driver must then manually control the speed. Cruise Control Cruise Control Automatic standby mode Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set in standby mode if: • • • • wheels lose traction NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. engine speed is too low/high To start cruise control from standby mode: brake temperature is too high speed falls below 30 km/h (20 mph). The driver must then control the speed himself/ herself. Related information • – Press the steering wheel button (1). > The cruise control markings and symbols in the driver display change colour from GREY to WHITE — the car will now follow the most recently stored speed again. Cruise Control (p. 276) }} 279 DRIVER SUPPORT || or Deactivating Cruise Control To start cruise control from standby mode: Cruise Control — CC can be deactivated. – NOTE Press the steering wheel button (2). > The cruise control markings and symbols in the driver display change colour from GREY to WHITE — the car will now follow the current speed. In cars equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control*, it is possible to switch between cruise control and Adaptive Cruise Control – see the heading "Switch between CC and ACC". Related information • Cruise Control (p. 276) WARNING A significant increase in speed may follow when the speed is resumed with the steering wheel button. Related information • Cruise Control (p. 276) Buttons and symbols for functions33. To deactivate cruise control: 1. (2). Press the steering wheel button > Cruise control is set in standby mode. 2. Press the steering wheel button ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to change to another function. > The driver display's symbol for cruise con(4) is extinguished - which trol deletes the set/stored speed. 3. 33 280 Press the steering wheel button again. > Another function is activated. (2) NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Adaptive Cruise Control* (ACC34) The adaptive cruise control helps the driver to maintain an even speed combined with a pre-selected time interval to the vehicle ahead. An adaptive cruise control provides a more relaxing driving experience on long journeys on motorways and long straight main roads in smooth traffic flows. The camera and radar unit measures the distance to the vehicle ahead35. The driver selects the desired speed and a time interval to the vehicle ahead. If the camera and radar unit detects a slower vehicle in front of the car, the speed is adapted automatically via the preset time interval to the vehicle. When the road 34 35 is clear again the car returns to the selected speed. WARNING • The adaptive cruise control function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system (see the list of links at the end of this article). • The adaptive cruise control is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. Adaptive cruise control regulates the speed with acceleration and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a low sound when they are being used to adjust the speed. Adaptive Cruise Control NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. The adaptive cruise control aims to control the speed in a smooth way. In situations that demand sudden braking the driver must brake himself/ herself. This applies in cases of large speed differences or if the vehicle in front brakes suddenly. Due to the limitations of the radar unit, braking may come unexpectedly or not at all. The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval set by the driver. If the radar unit cannot see any vehicle in front then the car will instead maintain the speed set and stored by the driver. This also takes place if the speed of the vehicle ahead increases and exceeds the stored speed. The following applies for cars with automatic gearbox: • Adaptive cruise control can follow another vehicle at speed from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h (125 mph). The following applies for cars with manual gearbox: • The Adaptive cruise control can follow another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to 200 km/h (125 mph). }} * Option/accessory. 281 DRIVER SUPPORT WARNING Overview Reduces the time interval to vehicles ahead • Adaptive cruise control is not a collision avoidance system. The driver is always responsible and must intervene if the system does not detect a vehicle ahead. Controls Target vehicle indicator: ACC has detected and is following a target vehicle at the preset time interval • The adaptive cruise control does not brake for humans or animals, and not for small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for low trailers, oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles and objects. || • Do not use the adaptive cruise control in demanding situations, such as in city traffic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip roads. Symbol for time interval to vehicles ahead NOTE In cars equipped with Adaptive Cruise Control*, it is possible to switch between cruise control and Adaptive Cruise Control – see the heading "Switch between CC and ACC". Buttons and symbols for functions35. : Activates the adaptive cruise control from standby mode and resumes stored speed : Increases the stored speed IMPORTANT Maintenance of adaptive cruise control components must only be performed at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. : From standby mode - activates the adaptive cruise control and stores current speed : From active mode - deactivates/ changes the adaptive cruise control to standby mode : Reduces stored speed Increases the time interval to vehicles ahead 35 282 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT • Managing speed with Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 285) • Setting time interval for Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 286) • Deactivating/reactivating Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 287) • Overtaking assistance with Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 289) • Starting overtaking assistance with Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 289) • Limitations for overtaking assistance with Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 290) • Changing target with Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 290) Speed of vehicle ahead. • Current speed of your car. Automatic braking with Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 291) • Limitations for Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 292) • Change between Cruise Control and Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 292) • Symbols and messages for Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 294) Driver display Indication of speeds35. Stored speed To see different combinations of symbols depending on traffic situation - see the heading "Symbols and messages for the adaptive cruise control". Related information • Adaptive Cruise Control and Collision risk warning (p. 283) • Activating and starting Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 284) 35 36 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. Adaptive Cruise Control and Collision risk warning Audio and symbol for collision warning36. Acoustic warning signal in the event of a risk of collision Warning signal in the event of a risk of collision Distance measurement with the camera and radar unit Adaptive Cruise Control uses approx. 40% of the capacity of the foot brake. If the car needs to be braked more heavily than the adaptive cruise control is capable of and the driver does not brake, the warning lamp and acoustic warning are activated to alert the driver that immediate intervention is required. }} 283 DRIVER SUPPORT || WARNING The adaptive cruise control only warns of vehicles which its radar unit has detected hence a warning may not be given, or it may be given with a certain delay. • Never wait for a warning. Apply the brakes when the situation requires. Activating and starting Adaptive Cruise Control Starting/activating the adaptive cruise control Adaptive cruise control (ACC37) must first be activated and then started if it is to control the speed and distance. In order to start the ACC the following requirements apply: Setting the adaptive cruise control in standby mode • The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and the driver's door must be closed. • There must be a vehicle (the "target vehicle") within reasonable distance in front of the car, or the current speed must be at least 15 km/h (9 mph). • For cars with manual gearbox. Speed must be at the lowest 30 km/h (20 mph). Related information • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 281) NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. Immediately after the engine is started the Adaptive Cruise Control is in the standby mode. To set it in standby mode from active mode, proceed as follows: – 37 284 Press steering wheel button ◀ (2) or ▶ (3) to scroll to the symbol/function (4). > The symbol is displayed and Adaptive Cruise Control is set in standby mode. NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. Adaptive Cruise Control * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT – With the symbol/function (4) displayed, press the steering wheel button (1). > Adaptive cruise control starts and the current speed is stored, which is shown in figures in the centre of the speedometer. Managing speed with Adaptive Cruise Control – The adaptive cruise control (ACC38) can be set to different speeds. • At the same time a speed range is marked. Related information • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 281) • Short press: Each press changes the speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph). • Press and hold: Release the button when the speed indicator (3) has moved to the desired speed. Setting/changing the stored speed The time interval is only adjusted to the vehicle ahead by the ACC when the distance symbol shows two vehicles. The higher speed is the stored/selected speed and the lower speed is that of the vehicle ahead (target vehicle). Change the set speed with short or long (1) or presses on steering wheel button (2): NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model and market. : Increases the stored speed. : Reduces stored speed. The speed set after the last button press is stored in the memory. If the driver increases the car’s speed using the accelerator pedal before pressing the steering wheel button , the speed stored will be the car’s speed when the button is depressed, provided the driver’s foot is on the accelerator pedal at the moment when the button is depressed. A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released. Stored speed. 38 Adaptive Cruise Control }} * Option/accessory. 285 DRIVER SUPPORT || Automatic gearbox Adaptive cruise control can follow another vehicle at speeds from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h (125 mph). Note that the lowest programmable speed for the adaptive cruise control is 30 km/h (20 mph) even though it is capable of following another vehicle down to 0 km/h, a speed lower than 30 km/h (20 mph) cannot be selected/stored. The maximum speed selectable is 200 km/h (125 mph). Manual gearbox The Adaptive cruise control can follow another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to 200 km/h (125 mph). The lowest programmable speed for the adaptive cruise control is 30 km/h (20 mph) - the maximum speed is 200 km/h (125 mph). Related information • 39 40 286 Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 281) Setting time interval for Adaptive Cruise Control The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC39) can be set to different time intervals. Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the driver display as 1-5 horizontal lines - the more lines the longer the time interval. One line represents about 1 second to the vehicle in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds. Control for time interval40. The same symbol is also shown when the Distance Warning function is activated. Decrease time interval Increase time interval NOTE When the symbol in the driver display shows two cars, ACC is following the vehicle in front at a pre-set time interval. When only one car is shown, there is no vehicle within a reasonable distance ahead. Distance indicator – Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to increase or decrease the time interval. > The distance indicator (3) shows the current time interval. The adaptive cruise control allows the time interval to vary significantly in certain situations in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in front smoothly and comfortably. At low speed, when the distances are short, the adaptive cruise control increases the time interval slightly. Adaptive Cruise Control NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT NOTE • The higher the speed the longer the calculated distance in metres for a given time interval. • Only use the time intervals permitted by local traffic regulations. • If the adaptive cruise control does not seem to respond with a speed increase when activated, it may be because the time window to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the set time window. WARNING • Only use a time window that suits the current traffic conditions. • The driver should be aware that short time windows limit the amount of time available to react and take action if an unexpected traffic situation arises. Select one of the following options: • Eco - ACC focuses on optimal fuel economy, which means longer time interval to the vehicle ahead. • Comfort - ACC focuses on following the set time interval to the vehicle ahead as smoothly as possible. • Dynamic - ACC focuses on following the set Deactivating/reactivating Adaptive Cruise Control The Adaptive cruise control (ACC41) can be temporarily deactivated so that it is set in the standby mode and can later be reactivated. Deactivate Adaptive Cruise Control and set it in standby mode time interval to the vehicle ahead more closely, which in certain cases may mean heavier acceleration and braking. See further information in the "Drive modes" sections. Supplementary information can also be found in the sections "Managing speed for the cruise control" and "Drive mode ECO". Related information • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 281) NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. Select how ACC shall maintain the distance* to the vehicle ahead The driver can select different driving styles for how the Adaptive cruise control should maintain the preset time interval to the vehicle ahead. Selection is made via the drive mode control DRIVE MODE. 41 Adaptive Cruise Control }} * Option/accessory. 287 DRIVER SUPPORT || To temporarily switch off Adaptive Cruise Control and set it in standby mode: • – A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released. Press the steering wheel button (2). > Stored speed in the centre of the speedometer changes from BEIGE to GREY and the indication for time interval as well as the symbol for the target vehicle, if on, are switched off. WARNING • • Automatic standby mode The adaptive cruise control is dependent on other systems, e.g. Electronic Stability Control ESC42. If any of the other systems stops working, the adaptive cruise control is deactivated automatically. WARNING With automatic standby mode, the driver is warned via an acoustic signal and a message on the driver display. When the adaptive cruise control is in standby mode and the car comes too close to a vehicle ahead, the driver is warned of the short distance by the Distance Warning function instead. • • • • • the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and ACC is uncertain whether the vehicle ahead is a stationary vehicle or an object, such as a speed bump. • the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the vehicle ahead turns off so that ACC no longer has a vehicle to follow. the gear selector is moved to N position. Electronic Stability Control • • • • • • • speed is reduced to below 30 km/h (20 mph) - only applies to cars with manual gearbox. the driver opens the door. the driver takes off the seatbelt. engine speed is too low/high. one or more wheels lose traction. brake temperature is high. the parking brake is applied. the camera and radar unit is covered by e.g. snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/radio waves are blocked). Reactivating adaptive cruise control from standby mode Automatic standby mode may occur if: the foot brake is used. the driver maintains a speed higher than the stored speed for longer than 1 minute. • The driver must then regulate the car's speed, apply the brakes as needed and maintain a safe distance to other vehicles. Standby mode on driver intervention The Adaptive cruise control is temporarily deactivated and set in standby mode if: 42 288 With the adaptive cruise control is in standby mode, the driver must intervene and regulate both speed and distance to the vehicle ahead. the clutch pedal is depressed for approx. 1 minute - applies to cars with manual gearbox. NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. DRIVER SUPPORT To reactivate ACC from standby mode: – Press the steering wheel button (1). > The speed is then set to the most recently stored speed. Overtaking assistance with Adaptive Cruise Control Starting overtaking assistance with Adaptive Cruise Control Adaptive cruise control (ACC43) can assist the driver when overtaking other vehicles. Continuation for Overtaking Assistance How overtaking assistance works WARNING A significant increase in speed may follow when the speed is resumed with the steering wheel button. Related information • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 281) When ACC is following another vehicle and the driver indicates the intention to overtake by activating the direction indicator44, adaptive cruise control helps by accelerating the vehicle towards the vehicle in front before the driver’s vehicle reaches the overtaking lane. The function then delays reducing speed in order to avoid premature braking when the driver’s car is approaching a slower vehicle. The function remains active until the driver’s vehicle has cleared the overtaken vehicle. The following conditions must exist for Overtaking Assistance to be activated: • there must be a vehicle in front (the “target vehicle”) • your car's current speed is at least 70 km/h (43 mph) • the stored ACC speed must be high enough for overtaking to take place safely. Starting Overtaking Assistance To start the Overtaking Assistance: – Use the left direction indicator in a car with the steering wheel on the left, or the right direction indicator in a car with the steering wheel on the right. > Overtaking Assistance is started. WARNING Be aware that this function can be activated in more situations than during overtaking, e.g. when a direction indicator is used to indicate a change of lane or exit to another road – the car will then accelerate briefly. Activate the direction indicator. Related information • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 281) Related information • 43 44 Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 281) Adaptive Cruise Control On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car. * Option/accessory. 289 DRIVER SUPPORT Limitations for overtaking assistance with Adaptive Cruise Control The overtaking assistance function may have limited functionality in certain situations. WARNING Changing target with Adaptive Cruise Control WARNING When the adaptive cruise control is following another vehicle at speeds in excess of approx. 30 km/h (20 mph) and the target is changed from a moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle, the adaptive cruise control will ignore the stationary vehicle and instead accelerate to the stored speed. In combination with automatic gearbox, the adaptive cruise control (ACC46) has functionality for change of target at certain speeds. Change of target When using the Overtaking Assistance System, the driver should be aware that there may be undesired acceleration if the conditions suddenly change. • Some situations should therefore be avoided, such as if: • the car is approaching an exit for turn-of that is in the same direction as overtaking would normally occur. • the vehicle ahead slows down before the driver's car has crossed over into the overtaking lane • the traffic in the overtaking lane slows down • a right-hand drive car is driven in a county with left-hand traffic (or vice versa). Situations of this kind can be avoided by temporarily setting ACC45 in the standby mode. Related information • 45 46 290 The driver must then intervene him/ herself and brake. Automatic standby mode with change of target The adaptive cruise control is disengaged and set in standby mode: If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there may be stationary traffic in front. When adaptive cruise control is following another vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph) and changes target from a moving to a stationary vehicle, the adaptive cruise control will slow down for the stationary vehicle. • when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the adaptive cruise control is uncertain whether the target object is a stationary vehicle or some other object, such as a speed bump. • when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the vehicle ahead turns off so the adaptive cruise control no longer has a vehicle to follow. Related information • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 281) Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 281) Adaptive Cruise Control Adaptive Cruise Control * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Automatic braking with Adaptive Cruise Control NOTE The Adaptive cruise control (ACC47) has a special brake function in slow traffic and while stationary. ACC can keep the car stationary for a maximum of 5 minutes. After this the parking brake is applied and adaptive cruise control is disengaged. Brake function in slow queues and while stationary The parking brake must be released before the adaptive cruise control can be reactivated. For shorter stops in connection with inching in slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is automatically resumed if the stops do not exceed about 3 seconds - if it takes longer before the car in front starts moving again then the adaptive cruise control is set in standby mode with automatic braking. – The Adaptive Cruise Control is reactivated in one of the following ways: • • Press the steering wheel button . Depress the accelerator pedal. > The Adaptive Cruise Control resumes following the vehicle ahead if it starts moving forward within 6 seconds. Cessation of automatic braking In some situations, automatic braking ceases on reaching 0 km/h and Adaptive Cruise Control is set in standby mode. This means that the brakes are released and the car may start to roll - the driver must therefore intervene and brake the car himself/herself to keep it stationary. This takes place if the adaptive cruise control is holding the car stationary with the foot brake and: • the driver opens the door or takes off his/her seatbelt • ACC has kept the car stationary for more than approx. 5 minutes • • the brakes have overheated the driver switches the engine off manually. Related information • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 281) This may take place in the following situations: • the driver puts his/her foot on the brake pedal • • the parking brake is applied • the driver sets the adaptive cruise control in the standby mode. the gear selector is moved to P, N, or R position Automatic activation of parking brake In certain situations the parking brake is applied to keep the car stationary. 47 Adaptive Cruise Control * Option/accessory. 291 DRIVER SUPPORT Limitations for Adaptive Cruise Control Adaptive cruise control (ACC48) may have limitations in certain situations. Steep roads and/or heavy load Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is primarily intended for use when driving on level road surfaces. The function may have difficulty in keeping the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes - in which case, be extra attentive and ready to brake. • Do not use adaptive cruise control if the car has a heavy load or a trailer is connected to the car. Miscellaneous • Drive mode Off Road cannot be selected when the adaptive cruise control is activated. NOTE The function uses the car's camera unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limitations for camera unit" section. NOTE The function uses the car's radar unit, which has some general limitations, see the section "Limitations for radar unit". 48 292 Related information • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 281) Change between Cruise Control and Adaptive Cruise Control In a car with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC49) the driver can change between Cruise Control (CC50) and ACC. A symbol in the driver display shows which cruise control is active: CC ACC A Cruise control A A Adaptive cruise control WHITE symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby mode Changing from ACC to CC Proceed as follows: 1. Set adaptive cruise control to standby mode using steering wheel button . 2. Press the Cruise Control button in the centre display's function view - the button's indicator changes colour from GREY to GREEN. > The symbol in the driver display changes from ACC to CC. Adaptive Cruise Control is now switched off and Cruise Control is set to standby mode. Adaptive Cruise Control * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Press the steering wheel button . > Cruise control starts and stores the current speed. 3. 2. WARNING from CC to ACC. Adaptive Cruise Control is now activated and set to standby mode. Switching from ACC to CC means that the car: • no longer maintains a preset time interval to the vehicle ahead. • only follows the stored speed, and the driver must therefore apply the brakes when necessary. If CC is active when the engine is switched off, ACC will be activated automatically the next time the engine is started. Tap on the Cruise Control button in the function view - the button's indicator changes colour from GREEN to GREY. > The symbol in the driver display changes 3. . Press the steering wheel button > Adaptive cruise control starts and stores the current speed, together with the preset time interval to the vehicle ahead. Related information • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 281) Changing from CC to ACC Proceed as follows: 1. 49 50 Set cruise control to standby mode using the steering wheel button. Adaptive Cruise Control Cruise Control * Option/accessory. 293 DRIVER SUPPORT Symbols and messages for Adaptive Cruise Control A number of symbols and messages regarding the Adaptive cruise control (ACC51) can be shown in the driver display. The previous illustration53 shows that the adaptive cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and that there is no vehicle ahead to follow. (68 mph) and at the same time is following a vehicle ahead which is keeping the same speed. Here are some examples52. The previous illustration53 shows that the adaptive cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h 51 52 53 294 Adaptive Cruise Control In the following illustrative example, the RSI (Road Sign Information) function informs the driver that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h (80 mph). NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. DRIVER SUPPORT Symbol Message Specification The symbol is WHITE. The car is maintaining the stored/selected speed. Adaptive cruise Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode. Unavailable The symbol is GREY. Adaptive cruise Service required The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The symbol is GREY. Windscreen sensor Clean the windscreen in front of the camera and radar unit's detectors. Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 281) * Option/accessory. 295 DRIVER SUPPORT Pilot Assist Pilot Assist helps the driver to drive the car between the lane's side markings using steering assistance as well as to maintain an even speed, combined with a preselected time interval to the vehicle ahead. How Pilot Assist works The Pilot Assist function is primarily intended for use on motorways and similar major roads where it can contribute to more comfortable driving and a more relaxed driving experience. The driver selects the desired speed and a time interval to the vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist scans the distance to the vehicle ahead and the lane's side markings on the road surface using the camera and radar unit. The preset time interval is maintained with automatic speed adjustment whilst the steering assistance helps to position the car in the lane. Pilot Assist steering assistance takes into account the speed of the preceding car and the lane markings. The driver can at any time ignore the Pilot Assist steering recommendation and steer in another direction, e.g. to change lane or avoid an obstruction on the road. If Pilot Assist cannot interpret the lane unambiguously, e.g. if the camera and radar unit does not see the lane's side markings, Pilot Assist temporarily deactivates steering assistance, but resumes it if the lane can be interpreted again although the speed and distance control functions remain active. WARNING The camera and radar unit measures the distance to the vehicle ahead and detects side markings54. Camera and radar unit Pilot Assist steering assistance is automatically deactivated and is resumed without prior warning. Distance readers Readers, side markings 54 296 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. The current status of steering assistance is indicated by the colour of the steering wheel's symbol: • GREEN steering wheel indicates active steering assistance • GREY steering wheel (as in illustration) indicates deactivated steering assistance. DRIVER SUPPORT WARNING • • • • The Pilot Assist function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system (see the list of links at the end of this article). Pilot Assist must only be used if there are clear lane lines painted on each side of the lane. All other use involves increased risk of contact with surrounding obstacles that cannot be detected by the function. Pilot Assist is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, positioned correctly in the lane, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. Pilot Assist regulates the speed with acceleration and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a low sound when they are being used to adjust the speed. Pilot Assist attempts to regulate the speed smoothly. In situations that demand sudden braking the driver must brake himself/herself. This applies in cases of large speed differences or if the car in front brakes suddenly. Due to the limitations of the camera and radar unit, braking may come unexpectedly or not at all. Pilot Assist aims to follow the vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval set by the driver. If the radar unit cannot see any vehicle in front then the car will instead maintain the speed set and stored by the driver. This also takes place if the speed of the vehicle ahead increases and exceeds the stored speed. The following applies for cars with automatic gearbox: • • Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at speeds from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h (125 mph). Pilot Assist can give steering assistance from almost stationary up to 140 km/h (87 mph). The following applies for cars with manual gearbox: • • Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to 200 km/h (125 mph). Pilot Assist can give steering assistance from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to 140 km/h (87 mph). WARNING • Pilot Assist is not a collision avoidance system. The driver must intervene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front. • Pilot Assist does not brake for people, animals, objects, small vehicles (e.g. cycles and motorcycles), low trailers as well as oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles. • Do not use Pilot Assist in demanding situations, such as in city traffic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads, on slip roads, or with a trailer connected to the car. IMPORTANT Maintenance of Pilot Assist internal components must only be performed at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Round bends and when the road splits Pilot Assist interacts with the driver, who should therefore not await the steering assistance from Pilot Assist but should always be prepared to increase his/her own steering input, especially on bends. }} 297 DRIVER SUPPORT || When the car approaches an exit or if the lane splits, the driver should steer towards the desired lane so that Pilot Assist can specify the desired direction. Overview Increases the time interval to vehicles ahead Controls ▶: Switches from adaptive cruise control to Pilot Assist Reduces the time interval to vehicles ahead Pilot Assist strives to keep the car in the middle of the lane When Pilot Assist helps to steer, it strives to position the car in between the lane markings and therefore it is recommended to let the car find the optimal placement to achieve as smooth a driving experience as possible. The driver checks that the car is positioned safely in the lane, and always has the ability to adjust the position by making his/her own steering corrections. If Pilot Assist does not position the car in an appropriate way in the lane, it is recommended to turn Pilot Assist off or switch to Adaptive cruise control. Function symbol Symbols for target vehicle and time interval to vehicles ahead Symbol for activated/deactivated steering assistance Buttons and symbols for functions54. : Activates Pilot Assist from standby mode and resumes the stored speed and time interval : Increases the stored speed : From standby mode - activates Pilot Assist and stores the current speed : From active mode - deactivates/ changes Pilot Assist to standby mode ◀: Switches from Pilot Assist to adaptive cruise control : Reduces stored speed 54 298 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. DRIVER SUPPORT Driver display Indication of speeds54. • • Deactivating/activating Pilot Assist (p. 304) • Start overtaking assistance with Pilot Assist (p. 306) • Limitations for overtaking assistance with Pilot Assist (p. 306) • • • • Change the target with Pilot Assist (p. 307) Overtaking assistance with Pilot Assist (p. 306) Pilot Assist and Collision risk warning Automatic braking with Pilot Assist (p. 307) Limitations of Pilot Assist (p. 308) Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist* (p. 309) Stored speed Speed of vehicle ahead Current speed of your car To see different combinations of symbols depending on traffic situation - see the heading "Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist". Related information • Pilot Assist and Collision risk warning (p. 299) • • • Activating and starting Pilot Assist (p. 300) 54 Managing speed for Pilot Assist (p. 301) Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist (p. 302) NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. }} * Option/accessory. 299 DRIVER SUPPORT || Collision risk warning WARNING Pilot Assist only gives warning about vehicles detected by its camera and radar unit – therefore a warning may not occur or be delayed. • Activating and starting Pilot Assist Pilot Assist must first be activated and then started to be able to control speed and distance and to give steering assistance. Never wait for a warning. Apply the brakes when the situation requires! Related information • Pilot Assist (p. 296) Audio and symbol for collision warning55. Acoustic warning signal in the event of a risk of collision Warning signal in the event of a risk of collision Distance measurement with the camera and radar unit Pilot Assist uses approx. 40% of the foot brake's capacity. If the car needs to be braked more heavily than Pilot Assist is capable of and the driver does not brake, the warning lamp and acoustic warning are activated to alert the driver that immediate intervention is required. 55 300 The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. In order to start the Pilot Assist it is required that: • The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and the driver's door must be closed. • There must be a vehicle (the "target vehicle") within reasonable distance in front of the car, or the current speed must be at least 15 km/h (9 mph). • For cars with manual gearbox. Speed must be at the lowest 30 km/h (20 mph). DRIVER SUPPORT With the Adaptive cruise control in standby mode: 1. 2. Press the steering wheel button ▶ (6). > The symbol changes to Pilot Assist in standby mode (8). Press the steering wheel button (2). > Pilot Assist is started and current speed is stored, which is shown with figures in the centre of the speedometer. ...or... Hands on the steering wheel Managing speed for Pilot Assist In order for Pilot Assist to function, the driver’s hands must be on the steering wheel. If Pilot Assist detects that the driver is not holding the steering wheel, the driver is prompted to actively steer the car via a text message and an acoustic signal. Pilot Assist can be set to different speeds. If Pilot Assist still cannot detect that the driver is holding the steering wheel, the function shifts to standby mode. Pilot Assist must then be restar. ted with the steering wheel button With the Adaptive cruise control started: – NOTE Press the steering wheel button ▶ (6). > Pilot Assist is started. Pilot Assist steering assistance is only active when the steering wheel symbol (2) has changed from GREY to GREEN. Pilot Assist only regulates the time interval to the vehicle ahead when the distance symbol shows a vehicle (1) above the steering wheel symbol. Setting/changing the stored speed Note that Pilot Assist only works when the driver has hands on the steering wheel. Related information • Pilot Assist (p. 296) NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model and market. : Increases the stored speed : Reduces stored speed Stored speed At the same time a speed range is marked. The higher speed is the stored/selected speed and the lower speed is that of the vehicle ahead (target vehicle). }} 301 DRIVER SUPPORT || – Change the set speed with short or long (1) or presses on steering wheel button (2): • • • Short press: Each press changes the speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph). Press and hold: Release the button when the speed indicator (3) has moved to the desired speed. The speed set after the last button press is stored in the memory. If the driver increases the car’s speed using the accelerator pedal before pressing the steering wheel button , the speed stored will be the car’s speed when the button is depressed, provided the driver’s foot is on the accelerator pedal at the moment when the button is depressed. A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released. Automatic gearbox Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at speeds from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h (125 mph). Note that the lowest programmable speed for Pilot Assist is 30 km/h (20 mph) - even though it is capable of following another vehicle down to 0 km/h, a speed lower than 30 km/h (20 mph) cannot be selected/stored. 302 The maximum speed selectable is 200 km/h (125 mph). Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist Manual gearbox Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to 200 km/h (125 mph). Pilot Assist can be set with different time intervals. The lowest programmable speed for Pilot Assist is 30 km/h (20 mph) - the maximum speed is 200 km/h (125 mph). Related information • Pilot Assist (p. 296) Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the driver display as 1-5 horizontal lines - the more lines the longer the time interval. One line represents about 1 second to the vehicle in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds. NOTE When the symbol in the driver display shows a car and a steering wheel, Pilot Assist follows a vehicle in front at a preset time gap. When only one steering wheel is shown, there is no vehicle within a reasonable distance ahead. DRIVER SUPPORT NOTE • The higher the speed the longer the calculated distance in metres for a given time interval. • Only use the time intervals permitted by local traffic regulations. • If Pilot Assist does not seem to respond with a speed increase when activated, it may be because the time window to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the set time window. Control for time interval56. Decrease time interval Increase time interval Distance indicator – Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to increase or decrease the time interval. > The distance indicator (3) shows the current time interval. In order to follow the vehicle ahead in a smooth and comfortable way, Pilot Assist allows the time interval to vary noticeably in certain conditions. For example, at low speed, when the distances become short, Pilot Assist increases the time interval slightly. 56 WARNING • Only use a time window that suits the current traffic conditions. • The driver should be aware that short time windows limit the amount of time available to react and take action if an unexpected traffic situation arises. Select one of the following options: • Eco - Pilot Assist focuses on optimal fuel economy, which means longer time interval to the vehicle ahead. • Comfort - Pilot Assist focuses on following the set time interval to the vehicle ahead as smoothly as possible. • Dynamic - Pilot Assist focuses on following the set time interval to the vehicle ahead more closely, which in certain cases may mean heavier acceleration and braking. See further information in the "Drive modes" sections. Supplementary information can also be found in the sections "Managing speed for the cruise control" and "Drive mode ECO". Related information • Pilot Assist (p. 296) Select how Pilot Assist shall maintain the distance* to the vehicle ahead The driver can select different driving styles for how Pilot Assist should maintain the preset time interval to the vehicle ahead. Selection is made via the drive mode control DRIVE MODE. NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. * Option/accessory. 303 DRIVER SUPPORT Deactivating/activating Pilot Assist ...or... Pilot Assist can be temporarily deactivated so that it is set in the standby mode and can be reactivated later. – Press the steering wheel button ◀ (3). > Pilot Assist is switched off and changes to the Adaptive cruise control in active mode. Deactivating and setting Pilot Assist in standby mode NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. To temporarily switch off Pilot Assist and set it in standby mode: – 304 Press the steering wheel button (2). > Pilot Assist is set in standby mode - the symbol (8) in the driver display changes colour from WHITE to GREY and the stored speed in the centre of the speedometer changes from BEIGE to GREY. • WARNING • With Pilot Assist in standby mode, the driver must intervene and steer, regulating both speed and distance to the vehicle ahead. • When Pilot Assist is in standby mode and the car comes too close to a vehicle ahead, the driver is warned of the short distance by the Distance Warning function instead. Standby mode on driver intervention Pilot Assist is temporarily deactivated and set in standby mode if: • • • the foot brake is used. • the driver maintains a speed higher than the stored speed for longer than 1 minute. the gear selector is moved to N position. the direction indicators are used for longer than 1 minute. the clutch pedal is depressed for approx. 1 minute - applies to cars with manual gearbox. A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released. When the direction indicators are used, Pilot Assist steering assistance is temporarily disengaged. When this is no longer the case, steering assistance is automatically reactivated if the lane's side markings can still be detected. DRIVER SUPPORT Automatic standby mode Pilot Assist is dependent on other systems, e.g. stability control/anti-skid ESC57. If any of these other systems stops working, Pilot Assist is switched off automatically. • • WARNING With automatic standby mode, the driver is warned via an acoustic signal and a message on the driver display. • The driver must then regulate the car's speed, apply the brakes as needed and maintain a safe distance to other vehicles. • the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and Pilot Assist is uncertain whether the vehicle ahead is a stationary vehicle or an object, such as a speed bump. To reactivate Pilot Assist: – the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the vehicle ahead turns off so that Pilot Assist no longer has a vehicle to follow. WARNING A significant increase in speed may follow when the speed is resumed with the steering wheel button. speed is reduced to below 30 km/h (20 mph) - only applies to cars with manual gearbox. Reactivating Pilot Assist from the standby mode Press the steering wheel button (1). > The speed is then set to the most recently stored speed. Related information • Pilot Assist (p. 296) Automatic standby mode may occur if, for example: • • • • • • • • 57 the driver opens the door. brake temperature is high. the driver's hands are not on the steering wheel. the parking brake is applied. engine speed is too low/high. the driver takes off the seatbelt. one or more wheels lose traction. NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. the camera and radar unit is covered by e.g. snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/radio waves are blocked). Electronic Stability Control 305 DRIVER SUPPORT Overtaking assistance with Pilot Assist Start overtaking assistance with Pilot Assist Limitations for overtaking assistance with Pilot Assist Pilot Assist can help the driver when overtaking other vehicles. Continuation for Overtaking Assistance The overtaking assistance function may have limited functionality in certain situations. How overtaking assistance works When Pilot Assist is following another vehicle and the driver indicates the intention to overtake by activating the direction indicator58, Pilot Assist helps by accelerating the vehicle towards the vehicle in front before the driver’s vehicle reaches the overtaking lane. The following conditions must exist for Overtaking Assistance to be activated: • there must be a vehicle in front (the “target vehicle”) • your car's current speed is at least 70 km/h (43 mph) • the stored Pilot Assist speed must be high enough for overtaking to take place safely. The function then delays reducing speed in order to avoid premature braking when the driver’s car is approaching a slower vehicle. Starting Overtaking Assistance The function remains active until the driver’s vehicle has cleared the overtaken vehicle. – 58 306 Some situations should therefore be avoided, such as if: Activate the direction indicator. Use the left direction indicator in a car with the steering wheel on the left, or the right direction indicator in a car with the steering wheel on the right. > Overtaking Assistance is started. Related information • Related information • When using the Overtaking Assistance System, the driver should be aware that there may be undesired acceleration if the conditions suddenly change. To start the Overtaking Assistance: WARNING Be aware that this function can be activated in more situations than during overtaking, e.g. when a direction indicator is used to indicate a change of lane or exit to another road – the car will then accelerate briefly. WARNING Pilot Assist (p. 296) On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car. Pilot Assist (p. 296) • the car is approaching an exit for turn-of that is in the same direction as overtaking would normally occur. • the vehicle ahead slows down before the driver's car has crossed over into the overtaking lane • the traffic in the overtaking lane slows down • a right-hand drive car is driven in a county with left-hand traffic (or vice versa). Situations of this kind can be avoided by temporarily setting Pilot Assist in the standby mode. Related information • Pilot Assist (p. 296) DRIVER SUPPORT Change the target with Pilot Assist In combination with automatic gearbox, Pilot Assist has functionality for change of target at certain speeds. Automatic standby mode with change of target Pilot Assist is disengaged and set in standby mode: Change of target • • when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and Pilot Assist is uncertain whether the target object is a stationary vehicle or some other object, e.g. a speed bump. when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the vehicle in front turns off so the Pilot Assist no longer has a vehicle to follow. Related information • If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there may be stationary traffic in front. When Pilot Assist is following another vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph) and changes target from a moving to a stationary vehicle, Pilot Assist will slow down for the stationary vehicle. WARNING When Pilot Assist is following another vehicle at speeds in excess of approx. 30 km/h (20 mph) and the target is changed from a moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle, Pilot Assist will ignore the stationary vehicle and instead accelerate to the stored speed. • The driver must then intervene him/ herself and brake. Pilot Assist (p. 296) Automatic braking with Pilot Assist Pilot Assist has a special brake function in slow traffic and while stationary. Brake function in slow queues and while stationary For shorter stops in connection with inching in slow traffic or at traffic lights, driving is automatically resumed if the stops do not exceed approx. 3 seconds - if it takes longer before the vehicle in front starts moving again then Pilot Assist is set in standby mode with automatic braking. – Pilot Assist is reactivated in the following way: • • Press the steering wheel button . Depress the accelerator pedal. > Pilot Assist resumes following the vehicle ahead if it starts moving forward within 6 seconds. NOTE Pilot Assist can hold the car stationary for a maximum of 5 minutes - then the parking brake is applied and the function is disengaged. Before Pilot Assist can be reactivated, the parking brake must be released. }} 307 DRIVER SUPPORT || Cessation of automatic braking In some situations, automatic braking ceases on coming to a standstill and Pilot Assist is set in standby mode. This means that the brakes are released and the car may start to roll - the driver must therefore intervene and brake the car himself/herself to keep it stationary. This may take place in the following situations: • the driver puts his/her foot on the brake pedal • • the parking brake is applied • the gear selector is moved to P, N, or R position In certain situations, the parking brake is applied in order to keep the car stationary. This takes place if Pilot Assist is holding the car stationary with the foot brake and: • the driver opens the door or takes off his/her seatbelt • Pilot Assist has kept the car stationary for more than approx. 5 minutes • • the brakes have overheated the driver switches the engine off manually. Related information 308 The Pilot Assist function may have limitations in certain situations. The Pilot Assist function is an aid which can help the driver in many situations. But the driver is at all times responsible for maintaining a safe distance to surrounding objects and a correct position in the lane. WARNING In certain situations, Pilot Assist steering assistance may have difficulty helping the driver in the right way or it may be automatically deactivated - in which case, the use of Pilot Assist is not recommended. Examples of such situations may be that: • the lane markings are worn, missing or cross each other. • lane division is unclear, for example, when the lanes divide or merge or at exits or in the event of multiple sets of markings. • edges or other lines than lane markings are present on or near the road, e.g. kerbs, joints or repairs to the road surface, edges of barriers, roadside edges or strong shadows. the driver sets Pilot Assist in the standby mode. Automatic activation of parking brake • Limitations of Pilot Assist Pilot Assist (p. 296) • • • the lane is narrow or winding. the lane contains ridges or holes. weather conditions are poor, e.g. rain, snow or fog or slush or impaired view with poor light conditions, back-lighting, wet road surface etc. The driver should also note that Pilot Assist has the following limitations: • High kerbs, roadside barriers, temporary obstacles (traffic cones, safety barriers, etc.) are not detected. Alternatively, they may be detected incorrectly as lane markings, with a subsequent risk of contact DRIVER SUPPORT between the car and such obstacles. The driver must ensure him/herself that the car is at a suitable distance from such obstacles. • The camera and radar sensor does not have the capacity to detect all oncoming objects and obstacles in traffic environments, e.g. potholes, stationary obstacles or objects which completely or partially block the route. • Pilot Assist does not "see" pedestrians, animals, etc. • The recommended steering input is force limited, which means that it cannot always help the driver to steer and keep the car within the lane. • the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes - in which case, be extra attentive and ready to brake. • Do not use Pilot Assist if the car has a heavy load or a trailer is connected to the car. Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist* A number of symbols and messages regarding Pilot Assist can be shown via the driver display. NOTE Pilot Assist cannot be activated if a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is connected to the car's electrical system. Miscellaneous • Off Road drive mode cannot be selected when Pilot Assist is activated. NOTE Pilot Assist is switched off if the power steering is working with reduced power e.g. during cooling due to overheating (see section "Speed-dependent steering force"). The function uses the car's camera unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limitations for camera unit" section. NOTE The driver always has the possibility of correcting or adjusting a steering intervention imposed by Pilot Assist and can turn the steering wheel to the desired position. Steep roads and/or heavy load Bear in mind that Pilot Assist is primarily intended for use when driving on level road surfaces. The function may have difficulty in keeping The function uses the car's radar unit, which has some general limitations, see the section "Limitations for radar unit". Related information • • Pilot Assist (p. 296) Speed-dependent steering force (p. 262) }} * Option/accessory. 309 DRIVER SUPPORT || Here are some examples59. The previous illustration60 shows that Pilot Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and that there is no vehicle ahead to follow. Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance since the lane's side markings cannot be detected. 59 60 310 The previous illustration60 shows that Pilot Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and at the same time is following a vehicle ahead which is keeping the same speed. The previous illustration60 shows that Pilot Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and at the same time is following a vehicle ahead which is keeping the same speed. Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance since the lane's side markings cannot be detected. Here, Pilot Assist also provides steering assistance since the lane's side markings can be detected. In the following illustrative example, the RSI (Road Sign Information) function informs the driver that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h (80 mph). NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. DRIVER SUPPORT Radar unit The radar unit is used by several driver support systems and has the task of sensing other vehicles. Related information • • • Limitations for radar device (p. 312) Recommended radar device maintenance (p. 315) Type approval for radar device (p. 316) The previous illustration60 shows that Pilot Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and that there is no vehicle ahead to follow. Here too, Pilot Assist provides steering assistance since the lane's side markings can be detected. Related information • Pilot Assist (p. 296) NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. The radar unit is used by the following functions: • • • • • Distance Warning* Adaptive cruise control* Lane assistance Pilot Assist* City Safety Modification of the radar unit could result in its use being illegal. 60 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. * Option/accessory. 311 DRIVER SUPPORT Limitations for radar device The radar unit has certain limitations - which in turn also limits those functions that use the unit. Blocked unit The radar unit is placed inside the upper section of the windscreen together with the car's camera unit. IMPORTANT Do not place, stick or mount anything on the outside or inside of the windscreen in front of or around the camera and radar unit — this can interfere with camera and radar-dependent functions. If the driver display shows this symbol and the message "Windscreen sensor Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual", this means that the camera and radar unit cannot detect other vehicles, cyclists, pedestrians and larger animals in front of the car and that the car's camera-based and radar-based functions may be disrupted, reduced, completely deactivated or give an incorrect function response. This may mean that functions are reduced, deactivated completely or give incorrect function response. The marked area must be kept free from stickers, objects, shade film, etc.61. The following table presents examples of possible causes for a message being shown, along with the appropriate action: Cause Action The windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit is dirty or covered with ice or snow. Clean dirt, ice and snow from the windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit. Thick fog and heavy rain or snow block the radar signals or the camera view. No action. Sometimes the unit does not work during heavy rain or snowfall. 61 312 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. DRIVER SUPPORT Cause Action Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar signals or camera view. No action. Sometimes the unit does not work on a very wet or snow-covered road surface. Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the camera and radar unit. Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the unit's cover cleaned - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. that drives in between your car and the vehicle ahead. NOTE Keep the windscreen clean in front of the camera and radar unit. Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehicles not driving in the centre of the lane can remain undetected. Vehicle speed In bends, the radar unit may detect the wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle from view. The capacity of the radar unit to detect vehicles ahead is reduced significantly if: • the speed of the vehicle ahead is significantly different from that of your own car Low trailers Limited field of vision The radar unit has a limited field of vision. In some situations another vehicle is not detected, or the detection is made later than expected. Low trailer in radar shadow. The radar unit's field of vision. Sometimes the radar unit is late at detecting vehicles at close distances - e.g. a vehicle Low trailers can also be difficult for the radar unit to detect, or are not detected at all - the driver should therefore be particularly careful when driving behind low trailers when the adaptive cruise control or Pilot Assist is activated. }} 313 DRIVER SUPPORT || High temperature At very high temperatures the camera and radar unit can temporarily be switched off for about 15 minutes after the engine is started so as to protect the unit's electronics. The camera and radar unit restarts automatically when the temperature has fallen sufficiently. IMPORTANT If a crack, scratch or stone chip in the windscreen in front of one of the camera and radar unit “windows” covers an area of approx. 0.5 × 3.0 mm (0.02 × 0.12 in.) or larger, a workshop must be contacted to have the windscreen replaced – an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. If not rectified it can lead to reduced performance for the driver support systems that use the camera and radar unit. This may mean that functions are reduced, deactivated completely or give incorrect function response. To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or reduced operation of driver support systems that use the radar unit, the following also applies: 314 • Damaged windscreen • Volvo recommends against repairing cracks, scratches or stone chips in the area in front of the camera and radar unit. Instead, the whole windscreen should be replaced. • Before replacing a windscreen, contact an authorised Volvo workshop to verify that the correct windscreen is ordered and fitted. The same type or Volvo-approved windscreen wipers must be fitted during replacement. IMPORTANT When the windscreen is replaced, the camera and radar unit must be recalibrated at the workshop to ensure the functionality of all the car’s camera and radar-based systems. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • Radar unit (p. 311) DRIVER SUPPORT Recommended radar device maintenance In order that the camera and radar unit shall function correctly, the windscreen in front of the unit must be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo. NOTE Dirt, ice and snow covering the camera and radar unit will reduce its function and may prevent measurement. This may mean that functions are reduced, deactivated completely or give incorrect function response. Related information • Radar unit (p. 311) 315 DRIVER SUPPORT Type approval for radar device The type approval for the car's radar units in the ACC62, PA63 and BLIS64 functions can be read out here. Market ACCA & PAB Symbol Type approval ✓ Botswana Brazil BLISC For BLIS64, the information is also on the Internet: www.hella.com/VCC. Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário, isto é, não tem direito à proteção contra interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo tipo, e não pode causar interferência a sistemas operando em caráter primário. ✓ Modelo: L2C0054TR 4122-14-8645 ✓ 62 63 64 316 ACC = Adaptive Cruise Control PA = Pilot Assist BLIS = Blind Spot Information 03563-17-05364 DRIVER SUPPORT Market ACCA & PAB BLISC Symbol Type approval Hereby, Delphi Electronics and Safety declares that L2C0054TR is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU (RED). The original declaration of conformity can be accessed at the following link www.delphi.com/automotive-homologation. ✓ Frequency Band: 76GHz – 77GHz Maximum Output Power: 55dBm EIRP The Declaration of Conformity may be consulted at Delphi Electronics & Safety / 2151 E. Lincoln Road / Kokomo, Indiana 46902 USA Europe Hereby, Hella KgaA Hueck & Co., declares that RS4 is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU. ✓ The Declaration of conformity may be consulted at Hella KGaA Hueck & Co., Rixbecker Straße 75/ 59552 Lippstadt, Germany and on the website www.hella.com/vcc. Frequency Band: 24050-24250 MHz Maximum Output Power: 20 dBm EIRP Registered No: ER37536/15 ✓ The United Arab Emirates (UAE) Dealer No: DA37380/15 ✓ Registered No: ER53878/17 Dealer No: DA44932/15 }} 317 DRIVER SUPPORT || Market ACCA & PAB BLISC 4927 Indonesia ✓ PLG ID: 6051 Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD) TRC/LPD/2017/63 Certification No. ✓ Lebanon Certificate number: 50459/SDPPI/2017 Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2014/255 ✓ ✓ Korea Type approval 37295/POSTEL/2014 ✓ Jordan Symbol MSIP-CMI- DPH-L2C0054TR ✓ MSIP-CMM-HLA-RS4 ✓ Not available at time of publication. AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC Morocco ✓ NUMÉRO D’AGRÉMENT: MR 9929 ANRT 2014 DATE D’AGRÉMENT: 26/12/2014 318 DRIVER SUPPORT Market ACCA & PAB BLISC ✓ Symbol Type approval IFETEL: RLVDEL215-0299 Radar de corto alcance Mexico ✓ RS4 Hella KGaA Hueck & Co IFETEL: RLVHERS17-0286 Moldova ✓ ✓ Russia ✓ ✓ И011 14 ✓ Serbia ✓ И011 17 }} 319 DRIVER SUPPORT || Market ACCA & PAB BLISC ✓ Singapore ✓ DA 103238 TA-2014/1824 ✓ ✓ Taiwan Type approval DA 105753 ✓ South Africa Symbol TA-2016/3407 CCAB15LP0560T3 ✓ CCAB17LP0470T5 Delphi і Ukraine і ( 2009 .) Д Delphi. ✓ ✓ A B C 320 ACC = Adaptive Cruise Control PA = Pilot Assist BLIS = Blind Spot Information є, щ і і ь ) і і і і RACAM і і (П ь і є П і і КМ № 679 і 24 і Delphi і : DRIVER SUPPORT Type approval for radio equipment Market Europe Symbol Type approval Hereby, Volvo cars, declares that all radio equipment's are in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU. Related information • Radar unit (p. 311) 321 DRIVER SUPPORT Camera unit The camera unit is used by several driver support systems and has the task of for example detecting lane lines or traffic signs. Related information • • Limitations for camera unit (p. 323) Recommended camera device maintenance (p. 326) NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. The camera unit is used by the following functions: • • • • • • • • 322 Adaptive cruise control* Pilot Assist* Lane assistance* Steering assistance at risk of collision City Safety Driver Alert Control* Road Sign Information* Active main beam* * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Limitations for camera unit Blocked unit The camera unit has certain limitations - which in turn also limits those functions that use the unit. Impaired vision The camera has limitations similar to the human eye, i.e. it can "see" worse in for example intense snowfall or rain, dense fog, heavy dust storms and snow flurries. Under such conditions, the functions of camera-dependent systems could be significantly reduced or temporarily disengaged. Strong oncoming light, reflections in the carriageway, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty road surfaces or unclear lane markings can also significantly reduce camera function when it is used to scan the carriageway to detect pedestrians, cyclists, large animals and other vehicles. The marked area must be kept free from stickers, objects, shade film, etc.65. If the driver display shows this symbol and the message "Windscreen sensor Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual", this means that the camera and radar unit cannot detect other vehicles, cyclists, pedestrians and larger animals in front of the car and that the car's camera-based and radar-based functions may be disrupted, reduced, completely deactivated or give an incorrect function response. The following table presents examples of possible causes for a message being shown, along with the appropriate action: The camera unit is placed inside the upper section of the windscreen together with the car's radar unit. IMPORTANT Do not place, stick or mount anything on the outside or inside of the windscreen in front of or around the camera and radar unit — this can interfere with camera and radar-dependent functions. This may mean that functions are reduced, deactivated completely or give incorrect function response. 65 NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. }} 323 DRIVER SUPPORT || Cause Action The windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit is dirty or covered with ice or snow. Clean dirt, ice and snow from the windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit. Thick fog and heavy rain or snow block the radar signals or the camera view. No action. Sometimes the unit does not work during heavy rain or snowfall. Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar signals or camera view. No action. Sometimes the unit does not work on a very wet or snow-covered road surface. Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the camera and radar unit. Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the unit's cover cleaned - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Strong oncoming light No action. The camera unit is reset automatically in more favourable light conditions. NOTE Keep the windscreen clean in front of the camera and radar unit. High temperature At very high temperatures the camera and radar unit can temporarily be switched off for about 15 minutes after the engine is started so as to protect the unit's electronics. The camera and radar unit restarts automatically when the temperature has fallen sufficiently. 324 Damaged windscreen IMPORTANT If a crack, scratch or stone chip in the windscreen in front of one of the camera and radar unit “windows” covers an area of approx. 0.5 × 3.0 mm (0.02 × 0.12 in.) or larger, a workshop must be contacted to have the windscreen replaced – an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. If not rectified it can lead to reduced performance for the driver support systems that use the camera and radar unit. This may mean that functions are reduced, deactivated completely or give incorrect function response. To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or reduced operation of driver support systems that use the radar unit, the following also applies: • Volvo recommends against repairing cracks, scratches or stone chips in the area in front of the camera and radar unit. Instead, the whole windscreen should be replaced. • Before replacing a windscreen, contact an authorised Volvo workshop to verify DRIVER SUPPORT that the correct windscreen is ordered and fitted. • The same type or Volvo-approved windscreen wipers must be fitted during replacement. IMPORTANT When the windscreen is replaced, the camera and radar unit must be recalibrated at the workshop to ensure the functionality of all the car’s camera and radar-based systems. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • Camera unit (p. 322) 325 DRIVER SUPPORT Recommended camera device maintenance In order that the camera and radar unit shall function correctly, the windscreen in front of the unit must be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo. City Safety™ City Safety can alert the driver using a visual, acoustic and brake pulse warning to help him/her detect pedestrians, cyclists, larger animals and vehicles that suddenly appear - the car then attempts to brake automatically unless the driver acts within a reasonable time him/herself. NOTE City Safety is designed to be activated as late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary intervention. This may mean that functions are reduced, deactivated completely or give incorrect function response. The driver or passengers are not normally aware of City Safety - it only intervenes in a situation where a collision is immediately imminent. Related information Camera unit (p. 322) Location of the radar unit66. City Safety can prevent a collision or reduce collision speed. City Safety is an aid to assist a driver who is at risk of colliding with a pedestrian, large animal, cyclist or a vehicle. The City Safety function can help the driver to avoid a collision when driving in queues, e.g. when changes in the traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in attention, could lead to an incident. 66 326 City Safety activates a short, sharp braking procedure, normally stopping the car just behind the vehicle in front. City Safety is activated in situations where the driver should have started braking earlier, which is why it cannot help the driver in every situation. Dirt, ice and snow covering the camera and radar unit will reduce its function and may prevent measurement. • The function helps the driver by automatically braking the car in the event of an imminent risk of collision if the driver does not react in time by braking and/or swerving. NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. DRIVER SUPPORT Safety to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system (see the list of links for all subsections). WARNING • The City Safety is supplementary driver support intended to improve driving safety – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The City Safety auto-brake function can prevent a collision or reduce collision speed, but to ensure full brake performance the driver should always depress the brake pedal – even when the car autobrakes. • • The warning is only activated if there is a high risk of collision – you must therefore never wait for a collision warning or for City Safety to intervene. The warning and brake intervention for pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). • City Safety does not activates any autobrake functions in the event of heavy acceleration. • City Safety is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to City Related information • Parameters and subfunctions for City Safety (p. 327) • Setting the warning distance for City Safety (p. 329) • Detection of obstacles with City Safety (p. 330) • • City Safety in cross traffic (p. 332) • City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are prevented (p. 333) • • Limitations of City Safety (p. 334) Limitations for City Safety in cross traffic (p. 333) Messages for City Safety (p. 337) Parameters and subfunctions for City Safety City Safety can avoid a collision with a vehicle, a cyclist, a pedestrian or a larger animal in front by reducing the car's speed with the auto-brake function. If the speed difference is greater than the following specified speeds, the City Safety auto-brake function cannot prevent a collision but mitigates the consequences of it. Vehicles For a vehicle in front, City Safety can reduce the speed by up to 60 km/h (37 mph). cyclists For a cyclist, City Safety can reduce the speed by up to 50 km/h (30 mph). Pedestrians For a pedestrian, City Safety can reduce speed by up to 45 km/h (28 mph). Large animals In the event of a risk of a collision with a large animal, City Safety can reduce the car's speed by up to 15 km/h (9 mph). The brake function for large animals is primarily intended to reduce the force of the impact at higher speeds and is most effective at speeds above 70 km/h (43 mph) but less effective at lower speed. }} 327 DRIVER SUPPORT || Subfunctions for City Safety 1 - Collision warning The driver is first warned of a potentially imminent collision. City Safety can detect pedestrians, cyclists or vehicles that are stationary or moving in the same direction as the car and are ahead. City Safety can also detect pedestrians, cyclists or large animals that are crossing the road in front of the car. Function overview67. Acoustic warning signal in the event of a risk of collision Warning signal in the event of a risk of collision Distance measurement with the camera and radar unit City Safety carries out three steps in the following order: 1. Collision warning 2. Brake support 3. Auto Brake The following text explains what happens during the three steps: 67 328 In the event of a risk of collision with a pedestrian, larger animal, cyclist or vehicle (including vehicles described in the "City Safety in cross traffic" section), the driver's attention is alerted by means of a visual, acoustic and brake pulse warning. There is no brake pulse warning at lower speeds, sudden driver braking or acceleration. The brake pulse frequency varies according to the car's speed. 2 - Brake support If the risk of collision has increased further after the collision warning then the brake support is activated. Brake support reinforces the driver’s braking action if the system considers that the braking is not sufficient to avoid a collision. 3 - Auto Brake The automatic brake function is activated last. If in this situation the driver has not yet started to take evasive action and the risk of collision is NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. imminent then the automatic braking function is deployed - this takes place irrespective of whether or not the driver brakes. Braking then takes place with full brake force in order to reduce collision speed, or with limited brake force if it is sufficient to avoid a collision. In connection with automatic braking the seatbelt tensioner may also be activated. For more information see the "Seatbelt tensioner" section. In some situations, the action of Auto-brake may begin with light braking and then progress to full brake action. When City Safety has prevented a collision with a stationary object, the car remains stationary in anticipation of positive action by the driver. If the car has been braked to avoid collision with a slower vehicle in front, its speed is reduced to match that of the vehicle in front. NOTE On cars with manual gearbox, the engine stops when the Auto-brake function has stopped the car, unless the driver has managed to depress the clutch pedal beforehand. The driver can always interrupt a braking intervention by firmly depressing the accelerator pedal. DRIVER SUPPORT NOTE When City Safety brakes, the brake lights come on. When City Safety is activated and brakes the vehicle, the driver display shows a text message to the effect that the function is/has been active. WARNING City Safety must not be used by the driver to change his/her driving style - the driver must not rely on City Safety alone and allow it to do the braking. Related information • City Safety™ (p. 326) Setting the warning distance for City Safety warnings and instead leads to City Safety giving a warning at a later stage. City Safety is always activated but the driver can select the warning distance for the function. The Late warning distance should therefore only be used in exceptional cases, as in dynamic driving. NOTE The City Safety function cannot be deactivated. It is activated automatically when the engine/electric operation is started and remains switched on until the engine/electric operation is switched off. WARNING • The warning distance determines the sensitivity of the system and regulates the distance at which a visual, acoustic and brake pulse warning should be deployed. No automatic system can guarantee 100 % correct function in all situations. Therefore, never test City Safety by driving at people, animals or vehicles - this may cause severe damage and injury and risk lives. • City Safety warns the driver when there is a risk of a collision, but it cannot shorten the driver’s reaction time. To select warning distance: • Even if the warning distance has been set to Early warnings could be perceived as being late in certain situations, e.g. when there are large differences in speed or if vehicles ahead suddenly brake heavily. • With the warning distance set at Early, the warnings will come more in advance. This may mean that the warnings come more frequently than at the warning distance Normal, but it is recommended since it can make City Safety more effective. 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in the centre display's top view. 2. Under City Safety Warning, select Late, Normal or Early to set the desired warning distance. If the Early setting produces too many warnings, which could be perceived as irritating in certain situations, the Normal or Late warning distance can be selected. When warnings are perceived as being too frequent or disturbing, the warning distance can be reduced, which reduces the total number of }} 329 DRIVER SUPPORT || NOTE The warning with direction indicators for Rear Collision Warning is deactivated if the warning distance for collision warning in the City Safety function is set at the lowest level "Late". The seat belt pre-tensioning and braking functions are, however, still active. Related information • City Safety™ (p. 326) Detection of obstacles with City Safety The obstructions that City Safety can detect are vehicles, cyclists, large animals and pedestrians. Vehicles City Safety detects most vehicles that are either stationary or moving in the same direction as your car, as well as vehicles described in the "City Safety in cross traffic" section. In order that City Safety shall be able to detect a vehicle in the dark, the vehicle's front and rear lights must be working and clearly illuminated. Cyclists bicycle outline, requiring the ability to identify the bicycle, head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower body plus a normal human pattern of movement. If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle are not visible to the function's camera then the system cannot detect a cyclist. For the function to be able to detect a cyclist, he/she must be an adult and riding a bicycle designed for adults. WARNING City Safety is supplementary driver support, but it cannot detect all cyclists in all situations and, for example, cannot see: • • Optimal examples of what City Safety interprets as a cyclist — with clear body outline and bicycle outline. Optimal performance requires that the system function that detects a cyclist must receive the clearest possible information about the body and 330 partially obscured cyclists. cyclists if the background contrast of the cyclist is poor – warning and brake interventions may then be late or not occur at all. • cyclists wearing clothing that obscures the body outline. • bicycles loaded with large objects. The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven correctly and with a safety distance adapted to the speed. DRIVER SUPPORT Pedestrians City Safety can also detect pedestrians in the dark if they are illuminated by the car's headlamps. Large animals WARNING City Safety is supplementary driver support, but it cannot detect all pedestrians in all situations and, for example, cannot see: • partially obscured pedestrians, people in clothing that hides their body contour or pedestrians shorter than 80 cm (32 in.). • pedestrians if the background contrast of the pedestrians is poor - warning and brake interventions may then be late or not occur at all. Optimal examples of what the system regards as pedestrians with clear body outlines. For optimal performance, the system function that detects pedestrians must receive the clearest possible information about the body outline, requiring the ability to identify the head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower body plus a normal human pattern of movement. In order that it shall be possible to detect a pedestrian there must be a contrast with the background and this will be affected by such things as clothes, the background and the weather. With poor contrast the pedestrian may either be detected late or not at all, which may mean that warnings and braking are late or omitted. • pedestrians who are carrying larger objects. The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven correctly and with a safety distance adapted to the speed. Optimum examples of what City Safety interprets as large animals - standing still or walking slowly and with clear body outline. Optimal performance requires that the system function that detects a large animal (e.g. elk and horse) must receive the clearest possible information about the body outline, requiring the ability to identify the animal directly from the side in combination with what is a normal pattern of movement for the animal. If parts of the animal's body are not visible to the function's camera then the system cannot detect the animal. City Safety can also detect large animals in the dark if they are illuminated by the car's headlamps. }} 331 DRIVER SUPPORT || WARNING City Safety is supplementary driver support, but it cannot detect all large animals in all situations and, for example, cannot see: • • partially obscured large animals. • • large animals that run or move quickly. • small animals such as dogs and cats, for example. the oncoming vehicle must have its headlamps switched on. WARNING large animals if the background contrast of the animals is poor - warning and brake interventions may then be late or not occur at all. Related information City Safety™ (p. 326) Sector in which City Safety can detect oncoming crossing vehicles. For City Safety to detect an oncoming vehicle on a collision course, the oncoming vehicle must first enter the sector in which City Safety can analyse the situation. The following further criteria must also be fulfilled: 332 • City Safety can help the driver when turning and crossing the path of another oncoming vehicle at an intersection. • The "City Safety in crossing traffic" function is supplementary driver support intended to improve driving safety – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • Warnings and brake interventions due to a collision risk with an oncoming vehicle often come very late. • Never wait for a collision warning or for City Safety to intervene. • City Safety is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. larger animals seen from the front or from behind. The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven correctly and with a safety distance adapted to the speed. • City Safety in cross traffic • your car must be travelling at no less than 4 km/h (3 mph) • your car must turn to the left in markets with right-hand traffic (or to the right in left-hand traffic) Related information • City Safety™ (p. 326) DRIVER SUPPORT Limitations for City Safety in cross traffic NOTE The function uses the car's camera unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limitations for camera unit" section. In some cases City Safety may have difficulty helping the driver deal with collision risks due to oncoming cross traffic. NOTE The function uses the car's radar unit, which has some general limitations, see the section "Limitations for radar unit". City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are prevented City Safety has the facility to assist the driver by automatically braking the car earlier when it is not possible to avoid a collision by only steering away. City Safety assists the driver by continuously attempting to anticipate whether there are "escape routes" to the side in case a slow or stationary vehicle ahead is discovered at a late stage. Related information • City Safety™ (p. 326) Examples are: • stability control ESC intervenes in the event of slippery driving conditions • • if the oncoming vehicle is detected too late • if the oncoming vehicle has headlamps switched off • if the oncoming vehicle drives in an unpredictable manner, for example, abruptly changes lanes at a late stage. if the oncoming vehicle is obscured by something Your car (1) "sees" no options for evading the vehicle ahead (2) and can therefore auto-brake earlier. Your car Slow/stationary vehicle City Safety does not intervene with the autobrake function as long as the driver him/herself }} 333 DRIVER SUPPORT || has the opportunity to avoid a collision via a steering manoeuvre. Limitations for City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are prevented However, if City Safety anticipates that an evasive manoeuvre is not possible due to traffic in an adjacent lane, the function can assist the driver by automatically starting to brake at an earlier stage. NOTE The function uses the car's camera unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limitations for camera unit" section. WARNING • The ability of City Safety to be able to predict a specific situation is supplementary driver support intended to improve driving safety – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • City Safety is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. NOTE The function uses the car's radar unit, which has some general limitations, see the section "Limitations for radar unit". Related information • City Safety™ (p. 326) Limitations of City Safety The City Safety function may have limitations in certain situations. Surroundings Low objects Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for projecting load, or accessories such as auxiliary lamps and bull bars that are higher than the bonnet limit the function. Skidding On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is extended, which may reduce the capacity of City Safety to avoid a collision. In such situations, the anti-lock brakes and the stability control ESC68 will give the best possible braking force with maintained stability. Oncoming light The visual warning signal in the windscreen may be difficult to notice in the event of strong sunlight, reflections, when sunglasses are being worn or if the driver is not looking straight ahead. Heat In the event of high passenger compartment temperature caused by e.g. strong sunlight, the visual warning signal in the windscreen may be temporarily disengaged. 68 334 Electronic Stability Control DRIVER SUPPORT The camera and radar unit's field of view The camera's field of vision is limited, which is why pedestrians, large animals, cyclists and vehicles in some situations cannot be detected, or they are detected later than anticipated. Dirty vehicles may be detected later than others and if it is dark, motorcycles may be detected late or not at all. If a text message in the driver display indicates that the camera and radar unit is obstructed, City Safety may be unable to detect pedestrians, large animals, cyclists, vehicles or road lines ahead of the car. This means that the functionality of City Safety may be reduced. However, an error message is not shown in all situations where the windscreen sensors are obstructed. The driver must therefore take care to keep the area of windscreen in front of the camera and radar unit clear. Low speed City Safety is not activated at very low speeds below 4 km/h (3 mph) - and the system therefore does not intervene in situations where your car is approaching a vehicle ahead very slowly, e.g. when parking. Active driver Driver commands are always prioritised, which is why City Safety does not intervene or postpone warning/intervention in situations where the driver is steering and accelerating in a decisive manner, even if a collision is unavoidable. Active and aware driving behaviour can therefore delay a collision warning and intervention in order to minimise unnecessary warnings. Miscellaneous WARNING • Warnings and brake interventions could be implemented late or not at all if a traffic situation or external influences mean that the camera and radar unit cannot detect pedestrians, cyclists, large animals or vehicles correctly. • For vehicles to be detected at night, their headlamps and rear lamp cluster must be switched on and shining clearly. • The camera and radar unit has a limited range for pedestrians and cyclists. The system can provide effective warnings and brake interventions as long as the relative speed is below 50 km/h (30 mph). For stationary or slow-moving vehicles, warnings and brake interventions are effective at vehicle speeds up to 70 km/h (43 mph). Speed reduction for large animals is less than 15 km/h (9 mph) and can be achieved at vehicle speeds above 70 km/h (43 mph). The warning and brake intervention for large animals is less effective at lower speeds. • Warnings for stationary or slow-moving vehicles and large animals could be disengaged due to darkness or poor visibility. IMPORTANT Maintenance and replacement of City Safety components must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Driver intervention Reversing When your own car is reversing, City Safety is temporarily deactivated. }} 335 DRIVER SUPPORT || • Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). Search path in the top view of the centre display: • Do not place, stick or mount anything on the outside or inside of the windscreen in front of or around the camera and radar unit — this can interfere with cameradependent functions. • • Objects, snow, ice or dirt in the area of the camera sensor may reduce its functionality, fully deactivate it or give incorrect function response. NOTE The function uses the car's camera unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limitations for camera unit" section. NOTE The function uses the car's radar unit, which has some general limitations, see the section "Limitations for radar unit". Market limitation City Safety is not available in all countries. If City Safety does not appear in the centre display's Settings menu, the car is not equipped with this function. 336 • Settings My Car Related information City Safety™ (p. 326) IntelliSafe DRIVER SUPPORT Messages for City Safety A number of messages regarding City Safety can be shown in the driver display. The following table shows some examples. Message Specification City Safety When City Safety brakes or has done an automatic braking, several of the driver display symbols may be illuminated in connection with a text message being shown. Automatic intervention City Safety Reduced functionality Service required The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • City Safety™ (p. 326) 337 DRIVER SUPPORT Rear Collision Warning The Rear Collision Warning (RCW) function can help the driver to avoid being hit by a vehicle approaching from behind. RCW is activated automatically each time the engine is started. The RCW can warn the driver in a vehicle approaching from behind that a collision is imminent by rapidly flashing the direction indicators. If, at a speed below 30 km/h (20 mph), the RCW function detects that the car is in danger of being hit from behind, the seatbelt tensioners may tension the front seatbelts and activate the Whiplash Protection System safety system. Immediately before a collision from behind, RCW may also activate the foot brake in order to reduce the forward acceleration of the car during the collision. However, the foot brake is only activated if the car is stationary. The foot brake releases immediately if the accelerator pedal is depressed. Related information • Limitations of Rear Collision Warning (p. 338) • Whiplash Protection System (p. 43) Limitations of Rear Collision Warning In certain cases the RCW may have difficulty helping the driver in the event of a collision risk. This can be, for example, if: • the vehicle approaching from behind is detected too late • the vehicle approaching from behind changes lane at the last moment • the vehicle approaching from behind has a speed exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph) • a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is connected to the car's electrical system - the RCW function is then deactivated automatically. NOTE In certain markets, RCW does not give a warning with the direction indicators due to local traffic regulations - in such cases, this part of the function is deactivated. NOTE The warning with direction indicators for Rear Collision Warning is deactivated if the warning distance for collision warning in the City Safety function is set at the lowest level "Late". The seat belt pre-tensioning and braking functions are, however, still active. 338 Related information • Rear Collision Warning (p. 338) DRIVER SUPPORT BLIS* from a constant glow to flashing with a more intense light. BLIS69 The function is intended to help the driver detect vehicles diagonally behind and to the side of the car so as to provide assistance in heavy traffic on roads with several lanes in the same direction. NOTE The lamp illuminates on the side of the car where the system has detected the vehicle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at the same time then both lamps illuminate. BLIS is a driver aid intended to give a warning of: • • vehicles in the car's blind spot quickly approaching vehicles in the left and right lanes closest to the car. WARNING Principle of BLIS • The BLIS function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The responsibility for changing lanes safely and using good judgement always rests with the driver. • BLIS is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. Zone in blind spot Zone for quickly approaching vehicle. The BLIS function is active at speeds above 10 km/h (6 mph). The system is designed to react when: • • Location of BLIS lamp70. Indicator lamp The function is activated/deactivated using the BLIS button in the centre display's function view. 69 70 your car is overtaken by other vehicles another vehicle is quickly approaching your car. When BLIS detects a vehicle in Zone 1 or a quickly approaching vehicle in Zone 2, the indicator lamp on the door mirror on the affected side illuminates with a constant glow. If the driver activates the direction indicator on the same side as the warning, the indicator lamp will change over Blind Spot Information Systems NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. }} * Option/accessory. 339 DRIVER SUPPORT || Related information • • • Activate/deactivate BLIS (p. 340) • Messages for BLIS (p. 343) Limitations of BLIS (p. 341) Activate/deactivate BLIS The BLIS71 function can be activated/deactivated. Recommended maintenance for BLIS (p. 341) If BLIS was deactivated when the engine was switched off, it will continue to be deactivated when the engine is next started and no indicator lights will then be illuminated. Related information • BLIS* (p. 339) Location of BLIS lamp72. Indicator lamp – The function is activated/deactivated using the BLIS button in the centre display's function view. Tap on the BLIS button in the function view. > BLIS is activated/deactivated - a green/ grey indicator is shown in the button. If BLIS is activated when starting the engine, the function is confirmed by the door mirror indicator lamps blinking once. 71 72 340 Blind Spot Information NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Limitations of BLIS WARNING The BLIS73 function may have limitations in certain situations. • • BLIS does not work on sharp bends. BLIS does not work when the car is reversing. Related information • Recommended maintenance for BLIS • To ensure optimal functionality, the surfaces in front of the sensors must be kept clean. • Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the area of the sensors. BLIS* (p. 339) Keep the surface clean - on both the left and right-hand sides of the car74. Examples of limitations: • Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may reduce the functions and deactivate alerts. • The BLIS function is automatically deactivated if a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is connected to the car's electrical system. • For optimal performance of BLIS, no bicycle rack, luggage carrier or similar should be mounted on the car's towbar. 73 74 75 Blind Spot Information NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. Keep the surface clean - on both the left and right-hand sides of the car75. The sensors for BLIS are located inside each corner of the rear wing/bumper. The sensors are also used by the Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) and Rear Collision Warning functions. }} * Option/accessory. 341 DRIVER SUPPORT || IMPORTANT Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' components or repainting the bumpers must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • • • • • • • 342 BLIS* (p. 339) Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 344) Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert (p. 345) Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert (p. 345) Recommended maintenance for Cross Traffic Alert (p. 346) Messages for Cross Traffic Alert (p. 348) Rear Collision Warning (p. 338) * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Messages for BLIS A number of messages regarding BLIS76 can be shown in the driver display. The following table shows some examples. Message Specification Blind spot sensor The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Service required Blind spot system off BLIS and CTA have been deactivated as a trailer has been connected to the car's electrical system. Trailer attached A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • 76 BLIS* (p. 339) Blind Spot Information * Option/accessory. 343 DRIVER SUPPORT Cross Traffic Alert* with auto-brake is a driver support that supplements BLIS78 and is designed to help the driver detect traffic crossing behind the car when it is reversing. The auto-brake subfunction can stop the car in the event of a risk of collision with an unobserved vehicle. CTA77 CTA is only active if the car rolls backwards or if reverse gear has been selected. If CTA senses that something is approaching from the side, this is also indicated with: • an acoustic signal - the sound is heard in the left-hand or right-hand speaker according to the direction from which the object approaches. • an illuminated icon in the PAS79 graphic on the screen. • an icon on the Park assist camera top view. Principle of CTA. CTA supplements BLIS by detecting the approach of crossing traffic during reversing, such as when reversing out of a parking space. CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles. In favourable conditions it may also be able to detect smaller objects, such as cyclists and pedestrians. 77 78 79 80 344 auto-brake function takes effect to stop the car, after which the driver display shows an explanatory text message on why the car was braked. Illuminated icon for CTA in the PAS79 graphic on the screen80. • If the driver does not observe the warning from CTA and a collision is unavoidable, the WARNING • The Cross Traffic Alert function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The auto-brake subfunction can only detect and brake for other vehicles that are moving - not for stationary obstacles, a cyclist or a pedestrian, for example. • The responsibility for reversing the car safely and using good judgement always rests with the driver. • Cross Traffic Alert is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. Cross Traffic Alert Blind Spot Information Park Assist System: Parking assistance system with reversing sensors NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Related information • • • • Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert (p. 345) Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert (p. 345) Recommended maintenance for Cross Traffic Alert (p. 346) Messages for Cross Traffic Alert (p. 348) Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert The driver can select to switch off the warning in the function CTA81 - subfunction auto brake cannot be switched off and continues to be active. Proceed as follows: Press the Cross Traffic Alert button in the centre display function view. • GREY button indication - warning signal and indication on display for CTA is deactivated. • GREEN button indication - CTA is activated. Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert The CTA82 function with auto-brake may have limited functionality in certain situations. CTA does not perform optimally in all situations but has some limitations. For example, the CTA sensors cannot "see" through other parked vehicles or obstructing obstacles. Here are some examples of situations where CTA’s "field of vision" may be already limited and approaching vehicles cannot therefore be detected until they are very close: CTA is activated automatically each time the engine is started. Related information • Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 344) The car is parked deep inside a parking slot. 81 82 Cross Traffic Alert Cross Traffic Alert }} * Option/accessory. 345 DRIVER SUPPORT || • CTA is automatically deactivated if a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is connected to the car's electrical system. • For optimal performance of CTA, no bicycle rack, luggage carrier or similar should be mounted on the car's towbar. Recommended maintenance for Cross Traffic Alert • To ensure optimal functionality, the surfaces in front of the sensors must be kept clean. • Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the area of the sensors. Related information • Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 344) In an angled parking slot CTA may be completely “blind” on one side. Blind CTA sector. Sector in which CTA can detect/“see”. However, as your car slowly reverses, the angle it makes with the obstructing vehicle/object changes and the blind sector rapidly decreases. Examples of further limitations • The auto-brake subfunction only detects moving vehicles and therefore cannot "see" and brake for stationary obstacles, a cyclist or a pedestrian, for example. • 83 346 Keep the surface clean - on both the left and right-hand sides of the car83. The sensors for CTA are located inside each corner of the rear wing/bumper. The sensors are Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may reduce the functions and deactivate alerts. See the supplementary information in the section "Recommended maintenance for Cross Traffic Alert". NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT also used by the BLIS84 and Rear Collision Warning functions. IMPORTANT Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' components or repainting the bumpers must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • • • 84 Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 344) BLIS* (p. 339) Rear Collision Warning (p. 338) Blind Spot Information * Option/accessory. 347 DRIVER SUPPORT Messages for Cross Traffic Alert A number of messages regarding CTA85 with auto-brake can be shown in the driver display. The following table shows some examples. Message Specification Blind spot sensor The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Service required Blind spot system off BLIS and CTA have been deactivated as a trailer has been connected to the car's electrical system. Trailer attached A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • 85 348 Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 344) Cross Traffic Alert * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Road Sign Information* NOTE (RSI86) The Road Sign Information function helps the driver to observe speed-related road signs and certain prohibition signs as the car passes them. In certain markets, the Road Sign Information function (RSI) is only available in combination with Sensus Navigation. WARNING Examples of readable signs87. RSI provides information about such things as current speed, when a motorway or road is starting/ending, when overtaking is prohibited or when the direction of travel is one-way. If both a sign for motorway/dual carriageway and a sign for the speed limit are passed at the same time, RSI selects to show a sign symbol for motorway/dual carriageway. The new speed limit is shown directly with a line in the driver display's speed scale. 86 87 • The Road Sign Information function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • Road Sign Information is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. • Road Sign Information with Speed Warning and Settings (p. 352) • Activating/deactivating Speed warning in Road Sign Information (p. 353) • Road Sign Information with Speed Camera Information (p. 354) • Limitations of Road Sign Information (p. 354) Related information • Activating/deactivating Road Sign Information (p. 350) • Road Sign Information and sign display (p. 350) • Road Sign Information and Sensus Navigation (p. 352) Road Sign Information Road signs are market-dependent - illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples. * Option/accessory. 349 DRIVER SUPPORT Activating/deactivating Road Sign Information The Road Sign Information function is selectable - the driver can select On or Off. Press the Road Sign Information button in the centre display function view. • • Related information • Road Sign Information* (p. 349) Road Sign Information and sign display The Road Sign Information function (RSI88) registers and shows road signs in different ways depending on the sign and the situation. GREEN button indication - RSI is activated. GREY button indication - RSI is deactivated. NOTE • 350 If the Automatic Speed Limiter function is activated, road sign information is shown in the driver display even if RSI is not activated. • To remove road sign information from the driver display, you must deactivate both Automatic Speed Limiter and RSI. • When the Automatic Speed Limiter function is activated but RSI is deactivated, no warnings are given from RSI. In this situation, settings for RSI cannot be adjusted either - to be able to adjust settings as well as receive warnings, RSI must be activated. Example89 of detected speed information. When RSI detects a road sign with an imposed speed limit, the driver display shows the sign as a symbol in combination with a RED indication on the speedometer. An additional89 sign, such as "no overtaking", may be shown together with the speed limit symbol. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT If the driver enters a road marked with a no-entry sign at the roadside, the symbol for this sign89 flashes on and off on the driver display as a warning. If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation then information from the map is also used to determine whether the car is being driven in the wrong direction. The driver can also get an acoustic warning when driving towards a no-entry entrance if the Road Sign Audio Warning function is activated - see the heading "Activating/deactivating the acoustic warning" in the section "Activating/deactivating Road Sign Information". Speed limit or end of motorway When RSI detects an "indirect speed limit sign" stating the end of the current speed limit - e.g. at the end of a motorway - a symbol appears with the corresponding road sign in the driver's display. End of all restrictions. The driver display symbol extinguishes after about 5 minutes and remains so until the next speed related sign is passed. Additional signs End of motorway. The driver display symbol extinguishes after 10-30 seconds and remains so until the next speed related sign is passed. Changed speed limit Examples of additional signs89. When passing a direct speed limit sign when a speed limit changes, a symbol with the corresponding road sign appears in the driver's display. Sometimes different speed limits are signed for the same road - an additional sign then indicates the circumstances under which the different speeds apply. The road section may be particularly susceptible to accidents in rain and/or fog, for example. Example of direct speed limit sign89. Example of indirect speed limit sign89: An additional sign relating to rain is displayed only if the windscreen wipers are in use. If a trailer is connected to the car's electrical system and you pass a speed sign with the addi- 88 89 Road Sign Information Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples. }} 351 DRIVER SUPPORT || tional sign “trailer”, the indicated speed will appear on the driver display. Road Sign Information and Sensus Navigation Road Sign Information with Speed Warning and Settings Some speed limits only apply after a certain distance or at a certain time of day. The driver's attention is drawn to this fact by means of a symbol for an additional sign below the speed symbol. The additional symbol in the driver display will show either “DIST” or “TIME”. If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation, speed information is read from the navigation unit in the following cases: The subfunction Speed Limit Warning for RSI91 is selectable - the driver can select On or Off. Speed Limit Warning alerts the driver when the speed limit in force or the set "speed limit" is exceeded - after the warning has been repeated one extra time if the driver does not reduce speed. • On detection of signs that indirectly indicate a speed limit, such as motorway, dual carriageway and city limit signs. • If a previously detected speed sign is assumed not to apply any longer, but no new sign has been detected. A symbol for additional sign in the form of an empty frame under the driver display's speed symbol89 means that the RSI has detected an additional sign with supplementary information for the current speed limit. NOTE In certain markets, the Road Sign Information function (RSI) is only available in combination with Sensus Navigation. NOTE Sign for "School" and "Children at play" If the warning sign89 for "School" or "Children at play" is included in the satellite navigator's map data90, the driver display shows a sign of this type. If a downloaded third-party app is used for navigation then there is no support for speedrelated information. Related information • Road Sign Information* (p. 349) Related information • 89 90 91 352 Road Sign Information* (p. 349) Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples. Only in cars with Sensus Navigation. Road Sign Information * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT The speed warning is given by the driver display symbol92 showing the applicable maximum permitted speed temporarily flashing when this speed is exceeded. A speed warning is always given if the speed limit is exceeded in connection with speed camera information. Note that the function does not give any consideration to selected limit adjustment when the driver display shows the speed camera symbol. Acoustic warning On/Off It is also possible to receive an acoustic warning in connection with Speed Warning. Select limit for speed warning as follows: 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe Road Sign Information in the centre display's top view. 2. Select Speed Limit Warning. > The function is activated and a speed limit selector appears. 3. Adjust the limit for Speed Warning by pressing the up/down arrows on the screen. 92 The subfunction Speed Limit Warning is activated as follows: 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe Road Sign Information in the centre display's top view. 2. Select Speed Limit Warning. > The function is activated and a speed limit selector appears. Change setting for acoustic warning as follows: 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe Road Sign Information in the centre display's top view. 2. Select/deselect Road Sign Audio Warning to activate/switch off the acoustic warning. Settings Adjust the limit for Speed Warning The driver can select to receive a warning at a higher speed than the signed speed. Activating/deactivating Speed warning in Road Sign Information With the Road Sign Audio Warning function activated, the driver is also warned when driving towards one-way traffic/no-entry entrance. (see description for "selecting speed limit" in section "Road Sign Information with Speed warning and Settings") Related information • • Road Sign Information* (p. 349) Road Sign Information with Speed Warning and Settings (p. 352) Related information • Road Sign Information* (p. 349) Road signs are market-dependent - the illustration in these instructions only show one example. * Option/accessory. 353 DRIVER SUPPORT Road Sign Information with Speed Camera Information A car equipped with RSI93 and Sensus Navigation* can provide information on an upcoming speed camera in the driver display. "Road Sign Information with Speed Warning and Settings" and "Road Sign Information limitations". NOTE • • Speed camera information in the driver display94. If the car exceeds a detected speed limit with the Speed warning function activated, a speed warning is given when the car approaches a speed camera, provided that the navigation map for the area in question contains information on speed cameras. To get an acoustic warning if you exceed the required speed, the Speed Limit Warning function must be activated and the Road Sign Audio Warning subfunction must be set to On. An acoustic warning is then given if the car's speed exceeds the speed indicated by the RSI function in the driver display. Information about speed cameras on the navigation map is not available for all markets/areas. Related information • • • Road Sign Information* (p. 349) Road Sign Information with Speed Warning and Settings (p. 352) Limitations of Road Sign Information (p. 354) Limitations of Road Sign Information The Road Sign Information (RSI95) function may have limitations in certain situations. Examples of what can reduce the RSI are as follows: • • • • • Faded signs • signs completely or partly covered with frost, snow and/or dirt • digital road maps96 are out-of-date, inaccurate or have no speed information97. Signs positioned on bends Rotated or damaged signs Signs positioned high above the roadway Fully/partially obscured or poorly positioned signs NOTE The RSI function may interpret some types of bicycle rack, connected to the electrical socket for trailers, as a connected trailer. In such cases, the driver display may show incorrect speed information. For more information about Speed warnings in connection with speed cameras - see section 93 94 354 Road Sign Information NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model and market/area. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT NOTE The function uses the car's camera unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limitations for camera unit" section. Related information • Road Sign Information* (p. 349) Driver Alert Control The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function is intended to help make the driver aware that he or she is starting to drive less consistently, e.g. if the driver becomes distracted or starts to fall asleep. the road with the driver’s steering wheel movements. The objective for DAC is to detect slowly deteriorating driving ability and it is primarily intended for major roads. The function is not intended for city traffic. The function is activated when speed exceeds 65 km/h (40 mph) and remains active as long as the speed is over 60 km/h (37 mph). When driving behaviour starts to become inconsistent, the driver is alerted by this symbol in the driver display, together with the text message Time for a break soon?. If driving behaviour does not improve but becomes noticeably inconsistent, the driver is alerted by the same symbol in the driver display, combined with an acoustic signal and the text message Time to take a break. A camera detects the edge markings painted on the carriageway and compares the alignment of 95 96 97 Road Sign Information In cars equipped with Sensus Navigation. Map data with speed information does not exist for all areas. If the Rest Stop Guidance function is activated in Sensus Navigation*, suggestions for a suitable }} * Option/accessory. 355 DRIVER SUPPORT || location for a break are also shown with the Time to take a break warning. WARNING An alarm from Driver Alert Control should be taken very seriously, as a sleepy driver is often not aware of his/her own condition. The warnings are repeated after a time if driving behaviour has not improved. WARNING • • • 356 The Driver Alert Control function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. Driver Alert Control should not be used to extend a period of driving. The driver should instead plan for breaks at regular intervals and make sure they are well rested. Driver Alert Control is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function can be activated/deactivated. If the alarm sounds or you feel fatigued: On/Off • To change settings in DAC: Stop the car safely as soon as possible and rest. Studies have shown that it is just as dangerous to drive while tired as it is to drive under the influence of alcohol or other stimulants. Related information • Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control (p. 356) • Select rest stop guidance in the event of a warning with Driver Alert Control (p. 357) • Limitations of Driver Alert Control (p. 357) 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Select My Car Control. 3. Select/deselect Alertness Warning to activate/deactivate DAC. IntelliSafe Related information • Driver Alert Control (p. 355) Driver Alert DRIVER SUPPORT Select rest stop guidance in the event of a warning with Driver Alert Control It is possible to set whether the Rest Stop Guidance function should be activated/deactivated. With the guide activated, an automatic suggestion for an appropriate rest area is displayed while DAC issues a warning. Limitations of Driver Alert Control Lane assistance The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function may have limitations in certain situations. The function of the Lane Keeping Aid (LKA98) is to help the driver to reduce the risk of the car accidentally leaving its own lane on motorways and similar major routes. In some cases the system may issue a warning despite driving ability not deteriorating, for example: • • in strong side winds on rutted road surfaces. To select Rest Stop Guidance: 1. WARNING Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Select My Car Control. IntelliSafe 3. Select/deselect Rest Stop Guidance to activate/deactivate the function. In some cases, driving behaviour is not affected despite driver fatigue – e.g. when using the Pilot Assist function – resulting in the driver not getting a warning from DAC. Driver Alert It is therefore important to always stop and take a break at the slightest feeling of fatigue, whether the DAC function ha given a warning or not. Related information • Lane Keeping Aid steers the car back into its lane and/or alerts the driver with vibrations in the steering wheel. Lane Keeping Aid is active within the speed range 65-200 km/h (40-125 mph) on roads with clearly visible side lines. On narrow roads the function may be unavailable, in which case it goes into standby mode. The function becomes available again when the road is wide enough. Driver Alert Control (p. 355) NOTE The function uses the car's camera unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limitations for camera unit" section. Related information • Driver Alert Control (p. 355) A camera reads the side lines of the road/lane. 98 Lane Keeping Aid }} 357 DRIVER SUPPORT Depending on settings, lane assistance acts in accordance with the following: || • Assist100 activated: When the car is WARNING • The Lane Keeping Aid function is supplementary driver support intended to improve driving safety – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The function is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. approaching a lane line, LKA will actively steer the car back into its lane by applying a slight torque to the steering wheel. • Warning100 activated: If the car is about to cross a lane line, the driver is warned by means of vibrations in the steering wheel. NOTE Lane assistance steers the car back into its lane. When a direction indicator is switched on, there are no steering corrections or alerts from Lane assistance. Lane assistance warns with steering wheel vibrations99. 99 The steering wheel vibration varies - the longer the car remains outside the lane lines, the longer the vibration. 100See the heading "Assistance alternatives for LKA" in the section "Activating/Deactivating Lane Keeping Aid". 358 DRIVER SUPPORT Lane assistance does not intervene • Lane assistance symbols in the driver display (p. 364) Steering assistance with lane assistance For steering assistance LKA101 to function, the driver’s hands must be on the steering wheel. The system monitors this continuously. If the driver does not keep his/her hands on the steering wheel, the driver display shows this symbol combined with a message, which prompts the driver to actively steer the car: • Lane Keeping Aid Apply steering Lane assistance does not engage on sharp inside curves. In some situations, lane assistance allows lane lines to be crossed without intervening with either steering assistance or a warning - e.g. when using the direction indicators or cutting bends. If the driver does not then start to steer, the symbol is shown again, combined with a warning sound and this message: • Lane Keeping Aid Standby until steering applied • Steering assistance with lane assistance (p. 359) If the driver then still does not follow the prompt to start steering, LKA101 is set in standby mode the function will then be unavailable until the driver starts to steer the car again. • • Limitations of Lane assistance (p. 360) Related information • Select assistance option for lane assistance (p. 360) • Symbols and messages for lane assistance (p. 362) Related information Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid (p. 360) 101Lane • Lane assistance (p. 357) Keeping Aid 359 DRIVER SUPPORT Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid Select assistance option for lane assistance The lane assistance LKA102 function is selectable - the driver can select On or Off. The driver can select how LKA103 should react if the car leaves its lane. 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in the centre display's top view. On/Off Press the Lane Keeping Aid button in the centre display function view. 2. In the event of Lane Keeping Aid Mode, select how LKA should react: • Assist - the driver is given steering assistance without a warning. • • GREEN button indication - LKA is activated. and steering assistance. • Warning — warning to driver only. GREY button indication - LKA is deactivated. Related information • • Both - the driver is given both a warning Lane assistance (p. 357) Related information • Lane assistance (p. 357) Limitations of Lane assistance In certain demanding conditions Lane assistance may have difficulty helping the driver correctly. In such cases it is recommended to switch off this function. Examples of such conditions are: • • • • • • road works • sharp edges or lines other than the lane's side markings • when the power steering works at reduced power - e.g. during cooling due to overheating (see section "Speed-dependent steering force"). winter road conditions poor road surface a very “sporty” driving style poor weather with reduced visibility roads with unclear or non-existent side markings NOTE The function uses the car's camera unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limitations for camera unit" section. 102Lane 103Lane 360 Keeping Aid Keeping Aid DRIVER SUPPORT Related information • • Lane assistance (p. 357) Speed-dependent steering force (p. 262) 361 DRIVER SUPPORT Symbols and messages for lane assistance A number of symbols and messages regarding Lane assistance LKA104 can be shown on the driver display. The following table shows some examples. Symbol Message Specification Driver support system The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Reduced functionality Service required Windscreen sensor The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced. Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual Lane Keeping Aid Apply steering Lane Keeping Aid Standby until steering applied 104Lane 362 Keeping Aid The LKA steering assistance does not function if the driver does not have his/her hands on the steering wheel. Follow the instruction and steer the car. LKA is set in standby mode until the driver starts to steer the car again. DRIVER SUPPORT A text message can be cleared by briefly pressbutton, located in the centre of the ing the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • Lane assistance (p. 357) 363 DRIVER SUPPORT Lane assistance symbols in the driver display Unavailable Lane assistance LKA105 is visualised by symbols in the driver display depending on the situation. Here are some examples of symbols and the situations in which they are shown: Available Unavailable — the lane lines in the symbol are GREY. The Lane assistance cannot detect the lane lines, the speed is too low or the road is too narrow. Indication of steering assistance/warning Available — the lane lines in the symbol are WHITE. Lane assistance is scanning one or both lane lines. Steering assistance/warning - the lane lines in the symbol are COLOURED. Lane assistance indicates that the system is giving a warning and/or attempting to steer the car back into the lane. 105Lane 364 Keeping Aid Related information • Lane assistance (p. 357) DRIVER SUPPORT Steering assistance at risk of collision • Steering assistance upon risk of run-off (p. 366) The Collision avoidance assistance function is designed to help the driver reduce the risk of the car leaving its lane unintentionally and/or colliding with another vehicle or obstacle by actively steering the car back into its lane and/or swerving. • Steering assistance level in the event of a run-off risk (p. 367) • Activating/deactivating Steering assistance in the event of run-off risk (p. 367) • Limitations for steering assistance upon risk of running off the road (p. 368) The Collision avoidance assistance function consists of two subfunctions: • Steering assistance upon risk of head-on collision (p. 369) • • • Activating/deactivating Steering assistance in the event of a risk of a head-on collision (p. 370) • Limitations for steering assistance upon risk of head-on collision (p. 370) Steering assistance upon risk of run-off Steering assistance upon risk of head-on collision After automatic engagement, the driver display indicates that this has occurred via a text message: Activating/deactivating Steering assistance in the event of a collision risk The function can be selected - the driver can choose to have it On or Off. • Collision avoidance assistance Automatic intervention NOTE It is always the driver who decides how much the car should steer – the car can never take command. Related information • Activating/deactivating Steering assistance in the event of a collision risk (p. 365) • Symbols and messages for steering assistance upon risk of collision (p. 372) }} 365 DRIVER SUPPORT Shift between On and Off using this button in the centre display's function view. || During subsequent engine starting, the function is automatically106 reactivated or it follows settings made in the remote control key, if it has an activated driver profile106 (see section "Driver profiles"). NOTE When the Collision avoidance assistance function is deactivated, all subfunctions are switched off: • Steering assistance at risk of road departure • Steering assistance at risk of oncoming collision Even though it is possible to deactivate the function, it is advisable for the driver to always have it activated since it improves driving safety in most cases. Related information • Steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 365) 106These 366 options are market-dependent. Steering assistance upon risk of run-off WARNING • The "Steering assistance at risk of lane departure" subfunction is supplementary driver support intended to improve driving safety – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. The function is active within the speed range 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph) on roads with clearly visible lane markings/lines. • The function cannot detect barriers, rails or similar obstacles at the side of the road. A camera scans the edges of the road and the painted side markings. If the car is about to leave the side of the road, the car is steered back onto the road and if the steering intervention is not enough to avoid run-off, the brakes are also activated. • "Steering assistance at risk of lane departure" is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. The subfunction's task is to help the driver reduce the risk of the car accidentally leaving the road by actively steering the car back onto the road. However, the function does not intervene with either steering assistance or brake intervention if the direction indicators are used. And if the function detects that the driver is actively driving the car, activation of the function will be delayed. After automatic engagement, the driver display indicates that this has occurred via a text message: • Collision avoidance assistance Automatic intervention Related information • Steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 365) DRIVER SUPPORT Steering assistance level in the event of a run-off risk Steering assistance with brake intervention The function has two activation levels on intervention: • Steering assistance only • The function can be selected - the driver can choose to have it On or Off. Shift between On and Off using this button in the centre display's function view. Steering assistance with brake intervention Steering assistance only Intervention with steering assistance and braking. Brake intervention helps in situations where steering assistance alone is not sufficient. The brake force is adapted automatically depending on the situation at the time of road run-off. Intervention with steering assistance. Activating/deactivating Steering assistance in the event of run-off risk Related information • Steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 365) During subsequent engine starting, the function is automatically107 reactivated or it follows settings made in the remote control key, if it has an activated driver profile107 (see section "Driver profiles"). NOTE When the Collision avoidance assistance function is deactivated, all subfunctions are switched off: • Steering assistance at risk of road departure • Steering assistance at risk of oncoming collision Even though it is possible to deactivate the function, it is advisable for the driver to always have it activated since it improves driving safety in most cases. 107These options are market-dependent. }} 367 DRIVER SUPPORT || Related information • Steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 365) Limitations for steering assistance upon risk of running off the road In certain demanding conditions the function may have difficulty helping the driver correctly. In such cases it is recommended to switch off this function. Examples of such conditions are: • • • • • • • road works winter road conditions narrow roads poor road surface a very “sporty” driving style poor weather with reduced visibility roads with unclear or non-existent side markings • sharp edges or lines other than the lane's side markings • when the power steering works at reduced power - e.g. during cooling due to overheating (see section "Speed-dependent steering force"). NOTE The function uses the car's camera unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limitations for camera unit" section. 368 NOTE The function uses the car's radar unit, which has some general limitations, see the section "Limitations for radar unit". Related information • Steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 365) • Speed-dependent steering force (p. 262) DRIVER SUPPORT Steering assistance upon risk of head-on collision The subfunction can help a distracted driver who does not notice that the car is drifting into the oncoming lane. However, the function does not intervene with steering assistance if the direction indicator is used. And if the function detects that the driver is actively driving the car, activation of the function will be delayed. Related information • Steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 365) After automatic engagement, the driver display indicates that this has occurred via a text message: • Collision avoidance assistance Automatic intervention WARNING The function can assist by guiding the car back to its own lane. Oncoming vehicles • The "Steering assistance at risk of oncoming collision" subfunction is supplementary driver support intended to improve driving safety – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • Steering assistance is only activated if there is a high risk of collision – you must therefore never wait for the function to intervene. • The function is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. Your car The function is active within the speed range 60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with clearly visible lane markings/lines. If the car is about to leave its own lane while an oncoming vehicle is approaching at the same time, the function can help the driver to steer the car back into its own lane. 369 DRIVER SUPPORT Activating/deactivating Steering assistance in the event of a risk of a head-on collision The function can be selected - the driver can choose to have it On or Off. Shift between On and Off using this button in the centre display's function view. During subsequent engine starting, the function is automatically108 reactivated or it follows settings made in the remote control key, if it has an activated driver profile108 (see section "Driver profiles"). Related information • Steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 365) Limitations for steering assistance upon risk of head-on collision In certain situations the function may have limited functionality and fail to intervene in the following cases, for example: • for small vehicles, such as motorcycles • on roads where the lane does not have clear lane markings • if the majority of the car has steered into the adjacent lane • outside the speed range 60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) • when the power steering works at reduced power - e.g. during cooling due to overheating (see section "Speed-dependent steering force"). NOTE When the Collision avoidance assistance function is deactivated, all subfunctions are switched off: • Steering assistance at risk of road departure • Steering assistance at risk of oncoming collision Even though it is possible to deactivate the function, it is advisable for the driver to always have it activated since it improves driving safety in most cases. 108These 370 options are market-dependent. Other demanding situations can include: • • • • • • road works winter road conditions narrow roads poor road surface a very “sporty” driving style poor weather with reduced visibility. In these demanding situations, the function may have difficulty helping the driver correctly. In such DRIVER SUPPORT cases it is recommended to switch off this function. NOTE The function uses the car's camera unit, which has some general limitations, see the "Limitations for camera unit" section. NOTE The function uses the car's radar unit, which has some general limitations, see the section "Limitations for radar unit". Related information • Steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 365) • Speed-dependent steering force (p. 262) 371 DRIVER SUPPORT Symbols and messages for steering assistance upon risk of collision A number of symbols and messages regarding the function can be shown on the driver display. The following table shows some examples. Symbol Message Specification Collision avoidance assistance When the function is activated, a message is shown to the driver indicating that the system has been activated. Automatic intervention Windscreen sensor Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • 372 Steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 365) The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced. DRIVER SUPPORT Park Assist* The Park Assist Pilot function can assist the driver when manoeuvring in tight spaces by indicating the distance to obstacles through acoustic signals combined with a graphic in the centre display. stops after the car has been stationary for approx. 2 seconds. The acoustic signal for obstacles behind is also active when the car is stationary. WARNING At a distance within 30 cm (1 ft) from an obstacle behind or in front of the car, the tone is constant and the active sensor's field closest to the car symbol is filled. The volume of the parking assistance signal can be adjusted while the signal is sounding by means of the [>II] knob on the centre console. Adjustment can also be performed in the top view's Settings menu option. NOTE • Acoustic warnings are only given for objects directly on the vehicle's route. Screen view showing obstacle zones and sensor sectors. • The Park Assist function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The parking sensors have blind spots where obstacles cannot be detected. • Be particularly aware of people and animals near the car. • The Park Assist system is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. The centre display shows an overview of the relationship between the car and detected obstacles. Related information The highlighted sector indicates the location of the obstacle. The closer the car symbol is to a highlighted sector box, the shorter the distance between the car and detected obstacle. • Park Assist Pilot front, rear and along the sides (p. 374) • Activating/deactivating Park Assist Pilot (p. 375) • • Limitations of Parking assistance (p. 375) • Symbols and messages for Park Assist Pilot (p. 377) The shorter the distance to the obstacle, the faster the signal sounds. Other sound from the audio system is muted automatically. The acoustic signal for obstacles ahead and to the sides is active when the car is moving but Recommended Park Assist Pilot maintenance (p. 376) * Option/accessory. 373 DRIVER SUPPORT Park Assist Pilot front, rear and along the sides Park Assist Pilot has different parameters depending on which part of the car is approaching an obstacle. Backwards NOTE Forwards When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike carrier on the towbar - without Volvo genuine trailer wiring - parking assistance may need to be switched off manually in order that the sensors do not react to them. Along the sides NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. The front parking assistance sensors are activated automatically when the engine is started. The front sensors are active at speeds below 10 km/h (6 mph). NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. The sensors for reverse are activated if the car rolls backward without a gear engaged or when the gear lever is moved to reverse position. The measuring range starts approx. 1.5 metres ( 5 ft) behind the car. When reversing with a hitched trailer, parking assistance backward is deactivated automatically. 374 The measuring range starts approx. 80 cm (2.5 ft) in front of the car. Parking assistance side sensors are activated automatically when the engine is started. They are active at speeds below 10 km/h (6 mph). The measuring range starts approx. 30 cm (1 ft) from the sides. The acoustic signal for obstacles on the sides comes from the side loudspeakers. NOTE Parking assistance is deactivated when the parking brake is applied or P mode is selected in a car with an automatic gearbox. DRIVER SUPPORT IMPORTANT When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember that these must not obscure the sensors - the auxiliary lamps may then be perceived as an obstacle. Related information • Park Assist* (p. 373) Activating/deactivating Park Assist Pilot The Park Assist Pilot function can be activated/ deactivated. On/Off The front and side parking assistance sensors are activated automatically when the engine is started. The rear sensors activate if the car rolls backwards or if reverse gear in engaged. The function is activated/deactivated in function view in the centre display. – Tap on the Park Assist button in the function view. > Park Assist Pilot is activated/deactivated, a GREEN/GREY indicator is displayed in the button. Limitations of Parking assistance The Parking Assistance System cannot detect everything in all situations and may therefore have limited functionality in some cases. A driver should be aware about the following examples of Park Assist Pilot's limitations: WARNING Pay additional attention while reversing when this symbol is shown if a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is mounted and electrically connected to the car. The symbol indicates that the parking assistance sensors rearward are switched off and will not warn of any obstacles. In cars equipped with a park assist camera, Park Assist Pilot can also be activated/deactivated from the relevant camera view. Related information • Park Assist* (p. 373) }} * Option/accessory. 375 DRIVER SUPPORT || IMPORTANT Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or low barriers may be in the "signal shadow" and are then temporarily not detected by the sensors - the pulsating tone may then unexpectedly stop instead of changing over to the expected constant tone. The sensors cannot detect high objects, such as projecting loading docks. • NOTE Since a towbar is configured with the car's electrical system, towbar protrusion is included when the function measures the distance to an object behind the car. Recommended Park Assist Pilot maintenance For the Park Assist Pilot function to work optimally, its sensors must be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo. Related information • Park Assist* (p. 373) In such situations, pay extra attention and manoeuvre/reposition the car particularly slowly or stop the current parking manoeuvre - there may be a high risk of damage to vehicles or other objects since information from the sensors is not always reliable in such situations. Location of the parking sensors109. IMPORTANT In certain conditions the parking assistance system may produce incorrect warning signals that are caused by external sound sources with the same ultrasonic frequencies that the system works with. Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, exhaust noises from motorcycles, etc. 109NOTE: 376 NOTE Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals, reduced or no function. Related information • Park Assist* (p. 373) The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Symbols and messages for Park Assist Pilot Symbols and messages for Park Assist Pilot can be shown in the driver display and/or the centre display. The following table shows some examples. Symbol Message Specification The rearward parking assistance sensors are deactivated, so there are no acoustic warnings for obstacles/objects. Park Assist System One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible. Sensors blocked, cleaning needed Park Assist System Unavailable Service required The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • Park Assist* (p. 373) * Option/accessory. 377 DRIVER SUPPORT Park assist camera* The park assist camera can assist the driver when manoeuvring in tight spaces by indicating obstacles with a camera image and graphics in the centre display. The parking assistance camera is a support function which is activated automatically when reverse gear is selected or manually via the centre display. Lines - activates/deactivates park assist lines WARNING Towbar* - activates/deactivates the towbar park assist line*112 • The parking camera function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The parking cameras have blind spots where obstacles cannot be detected. • Be particularly aware of people and animals near the car. • Objects/obstacles on the display screen may be closer to the car than they appear to be on the screen. • The parking cameras are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. CTA* - activates/deactivates Cross Traffic Alert Example of camera view110. Zoom111 - zoom in/out 360° view* - activates/deactivates all cameras PAS* - activates/deactivates the Parking Assistance System 110The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car 111The park assist lines are switched off when zooming in. 112Not available on all markets. 378 Related information • • • Parking cameras' camera views (p. 379) Park assist lines for parking camera (p. 381) Sensor fields from Park Assist Pilot for parking camera (p. 383) model. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT • • • Starting the park assist camera (p. 383) Parking cameras' camera views Limitations for park assist camera (p. 384) The function can display a composite 360° view and separate views for each of the four cameras: rear, front, left or right camera view. Recommended parking camera maintenance (p. 385) • Recommended parking camera maintenance (p. 385) • Symbols and messages for Park assist camera (p. 386) 360° view* A camera symbol on the centre display's car symbol indicates which of the cameras is active. If the car is also equipped with Park Assist System* then distance to detected obstacles is illustrated with fields in different colours. The cameras can be activated automatically or manually, see the section "Starting the Park assist camera". The "field of vision" of the parking cameras with approximate coverage area. The 360° view function activates all parking cameras, whereupon the four sides of the car are shown simultaneously in the centre display, which helps the driver to observe what is around the car when manoeuvring at slow speeds. From the 360° view, each camera view can be activated separately: • Press the screen for the desired “field of vision” of the camera, e.g. on the surface in front of/above the front camera. }} * Option/accessory. 379 DRIVER SUPPORT || Backwards Forwards The sides The backwards-facing camera113 is fitted above the registration plate. The forwards parking camera114 is located in the grille. The side cameras114 are positioned in each door mirror. The front camera can be helpful on an exit road with limited visibility to the sides, e.g. when there are high hedges. It is active at speeds up to 25 km/h (16 mph) - following which, the front camera is switched off. The side cameras can show what is along each side of the car. The backward-facing camera shows a wide area behind the car. For certain models, part of the bumper can be seen as well as the towbar in some cases. Objects shown in the centre display may appear slightly tilted — this is normal. 113NOTE: 114NOTE: 380 Related information • Park assist camera* (p. 378) If the car does not reach 50 km/h (30 mph) and the speed falls below 22 km/h (14 mph) within 1 minute after the forward-facing camera has been extinguished, the camera is reactivated. The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Park assist lines for parking camera The Park assist cameras indicate the position of the car in relation to its surroundings by displaying lines on the screen. reversing into tight spaces and when connecting a trailer. The lines on the screen are projected as if they were at ground level behind the car and respond directly to steering wheel movements, showing the driver the path the car will take - also when the car is turning. These park assist lines include the car's most protruding parts, e.g. towbar, door mirrors and corners. NOTE • When reversing with a trailer which is not connected electrically to the car, the park assist lines on the display show the route the car will take – not the trailer. • The screen shows no park assist lines when a trailer is connected electrically to the car's electrical system. • Park assist lines are not shown when zooming in. IMPORTANT • Remember, that with the rear camera view selected, the monitor only displays the area behind the car. Be aware of the sides and front of the car when manoeuvring in reverse. • The same applies vice versa - note what happens to the rear parts of the car when the front camera view is selected. • Note that the park assist lines show the shortest route. Therefore, pay extra attention to the car's sides so that they do not go against/over something when the steering wheel is turned when driving forward or that the front sweeps against/ over something when the steering wheel is turned when reversing. Example115 of park assist lines. Park assist lines show the intended route for the car's external dimensions with the current steering wheel angle - this facilitates parallel parking, 115The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. }} 381 DRIVER SUPPORT || Park assist lines in 360° view* Towbar assist line* The camera can facilitate connecting up to a trailer by showing an assist line representing the towbar's intended "path" to the trailer. 1. Press Towbar (1). > The park assist lines for the towbar's intended "path" appear - the car's park assist lines disappear simultaneously. Park assist lines for both car and towbar cannot be shown at the same time. 2. 360° view with park assist lines115. Related information With the 360° view, park assist lines are shown behind, in front of and at the side of the car (depending on the direction of travel): • • • Park assist camera* (p. 378) When driving forwards: Front lines When reversing: Side lines and reversing lines. With front or rear camera selected, the park assist lines appear regardless of the car's direction of travel. With one side camera selected, the park assist lines only appear when reversing. 115The 382 Press Zoom (2) when a more precise manoeuvring is required. > The camera view zooms in. Towbar with park assist line115. Towbar - activates the towbar assist line. Zoom - zoom in/out. figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Sensor fields from Park Assist Pilot for parking camera If the car is equipped with Parking assistance then the distance is shown in the 360° view with coloured fields for each sensor that registers an obstacle. The fields for the front and reversing sensors change colour as the distance to the obstacle decreases — from yellow through orange to red. Sensor fields backwards and forwards Colours of front and reversing fields Distance in metres (feet) Yellow 0,6-1,5 (2,0-4,9) Orange 0,4-0,6 (1,3-2,0) Red 0-0,4 (0-1,3) Sensor field to the sides The side fields are only shown in orange. Colour of side fields Distance in metres (feet) Orange 0-0,3 (0-1,0) Related information • Park assist camera* (p. 378) Starting the park assist camera The park assist camera starts automatically when reverse gear is engaged or manually with one of the centre display's function buttons. Camera view when reversing When reverse gear is engaged, the screen shows the 360° view if it or any of the side views was the last used camera view, otherwise the rear view is shown. Camera view for manual camera start Start the parking camera with this button in the centre display's function view. The screen then initially shows the last used camera view. However, after each engine start, the previously shown side view is replaced by the 360° view and the previously shown zoomed rear view is replaced by the rear view. Automatic deactivation of camera The front view extinguishes at 25 km/h (16 mph) to avoid distracting the driver - it reactivates automatically if the speed drops to 22 km/h (14 mph) within 1 minute, on the condition that the speed has not exceeded 50 km/h (31 mph). The screen can show coloured sensor fields on the car symbol116. 116The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. Other camera views are extinguished at 15 km/h (9 mph) and not reactivated. }} * Option/accessory. 383 DRIVER SUPPORT || Related information • Park assist camera* (p. 378) Limitations for park assist camera Blind sectors The park assist camera cannot detect everything in all situations and may therefore have limited functionality. A driver should be aware about the following examples of the park assist camera's limitations: WARNING Pay additional attention while reversing when this symbol is shown if a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is mounted and electrically connected to the car. The symbol indicates that the parking assistance sensors rearward are switched off and will not warn of any obstacles. NOTE A bike carrier or other accessory mounted on the rear of the car could obscure the camera's view. 384 There are "blind" sectors between the cameras' fields of vision. In 360° view obstacles/objects can “vanish” in the gaps between the individual cameras. WARNING Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it only looks like a relatively small part of the image is obscured, a relatively large sector could be hidden from view. An obstacle could thereby go undetected until the car is very close to it. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Defective camera If a camera sector is black and contains this symbol then it means that the camera is out of order. The following illustration shows an example. of this, the image may vary slightly in brightness and quality. Poor light conditions can result in reduced image quality. Related information • Park assist camera* (p. 378) Recommended parking camera maintenance The parking cameras positioned beside the rear number plate holder, in the grille and in both door mirrors need a certain amount of maintenance. Clean camera lenses regularly with lukewarm water and car shampoo - be careful not to scratch the lenses. NOTE Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow and ice to ensure optimum function. This is particularly important in poor light. Related information • Park assist camera* (p. 378) The car's left-hand camera is out of order. Black camera sector A black camera sector is also shown in the following instances, but then without the symbol for defective camera: • • • open door open tailgate folded-in door mirror. Light conditions The camera image is adjusted automatically according to prevailing light conditions. Because * Option/accessory. 385 DRIVER SUPPORT Symbols and messages for Park assist camera Symbols and messages for Park assist camera can be shown in the driver display and/or the centre display. The following table shows examples. Symbol Message Specification The rearward parking assistance sensors are deactivated, so there are no acoustic warnings and field marks for obstacles/objects. The camera is disengaged. Park Assist System One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible. Sensors blocked, cleaning needed Park Assist System Unavailable Service required A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. 386 The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • Park assist camera* (p. 378) * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Park Assist Pilot* NOTE (PAP117) Park Assist Pilot helps the driver to park in or leave a parking space. The PAP function measures the space and steers the car - the driver's task is to: PAP first checks if a space is large enough and if so steers the car into the space. • • The centre display indicates with symbols, graphics and text the various operations to be carried out and when to do so. WARNING • • • The PAP function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. Be particularly aware of people and animals near the car. PAP is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. 117Park 118Park Assist Pilot Assist Pilot keep a close watch around the car Parking variants with Park Assist Pilot Park Assist Pilot PAP118 can be used for the following different parking situations. follow the instructions in the centre display • select gear (reverse/forward) - a "ping" sound indicates when the driver should change gear • • control and maintain a safe speed brake and stop. Related information • • • Parking variants with Park Assist Pilot (p. 387) Parking with Park Assist Pilot (p. 388) Leaving a car park with Park Assist Pilot (p. 391) • • Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 392) • Messages for Park Assist Pilot* (p. 394) Recommended Park Assist Pilot maintenance (p. 393) }} * Option/accessory. 387 DRIVER SUPPORT || Parallel parking Perpendicular parking Parking with Park Assist Pilot Park Assist Pilot (PAP119) helps the driver park via three steps. The function can also help the driver to leave a parking space. NOTE The PAP function measures the space and steers the car - the driver's task is to: • • The principal of parallel parking. Principle for perpendicular parking. The PAP function parks the car using the following steps: The PAP function parks the car using the following steps: 1. A parking space is identified and measured. 1. A parking space is identified and measured. 2. The car is reversed into the space. 2. 3. The car is positioned in the space by means of driving forward/backward. The car is reversed into the space and then positioned in the space by means of driving forward/backward. Using the Park Out function, a parallel-parked car can also be assisted by PAP to leave the parking space - see the heading "Leaving a parking space" in the section "Parking with Park Assist Pilot". NOTE A perpendicular-parked car cannot be assisted by the PAP Park Out function to leave a parking space - the function must only be used for a parallel-parked car. keep a close watch around the car follow the instructions in the centre display • select gear (reverse/forward) - a "ping" sound indicates when the driver should change gear • • control and maintain a safe speed brake and stop. Symbols, graphics and/or text appear on the centre display's screen when the different steps are to be performed. PAP can be activated if the following criteria are met once the engine has been started: • • No trailer is attached to the car Speed must be lower than 30 km/h (20 mph). Related information • 119Park 388 Park Assist Pilot* (p. 387) Assist Pilot * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT NOTE The distance between the car and parking spaces should be 0.5-1.5 metres (1.6-5.0 ft) while PAP is searching for a parking space. 2. Tap on the Park In button in the function view or in the camera view. > PAP searches for a parking space and checks whether it is big enough. 3. Be prepared to stop the car when the graphic and message on the centre display state that a suitable parking space has been found. > A pop-up window is shown. 4. Select Parallel parking or Perpendicular parking and select reverse gear. Parking PAP parks the car using the following steps: 1. A parking space is identified and measured. 2. The car is reversed into the space. 3. The car is positioned into the space - the system may then request that the driver changes gear. Principle for parallel parking. NOTE Finding and measuring parking spaces The function can be activated in the centre display's function view. PAP searches the area for parking, displays instructions and guides the car in on its passenger side. But if required the car can also be parked on the driver's side of the street: It can also be accessed from the camera views. • Activate the direction indicator to the driver's side - then the system searches for a parking space on that side of the car instead. Principle for perpendicular parking. Proceed as follows: 1. Drive at a maximum of 30 km/h (20 mph) before parallel or perpendicular parking. }} 389 DRIVER SUPPORT || Reversing in to the parking space Parallel. Perpendicular. Perform the following to reverse the car into the parking space: 1. Check that the area behind the car is clear, then engage reverse gear. 2. Reverse slowly and carefully without touching the steering wheel - and no faster than 7 km/h (4 mph). 3. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed by the graphic and message on the centre display. NOTE • Keep your hands away from the steering wheel when the PAP function is activated. • Make sure that the steering wheel is not hindered in any way and can rotate freely. • To achieve optimum results - wait until the steering wheel is fully turned before starting to drive backward/forward. Positioning the car in the parking space Parallel. Perpendicular. Proceed as follows: 1. 390 Move the gear selector into the D position, wait until the steering wheel has been turned and drive slowly forward. DRIVER SUPPORT 2. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed by the graphic and message on the centre display. 3. Select reverse gear and drive slowly backwards. 4. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed by the graphic and message on the centre display. The function is deactivated automatically and the graphics and message show that parking is complete. It may be necessary for the driver to correct the car’s position. Only the driver can determine whether the car is properly parked. Leaving a car park with Park Assist Pilot mum steering angle in order to leave the parking space. The function Park Out can also help the driver to leave a parking space. If PAP considers that the driver can leave the parking space without any extra manoeuvring then the function will be stopped, even if the driver may consider that the car is still in the parking space. NOTE When leaving a parking space, the Park Out function must only be used for a parallelparked car - it does not work for a perpendicular-parked car. Related information • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 387) The Park Out function is activated in the centre display's function view or in the camera view. IMPORTANT The warning distance is shorter when the sensors are used by PAP compared with when Park Assist uses the sensors. Related information • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 387) Proceed as follows: 1. Tap on the Park Out button in the function view or in the camera view. 2. Use the direction indicator to select the direction in which the car should leave the parking space. 3. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed by the graphic and message on the centre display - follow the instructions in the same way as for the parking procedure. Note the steering wheel can "spring" back when the function is completed - the driver may then need to turn the steering wheel back to the maxi- * Option/accessory. 391 DRIVER SUPPORT Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* PAP120 The Park Assist Pilot function cannot detect everything in all situations and may therefore have limited functionality. WARNING • The PAP function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. Parking is discontinued A parking sequence will be discontinued: • • if the driver moves the steering wheel • if the driver presses Cancel in the centre display • when the anti-lock brakes or the Electronic stability control are engaged - e.g. when a wheel loses grip on a slippery road if the car is driven too quickly - above 7 km/h (4 mph) • Be particularly aware of people and animals near the car. • Bear in mind that the front of the car may swing out towards oncoming traffic during the parking manoeuvre. • Objects situated higher than the sensor detection area are not included when calculating the parking manoeuvre, which could cause PAP to swing into the parking space too early – such parking spaces should be avoided for this reason. Where applicable, a message in the centre display states the reason for a parking sequence being discontinued. • • PAP is not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. 120Park 392 A driver should be aware about the following examples of Park Assist Pilot limitations: when the power steering works at reduced power - e.g. during cooling due to overheating (see section "Speed-dependent steering force"). IMPORTANT Under certain circumstances, PAP is unable to find parking spaces - one reason for this may be the fact that there is interference with the sensors from external sound sources which emit the same ultrasound frequencies as those with which the system works. Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc. NOTE Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will reduce their function and may prevent measurement. Driver responsibility The driver should bear in mind that the PAP is an aid – not an infallible, fully-automatic function. The driver must therefore be prepared to interrupt a parking step. Assist Pilot * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT There are also a few details to bear in mind while parking, e.g.: • The driver is always responsible for determining whether the space selected by PAP is suitable for parking. • Do not use PAP if snow chains or a spare wheel are fitted. • Do not use PAP if cargo items are protruding from the car. • Heavy rain or snow may cause the system to measure the parking space incorrectly. • During the search and check-measurement of the parking space, PAP may miss objects positioned deep in the parking space. • Parking spaces on narrow streets are not always feasible, since the space required for manoeuvring may not be sufficient. • • PAP is designed for parking on straight streets - not sharp curves or bends. For this reason, make sure the car is parallel to the potential parking spaces when PAP measures the space. IMPORTANT PAP bases itself on the locations of vehicles already parked nearby - if they are inappropriately parked, your own car's tyres and wheel rims may be damaged by contact with the kerb. • Perpendicular parking spaces may be missed or offered unnecessarily if one parked car is protruding more than other parked cars. 121"Approved For the Park Assist Pilot PAP122 function to work optimally, the parking assistance sensors must be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo. Changing to another approved wheel rim and/or tyre dimension may involve a changed tyre circumference, which means that the PAP system's parameters may then need to be updated. Consult a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 387) Speed-dependent steering force (p. 262) Use approved tyres121 with the correct tyre pressure - this affects the ability of PAP to park the car. • Recommended Park Assist Pilot maintenance Location of the parking sensors123. NOTE Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals, reduced or no function. Related information • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 387) tyres" refers to tyres of the same type and make as those fitted new on delivery from the factory. * Option/accessory. 393 DRIVER SUPPORT Messages for Park Assist Pilot* Messages for Park Assist Pilot PAP124 can be shown in the driver display and/or the centre display. The following table shows examples. Message Specification Park Assist System One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible. Sensors blocked, cleaning needed Park Assist System Unavailable Service required The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 387) 122Park Assist Pilot 123NOTE: The illustration 124Park Assist Pilot 394 is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING STARTING AND DRIVING Starting the car The car is started using the start button beside the steering wheel when the remote control key is in the passenger compartment. Start button location. WARNING Before starting: 1 396 • • Fasten the seatbelt. • Make sure that the brake pedal can be fully depressed. The remote control key is not physically used when starting the car since it is equipped with support for keyless starting (Passive start). To start the car: 1. The remote control key must be inside the car. For cars with Passive Start, the key needs to be located in the front part of the passenger compartment. With the option for keyless locking/unlocking* of the car, the key can be anywhere in the car. 2. Hold the brake pedal depressed1 fully. For cars with automatic gear changing, make sure that gear position P or N is selected. For cars with a manual gearbox, make sure that the gear lever is in neutral position or that the clutch pedal is depressed. 3. Press the start button. When the engine is started the starter motor works until the engine is started or until its overheating protection triggers. Adjust the seat, steering wheel and mirrors. Backup reader's location. If the Car key not found message is shown in the driver display when starting, place the remote control key by the backup reader. Then try to start the car again. NOTE When the remote control key is positioned by the backup reader, make sure that there are no car keys, metal objects or electronic apparatus by the backup reader, (e.g. mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers). Several car keys close to one another by the backup reader may cause interference with each other. If the car is moving, the engine can be started simply by pressing the button. * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING IMPORTANT If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts wait for 3 minutes before making a further attempt. Starting capacity increases if the battery is allowed to recover. Switching off the car • The car is switched off using the start button beside the steering wheel. Using jump starting with another battery (p. 443) • Selecting ignition mode (p. 399) WARNING Always take the remote control key out from the car when leaving the car and make sure the car's electrical system is in ignition position 0 - especially if there are children in the car. NOTE The idling speed can be noticeably higher than normal for certain engine types during cold starting. This is done in order that the emissions system can reach normal operating temperature as quickly as possible, which minimises exhaust emissions and protects the environment. Related information • • • • • Switching off the car (p. 397) Ignition positions (p. 398) Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 175) Using jump starting with another battery (p. 443) Start button location. To switch off the car: – Press the start button - the car is switched off. If the gear selector for cars with an automatic gearbox is not in position P or if the car rolls: – Press the start button and hold it depressed until the car is switched off. Related information • • • Starting the car (p. 396) Ignition positions (p. 398) Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 175) Selecting ignition mode (p. 399) 397 STARTING AND DRIVING Ignition positions The car's electrical system can be set in different levels/positions and in this way make the different functions available. Level 0 Functions • • • • In order to facilitate the use of a limited number of functions with the engine switched off, the car's electrical system can be set in 3 different levels - 0, I and II. These levels are described with the denomination "ignition position" throughout the owner's manual. • The following table shows the functions available in each ignition position/level: Odometer, clock and temperature gauge are illuminatedA. • II Functions • • The power seats* can be adjusted. • The power windows can be used. The centre display is started and can be usedA. The infotainment system can be usedA. The functions are time-controlled in this ignition position and are switched off automatically after a period of time. I Level Panorama roof, power windows, 12V socket in the passenger compartment, Bluetooth, navigation, phone, ventilation fan and windscreen wipers can be used. • • Power seats can be adjusted. • The infotainment system is started automatically if it was running when the car was left. 12 V sockets in the cargo area can be used. The headlamps come on. Warning/indicator lamps illuminate for 5 seconds. Several other systems are activated. However, heating in seat cushions and the rear window can only be activated after the car has been started. This ignition position consumes a lot of current from the battery and should therefore be avoided! A Also activated when the door is opened. Related information • • • • Starting the car (p. 396) Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 175) Using jump starting with another battery (p. 443) Selecting ignition mode (p. 399) Power is taken from the battery in this ignition position. 398 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING Selecting ignition mode • The car's electrical system can be set in different levels/positions and in this way make the different functions available. Ignition position I - Depress the start button and release. • Ignition position II - Press and hold the button depressed for approx. 5 seconds. Then release the button. • Back to ignition position0 - To return to ignition position 0 from position I and II press the start button. Selecting ignition position Related information • • • • • Start button location. • Starting the car (p. 396) Switching off the car (p. 397) Ignition positions (p. 398) Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 175) Using jump starting with another battery (p. 443) Alcohol lock* The function of the alcohol lock is to prevent the car from being driven by individuals under the influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be started the driver must take a breath test that verifies that he/she is not under the influence of alcohol. Alcohol lock calibration takes place in accordance with each market's limit value in force for driving legally. The car has an interface for the electrical connection of the different makes and models of alcohol lock recommended by Volvo. The interface facilitates alcohol lock connection, and gives the option of an integrated function including messages related to the alcohol lock in the car's main display. For information about a specific alcohol lock, please refer to the owner's manual from the respective alcohol lock manufacturer. Ignition position 0 - Unlock the car and store the remote control key inside the car. WARNING The alcohol lock is an aid and does not exempt the driver from responsibility. It is always the responsibility of the driver to be sober and to drive the car safely. NOTE To reach level I or II without starting the engine - do not depress the brake pedal, or the clutch pedal for cars with manual gear changing, when these ignition positions are to be selected. Related information • • • • Bypass of the alcohol lock* (p. 400) Before starting the engine with the alcohol lock (p. 400) Starting the car (p. 396) Ignition positions (p. 398) * Option/accessory. 399 STARTING AND DRIVING Bypass of the alcohol lock* In the event of an emergency situation or the alcohol lock is out of order, it is possible to bypass the alcohol lock in order to drive the car. For deactivation via the alcohol lock, see the separate instructions for that specific lock. Activating the bypass function (Bypass) NOTE All bypass activation is logged and saved in the memory in the alcohol lock's control unit. It is not possible to undo a bypass. Alcohol lock* (p. 399) Before starting the engine with the alcohol lock Before starting the engine with the alcohol lock (p. 400) The alcohol lock is activated automatically and is then ready for use when the car is opened. Starting the car (p. 396) To bear in mind Ignition positions (p. 398) In order to obtain correct function and as accurate a measurement result as possible: Related information • • • • • Avoid eating or drinking approx. 5 minutes before the breath test. • Avoid excess windscreen washing - the alcohol in the washer fluid may result in an incorrect measurement result. NOTE The message, Blow into alcolock Bypass instead?, is shown in the screen: • • If "Cancel/Yes" is shown - select bypass by pressing the right arrow button on the steering wheel's right-hand keypad and then on the O button. If "Yes" is shown - select bypass by pressing the O button. The alcohol lock is now bypassed and the car can be started. After a completed period of driving, the engine can be restarted within 30 minutes without a new breath test. Related information • • • • Bypass of the alcohol lock* (p. 400) Alcohol lock* (p. 399) Starting the car (p. 396) Ignition positions (p. 398) The number of bypasses possible before service is required is selected during alcohol lock installation. 400 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING Brake functions Foot brake The car's brakes are used to reduce the speed or prevent the car from rolling. The foot brake is part of the brake system. The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If a brake circuit is damaged, the brake pedal will engage deeper. Higher pressure on the pedal will therefore be needed to produce the normal braking effect. Besides the foot brake and parking brake, the car is equipped with several automatic brake assist functions. These can assist the driver by not needing to keep his/her foot on the brake pedal when stationary at a traffic light, when starting on an uphill gradient or when driving on a downhill gradient. Depending on the car's equipment, the following auto braking functions are available: • Automatic braking when stationary (Auto Hold) • • • • Hill start assist (Hill Start Assist) Auto braking after a collision City Safety Hill descent control (Hill Descent Control)* WARNING The brake servo only works when the engine is running. If the foot brake is used when the engine is switched off then the pedal will feel stiff and a higher pedal pressure must be used to brake the car. Auto braking after a collision (p. 408) In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy load the brakes should be relieved by using engine braking in manual gearshift mode. Engine braking is most efficiently used if the same gear is used downhill as up. Use drive mode Off Road* for increased engine braking while driving on steep downhill gradients at low speeds. Help when starting on a hill (p. 408) Anti-lock braking system City Safety™ (p. 326) The car has anti-lock brakes, Anti-lock Braking System (ABS), which can prevent the wheels from locking while braking and allows maintained steering control. Vibration may be felt in the Related information • • • • • • • The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted by a brake servo. Foot brake (p. 401) Parking brake (p. 403) Automatic braking when stationary (p. 407) Hill descent control* (p. 426) brake pedal when this is engaged and this is normal. A short test of the ABS system is made automatically after the car has been started when the driver releases the brake pedal. A further automatic test of the system may be made at low speed. The test may be felt as pulses in the brake pedal. Symbols in the driver display Symbol Specification Check the brake fluid level. If the level is low, fill with brake fluid and check for the cause of the brake fluid loss. Constant glow for 2 seconds when the engine is started: Automatic function check. Constant glow for more than 2 seconds: Fault in the ABS system. The car's normal brake system is still working, but without the ABS function. }} * Option/accessory. 401 STARTING AND DRIVING || WARNING If both the warning lamps for brake fault and ABS fault illuminate at the same time, a fault has occurred in the brake system. • If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is normal at this stage, drive carefully to the nearest workshop and have the brake system checked - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. • If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid. The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated. Brake assistance Braking on wet roads The brake assist system, BAS (Brake Assist System), helps to increase brake force during braking, thereby shortening the braking distance. The system detects the way in which the driver brakes and increases brake force where necessary. The brake force can be boosted up to the level when the ABS system is engaged. The function is suspended when the pressure on the brake pedal decreases. When driving for a prolonged period of time in heavy rain without braking, the braking effect may be delayed slightly when next using the brakes. NOTE When BAS is activated the brake pedal lowers slightly more than usual, depress (hold) the brake pedal as long as necessary. When the brake pedal is released, all braking ceases. Related information • • • • • • • 402 Brake assistance (p. 402) Automatic braking when stationary (p. 407) Help when starting on a hill (p. 408) Braking on wet roads (p. 402) Braking on gritted roads (p. 403) Brake system maintenance (p. 403) Brake lights (p. 142) Related information • Foot brake (p. 401) This may also be the case after a car wash. It is then necessary to depress the brake pedal more forcefully. You should therefore maintain a greater distance to the vehicles in front. Brake the car firmly after driving on wet roads or using a car wash. This warms up the brake discs, enabling them to dry faster and protecting them against corrosion. Bear in mind the current traffic situation when braking. Related information • • Foot brake (p. 401) Braking on gritted roads (p. 403) STARTING AND DRIVING Braking on gritted roads Brake system maintenance Parking brake When driving on salted roads, a layer of salt may form on the brake discs and brake linings. Check brake system components regularly for wear. To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service intervals as specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet. New and replaced brake linings and brake discs do not provide optimal braking effect until they have been "worn in" for a few hundred kilometres (miles). Compensate for the reduced braking effect by depressing the brake pedal harder. Volvo recommends only fitting brake linings that are approved for your Volvo. The parking brake prevents the car from rolling away from stationary by means of mechanically locking/blocking two wheels. This may extend braking distance. You should therefore maintain a greater safety distance to vehicles in front. In addition, make sure you do the following: • Brake now and again to remove any layer of salt. Make sure that other road users are not put at risk by the braking. • Gently depress the brake pedal after finishing driving and before starting your next trip. Related information • • IMPORTANT Foot brake (p. 401) The wear on the brake system's components must be checked regularly. Braking on wet roads (p. 402) Contact a workshop for information about the procedure or engage a workshop to carry out the inspection - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • Foot brake (p. 401) A faint electric motor noise can be heard when the electrically-operated parking brake is being applied. The noise can also be heard during the automatic function checking of the parking brake. If the car is stationary when the parking brake is applied then it only acts on the rear wheels. If it is applied when the car is moving then the normal foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts on all four wheels. Brake function changes over to the rear wheels when the car is almost stationary. Related information • Activating and deactivating the parking brake (p. 404) • Parking on a hill (p. 406) }} 403 STARTING AND DRIVING • In the event of a fault in the parking brake (p. 406) Activating and deactivating the parking brake Automatic activation The parking brake is activated automatically: • Automatic braking when stationary (p. 407) Use the parking brake to prevent the car from rolling from stationary. • if the Auto hold function (automatic braking when stationary) is activated and the car has been stationary for a longer time (5-10 minutes). • when gear position P is selected on a steep hill. • when the car is switched off and the setting for automatic activation of the parking brake is activated in the centre display. Activating the parking brake Emergency brake In an emergency, the parking brake can be activated when the car is in motion by pulling and holding up the control. Braking stops when the control is released, or if the accelerator pedal is depressed. 1. 2. Pull the control upward. > The symbol in the driver display illuminates when the parking brake is activated. Check that the car is stationary. Symbol in the driver display Symbol Specification The symbol is illuminated when the parking brake is activated. If the symbol flashes, it indicates a fault has occurred. Read the message in the driver display. 404 NOTE An acoustic signal sounds while emergency braking is active at high speeds. STARTING AND DRIVING Deactivating the parking brake NOTE When the car is first started, the parking brake can be released automatically without the seatbelt fastened. Related information Deactivate manually 1. Depress the brake pedal firmly. 2. Press the control down. > The parking brake releases and the symbol in the driver display extinguishes. • Automatic parking brake activation setting (p. 405) • In the event of a fault in the parking brake (p. 406) • • Parking brake (p. 403) Parking on a hill (p. 406) Automatic parking brake activation setting Choose whether the parking brake is to be activated automatically when the car is switched off. This choice is made in the settings menu in the centre display. 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press My Car Parking Brake and Suspension to select or deselect the function Auto Activate Parking Brake. Related information • Activating and deactivating the parking brake (p. 404) • Parking brake (p. 403) Deactivate automatically 1. Put the seatbelt on. 2. Depress the brake pedal firmly. 3. Start the car. 4. Select gear position D or R and depress the accelerator pedal. > The parking brake releases and the symbol in the driver display extinguishes. 405 STARTING AND DRIVING Parking on a hill Always use the parking brake when parking on a hill. WARNING Always use the parking brake when parking on an inclined surface. Engaging a gear or the automatic transmission's P position is not sufficient to hold the car stationary in all situations. If the car is parked facing uphill: • Low battery voltage Turn the wheels away from the kerb. • Turn the wheels towards the kerb. Heavy load uphill A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the car to roll backward when the parking brake is released automatically on a steep incline. Avoid this by pulling the control upwards while driving the car away. Release the control when the engine achieves traction. Related information • Activating and deactivating the parking brake (p. 404) Symbols in the driver display Symbol Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if it is not possible to deactivate or activate the parking brake after several attempts. An acoustic warning signal sounds when driving with the parking brake applied. If the car must be parked before a possible fault is rectified, then the wheels must be turned as for parking on a hill and the gear selector must be in position P. If the car is parked facing downhill: 406 In the event of a fault in the parking brake If the battery voltage is too low then the parking brake can neither be released nor applied. Connect a donor battery if the battery voltage is too low. Replacing the brake linings The rear brake linings must be replaced at a workshop due to the design of the electricallyoperated parking brake - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Specification If the symbol flashes, it indicates a fault has occurred. See the message in the driver display. Fault in brake system. See the message in the driver display. Information message in driver display. Related information • Activating and deactivating the parking brake (p. 404) • • Starter battery (p. 579) Volvo service programme (p. 560) STARTING AND DRIVING Automatic braking when stationary Symbols in the driver display Automatic braking when stationary (Auto hold) means that the driver can release the brake pedal while maintaining braking effect when the car has stopped at traffic lights or a junction. When the car has stopped, the brakes are activated automatically. The function can use either foot brake or parking brake to hold the car stationary and it works on all gradients. When driving away, the brakes disengage automatically if the driver is wearing the seatbelt. Symbol Specification The symbol is illuminated when the function uses the foot brake to keep the car stationary. Activating and deactivating the automatic brake at a standstill The automatic brake function at a standstill is activated using the button in the tunnel console. The symbol is illuminated when the function uses the parking brake to keep the car stationary. Related information NOTE When braking to a standstill on an uphill or downhill slope, the brake pedal should be depressed a little harder before being released to ensure the car does not roll. The parking brake is activated if: • • • • the car is switched off the driver's door is opened • • • • Activating and deactivating the automatic brake at a standstill (p. 407) Foot brake (p. 401) Parking brake (p. 403) Help when starting on a hill (p. 408) – Press the button in the tunnel console to activate or deactivate the function. > The indicator in the button illuminates when the function is activated. Activated function remains even when the car is started next time. the driver's seatbelt is unbuckled the car has been stationary for a longer time (5-10 minutes). }} 407 STARTING AND DRIVING || Applicable when switching off Help when starting on a hill Auto braking after a collision If the function is active and holds the car with the foot brake (A-symbol illuminated) then the brake pedal must be depressed at the same time as the button is depressed in order to deactivate. Hill start assist, Hill Start Assist (HSA), prevents the car from rolling backwards when starting on an uphill gradient. When reversing uphill, it prevents the car from rolling forwards. The function means that the pedal pressure in the brake system remains for several seconds while the driver's foot is moved from brake pedal to accelerator pedal. In the event of a collision in which the activation level is reached for the pyrotechnic seatbelt tensioners or airbags, or if a collision with a large animal is detected, the car's brakes are automatically applied. This function is to prevent or reduce the effects of any subsequent collision. • The function remains deactivated until it is reactivated. • When the function is deactivated, hill start assist (HSA) remains active to prevent the car from rolling backwards when starting on an uphill gradient. Related information • Automatic braking when stationary (p. 407) The temporary braking effect releases after several seconds or when the driver starts to drive away. Hill start assist is available even if the function for automatic braking when stationary (Auto hold) is deactivated. Related information • • Automatic braking when stationary (p. 407) Foot brake (p. 401) After a serious collision there is a risk that it is no longer possible to control and steer the car. In order to avoid or mitigate a possible further collision with a vehicle or an object in the vehicle's path, the auto braking system is activated automatically and brakes the car in a safe manner. Brake lights and hazard warning lights are activated during braking. When the car has stopped, the hazard warning lights continue to flash and the parking brake is applied. If braking is not appropriate, e.g. if there is a risk of being hit by following traffic, the system can be overridden by the driver depressing the accelerator pedal. The function assumes that the brake system is intact after the collision. Brake assist is included in the Rear Collision Warning and Blind Spot Information safety systems. 408 STARTING AND DRIVING Related information • • • Rear Collision Warning (p. 338) BLIS* (p. 339) Brake functions (p. 401) Gearbox Symbol The gearbox is part of the car's powertrain (power transmission) between engine and drive wheels. The function of the gearbox is to change the gear ratio depending on speed and power requirements. The car has an eight-speed automatic gearbox. The number of gear changes means that the engine's torque and power range can be used effectively. Two of the gears are overdrive gears that save fuel when driving at constant engine speed. It is also possible to select gears manually. The driver display shows which gear position is currently in use. Information or error message for gearbox. Follow the recommendation given. Hot or overheated gearbox. Follow the recommendation given. Reduced performance/Acceleration performance reduced In the event of a temporary powertrain fault, the car can go into a Limp home mode with reduced engine power to prevent damage to the powertrain. IMPORTANT To prevent damage to any drive system components, the working temperature of the gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of overheating, a warning symbol illuminates in the driver display and a text message is shown follow the recommendation given. Specification Related information • Gear positions for automatic gearbox (p. 410) • Gear shift indicator* (p. 413) Symbols in the driver display If a fault should occur in the gearbox, the driver display shows a symbol and a message. * Option/accessory. 409 STARTING AND DRIVING Gear positions for automatic gearbox WARNING Always use the parking brake when parking on an inclined surface. Engaging a gear or the automatic transmission's P position is not sufficient to hold the car stationary in all situations. With an automatic gearbox, the system chooses the gear so that driving is optimal. The gearbox also has a manual gearshift mode. NOTE The gear selector must be in P position to allow the car to be locked and alarmed. The driver display shows the gear position selected: P, R, N, D or M. In manual gearshift mode, the gear being used is also shown. Changing gear The gear selector is the shift-by-wire-type where shifting is performed electronically instead of mechanically. This means simpler shifting and more distinct gear positions. Change gear position by pressing the spring-loaded gear selector forwards or backwards, or sideways for manual shifting. 410 Gear positions Help functions Park position - P The park position is activated via the P button next to the gear selector. The system will change to P position automatically: Select the P position when the car is parked or when starting the engine. The car must be stationary when the park position is selected. • • if the car is switched off in position D or R. if the driver unfastens the seatbelt and opens the driver's door when the car is running with the gear selector in a position other than P. To select another gear position when the park position is selected, the brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition position must be II. To park a car without wearing the seatbelt and with the door open - exit the P position by selecting R or D again. To park - first apply the parking bake and then select park position. Reverse position - R Select position R to reverse. The car must be stationary when reverse position is selected. STARTING AND DRIVING Changing gear with steering wheel paddles* Neutral position - N No gear is engaged and the engine can be started. Apply the parking brake if the car is stationary with the gear selector in N position. The steering wheel paddles are a complement to the gear selector and make it possible to change gear manually without releasing hands from the steering wheel. To be able to change from the neutral position to another gear position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition position must be II. Drive position - D D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and down takes place automatically based on the level of acceleration and speed. The car must be stationary when changing gear from R position to D position. Manual gearshift mode - M The manual gearshift mode can be selected at any time while driving. The car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal is released. Select manual gear position by moving the gear selector backwards from the D position. The driver display shows which gear is engaged at the time. • Press the gear selector to the right to "+" (plus) to change up one step and release it. • Press the gear selector to the left to "–" (minus) to change down one step and release it. • Press the gear selector backwards to return to the D position. Activating the steering wheel paddles To be able to change gear with the steering wheel paddles they must first be activated: – Manual gearshift mode in the driver display. Related information • • • • Pull one of the paddles toward the steering wheel. > A figure in the driver display indicates current gear. Gear selector inhibitor (p. 412) Changing gear with steering wheel paddles* (p. 411) Kick-down function (p. 413) Gear shift indicator* (p. 413) Driver display when changing gear with steering wheel paddles. In gear position M the steering wheel paddles are automatically activated. }} * Option/accessory. 411 STARTING AND DRIVING || Switch Deactivating the function Gear selector inhibitor To change gear one step: Manual deactivation in gear position D. – Deactivate the steering wheel paddles by pulling the right-hand paddle (+) toward the steering wheel and holding in place until the figure in the driver display for the current gear extinguishes. The gear selector inhibitor prevents accidental changing between different gear positions in an automatic gearbox. – Pull one of the paddles backwards - towards the steering wheel - and release. Automatic deactivation In gear position D the steering wheel paddles are deactivated after a short time if they are not used. This is indicated by means of the figure for the current gear extinguishing. The exception is during engine braking - then the paddles are activated for as long as engine braking is in progress. "-": Selects the next lower gear. In gear position M there is no automatic deactivation. "+": Selects the next higher gear. Related information A gear change occurs at each pull of the paddle provided that the engine speed does not leave the permitted range. After each gear change the figure in the driver display changes to show the current gear. • Gear positions for automatic gearbox (p. 410) • Gear shift indicator* (p. 413) Automatic gear selector inhibitor The automatic gear selector inhibitor has special safety systems. From park position - P To be able to move the gear selector from the P position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition position must be II. From neutral position - N If the gear selector is in the N position and the car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds (irrespective of whether the engine is running) then the gear selector is locked. To be able to move the gear selector from the N position to another gear position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition position must be II. Message in the driver display If the gear selector is inhibited, a message is shown in the driver display, e.g. Gear lever Press brake pedal to activate gear lever. The gear selector is not inhibited mechanically. Related information • 412 Gear positions for automatic gearbox (p. 410) * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING Kick-down function Gear shift indicator* All-wheel drive Kick-down is used when maximum acceleration is needed, such as for overtaking. When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the way to the floor (beyond the position normally regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is immediately engaged. This is known as kickdown. The gear shift indicator in the driver display shows the current gear during manual gearshifting and when it is appropriate to engage the next gear for optimum fuel economy. For eco-driving during manual gear changing, it is important to drive in the right gear and to change gear in good time. All-wheel drive, AWD (All Wheel Drive), means that the car is driving all four wheels at the same time, which improves traction. If the accelerator is released from the kick-down position, the gearbox automatically changes up. The gear shift indicator shows the current gear in the driver display and indicates recommended shifting to a higher gear by a flashing plus sign. Safety function To prevent over-revving of the engine, the gearbox control program has a protective downshift inhibitor. The gearbox does not permit downshifting/kickdown which would result in an engine speed high enough to damage the engine. Nothing happens if the driver still tries to shift down in this way at high engine speed – the original gear remains engaged. On kick-down the car can shift down one or more steps at a time, depending in engine speed. The car shifts up when the engine has reached is maximum engine speed in order to prevent engine damage. Related information • To achieve the best possible traction, the motive force is distributed automatically to the wheels with the best grip. The system continuously calculates the need for torque to the rear wheels, and can immediately redistribute up to half of the motor's torque to the rear wheels. All-wheel drive also has a stabilising effect at higher speeds. Under normal driving conditions, the majority of power is transmitted to the front wheels. When stationary, the all-wheel drive is always engaged in preparation for maximum traction during acceleration. All-wheel drive characteristics vary depending on the selected drive mode*. Related information Related information • • • • Drive modes* (p. 414) Low speed control* (p. 425) Gearbox (p. 409) Gear positions for automatic gearbox (p. 410) Gear positions for automatic gearbox (p. 410) * Option/accessory. 413 STARTING AND DRIVING Drive modes* Selection of drive mode affects the car's driving characteristics in order to enhance the driving experience and facilitate driving in special situations. Using the drive modes it is possible to quickly have access to the car's numerous functions and settings for different driving needs. The following systems are adapted to obtain the best possible driving characteristics in each respective drive mode: • • • • • • • Steering Engine/gearbox/all-wheel drive Brakes Shock absorption Driver display Start/Stop function Climate settings Select the drive mode that best suits the current driving conditions. Remember that not all drive modes are available in all situations. Selectable drive modes COMFORT • This is the car's normal mode. tings mean that the car feels comfortable, the steering is light, the shock absorption is soft and body's movement is smooth. This drive mode is the certification mode for carbon dioxide emissions. ECO • Adapt the car for more energy-efficient and environmentally-conscious driving with the Eco mode. The drive mode means, for example, that the Start/Stop function is activated and the output of certain climate settings is reduced. In the Off road mode the driver display has a compass between the speedometer and tachometer. NOTE The driving mode is not designed to be used on public roads. DYNAMIC • Dynamic mode means that the car has sportier characteristics and faster response to accelerating. The driver display has an ECO gauge that facilitates fuel-efficient driving. The gear changes become faster and more distinct, and the gearbox prioritises a gear with greater traction. OFF ROAD • Maximise the car's traction when driving in difficult terrain and on poor roads. Steering response is faster and shock absorption is harder2 which means that the body follows the roadway in order to reduce roll during cornering. The steering is light, the all-wheel drive operation and low speed function with hill descent control (Hill Descent Control) are activated. Start/Stop function is deactivated. Start/Stop function is deactivated. The drive mode can only be activated at low speeds and the speedometer shows the range for speed limitation. If this speed is exceeded, Off road mode is suspended and another drive mode is activated. When the car starts, it is in Comfort mode and the Start/Stop function is activated. These set- 2 414 Applies to Four-C. * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING 3. INDIVIDUAL • Adapting a drive mode according to individual preferences. In Presets, select a drive mode to start from: Eco, Comfort or Dynamic. Possible adjustments apply to settings for: Select a drive mode to start from, and then adjust the settings according to the desired driving characteristics. These settings are saved in an individual driver profile. • • • • • • • An individual drive mode is only available if it is first activated in the centre display. Driver Display Steering force Powertrain Characteristics Brake Characteristics Suspension Control ECO Climate Start/Stop. Related information Settings view3 for individual drive mode. 3 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press My Car Individual Drive Mode and select Individual Drive Mode. • • • • • • • Changing drive mode* (p. 416) Drive mode ECO (p. 416) Economical driving (p. 428) Start/Stop function (p. 419) Low speed control* (p. 425) Hill descent control* (p. 426) All-wheel drive (p. 413) The figure is schematic - details may vary depending on car model or updated software. * Option/accessory. 415 STARTING AND DRIVING Changing drive mode* 2. Change the drive mode using the button in the centre console. Select the drive mode that best suits the current driving conditions. Remember that not all drive modes are available in all situations. To change drive mode: Select the drive mode in one of two ways: Drive mode ECO • Tap the desired drive mode directly on the touchscreen to select and activate the drive mode. • Press the DRIVE MODE button again to move the cursor to the desired drive mode. The selected drive mode is activated after a short delay. Drive mode Eco optimises the car's driving characteristics for more fuel efficient and environmentally-conscious driving. Use this drive mode to save fuel and the environment. If a drive mode is greyed-out in the pop-up menu then it cannot be selected. Related information • • 1. Press the DRIVE MODE button. > A pop-up menu is opened in the centre display with the active drive mode highlighted. Drive modes* (p. 414) The following properties are adapted for Eco driving: • • Gearbox gearshift points. • The Eco Coast freewheel function is activated and engine braking is deactivated when the accelerator pedal is released at speeds between 65 and 140 km/h (40 and 87 mph). • Some of the climate control system's settings work at reduced power or are deactivated. • The driver display shows information in an ECO gauge which facilitates environmentallyconscious and fuel-efficient driving. Activating and deactivating drive mode ECO with the function button (p. 418) • Activating and deactivating low-speed driving* using a function button (p. 425) • Activating and deactivating hill descent control* with the function button (p. 427) Engine management and response from the accelerator pedal. Free-wheel function Eco Coast The freewheel function Eco Coast means in practice that engine braking ceases, meaning in turn that the car's kinetic energy is used to freewheel for longer distances. When the driver releases the accelerator pedal the gearbox is automatically disengaged from the engine whose speed is 416 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING reduced to idling speed with reduced consumption. • The road's downhill gradient is steeper than approx. 6%. The function is best used where it is possible to freewheel a long way, e.g. roads with a slight downhill gradient or when there is a predictable speed reduction to freewheel into a zone with a lower speed limit. • Manual gear changing is performed with the steering wheel paddles*. Activating the freewheel function The function is activated when the accelerator pedal is fully released, in combination with the following parameters: • • • Drive mode Eco is activated. • The road's downhill gradient is not steeper than approx. 6%. The gear selector is in D position. Speed within the range of approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph). The driver display shows COASTING when the freewheel function is being used. Limitations The freewheel function is not available if: • Engine and/or gearbox are not at normal operating temperature. • The gear selector is moved from the D position and the manual position. • The speed is outside the range of approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph). Deactivating and switching off the freewheel function In certain situations it may be desirable to deactivate or switch off the function in order to use engine braking. Examples of such situations may be on steep downhill gradients or before an imminent overtaking manoeuvre - in order to be able to do it in the safest way possible. be lower compared to other drive modes, which enables further fuel savings. This means that the car's speed can be slightly above or below the set speed. • On a smooth road, the car's speed can deviate from the set speed when the cruise control is active and the car free-rolls. • On a steep uphill slope, the car's speed drops until a downshift is made, then reduced acceleration starts in order to achieve the set speed. • On a downhill slope where the car free-rolls, the car's speed can be slightly above or below the set speed. The function uses normal engine braking to maintain the set speed. The foot brake is also used if necessary. Deactivate the freewheel function as follows: • • • Actuate the accelerator or brake pedal. Move the gear selector to manual position. Changing gear with steering wheel paddles*. Switch off the freewheel function as follows: Eco gauge in the driver display • The ECO gauge indicates how fuel-efficient the driving is: Change drive mode*, or switch off the Eco drive mode in the function view. Even without the freewheel function, it is possible to freewheel for short distances. This, in turn, reduces consumption. However, for the best fuel economy it is better to have the freewheel function activated and be able to freewheel for longer distances. Cruise control Eco Cruise When using the cruise control in the Eco drive mode, the car's acceleration and deceleration will • With fuel-efficient driving, the gauge shows a low value with the pointer in the green zone. • With non-fuel-efficient driving, e.g. during heavy braking or heavy acceleration, the gauge shows a high value. The ECO gauge also has an indicator to show how a reference driver would drive the car under the same driving conditions. This is indicated with the short pointer on the gauge. }} * Option/accessory. 417 STARTING AND DRIVING Related information || • • • • • ECO climate control In the Eco drive mode, Eco climate control is activated automatically in the passenger compartment in order to reduce energy consumption. Changing drive mode* (p. 416) Activating and deactivating drive mode ECO with the function button (p. 418) Drive modes* (p. 414) Economical driving (p. 428) Start/Stop function (p. 419) Activating and deactivating drive mode ECO with the function button Any car that is not equipped with a drive mode button in the centre console has a function button for the Eco drive mode in the centre display's function view. The Eco mode is deactivated when the engine is switched off, and it must therefore be activated after each time the engine is started. The driver display shows ECO when the function is activated. Selecting Eco drive mode in the centre display function view – Press the Driving Mode ECO button to activate or deactivate the function. NOTE When the ECO function is activated, several parameters in the climate control system's settings are changed, and several electricity consumer functions are reduced. Certain settings can be reset manually, but full functionality is only regained by switching off the ECO function or adapting Individual* drive mode with full climate functionality. In the event of difficulties due to misting, press the button for max. defroster which has normal functionality. 418 > An indicator in the button illuminates when the function is activated. Related information • • • Drive mode ECO (p. 416) Changing drive mode* (p. 416) Drive modes* (p. 414) * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING Start/Stop function Driving with start/stop function Autostart With the Start/Stop function, the engine switches off temporarily when the car has stopped e.g. at traffic lights or in a traffic queue, and then starts again automatically when the journey is resumed. The Start/Stop function temporarily switches off the engine when stationary and then restarts it automatically when the journey is resumed. The Start/Stop function is available when the engine is started and can be activated if certain conditions have been met. The driver display indicates whether the function is available, active or not available. The following is required for the engine to autostart: The start/stop function reduces fuel consumption, which in turn contributes to reduced exhaust emissions. The system makes it possible to adopt an environmentally-conscious driving style by allowing the car to engine auto-stop when possible. Related information • • • Driving with start/stop function (p. 419) Conditions for the Start/Stop function (p. 421) Drive modes* (p. 414) All of the car's normal systems such as lighting, radio, etc. work normally, even when the engine is auto-stopped. However, some equipment may have its output temporarily reduced, e.g. the climate control system's fan speed or extremely high volume on the audio system. • Release the brake pedal - the engine will autostart and you can continue driving. On an uphill gradient hill start assist (HSA) engages, which prevents the car from rolling backwards. • When the Auto Hold function is activated, auto-start is delayed until the accelerator pedal is depressed. • When adaptive cruise control or Pilot Assist is activated, the engine will auto-start when the accelerator pedal is depressed, or by button on the left keypad pressing the of the steering wheel. • Maintain foot pressure on the brake pedal and depress the accelerator pedal - the engine auto-starts. • On a downhill gradient: Release pressure on the brake pedal slightly so that the car begins to roll - the engine will auto-start after a slight speed increase. Auto-stop The following is required for the engine to autostop: • Stop the car with the foot brake and then keep your foot on the brake pedal - the engine stops automatically. In drive mode Eco or Comfort4, the engine may auto-stop before the car is completely stationary. With adaptive cruise control or Pilot Assist activated, the engine will auto-stop after approximately three seconds. 4 Normal start mode. }} * Option/accessory. 419 STARTING AND DRIVING || Symbols in the driver display • The text READY is shown in the tachometer when the function is available. • A pointer in the tachometer points to READY when the function is active and the engine is auto-stopped. • The text READY is greyed out when the function is not available. • No text is shown when the function is deactivated. • Automatic braking when stationary (p. 407) Deactivating the Start/Stop function temporarily In certain situations it may be desirable to temporarily deactivate the start/stop function. Deactivate using the Start/ Stop function button in the centre display's function view. The indication in the button is switched off when the function is deactivated. The function is deactivated until • • • it is reactivated the drive mode is changed to Eco or Comfort the next time the car is started. Related information • • The function is active and the engine is auto-stopped. Related information 420 • Deactivating the Start/Stop function temporarily (p. 420) • Conditions for the Start/Stop function (p. 421) • • Start/Stop function (p. 419) Help when starting on a hill (p. 408) Driving with start/stop function (p. 419) Conditions for the Start/Stop function (p. 421) STARTING AND DRIVING Conditions for the Start/Stop function • The starter battery's temperature is below or above the permitted limit values. The engine auto-starts without the brake pedal having been released For the Start/Stop function to work requires that a number of conditions are met. • The driver makes sweeping steering wheel movements. In the following cases, the engine auto-starts even if the driver does not take his/her foot off the brake pedal: If any condition is not met, this will be indicated in the driver display. The engine does not auto-stop The engine does not auto-stop in the following cases: • The car has not reached approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) after starting. • After a number of repeated auto stops, speed must again exceed approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) before the next auto stop. • • • • • The road is very steep. The bonnet is opened. • When driving at high altitudes when the engine has not reached operating temperature. High humidity in the passenger compartment forms misting on the windows. • The environment in the passenger compartment deviates from the set values. • There is a temporarily high current take-off or starter battery capacity drops below the lowest permissible level. • • • Repeated pumping of the brake pedal. The ABS system has been activated. In the event of heavy braking (even without the ABS system having been activated). • Many starts during a short period of time have activated the starter motor's thermal protection. The bonnet is opened. The car starts to roll or increase speed slightly if the car auto-stopped without being completely stationary. • • The driver has unfastened the seatbelt. The capacity of the starter battery is below the minimum permissible level. • • The exhaust system's particulate filter is full5. • The engine is not at normal operating temperature. A trailer is connected electrically to the car’s electrical system. • • • The ambient temperature is under -5 °C (23 °F) or above approx. 37 °C (98 °F). The gearbox is not at normal operating temperature. The driver's seatbelt buckle is opened with the gear selector in D or N position. • • The gear selector is in M (±) position. The gear selector is moved from D to R or M (±) position. • • the windscreen's electric heating is activated. The engine does not auto-start • The environment in the passenger compartment deviates from the set values. In the following cases the engine does not autostart after having auto-stopped: The driver's door is opened with the gear selector in D position - a "ping" sound and text message indicate that the ignition is on. • the car is reversed. • 5 Applies to cars with diesel engines. The driver is unbelted, the gear selector is in P position and the driver's door is open - a normal start must take place. }} 421 STARTING AND DRIVING || WARNING Do not open the bonnet when the engine has auto-stopped. Switch off the engine normally before lifting up the bonnet. Related information • • • 422 Start/Stop function (p. 419) Driving with start/stop function (p. 419) Deactivating the Start/Stop function temporarily (p. 420) STARTING AND DRIVING Level control* and shock absorption Shock absorption(Four-C)* Level control and shock absorption are regulated automatically in the car. The shock absorption is adapted according to the selected drive mode and according to the speed of the car. Shock absorption is normally set for the best possible comfort and is regulated continuously depending on the road surface, the car's acceleration, braking and cornering. Symbols and messages in driver display Symbol Message Specification Suspension Level control has been switched off manually by the user. Deactivated by user Temporarily reduced performence Level control performance has been temporarily reduced due to extensive system use. If this message appears frequently (e.g. several times in one week) contact a workshopA. Suspension A fault has occurred. Visit a workshopA as soon as possible. Suspension Service required }} * Option/accessory. 423 STARTING AND DRIVING || Symbol Message Specification Suspension failure A critical fault has occurred. Stop safely, have the car towed to a workshopA. Stop safely Suspension A fault has occurred. If the message appears whilst driving, contact a workshopA. Slow down Car too high Suspension Auto adjusting car level A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • 424 Drive modes* (p. 414) * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING Low speed control* NOTE The low speed control function Low Speed Control (LSC) facilitates and improves traction for driving off-road and on slippery surfaces, such as with a caravan on grass or a boat trailer on a launch ramp. The driving mode is not designed to be used on public roads. In a car with drive mode button*, the function is included in the Off Road drive mode. The function is adapted for off-road driving and driving with a trailer at low speed, up to approx. 40 km/h (25 mph). The function is deactivated when driving at higher speeds and must be reactivated at a lower speed, if required. With low-speed control, low gears and all-wheel drive are prioritised, which help to avoid wheelspin and provides better traction on all wheels. The accelerator pedal is less responsive in order to facilitate traction and speed control at low speed. The function is activated together with Hill Descent Control (HDC) which means that speed down steep hills can be controlled with the accelerator pedal, reducing the need to use the brake pedal. The system facilitates a low and even speed while driving on steep downhill gradients. NOTE When LSC with HDC is activated, the feel of the accelerator pedal and engine response are changed. NOTE Related information • • • • Activating and deactivating lowspeed driving* using a function button Any car that is not equipped with a drive mode button in the centre console has a function button for low-speed control with Hill Descent Control in the centre display's function view. Select low-speed driving in the centre display function view – Press the Hill Descent Control button to activate or deactivate the function. Activating and deactivating low-speed driving* using a function button (p. 425) Changing drive mode* (p. 416) Hill descent control* (p. 426) All-wheel drive (p. 413) > An indicator in the button illuminates when the function is activated. This function is disabled automatically when the engine is switched off. NOTE The function is deactivated when driving at higher speeds and must be reactivated at a lower speed, if required. }} * Option/accessory. 425 STARTING AND DRIVING || Related information • • Low speed control* (p. 425) Changing drive mode* (p. 416) Hill descent control* Hill descent control, Hill Descent Control (HDC), is a low speed function with enhanced engine braking. The function makes it possible to increase or reduce vehicle speed on steep downhill gradients using only the accelerator pedal, without using the foot brake. In a car with drive mode button*, the function is included in the Off Road drive mode. Hill descent control is adapted for off-road driving at low speeds and facilitates driving on steep downhill gradients with difficult surfaces. The driver does not need to use the brake pedal, but can instead focus on steering. WARNING HDC does not work in all situations but is designed merely as a supplementary aid. The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely. the foot brake to be used. The brake lights are switched on when the function is operating. The driver can brake and reduce crawling speed, or stop the car at any time by using the foot brake. The function is activated together with Low Speed Control (LSC) which facilitates driving and improves traction for driving off-road and on slippery surfaces. The systems are designed for use at low speed, up to approx. 40 km/h (25 mph). Points to remember when driving with HDC • If the function is disabled while driving on a steep downhill gradient, the braking effect will gradually decrease. • HDC can be used in gear position D, R, and with 1st or 2nd gear with manual gear changing. • It is not possible to change to 3rd gear or higher with manual gear changing. Function Hill descent control allows the car to roll at inching speed both forward and backward, assisted by the brake system. The speed can be increased by using the accelerator pedal. When the accelerator pedal is then released the car slows back down to crawling speed, regardless of the gradient of the hill and without the need for 426 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING NOTE When LSC with HDC is activated, the feel of the accelerator pedal and engine response are changed. NOTE The driving mode is not designed to be used on public roads. Activating and deactivating hill descent control* with the function button Any car that is not equipped with a drive mode button in the centre console has a function button for hill descent control with Hill Descent Control in the centre display's function view. Related information • • Hill descent control* (p. 426) Changing drive mode* (p. 416) Selecting hill descent control in the centre display function view Hill descent control only works at low speeds. NOTE The function is deactivated when driving at higher speeds and must be reactivated at a lower speed, if required. – Press the Hill Descent Control button to activate or deactivate the function. Related information • Activating and deactivating hill descent control* with the function button (p. 427) • • • Changing drive mode* (p. 416) Low speed control* (p. 425) All-wheel drive (p. 413) > An indicator in the button illuminates when the function is activated. This function is disabled automatically when the engine is switched off. NOTE The function is deactivated when driving at higher speeds and must be reactivated at a lower speed, if required. * Option/accessory. 427 STARTING AND DRIVING Economical driving Drive economically and eco-consciously by driving smoothly, thinking ahead, and adjusting your driving style and speed to the prevailing conditions. • For lower fuel consumption, activate Eco drive mode. • • Drive in the highest gear6 possible, adapted to the current traffic situation and road lower engine speeds result in lower fuel consumption. Use the gear shift indicator. • Drive at a steady speed and keep a good distance to other vehicles and objects to minimise braking. • High speed results in increased fuel consumption - the wind resistance increases with speed. • Drive with the correct air pressure in the tyres and check this regularly - select ECO tyre pressure for best results. • Choice of tyres can affect fuel consumption seek advice on suitable tyres from a retailer. • Remove unnecessary items from the car the greater the load the higher the consumption. 6 428 Use the Eco Coast freewheel function in Eco drive mode - engine braking ceases, meaning that the car's kinetic energy is used to freewheel for longer distances. Applies to driving with manual gear changing. • Use engine braking to slow down, when it can take place without risk to other road users. • A roof load and space box increase wind resistance, leading to higher consumption remove the load carriers when not in use. • Avoid driving with open windows. WARNING Never switch off the engine while moving, such as downhill, this deactivates important systems such as the power steering and brake servo. Preparations for a long trip Before a driving holiday or some other type of long journey, it is important to check the car's functions and equipment particularly carefully. Check that: • the engine is working normally and that fuel consumption is normal • • • there are no leaks (fuel, oil or other fluid) • Related information • • • Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 28) Drive mode ECO (p. 416) Checking tyre pressure (p. 522) • • • brake force during braking is optimal all lamps are working - adjust headlamp level if the car is heavily laden the tyres have sufficient tread depth and pressure. Change to winter tyres when driving to areas where there is a risk of snowy or icy road surfaces. starter battery charging is good the wiper blades are in good condition a warning triangle and high-visibility vest are located in the car - legally required in certain countries. Related information • • • • Checking tyre pressure (p. 522) Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 626) Filling washer fluid (p. 609) Winter driving (p. 429) STARTING AND DRIVING • • • • • • • Economical driving (p. 428) Winter driving Slippery driving conditions Settings for car modem (p. 501) For winter driving it is important to perform certain checks of the car in order to ensure that it can be driven safely. To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo recommends using winter tyres on all wheels if there is a risk of snow or ice. Recommendations for loading (p. 550) Driving with a trailer (p. 448) Pilot Assist (p. 296) Speed Limiter (p. 268) Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 537) Check the following in particular before the cold season: • The engine coolant must contain 50% glycol. This mixture protects the engine against frost down to approx. -35°C (-31°F). To avoid health risks, different types of glycol must not be mixed. • The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent condensation. • Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate starting in cold weather and also reduce fuel consumption while the engine is cold. IMPORTANT Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard driving or in hot weather. • • The condition of the starter battery and charge level must be inspected. Cold weather places great demands on the starter battery and its capacity is reduced by the cold. NOTE The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement in certain countries. Studded tyres are not permitted in all countries. Practise driving on slippery surfaces under controlled conditions to learn how the car reacts. Related information • • • • • • • • • • Winter wheels (p. 536) Snow chains (p. 536) Braking on gritted roads (p. 403) Braking on wet roads (p. 402) Filling washer fluid (p. 609) Starter battery (p. 579) Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 607) Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 606) Topping up coolant (p. 572) Adverse driving conditions for engine oil (p. 622) Use washer fluid with antifreeze to avoid ice forming in the washer fluid reservoir. 429 STARTING AND DRIVING Driving in water IMPORTANT Driving in water means that the car is driven in a deeper amount of water on a road that is under water. Driving in water must be performed with great caution. The car can be driven through water to a maximum depth of 45 cm (17.7 inches) at no more than walking speed. Extra caution should be exercised when passing through flowing water. During driving in water, maintain a low speed and do not stop the car. When the water has been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly and check that full brake function is achieved. Water and mud for example can make the brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake function. • • 7 430 Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter. • If water enters the transmission, it reduces the lubricating ability of the oil, which shortens the service life of related systems. • Damage to any component, engine, transmission, turbocharger, differential or its internal components caused by flooding, hydrostatic locking or oil shortage, is not covered by the warranty. • If necessary, clean the contacts for the electric heater and trailer coupling after driving in water and mud. Do not let the car stand with water over the sills for any long period of time - this could cause electrical malfunctions. • In the event of the engine stalling in water, do not try restart - tow the car from the water to a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Risk of engine breakdown. Opening and closing the fuel filler flap The car must be unlocked for the fuel filler flap to be opened7. In the driver display, the arrow next to the tank symbol indicates which side of the car the fuel filler flap is located. 1. Open the fuel filler flap with a gentle press on the rear of the flap. 2. After refuelling is finished - close the flap with a gentle press. Related information • • Filling fuel (p. 431) Checking and filling with AdBlue® (p. 438) Related information • • Recovery (p. 455) Low speed control* (p. 425) Only locking and unlocking with the remote control key, keyless or via Volvo On Call affects the status of the fuel filler flap. * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING Filling fuel 3. Insert the pump nozzle in the fuel filler opening. The filler pipe has two opening caps. The pump nozzle must be pushed past both caps before refuelling is started. 4. Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump nozzle cuts out the first time. > The tank is full. The fuel tank is fitted with a coverless fuel filler system. Refuelling the car at a petrol station NOTE Overfilled fuel in the tank can overflow in hot weather. Topping up fuel from a fuel can Fuel filling is performed in the following way. When filling with a fuel can, use the funnel located in the foam block under the floor hatch in the cargo area. 1. Switch off the car and open the fuel filler flap. 1. Open the fuel filler flap. 2. 2. Choose fuel that is approved for use in the car in accordance with the identifier8 on the inside of the fuel filler flap. See information on approved fuels and the identifier in the sections on "Petrol" and "Diesel" respectively. Insert the funnel in the fuel filler opening. The filler pipe has two opening caps. The funnel's pipe must be pushed past both caps before filling can be started. 8 Decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Related information • Opening and closing the fuel filler flap (p. 430) • • • Petrol (p. 432) Diesel (p. 434) Empty tank and diesel engine (p. 435) Applies to cars with fuel-driven heater* Never use the fuel-driven heater when the car is in a filling station area. The identifier in accordance with the CEN standard EN16942 is located on the inside of the fuel filler flap, and will be on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations throughout Europe by the end of 2018 at the latest. * Option/accessory. 431 STARTING AND DRIVING Handling of fuel IMPORTANT Do not use fuel with a lower quality than that recommended by Volvo, as this will negatively affect engine power and fuel consumption. Mixtures of various fuel types or use of fuels which are not recommended will invalidate Volvo's guarantees and any supplementary service agreements; this is applicable to all engines. WARNING Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and getting fuel splashes in the eyes. In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, bioethanol and mixtures of them and diesel are highly toxic and could cause permanent injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical attention immediately if fuel has been swallowed. WARNING Fuel which spills onto the ground can be ignited. Petrol Petrol is a type of engine fuel that is intended for cars with a petrol engine. Only use petrol from well-known producers. Never use fuel of dubious quality. The petrol must fulfil the EN 228 standard. Identifier for petrol Related information • • • Petrol (p. 432) Diesel (p. 434) Handling AdBlue® (p. 437) The identifier in accordance with the CEN standard EN16942 is located on the inside of the fuel filler flap, and will be on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations throughout Europe by the end of 2018 at the latest. These are the identifiers that apply for current standard fuels in Europe. Petrol with the following identifiers may be used in cars with petrol engine: E5 is a petrol with maximum 2.7% oxygen and maximum 5 volume % ethanol. Switch off the fuel-driven heater before starting to refuel. Never carry an activated mobile phone when refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to fire and injury. 432 E10 is a petrol with maximum 3.7% oxygen and maximum 10 volume % ethanol. STARTING AND DRIVING IMPORTANT • Fuel that contains up to 10 percent by volume ethanol is permitted. • EN 228 E10 petrol (max 10 percent by volume ethanol) is approved for use. • Ethanol higher than E10 (max. 10 percent by volume ethanol) is not permitted, e.g. E85 is not permitted. Octane rating • • 95 RON can be used for normal driving. 98 RON is recommended for optimum performance and minimum fuel consumption. • An octane rating lower than RON 95 must not be used. When driving in temperatures above +38 °C (100 °F), fuel with the highest octane rating is recommended for optimum performance and fuel economy. IMPORTANT • Use only unleaded petrol to avoid damaging the catalytic converter. • Fuel containing metallic additives must not be used. • Do not use any additives which have not been recommended by Volvo. Related information • • • • Handling of fuel (p. 432) Filling fuel (p. 431) Petrol particle filter (p. 433) Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 626) Petrol particle filter Petrol cars are fitted with particle filters for more efficient emission control. Particles in the exhaust gases are collected in the petrol particle filter during normal driving. In normal driving conditions, passive regeneration takes place, which leads to the particles being oxidised and burned away. The filter is emptied in this way. If the car is driven at low speed or with repeated cold starts in low outside temperature, active regeneration may be necessary. Regeneration of the particulate filter is automatic and normally takes 10-20 minutes. There may be a smell of burning during regeneration. Use the parking heater in cold weather - the engine then reaches normal operating temperature more quickly. When driving short distances at low speeds in a petrol car The capacity of the petrol emission control system is affected by how the car is driven. It is important to drive varying distances at different speeds to achieve optimal performance. Driving short distances at low speeds (or in cold climates) frequently, where the engine does not reach normal operating temperature, can lead to problems that can eventually cause a malfunction and trigger a warning message. If the vehicle is mostly driven in city traffic, it is important to regu- }} 433 STARTING AND DRIVING || larly drive at higher speeds to allow the petrol emission control system to regenerate. • The car should be driven on A-roads at speeds in excess of 60 km/h (38 mph) for at least 20 minutes between each refuelling. Related information • Petrol (p. 432) Diesel Diesel is a type of engine fuel that is intended for cars with a diesel engine. Only use diesel fuel from well-known producers. Never use fuel of dubious quality. Diesel fuel must fulfil the EN 590 or SS 155435 standard. Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants in the fuel, such as excessively high volumes of sulphur and metals. Identifier The identifier in accordance with the CEN standard EN16942 is located on the inside of the fuel filler flap, and will be on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations throughout Europe by the end of 2018 at the latest. This is the identifier that applies for current standard fuel in Europe. Diesel with the following identifiers may be used in cars with diesel engine: B7 is diesel with maximum 7 volume % fatty acid methyl ester (FAME). At low temperatures (lower than 0 °C (32 °F)) a paraffin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, 9 434 Fatty Acid Methyl Ester which may lead to starting problems. The fuel qualities that are sold must be adapted for season and climate zone, but for extreme weather conditions, old fuel or moving between climate zones, paraffin precipitate may occur. The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When refuelling, check that the area around the fuel filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the paintwork. Wash off any spillage with detergent and water. IMPORTANT Diesel fuel must: • fulfil the EN 590 and/or SS 155435 standards • have a sulphur content not exceeding 10 mg/kg • have a maximum of 7 vol % FAME9 (B7). STARTING AND DRIVING IMPORTANT Diesel type fuels that must not be used: • • • • Special additives Marine diesel fuel Heating oil Before starting the car after the fuel tank has been filled with diesel - proceed as follows: FAME10 and vegetable oil. 1. The remote control key must be inside the car. 2. Set the car in ignition position II - press the start button without depressing the brake pedal and hold the button depressed for approx. 4 seconds. Then release the button. 3. Wait approx. one minute. 4. Start the engine. These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in accordance with Volvo recommendations and generate increased wear and engine damage that is not covered by the Volvo warranty. Related information • • • • • • Empty tank and diesel engine Once the engine has stopped due to fuel starvation, the fuel system needs a few moments to carry out a check. Handling of fuel (p. 432) Filling fuel (p. 431) Empty tank and diesel engine (p. 435) Diesel particulate filter (p. 436) the filler pipe. The filler pipe has two opening caps. The funnel's pipe must be pushed past both caps before filling can be started. Related information • • • Filling fuel (p. 431) Diesel (p. 434) Tool kit (p. 529) NOTE Emission control with AdBlue® (p. 436) Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel shortage: Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 626) • Stop the car on as flat/level ground as possible - if the car is tilting there is a risk of air pockets in the fuel supply. Points to remember when filling with a fuel can When filling diesel with a fuel can, use the funnel located under the floor hatch in the cargo area. Make sure you insert the funnel's pipe firmly into 10 Diesel fuel with maximum 7 vol % FAME (B7) is permitted. 435 STARTING AND DRIVING Diesel particulate filter Diesel cars are fitted with particle filters for more efficient emission control. Particles in the exhaust gases are collected in the diesel particle filter during normal driving. When these conditions have been met, regeneration starts to burn off the particles and empty the filter. To start regeneration, the engine must have reached normal operating temperature. Regeneration of the particulate filter is automatic and normally takes 10-20 minutes. The capacity of the diesel emission control system is affected by how the car is driven. It is important to drive varying distances at different speeds to achieve optimal performance. The following may arise during regeneration: Driving short distances at low speeds (or in cold climates) frequently, where the engine does not reach normal operating temperature, can lead to problems that can eventually cause a malfunction and trigger a warning message. If the vehicle is mostly driven in city traffic, it is important to regularly drive at higher speeds to allow the diesel emission control system to regenerate. • a smaller reduction of engine power may be noticed temporarily • • fuel consumption may increase temporarily • a smell of burning may arise. NOTE Use the parking heater* in cold weather - the engine then reaches normal operating temperature more quickly. IMPORTANT If the filter is completely filled with particles, it may be difficult to start the engine and the filter is non-functional. Then there is a risk that the filter will need to be replaced. 436 When driving short distances at low speeds in a diesel car The car should be driven on A-roads at speeds in excess of 60 km/h (38 mph) for at least 20 minutes between each refuelling. AdBlue is an additive used in the SCR12 system to reduce emissions of noxious substances from a diesel engine. In the SCR system, the AdBlue and the nitrous oxide exhaust gas substance are converted to nitrogen and water vapour, which significantly reduces the emissions of harmful nitrous oxides. AdBlue AdBlue is a colourless fluid that consists of 32.5% urea13 in deionised water and is produced in accordance with the ISO 22241 standard. It is specially developed for SCR cleaning technology for diesel engines. Diesel (p. 434) AdBlue has its own tank in the car and is topped up via a separate filler pipe behind the fuel filler flap. Consumption depends on driving style, outside temperature and the operating temperature of the system. Emission control with AdBlue® (p. 436) Conditions for driving with AdBlue Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 626) There must always be AdBlue of the correct quality in the tank before the car can be started. The SCR system is very sensitive to contaminants. Related information • • • Emission control with AdBlue®11 The emission control system continuously monitors the tank level, quality and dosage of AdBlue. If something is wrong, a message is shown in the driver display. * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING IMPORTANT AdBlue is required for the function of the SCR system and legal emissions compliance. It is illegal to modify or manipulate the AdBlue supply system in any way so that no AdBlue reagent is consumed when it is required for legal exhaust emissions compliance. Any such tampering may be a criminal offence which may lead to legal prosecution actions. It is not permitted to operate the car with an empty AdBlue tank, since it will no longer be compliant with the legal requirements for exhaust emissions. Therefore, the car is equipped with a warning system to inform when AdBlue refilling is required. When the fill level in the AdBlue tank is getting low, warnings are displayed to inform that AdBlue refilling is needed. Related information • • • 11 12 13 Handling AdBlue® (p. 437) Checking and filling with AdBlue® (p. 438) Symbols and messages for AdBlue® (p. 440) Handling AdBlue® Storage AdBlue consists primarily of water (approx. 67.5% water and 32.5% urea). The fluid is not flammable but should be handled with care since it can irritate the eyes and skin. AdBlue must be stored in tightly sealed original packaging at a temperature above -11 °C (12 °F) and below 30 °C (86 °F). The fluid must not be stored in direct sunlight. Points to remember when handling AdBlue freezes at -11 °C (12 °F) but can be used again when the solution has thawed. Avoid inhaling vapour as well as contact with skin and eyes. Preferably use gloves that prevent irritation to sensitive skin when handling the fluid. WARNING Related information • • Checking and filling with AdBlue® (p. 438) Emission control with AdBlue® (p. 436) Action for first aid: • • For inhalation - get fresh air. • For contact with the eyes - rinse immediately with a lot of water. • For ingestion - rinse the mouth thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. For skin contact - wash the skin with soap and water. Seek medical attention if the discomfort remains or if a large quantity has been ingested. Action in the event of a spill AdBlue spilled on the ground, the car or painted surfaces must be rinsed thoroughly with water. Avoid releasing into the drainage system. Registered trademark that belongs to Ver-band der Automobilindustrie e.V. (VDA) Selective Catalytic Reduction CO(NH2)2 437 STARTING AND DRIVING Checking and filling with AdBlue® Checking AdBlue level Check the AdBlue level regularly and top up if the message for low AdBlue level is shown in the driver display. The Volvo workshop tops up AdBlue when the car is serviced, however, it must also be topped up several times between services depending on driving style. If the AdBlue tank is allowed to drain completely then it will no longer be possible to start the car. 1. 2. Press Status to show the AdBlue level. Open the Car status app in the app view. NOTE Never run the AdBlue tank dry. Fill the tank in good time before it is empty. If the tank is run dry, it will not be possible to start the engine after it is switched off – not the regular way or using aids. The only way to restart the car after the tank has been run dry is to refill with AdBlue of the specified quality, minimum 3 litres. Graphic for AdBlue level in the centre display. Each cursor represents approx. 25% of a full tank. When less than 25 % of the tank remains available, the colour of the remaining cursor changes to amber, and at less than 10 % it turns red. 438 STARTING AND DRIVING Filling 3. When the AdBlue level starts to become low, a symbol illuminates in the driver display and the AdBlue level low message is shown. 1. Fill with AdBlue of the correct quality14. Do not overfill the tank. WARNING When filling from the AdBlue pump at a filling station, it is advisable to use the pump adapted for passenger cars. The AdBlue pump for heavy vehicles can also be used. Open the fuel filler flap with a gentle press on the rear of the flap. 2. IMPORTANT Exercise caution to prevent AdBlue from coming into contact with the car's paintwork. If it does, rinse with plenty of water since the fluid can affect the paintwork. Related information Open the blue cover for the smaller filler pipe intended for AdBlue. • • • 14 Handling AdBlue® (p. 437) Symbols and messages for AdBlue® (p. 440) Tank capacity for AdBlue® (p. 624) ISO 22241 439 STARTING AND DRIVING Symbols and messages for AdBlue® The emission control system continuously monitors the level, quality and dosage of AdBlue. If something is wrong, a message is shown in the driver display. Symbol Message Specification AdBlue level low The AdBlue level is low and the tank needs to be topped up. AdBlue dosing The system does not function as it should. Contact a workshopA to check the function. and AdBlue quality 440 STARTING AND DRIVING Symbol Message Specification Refill AdBlue The AdBlue level is critically low and the tank needs to be topped up immediately. Engine start prohibit. The car cannot be started before AdBlue has been filled. Fill with AdBlue to the amount specified in the driver display, or contact a workshopA. and e.g.: Fill a minimum of 4 litres of AdBlue Engine start prohibited Note that: • The car must be level for the level gauge to be able to correctly register the amount of AdBlue filled. • It can take up to 20 seconds after filling before the system has been updated with the correct level indication. The system does not function as it should. Contact a workshopA to check the function. Service of AdBlue system needed to allow restart A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • • • Checking and filling with AdBlue® (p. 438) Handling AdBlue® (p. 437) Book service and repair (p. 562) 441 STARTING AND DRIVING Overheating in the engine and drive system Transmission warm Reduce speed to lower temperature or Transmission hot Stop safely, wait for cooling. Follow the recommendation given, reduce speed or stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for several minutes to enable the gearbox to cool down. Under special conditions, for example hard driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is a risk that the engine and drive system may overheat in particular with a heavy load. • In the event of overheating, the engine's power may be limited temporarily. • • Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of the grille when driving in hot climates. If the car overheats, the air conditioning may be switched off temporarily. • • If the temperature in the engine's cooling system becomes too high then a warning symbol is illuminated and the driver display shows the message Engine temperature High temperature Stop safely. Stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for several minutes and cool down. Do not turn the engine off immediately you stop after a hard drive. • If the message Engine temperature High temperature Turn off engine or Engine coolant Level low, turn off engine is shown, stop the car and switch off the engine. • In the event of overheating in the gearbox, an alternative gear shift program will be selected15. In addition, a built-in protection function is activated that, amongst other things, illuminates a warning symbol and the driver display shows the message 15 442 Symbols in the driver display Symbol High engine temperature. Follow the recommendation given. Low level, coolant. Follow the recommendation given. Gearbox hot/overheated/cooled. Follow the recommendation given. NOTE It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to operate for a time after the engine has been switched off. Specification Related information • • • • Topping up coolant (p. 572) Driving with a trailer (p. 448) Preparations for a long trip (p. 428) Gear shift indicator* (p. 413) Applies to automatic gearbox. * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING Overloading the starter battery The electrical functions in the car load the starter battery to varying degrees. Avoid using the ignition position II when the car is switched off. Instead, use ignition position I - which uses less power. Using jump starting with another battery If the starter battery is discharged then the car can be started with current from another battery. – Open the positive jump-starting point's cover (2). 6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp onto the car's positive jump-starting point (2). 7. Connect one of the black jump lead's clamps to the donor battery's negative terminal (3). Attachment points for the jump leads. 8. When jump starting the car, the following steps are recommended to avoid short circuits or other damage: Connect the black jump lead's other clamp onto the car's negative jump-starting point (4). 9. Check that the jump lead clamps are affixed securely so that there are no sparks during the starting attempt. headlamps windscreen wiper audio system (high volume). In which case, charge the starter battery by starting the car and then running it for at least 15 minutes - starter battery charging is more effective during driving than running the engine at idling speed while stationary. Related information • • IMPORTANT 5. ventilation fan If the starter battery voltage is low, a message is shown in the driver display. The energy-saving function then shuts down certain functions or reduces certain functions such as the ventilation fan and/or audio system. Starter battery (p. 579) Ignition positions (p. 398) Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps to the donor battery's positive terminal (1). Connect the start cable carefully to avoid short circuits with other components in the engine compartment. Also, be aware of different accessories that load the electrical system. Do not use functions which use a lot of power when the car is switched off. Examples of such functions are: • • • • 4. 1. Set the car's electrical system in ignition position 0. 2. Check that the donor battery has a voltage of 12 V. 3. If the donor battery is installed in another car - switch off the donor car's engine and make sure that the two cars do not touch each other. 10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and allow it to run a few minutes at a speed slightly higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm. }} 443 STARTING AND DRIVING || 11. Start the engine in the car with the discharged battery. • IMPORTANT Do not touch the connections between cable and car during the starting attempt. There is a risk of sparks forming. 12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order first the black and then the red. Make sure that none of the black jump lead's clamps comes into contact with the car's positive jump-starting point/donor battery's positive terminal or the clamp connected to the red jump lead. WARNING Towbar* The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can be formed if a jump lead is connected incorrectly, and this can be enough for the battery to explode. The car can be equipped with a towbar that makes it possible to tow e.g. a trailer behind the car. • Do not connect the jump leads to any fuel system component or any moving part. Be careful of hot engine parts. • The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns. • If sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes - seek medical attention immediately. • Never smoke near the battery. There may be different towbar variants available for the car. Contact a Volvo dealer for more information. IMPORTANT When the engine is switched off, the constant battery voltage to the trailer connector can be switched off automatically so as not to drain the starter battery. IMPORTANT The towball needs regular cleaning and lubrication with grease in order to prevent wear. Related information • • • • NOTE Starting the car (p. 396) Ignition positions (p. 398) When a hitch with a vibration damper is used, the towball must not be lubricated. Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 175) This also applies when fitting a bicycle rack that is clamped in around the towball. Selecting ignition mode (p. 399) Related information • • 444 Extendable and retractable towbar* (p. 446) Driving with a trailer (p. 448) * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING • • Towbar-mounted bicycle rack* (p. 451) Specifications for towbar* Specifications for towbar* (p. 445) Dimensions and mounting points for towbar. Dimensions, mounting points in mm (inches) A 939 (37) B 72 (2,8) C 6 (0,24) D 145 (5,7) E 88 (3,5) F Side beam tilts 8 degrees G 353 (13,9) H 1048 (41,3) I 524 (20,6) Related information • • Towbar* (p. 444) Towing capacity and towball load (p. 618) * Option/accessory. 445 STARTING AND DRIVING Extendable and retractable towbar* 1. 2. The extendable/retractable towbar is always easily accessible and simple to extend or retract as needed. In the retracted position, the towbar is completely concealed. WARNING Follow the instructions for retracting and extending the towbar carefully. Extending the towbar WARNING Avoid standing close to the bumper in the centre behind the car when extending the towing hitch. Open the tailgate. A button for extending/ retracting the towbar is located on the righthand side at the rear of the cargo area. An indicator lamp in the button must illuminate with a constant orange glow for the extension function to be active. Press and release the button - extension might not start if the button is pressed for too long. > The towbar extends out and down in an unlocked position - the indicator lamp flashes orange. WARNING Do not press the extend/retract button if a trailer is attached to the towbar. NOTE The towbar must finish the extension procedure before it can then be moved to locked position. This procedure may take several seconds. If the towbar is not fixed in locked position, wait a few seconds and try again. 446 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING 3. 1. Move the towbar to its end position, where it is secured and locked in place - the indicator lamp illuminates with a constant orange glow. > The towbar is ready for use. WARNING Take care to secure the trailer's safety cable in the intended bracket. 2. Open the tailgate. Press and release the button on the right-hand side at the rear of the cargo area - retraction might not start if the button is pressed for too long. > The towbar automatically lowers in an unlocked position - the indicator lamp in the button flashes orange. Lock the towbar by moving it back to its retracted position, where it is locked. > The indicator lamp will now illuminate with a constant glow if the towbar is correctly retracted. Retracting the towbar IMPORTANT Make sure that there is no plug or adapter in the electrical socket when retracting the towbar. Related information • • Driving with a trailer (p. 448) Towbar* (p. 444) * Option/accessory. 447 STARTING AND DRIVING Driving with a trailer When driving with a trailer, there are a number of points that are important to think about regarding the towbar, the trailer and how the load is positioned in the trailer. • • Maintain a low speed when driving with a trailer up long, steep ascents. • The maximum indicated trailer weight only applies to heights up to 1000 metres above sea level (3280 ft). At higher elevations, the engine output and the vehicle's climbing ability are reduced due to the reduced air density, and the maximum trailer load must therefore be reduced. The weight of the car and trailer must be decreased by 10% for each additional 1000 m (3280 ft) (or part thereof). Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's payload by a corresponding weight. The car is supplied with the necessary equipment for towing a trailer. • The car's towbar must be of an approved type. • Distribute the load on the trailer so that the weight on the towbar complies with the specified maximum towball load. Towball load is calculated as part of the car's payload. • Increase the tyre pressure to the recommended pressure for a full load. • The engine is loaded more heavily than usual when driving with a trailer. • Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is brand new. Wait until it has been driven at least 1000 km (620 miles). • 448 The brakes are loaded much more than usual on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift to a lower gear when shifting manually and adjust your speed. Follow the regulations in force for the permitted speeds and weights. • Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more than 12%. NOTE Extreme weather conditions, driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combination with fuel quality are factors that considerably increase the car's fuel consumption. Trailer connector An adapter is required if the car's towbar has a 13 pin connector and the trailer has a 7 pin connector. Use an adapter approved by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on the ground. IMPORTANT When the engine is switched off, the constant battery voltage to the trailer connector can be switched off automatically so as not to drain the starter battery. Trailer weights WARNING Follow the stated recommendations for trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be difficult to control in the event of sudden movement and braking. NOTE The stated maximum permitted trailer weights are those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle regulations can further limit trailer weights and speeds. Towbars can be certified for higher towing weights than the car can actually tow. Level control* The car's system for level control endeavours to maintain a constant height regardless of load (up to the maximum permissible weight). When the car is stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly, which is normal. * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING When driving in hilly terrain and hot climates Under certain circumstances, there may be a risk of overheating when towing a trailer. If the engine and drive system overheats, a warning symbol comes on in the driver display together with a message. The automatic gearbox selects the optimum gear related to load and engine speed. Steep inclines Do not lock the automatic gearbox in a higher gear than the engine "can cope with" - it is not always a good idea to drive at a high gear with low engine speed. Parking on a hill 1. Depress the brake pedal fully. 2. Activate the parking brake. Related information • • • • • Trailer stability assist* (p. 449) Checking trailer lamps (p. 450) Towing capacity and towball load (p. 618) Overheating in the engine and drive system (p. 442) Adverse driving conditions for engine oil (p. 622) Trailer stability assist* The function of trailer stability assist (TSA16) is to stabilise cars towing trailers in situations where they begin snaking. The function is included in the stability system ESC17. Reasons for snaking The snaking phenomenon can occur with any car/trailer combination. Snaking normally occurs at high speeds. But, there is a risk of it occurring at lower speeds if the trailer is overloaded or the load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back. In order for snaking to occur, there must be a triggering factor, e.g.: • Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and powerful side wind. • Car with trailer drives on an uneven road surface or in a pothole. Sweeping steering wheel movements. 3. Select gear position P. • 4. Release the brake pedal. If snaking has started, it could be difficult or even impossible to suppress. This makes the car/ trailer combination difficult to control and there is a risk that you could, for example, end up in the wrong lane or leave the carriageway. Block the wheels with chocks when parking a car with hitched trailer on a hill. Starting on a hill 1. Depress the brake pedal fully. 2. Select gear position D. 3. Releasing the parking brake. 4. Release the brake pedal and start driving off. 16 17 Trailer Stability Assist Electronic Stability Control Trailer stability assist function The trailer stability assist function continually monitors the car's movements, particularly lateral }} * Option/accessory. 449 STARTING AND DRIVING || movements. If snaking is detected, the front wheels are individually braked. This serves to stabilise the car/trailer combination. This is often enough to help the driver regain control of the car. If snaking is not eliminated the first time that trailer stability assist intervenes, the car/trailer combination is braked with all wheels and engine power is reduced. Once snaking has been gradually suppressed and the car/trailer combination is stable once again, the system stops regulating and the driver once again has full control of the car. Related information • • Driving with a trailer (p. 448) Electronic stability control (p. 264) Checking trailer lamps When connecting a trailer - check that all the trailer lamps work before departure. Direction indicators and brake lights on the trailer If one or more of the trailer's direction indicators or brake light bulbs is broken, the driver display shows a symbol and a message. Other lights on the trailer must be checked manually by the driver before setting off. Symbol Message • Trailer turn indicator Right NOTE The stability function is deactivated if the driver selects Sport mode by deactivating ESC via the menu system in the centre display. turn indicator malfunction • Trailer turn indicator Left turn indicator malfunction • Trailer brake light Malfunction Trailer stability assist may fail to intervene if the driver uses severe steering wheel movements to try to rectify the snaking because in such a situation the system cannot determine whether it is the trailer or the driver causing the snaking. When trailer stability assist is operating, the ESC symbol flashes in the driver display. 450 If any lamp for the trailer's direction indicators is broken, the driver display symbol for direction indicators will also flash more quickly than normal. Rear fog lamp on trailer When connecting the trailer, the rear fog lamp may not light up on the car. In such cases, the rear fog lamp function switches to the trailer. Upon activation of the rear fog lamp, check STARTING AND DRIVING 1. Press Settings in the top view. Towbar-mounted bicycle rack* 2. Press My Car Checking trailer lamps* 3. Deselect Automatic Trailer Lamp Check. When using a bicycle rack, the bicycle racks that Volvo has developed are recommended. Automatic checking After a trailer is connected electrically, it is possible to check that the trailer lamps are working via an automatic lamp activation. The function helps the driver check that the trailer lamps are working before starting off. Manual checking If the automatic checking is switched off then it is possible to start the check manually. therefore that the trailer is equipped with a rear fog lamp to travel safely. The engine must be switched off to perform the check. 1. 2. 3. When a trailer is connected to the towbar, the Automatic Trailer Lamp Check message is shown in the driver display. Confirm the message by pressing the righthand steering wheel keypad's O button. > The lamp check starts. Exit the car to check lamp functionality. > All trailer lamps start to flash - then the lamps are switched on one at a time. 4. Visually check that all lamps available on the trailer are operational. 5. After a moment, all lamps on the trailer flash again. > The check is complete. Lights and Lighting. 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press My Car 3. Select Manual Trailer Lamp Check. > The lamp check starts. Exit the car to check lamp functionality. Lights and Lighting. This is in order to avoid damage to the car and in order to achieve the maximum possible safety during a journey. Volvo's bicycle racks are available for purchase at authorised Volvo dealers. Carefully follow the instructions enclosed with the bicycle rack. • Bicycle rack including load must weigh a maximum of 75 kg (165 pounds). • The bicycle rack may be designed for a maximum of three bicycles. Related information • Driving with a trailer (p. 448) WARNING Incorrect use of the bicycle rack may cause damage to the towbar and car. The bicycle rack can loosen from the towbar if it: • • is incorrectly fitted on the towball • is used for carrying something other than bicycles. is overloaded, see the bicycle rack's instructions for maximum load weight Switching off automatic checking The automatic checking function can be switched off in the centre display. }} * Option/accessory. 451 STARTING AND DRIVING || The car's driving characteristics are affected when a bicycle rack is fitted on the towbar. For example, due to: • • • • increased weight reduced acceleration capacity reduced ground clearance changed braking capacity. Recommendations for loading bicycles on the bicycle rack The larger the distance between the load's centre of gravity and the towball, the greater the load on the towbar. ity and increase fuel consumption. It may also lead to an increased load on the towbar. Related information • Towbar* (p. 444) Towing During towing, the car is towed by another vehicle by means of a towline. Find out the statutory maximum speed limit for towing before the towing begins. Preparations and towing IMPORTANT Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling forward. • Load according to the following recommendations: • Fit the heaviest bicycle furthest in, closest to the car. • Keep the load symmetrical and as close to the centre of the car as possible, e.g. by loading the bicycles facing alternately if several bicycles are loaded. • Remove loose objects from the bicycle for transportation, e.g. bicycle basket, battery, child seat. Partly to reduce the load on the towbar and bicycle rack, and partly to reduce the wind resistance, which affects fuel consumption. • 452 Do not tow cars with automatic transmission at speeds higher than 80 km/h (50 mph) or for distances in excess of 80 km (50 miles). WARNING • Check that the steering lock is unlocked before towing. • Ignition position II must be active - in ignition position I all airbags are deactivated. • Always keep the remote control key in the car when it is being towed. Do not use protective covers on the bicycles. This may affect manoeuvrability, impair visibil- * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING The brake servo and power steering do not work when the engine is switched off - the brake pedal needs to be depressed about 5 times more heavily and the steering is considerably heavier than normal. 1. Activate the car's hazard warning flashers. 2. Secure the towline in the towing eye. 3. Deactivate the steering lock by unlocking the car. 4. 5. Set the car in ignition position II - press the start button without depressing the brake pedal and hold the button depressed for approx. 4 seconds. Then release the button. Move the gear selector to neutral position N and release the parking brake. If the battery voltage is too low, the parking brake cannot be disengaged. Connect a donor battery if the battery voltage is too low. > The towing vehicle can now start towing. 6. Keep the towline taut when the towing vehicle reduces speed by holding your foot gently pressed on the brake pedal - thereby avoiding unnecessary jerking. 7. Be prepared to brake to stop. Jump starting Fitting and removing the towing eye Do not tow the car to jump start the engine. Use a donor battery if the starter battery is discharged and the engine does not start. Use the towing eye for towing. The towing eye is screwed into a threaded socket behind a cover on the right-hand side of the bumper, front or rear. IMPORTANT The catalytic converter may be damaged during attempts to tow-start the engine. Related information • • • • • Fitting and removing the towing eye (p. 453) NOTE If the car is equipped with a towbar, there is no rear mounting for a towing eye. Fitting the towing eye Hazard warning flashers (p. 143) Recovery (p. 455) Using jump starting with another battery (p. 443) Selecting ignition mode (p. 399) Take out the towing eye from the foam block under the floor in the cargo area. }} 453 STARTING AND DRIVING 4. || Front: Remove the cover - press on the marking with a finger. > The cover pivots around its centre line and can then be removed. Rear: Remove the cover - press on the marking with a finger and, at the same time, fold out the opposite side/corner using a coin or similar. > The cover pivots around its centre line and can then be removed. Screw the towing eye right in until it stops. Screw the eye in firmly. For example, thread through the wheel bolt wrench* and use it as a lever. IMPORTANT It is important that the towing eye is firmly screwed into place - right in until it stops. Removing the towing eye: – After use, unscrew the towing eye and return it to its place. Finish by refitting the cover onto the bumper. 454 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING The towing eye may be used to pull the car up onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform. The car's position and ground clearance determine whether it is possible. If the slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is too steep, or if the ground clearance under the car is inadequate, then the car may be damaged if you try to pull it up using the towing eye. If necessary, raise the car by using the recovery vehicle's lifting device. Do not use the towing eye. WARNING No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up onto the flatbed platform. Recovery For recovery, the car is taken away with the help of another vehicle. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance. Related information • Fitting and removing the towing eye (p. 453) The towing eye can be used to pull the car up onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform. The car's position and ground clearance determine whether it is possible to pull it up onto a flatbed platform. If the slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is too steep, or if the ground clearance under the car is inadequate, then the car may be damaged if you try to pull it up. The car should then be lifted using the recovery vehicle's lifting device. WARNING IMPORTANT The towing eye is only designed for towing on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance. Related information • • • Towing (p. 452) Recovery (p. 455) Tool kit (p. 529) No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up onto the flatbed platform. IMPORTANT The towing eye is only designed for towing on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance. IMPORTANT Note that the car must always be transported with the wheels rolling forward. 455 STARTING AND DRIVING HomeLink®*18 HomeLink®19 is a programmable remote control, integrated in the car's electrical system, which can remotely control up to three different devices (e.g. garage door opener, alarm system, outdoor and indoor lighting, etc.) and thereby replace the remote controls for them. General HomeLink® is supplied built-in to the interior rearview mirror. The HomeLink® panel consists of three programmable buttons and one indicator lamp in the mirror glass. For more information about HomeLink®, visit www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/ HomeLinkGentex or call the toll-free number 00 8000 466 354 65 (or the toll number +49 6838 907 277)20. Save the original remote controls for future programming (e.g. when changing to another car or for use in another vehicle). It is also recommended that the programming for the buttons is deleted when the car is sold. Related information • • • Using HomeLink (p. 458) Programming HomeLink®* (p. 456) Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 459) The figure is schematic - the version may vary. Button 1 Programming HomeLink®*21 Follow these instructions to program HomeLink®, reset all programming or reprogram individual buttons. NOTE In certain vehicles the ignition must be switched on or in "accessory position" before HomeLink® can be programmed or used. If possible, fit new batteries in the remote control that shall be replaced by HomeLink® for faster programming and improved transmission of the radio signal. The HomeLink® buttons should be reset before programming. WARNING While programming HomeLink®, the garage door or gate being programmed may activate. For this reason, make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the door or gate while programming is in progress. The car should be outside the garage while a garage door opener is being programmed. Button 2 Button 3 Indicator lamp 18 19 20 21 456 Applies to certain markets. HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation. Note that the toll-free number may not be available depending on operator. Applies to certain markets. * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING 1. Aim the remote control towards the HomeLink® button to be programmed and hold it approx. 2-8 cm (approx. 1-3 inches) from the button. Do not obstruct the indicator lamp on HomeLink®. Note: The ability of some remote controls to program HomeLink® is improved at a distance of approx. 15-20 cm (approx. 6-12 inches). Bear this in mind if you encounter problems during programming. 2. Press and hold depressed both the button on the remote control and the button to be reprogrammed on HomeLink®. 3. Do not release the buttons until the indicator lamp has switched from flashing slowly (approx. once per second) to either flashing quickly (approx. 10 times per second) or illuminating with a constant glow. > If it illuminates with a constant glow: Indication that the programming has finished. Press the programmed button twice to activate. If it flashes quickly: The device to be programmed to HomeLink® may have a security function that requires extra steps. Test by pressing the programmed button twice to see whether the programming is working. Otherwise, continue with the following steps. 4. Locate programming button22 on the receiver for the garage door or similar. It is normally located close to the antenna's bracket on the receiver. 5. Depress and release the receiver's programming button once. The programming must be completed within 30 seconds of the button being depressed. 6. Press and release the button on HomeLink® that you want to program. Repeat the sequence of pressing/holding/releasing a second time and, depending on the receiver model, even a third time. > Programming is now be complete and the garage door, gate or similar should now be activated when the programmed button is depressed. In the event of programming problems, contact HomeLink® at www.HomeLink.com, 22 Button designation and colour varies between manufacturers. }} 457 STARTING AND DRIVING || www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or call the toll-free number 00 8000 466 354 65 (or the toll number +49 6838 907 277)23. Reprogramming individual buttons To reprogram an individual HomeLink® button, proceed as follows: 1. Press the desired button and hold it depressed for approx. 20 seconds. 2. Once the indicator lamp on HomeLink® starts to flash slowly, programming can continue as normal. Related information • • • Note: If the button to be reprogrammed is not programmed with a new unit, it will resume the previously saved programming. Resetting the HomeLink® buttons It is only possible to reset all of the HomeLink® buttons at the same time, not each button individually. Individual buttons can only be reprogrammed. – 23 458 Press and hold depressed the outer buttons (1 and 3) on HomeLink® for approx. 10 seconds. > When the indicator lamp changes over from a constant glow to starting to flash, the buttons are reset and ready to be reprogrammed. Using HomeLink (p. 458) HomeLink®* (p. 456) Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 459) Using HomeLink When HomeLink® is fully programmed it can be used in place of the separate original remote controls. Depress the programmed button. The garage door, gate, alarm system or similar is activated (may take a few seconds). If the button is depressed for more than 20 seconds then the reprogramming is started. The indicator lamp illuminates or flashes when the button has been depressed. Naturally the original remote controls can still be used in parallel with HomeLink® if required. NOTE If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink® will work for 30 minutes after the driver's door has been opened. NOTE HomeLink® cannot be used if the car is locked and the alarm is armed from the outside. Note that the toll-free number may not be available depending on operator. * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING • • HomeLink® If is used to control a garage door or gate, ensure that nobody is near the door or gate while it is in motion. Do not use HomeLink® for any garage door that does not have safety stop and safety reverse. Related information • • • HomeLink®* (p. 456) Programming HomeLink®* (p. 456) Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 459) Type approval for HomeLink®*24 Type approval for EU Gentex Corporation hereby declares that HomeLink® Model UAHL5 complies with the Radio equipment directive 2014/53/EU. Compass* The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mirror has an integrated display that shows the compass direction in which the front of the car is pointing. Wavelength within which the radio equipment functions: • • • • • 433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P. 868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P. 868.70MHz-868.20MHz <25mW E.R.P. 869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P. 869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P. Certificate holder address: Gentex Corporation, 600 North Centennial Street, Zeeland MI 49464, USA For more information, see support.volvocars.com. Related information • HomeLink®* (p. 456) Rearview mirror with compass. Eight different compass directions are shown by their English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW (south west), W (west) and NW (north west). Related information 24 • Activating and deactivating the compass* (p. 460) • Calibrating the compass* (p. 460) Applies to certain markets. * Option/accessory. 459 STARTING AND DRIVING Activating and deactivating the compass* The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mirror has an integrated display that shows the compass direction in which the front of the car is pointing. Activating and deactivating the compass The compass is activated automatically when the car is started. Calibrating the compass* The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The compass should be calibrated if the car is moved between several magnetic zones. Proceed as follows to perform calibration: 1. Stop the car in a large open area free from steel structures and high-voltage power lines. 2. Start the car and switch off all electrical equipment (air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and ensure that all doors are closed. To deactivate/activate the compass manually: – Depress the button on the underside of the rearview mirror using e.g. a paper clip. Related information • • 460 NOTE Calibration may fail or not start at all if electrical equipment is not switched off. Magnetic zones. 4. Press the button repeatedly until the required magnetic zone (1–15) is shown. See the map of magnetic zones for the compass. 5. Wait until the display returns to showing the character C, or hold the button on the underside of the rearview mirror depressed for approx. 6 seconds until the character C is shown. 6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more than 10 km/h (6 mph) until a compass direction is shown in the display, indicating that calibration is complete. Then drive a further 2 circles to fine-tune calibration. Compass* (p. 459) Calibrating the compass* (p. 460) 3. Hold the button on the underside of the rearview mirror depressed for approx. 3 seconds (use a paper clip, for example). The number for the current magnetic zone is shown. * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING 7. Cars with heated windscreen*: If the character C is shown in the display when the heated windscreen is activated, perform the calibration in accordance with point 6 above with the heated windscreen activated. 8. Repeat the above procedure as necessary. Related information • • Compass* (p. 459) Activating and deactivating the compass* (p. 460) * Option/accessory. 461 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Sound, media and Internet The audio and media system consists of media player and radio. You can also connect a phone via Bluetooth to use handsfree functions or play music wirelessly in the car. When the car is connected to the Internet you can also use apps for media playback. Related information • • • • • • • • • • Overview of audio and media Control the functions with your voice, steering wheel keypad or the centre display. The number of speakers and amplifiers depends on which audio system the car is equipped with. System updating The audio and media system is continuously improved. When the car is connected to the Internet, it is possible to download system updates for optimal functionality, see support.volvocars.com. Media player (p. 474) Radio (p. 468) Phone (p. 488) Internet-connected car* (p. 498) Apps (p. 465) Voice recognition (p. 128) Ignition positions (p. 398) Driver distraction (p. 39) Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 561) License agreement for audio and media (p. 507) Audio settings The audio system is preset for optimal sound reproduction but can be adapted according to needs. The volume is normally adjusted with the volume control below the centre display or with the righthand steering wheel keypad. This applies, for example, during playback of music, radio, ongoing phone calls and active traffic messages. Optimum sound reproduction The audio system is pre-calibrated for optimum sound reproduction by means of digital signal processing. This calibration takes into account loudspeakers, amplifiers, passenger compartment acoustics, listener position, etc., for each combination of car model and audio system. There is also a dynamic calibration that takes into account the setting of the volume control and vehicle speed. Audio settings as required The following settings can be selected in the top view under Settings Sound: • Tone — personal preference for bass, treble, equaliser for example. • Balance - balance between right/left loudspeakers and balance between front/rear loudspeakers. • System Volumes – adjusts volume in the various systems of the car, e.g. Voice Control, Park Assist and Phone Ringtone. 464 * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Sound experience* Apps Sound Experience is opened from the centre display's app view and gives access to further audio settings. The following settings can be made: The app view contains applications (apps) that give access to certain of the car's services. Swipe from right to left1 across the centre display's screen in order to access the app view from the home view. Apps that have been downloaded (third-party apps) and apps for embedded functions, such as FM radio, are found here. • Surround - surround sound mode with level settings. Related information • • • • • Media player (p. 474) Settings for voice recognition (p. 131) Settings for phone (p. 496) Sound, media and Internet (p. 464) Internet-connected car* (p. 498) App view (generic image, basic apps vary by market and model) Some basic apps are always available. More apps such as web radio and music services can be downloaded when the car is connected to the Internet. Certain apps are only available for use if the car is connected to the Internet. 1 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction. }} * Option/accessory. 465 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || Start an app by pressing the app in the centre display's app view. Related information • • • • • • • • Downloading apps NOTE Downloading apps (p. 466) Updating apps (p. 467) Deleting apps (p. 467) Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 483) Android Auto* (p. 486) Internet-connected car* (p. 498) NOTE When downloading using a phone, pay extra attention to the data traffic costs. 1. 2. 466 Tap on the row for an app in order to expand in the list and get more information about the app. 4. Select Install in order to start the download and installation of the desired app. > The status of the download and installation is shown while it is in progress. Data download may affect other services that transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect on other services is experienced as disruptive then the download can be interrupted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate to switch off or interrupt other services. Storage space on hard disk (p. 506) User terms and conditions and data sharing (p. 504) 3. New apps can be downloaded when the car is connected to the Internet. Open the Download Centre app in the app view. Select New apps in order to open a list of apps that are available but not installed in the car. A message is shown if a download cannot be started for the moment. The app will remain in the list and it is possible to try to start a download again. Cancelling the download – Tap on Abort to cancel a download in progress. Note that only the download can be cancelled, when the installation phase has started, this cannot be cancelled. Related information • • • • • Deleting apps (p. 467) • Storage space on hard disk (p. 506) Apps (p. 465) Updating apps (p. 467) Internet-connected car* (p. 498) Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 561) * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Updating apps The apps can be updated when the car is connected to the Internet. NOTE Data download may affect other services that transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect on other services is experienced as disruptive then the download can be interrupted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate to switch off or interrupt other services. NOTE When downloading using a phone, pay extra attention to the data traffic costs. Update some 1. Open the Download Centre app in the app view. 2. Select Application updates in order to open a list of all available updates. 3. Locate the desired app and select Install. > Updating is started. Update all 1. Open the Download Centre app in the app view. 1. Open the Download Centre app in the app view. 2. Select Application updates in order to open a list of all installed apps. 3. Locate the desired app and select Uninstall in order to start the uninstallation of the app. > When the app has been uninstalled, it disappears from the list. Related information • • • • • If an app is being used during an ongoing update, it will be restarted in order for the installation to be completed. Deleting apps Apps can be uninstalled when the car is connected to the Internet. An app that is being used must be closed in order for the uninstallation to be completed. Apps (p. 465) Downloading apps (p. 466) Deleting apps (p. 467) Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 561) Internet-connected car* (p. 498) Related information • • • • • 2. Apps (p. 465) Downloading apps (p. 466) Updating apps (p. 467) Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 561) Internet-connected car* (p. 498) Select Install all. > Updating is started. * Option/accessory. 467 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Radio It is possible to listen to the AM and FM bands and to digital radio (DAB)*. When the car is online, it is also possible to listen to Internet radio. • • • • RDS radio (p. 472) Start radio Internet-connected car* (p. 498) The radio is started from the centre display app view. 1. Open the required frequency band (e.g. FM) from the app view. Voice control of radio and media (p. 131) Media player (p. 474) The radio can be operated using voice recognition, the steering wheel keypad or the centre display. Related information • • • • • 468 Start radio (p. 468) Changing radio band and radio station (p. 469) 2. Setting radio favourites (p. 470) • • Settings for radio (p. 471) Digital radio* (p. 473) Select a radio station. Related information Radio (p. 468) Searching for radio stations (p. 470) * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET • Changing radio band and radio station (p. 469) Changing radio band and radio station 2. Select playback from Stations, Favourites, Genres or Ensembles2. • • • Setting radio favourites (p. 470) There are instructions here for changing the radio band, the list in the radio band and the radio station in the selected list. 3. Tap on the desired station from the list. Settings for radio (p. 471) Voice control of radio and media (p. 131) Changing radio band Swipe to show the app view in the centre display and select the preferred radio band (e.g. FM), or open the driver display's app menu using the right-hand keypad on the steering wheel and make your selection from there. Changing lists within the frequency band Favourites - only plays back selected favourite channels. Genres — only plays back channels broadcasting the selected genre/programme type, e.g. pop or classical. Changing stations within the selected list – Press on or under the centre display or the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. > The highlight moves up or down one place in the selected playlist. You can also change radio station in the selected list via the centre display. Related information 1. 2 Press Library. • • • • • • Radio (p. 468) Searching for radio stations (p. 470) Voice control of radio and media (p. 131) Setting radio favourites (p. 470) Settings for radio (p. 471) Application menu in driver display (p. 90) Only applies to digital radio (DAB*). * Option/accessory. 469 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Searching for radio stations Manual tuning The radio automatically compiles a station list of the radio stations within the area that are transmitting the strongest signals. Setting radio favourites It is possible to add a radio channel to the Radio favourites app and the favourites list for the radio band (e.g. FM). Instructions on how to add and remove favourites can be found below. Radio Favourites Radio Favourites shows saved favourites from all frequency bands. On changing over to manual tuning, the radio no longer changes frequency automatically when reception is poor. The parameters you can search on depend on the frequency band selected: 470 • • • FM — station, genre and frequency. 1. Press Library. 2. Press . > Search view with keyboard is opened. 3. Enter the search terms. > Searching takes place with each input of a character and the search results are shown by category. – AM — station and frequency. DAB* - ensembles and stations. Press Manual tuning, pull the control or or . With a long press, the press search jumps to the next available station in the frequency band. It is also possible to use the right keypad on the steering wheel. Related information • • • • • Radio (p. 468) Start radio (p. 468) Changing radio band and radio station (p. 469) Voice control of radio and media (p. 131) Settings for radio (p. 471) 1. Open the app Radio favourites from the app view. 2. Tap on the desired station in the list to start listening. Adding and removing radio favourites – Tap on to add or remove a channel to or from frequency band favourites and Radio Favourites. When a favourite is saved from a station list, the radio will automatically search for the best frequency. But if a favourite is saved from a manual station search, the radio does not automatically change to a stronger frequency. When you remove a favourite, it will also be removed from frequency band favourites. * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Related information • • • • • • • Radio (p. 468) Settings for radio Start radio (p. 468) There are various radio functions to activate and deactivate. Searching for radio stations (p. 470) Cancelling traffic messages Changing radio band and radio station (p. 469) The broadcast of traffic messages etc. can be temporarily interrupted by tapping on in the right-hand steering wheel keypad or by tapping on Cancel in the centre display. Voice control of radio and media (p. 131) Settings for radio (p. 471) Application menu in driver display (p. 90) Activating and deactivating radio functions Drag down the top view and select Settings Media and the desired radio band to view available functions. AM/FM Radio • Show Broadcast Information: shows information on programme content, artists, etc. Announcements function must be activated at the same time. - News : interrupts the current media playback and broadcasts news. Playback of previous media source is resumed when the news broadcast is finished. - Alarm: interrupts the current media playback and sends alerts about major accidents and disasters. Playback of previous media source is resumed when the message is finished. - Traffic Announcements: interrupts the current media playback and broadcasts information about traffic disruptions. Playback of previous media source is resumed when the message is finished. • Freeze Program Name: select to stop the programme service name from scrolling continuously. Instead it freezes after 20 seconds. • Select Announcements: - Local Interruptions: interrupts the current media playback and broadcasts information about traffic disruptions in the neighbourhood. Playback of previous media source is resumed when the message is finished. The Local Interruptions function is a geographically restricted version of the Traffic Announcements function. The Traffic }} 471 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || source is resumed when the message is finished. DAB* (digital radio) • Sort Services: option for how channels will be sorted. Either alphabetically or by service number. - Traffic Flash: receives information about traffic disruptions. • DAB To DAB Handover: starts the function - News Flash: receives news. for linking within DAB. If reception of a radio channel is lost, another channel is found automatically in another channel group (ensemble). - Transport Flash: receives information about public transport, e.g. ferry and train timetables. - Warning/Services: receives information about incidents of lower significance than the Alarm function, e.g. power failures. • DAB To FM Handover: starts the function for linking between DAB and FM. If reception of a radio channel is lost, an alternative FM frequency is searched for automatically. • Show Broadcast Information: select to show radio text or selected types of radio text, e.g. artist. • Show Program Related Images: select whether or not to show images for programmes on the screen. • Select Announcements: select the types of messages to be received while DAB is playing. Selected messages will interrupt the current media playback to play back the message. Playback of previous media source is resumed when the message is finished. - Alarm: interrupts the current media playback and sends alerts about major accidents and disasters. Playback of previous media 472 Related information • • • Radio (p. 468) Digital radio* (p. 473) Symbols in the centre display's status bar (p. 110) RDS radio RDS (Radio Data System) means that the radio automatically changes to the strongest transmitter. RDS provides the ability to receive e.g. traffic information and to search for certain programme types. RDS links FM transmitters into a network. An FM transmitter in such a network sends information that gives an RDS radio the following functions: • Switch automatically to a stronger transmitter if reception in the area is poor. • Search for programme category, e.g. programme types or traffic information. • Receive text information on current radio programme. NOTE Some radio stations do not use RDS or only selected parts of its functionality. When broadcasting news or traffic messages, the radio can switch stations, interrupting the audio source currently in use. The radio returns to the previous audio source and volume when the set programme type is no longer broadcast. To go back earlier, press on the right-hand steering wheel keypad or tap Cancel in the centre display. * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Related information • • Radio (p. 468) Settings for radio (p. 471) Digital radio* (DAB3) Digital radio is a digital broadcasting system for radio. The radio supports DAB, DAB + and DMB4. The radio can be operated using voice recognition, the steering wheel keypad or the centre display. The digital radio app is launched from app view in the centre display. DAB subchannel Secondary components are usually named subchannels. These are temporary and can contain e.g. translations of the main programme into other languages. Subchannels are indicated with an arrow symbol in the channel list. Related information • • • • • • Link between FM and digital radio* (p. 474) Changing radio band and radio station (p. 469) Searching for radio stations (p. 470) Setting radio favourites (p. 470) Voice control of radio and media (p. 131) Settings for radio (p. 471) Digital radio is played back in the same way as other radio bands, such as FM. Besides the option to select playback from Stations, Favourites and Genres, there is also the option to select playback from subchannels and Ensembles. An ensemble is a set of radio channels (a channel group) broadcasting on the same frequency. In the cases where the radio channel transmits its logotype, it is downloaded and shown beside the station name (download time varies). 3 4 Digital Audio Broadcasting Digital Multimedia Broadcasting * Option/accessory. 473 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Link between FM and digital radio* Media player The function enables the digital radio (DAB) to switch from a channel with poor or no reception to the same channel in another channel group (ensemble) with better reception, within DAB and/or between DAB and FM. The media player can play back audio from external audio sources connected via the USB port or Bluetooth. It can also play back video format via the USB port. When the car is connected to the internet, it is also possible to listen to web radio, audio books and music services via apps. DAB to DAB and DAB to FM linking 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press Media 3. Tick/untick DAB To DAB Handover and/or DAB To FM Handover in order to activate/ deactivate the respective functions. Related information DAB. • • • • • • • • • Media playback (p. 475) Controlling and changing media (p. 476) Searching media (p. 477) Apps (p. 465) Radio (p. 468) Video (p. 478) Media via Bluetooth® (p. 480) Media via USB port (p. 480) Internet-connected car* (p. 498) Related information • • • Digital radio* (p. 473) Radio (p. 468) Settings for radio (p. 471) The media player is operated from the centre display, but several functions can be operated using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad or voice control. The radio is operated in the media player and is described in a separate section. 474 * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Media playback The media player is controlled from the centre display. Several functions can also be operated using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad or voice control. The media player also operates the radio, which is described in a separate section. USB memory 1. Insert the USB memory. 4. 2. Open the app USB from the app view. 3. Select what to play back. > Playback begins. Media with Internet connection Play back media from Internet-connected apps: Mp3 player and iPod® Starting the media source NOTE To start playback from iPod, use the iPod app (not USB). When an iPod is used as audio source, the car's audio and media system has a menu structure that is similar to the iPod player's own menu structure. 1. Connect media source. 2. Start playback from the connected media source. 3. Open the app (iPod, USB) from the app view. > Playback begins. Bluetooth connected device 1. Activate Bluetooth in the media source. App view. (Generic image, basic apps vary by market and model.) 2. Connect media source. 3. Start playback from the connected media source. Open the app Bluetooth from the app view. > Playback begins. 1. Connect the car to the Internet. 2. Open the current app from the app view. > Playback begins. Read the separate section on how apps are downloaded. Video 1. Connect media source. 2. Open the app USB from the app view. 3. Tap on the title of the desired item to play back. > Playback begins. Apple CarPlay CarPlay is described in a separate section. Android Auto Android Auto is described in a separate section. Related information • Handling the application menu in the driver display (p. 90) • • • • Radio (p. 468) Controlling and changing media (p. 476) Connecting a device via USB port (p. 481) Connecting a device via Bluetooth® (p. 480) }} 475 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET • • • • • • • Downloading apps (p. 466) Controlling and changing media Internet-connected car* (p. 498) The playback of media can be controlled with voice control, steering wheel keypad or the centre display. The media player can be operated by voice recognition, from the steering wheel keypad or the centre display. Video (p. 478) Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 483) Android Auto* (p. 486) Voice control of radio and media (p. 131) Compatible media formats (p. 505) Change track/song - tap on the desired track in or under the centre display, press on the centre display or on the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. Fast forward/move in time - tap on the time axis in the centre display and drag sideways, or press and hold or under the centre display or on the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. Changing media - select from previous sources in the app, in the app view, press on the desired app or select with the steering wheel's right-hand keypad via the app menu . Library - tap on the button to play back from the library. Shuffle - tap on the button to shuffle the playback order. Volume - turn the control knob under the centre on the steering wheel's display or press right-hand keypad in order to increase or decrease the volume. Play/pause - tap on the image belonging to the song being played back, the physical button on the steering under the centre display or wheel's right-hand keypad. 476 * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Similar - tap on the button in order to use Gracenote to search for similar music on the USB device and to create a playlist from it. The playlist can contain a maximum of 50 songs. Searching media It is possible to search by artist, composer, song titles, album, video, audio book, playlist and, when the car is connected to the Internet, podcasts (digital media via Internet). • • Media playback (p. 475) Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display (p. 115) Change device - tap on the button in order to switch between USB devices when several are connected. Related information • • • • • • Media player (p. 474) Searching media (p. 477) Audio settings (p. 464) Apps (p. 465) Gracenote® (p. 478) Voice control of radio and media (p. 131) 1. . Press > Search view with keyboard is opened. 2. Enter the search terms. 3. Press Search. > Connected devices are searched and the search results are listed by category. Swipe sideways across the screen to show each category separately. Related information • • Media player (p. 474) Internet-connected car* (p. 498) * Option/accessory. 477 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Gracenote® Related information Gracenote identifies artist, album, song titles and associated images, which are shown during playback. Gracenote MusicID® is a standard for music recognition. 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press Media 3. Select settings for Gracenote data: Gracenote®. • Gracenote® Online Search - searches in Gracenote's online database for playing media. • Gracenote® Multiple Results - selects how to display Gracenote data if there are more than one search results. 1 - the file's original data are used. 2 - Gracenote data are used. 3 - Gracenote or original data can be selected. • None - no results are shown. Updating Gracenote The content of the Gracenote database is updated continuously. Download the latest update for optimal functionality. For information and download, see support.volvocars.com. 478 • • Media playback (p. 475) License agreement for audio and media (p. 507) Video Videos on USB-connected devices can be played back using the media player. No picture is shown when the car starts to move, but only the audio is played back. The picture is shown again when the car is stationary. Information on compatible formats for media can be found in a separate section. Related information • • • • Playing a video (p. 479) Playing back DivX® (p. 479) Settings for video (p. 479) Compatible media formats (p. 505) SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Playing a video Playing back DivX® Videos are played using the USB app in the app view. 1. Connecting a media source (USB device). This DivX device must be registered in order to play back purchased DivX Video-onDemand (VOD) films. 2. Open the app USB from the app view. 1. Press Settings in the top view. 3. Tap on the title of the desired item to play back. > Playback begins. 2. Tap Video DivX® VOD and retrieve the registration code. 3. Go to vod.divx.com for more information and to complete the registration. Certified® Related information • • • • Video (p. 478) Playing back DivX® (p. 479) Settings for video (p. 479) Compatible media formats (p. 505) Settings for video It is possible to change certain video playback settings, e.g. language. With the video player in full screen mode, or by opening the top view and pressing Settings Video, the following can be adjusted: Audio Language, Off and Subtitle Language. Related information • Video (p. 478) Related information • • • • Video (p. 478) Playing a video (p. 479) Settings for video (p. 479) Compatible media formats (p. 505) 479 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Media via Bluetooth® The car's media player is equipped with Bluetooth and can wirelessly play audio files from external Bluetooth devices, such as mobile phones and tablets. For the media player to be able to play back audio files wirelessly from an external device, the device must first be connected to the car via Bluetooth. Related information • • • • Connecting a device via Bluetooth® (p. 480) Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 489) Media playback (p. 475) Compatible media formats (p. 505) Connecting a device via Bluetooth® Bluetooth® Media via USB port Connect a device to the car for wireless playback of media and to provide the car with an Internet connection where possible. An external audio source, e.g. an iPod® or MP3 player, can be connected to the audio system via the car's USB port. Many phones on the market now have wireless Bluetooth® technology, but not all of them are fully compatible with the car. For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com. Devices with rechargeable batteries are recharged when connected via USB and the ignition is in position I, II or the engine is running. The procedure for connecting a media device is the same as for connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth®. The content of the external source can be loaded more quickly if it only consists of compatible formats. Video files can also be played back via the USB port. Related information Certain MP3 players have their own file system that the car does not support. • • • Media via Bluetooth® (p. 480) Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 489) Media playback (p. 475) Related information • • • • • • • 480 Connecting a device via USB port (p. 481) Media playback (p. 475) Video (p. 478) Ignition positions (p. 398) Technical specifications for USB devices (p. 506) Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 483) Android Auto* (p. 486) * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Connecting a device via USB port TV*6 An external audio source, e.g. an iPod® or MP3 player, can be connected to the audio system via one of the car's USB ports. No images are shown once the car reaches a certain speed but the sound will be heard the whole time. The picture returns once more when the car is almost or completely stationary. The TV is controlled from the centre display. Several functions can also be controlled from the right keypad on the steering wheel or with voice recognition. The phone must be connected to the USB port with white frame (when there are two USB ports) when using Apple CarPlay* and Android Auto*. USB input* (type C) on rear of tunnel console for charging telephones and tablets for example5. Related information USB inputs (type A) under the centre display. 5 6 • • • • Media playback (p. 475) Media via USB port (p. 480) Media player (p. 474) Technical specifications for USB devices (p. 506) • Technical specifications for USB devices (p. 506) • • Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 483) Android Auto* (p. 486) Related information • • Using the TV* (p. 482) Settings for TV* (p. 482) It is not possible to playback media in the car's audio or media system via this input. Applies to certain markets. * Option/accessory. 481 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Using the TV*7 NOTE The TV is started from the app view. Tap on the TV app and select a channel. The TV automatically searches for the channels with best reception. If the car is moved within the country, e.g. from city to city, it is not certain that Favourites are available since the frequency may have changed. Change the list of visible channels 1. Press Library 2. Select playback from TV-channels or Favourites. 3. Select the desired channel. Change channel from selected list – Press on or under the centre display or on the steering wheel keypad. > The highlight moves up or down one place in the selected playlist You can also change stations from the centre display. Favourites A TV channel can be saved as a favourite: – Tap on in order to add/remove a channel to/from the favourites list. TV guide A programme guide is available with information about TV programmes for up to 48 hours. – 7 482 NOTE The system only supports TV broadcasts in the countries that broadcast in MPEG-2 or MPEG-4 format and follow the DVB-T/T2 standard. The system does not support analogue broadcasts. Related information • • • • TV* (p. 481) Settings for TV* (p. 482) Settings for TV*8 The option to make certain settings is available, both in the top view or when the TV is in full screen mode. With the TV in full screen mode, or by opening the top view and pressing Settings Media TV, the following can be adjusted: • Subtitle Language • Audio Language Pict. format Tapping on Picture format enables you to choose which format the TV picture should be shown in. 1. Auto - The TV picture is shown in the image format being transmitted. 2. Auto fill - The TV picture is maximised without cropping. Voice control of radio and media (p. 131) License agreement for audio and media (p. 507) Related information • • • • TV* (p. 481) Using the TV* (p. 482) Compatible media formats (p. 505) Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 121) Tap on Guide to show information about TV programmes. Applies to certain markets. * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Apple® CarPlay®* CarPlay gives you the option to listen to music, make phone calls, get directions, send/receive messages and use Siri, all while you stay focused on your driving. CarPlay works with selected Apple devices. If the car does not already support CarPlay there is the option to install it retroactively. Contact a Volvo retailer to install CarPlay. Information about which apps are supported and which phones are compatible is available on Apple's website: www.apple.com/ios/carplay/. Using apps that are not compatible with CarPlay may sometimes mean that the connection between an iPhone and the car is broken. Please note that Volvo is not responsible for the content in CarPlay. When using map navigation via CarPlay no guidance is shown in the driver display, but only in the centre display. The CarPlay apps can be controlled via the centre display, phone or using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad (applies to certain functions). The apps can also be voice-controlled using Siri. A long press on the steering wheel button 8 9 Applies to certain markets. Apple and CarPlay are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc. starts voice control using Siri and a short press activates the car's own voice control. If Siri breaks 9 off too early, hold the steering wheel button depressed. By using Apple CarPlay you acknowledge the following: Apple CarPlay is a service provided by Apple Inc. under its terms and conditions. Volvo Cars is thus not responsible for Apple CarPlay or its features/applications. When using Apple CarPlay, certain information from your car (including its position) is transferred to your iPhone. In relation to Volvo Cars, you are fully responsible for your and any others person’s use of Apple CarPlay. Related information • • • • Using Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 483) Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 485) Using Apple® CarPlay®* To use CarPlay, Siri voice control must be activated in your phone. The phone must also have an Internet connection via Wi-Fi or the mobile network. Connect an iPhone and start CarPlay NOTE CarPlay can only be used if Bluetooth is deactivated. A phone or media player connected to the car via Bluetooth will therefore not be available when CarPlay is active. An alternative Internet source must be used to connect to the Internet for the car's apps. Use Wi-Fi or the car's built-in modem*. 1. Connect an iPhone to the USB port. In the cases where there are two USB ports, the one with the white frame around the port must be used. 2. Read the information in the pop-up window and then tap on OK. 3. Tap on Apple CarPlay in the app view. Voice recognition (p. 128) Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 121) }} * Option/accessory. 483 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || 4. 5. Read the terms and conditions and then tap on Accept to connect. > The tile with CarPlay is opened and compatible apps are shown. Tap on the desired app. > The app starts. Starting CarPlay CarPlay is started according to the following after an iPhone has been connected. 1. 2. Connect an iPhone to the USB port. In the cases where there are two USB ports, the one with the white frame around the port must be used. > If the setting for automatic start is selected - the name of the phone is shown. Tap on the phone name - the tile with CarPlay is opened and compatible apps are shown. 3. If the tile with CarPlay is not opened, tap on Apple CarPlay in the app view. > The tile with CarPlay is opened and compatible apps are shown. 4. Tap on the desired app. > The app starts. CarPlay runs in the background if another app is started in the same tile. To show CarPlay in the 10 484 tile again - tap on the CarPlay icon in the app view. • • Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 485) Connecting the car to the Internet via a mobile device (Wi-Fi) (p. 500) Switch the connection between CarPlay and iPod • CarPlay to iPod 1. Press Settings in the top view. Connect the car to the Internet via car modem (SIM card) (p. 500) • Voice recognition (p. 128) 2. Continue to Communication CarPlay. Apple 3. Untick the box for the Apple device that shall no longer start CarPlay automatically when the USB cable is connected. 4. Disconnect and connect the Apple device to the USB port. 5. Open the app iPod from the app view. iPod to CarPlay 1. Tap on Apple CarPlay in the app view. 2. Read the information in the pop-up window and then tap on OK. 3. Disconnect and connect the Apple device to the USB port. > The tile with Apple CarPlay is opened and compatible apps are shown10. Related information • • Connecting a device via USB port (p. 481) Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 483) Apple, CarPlay, iPhone and iPod are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc. * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* Settings for Apple device connected with CarPlay11. Automatic start 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Continue to Communication CarPlay and select setting: Related information • • • Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 483) Using Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 483) Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 121) Tips for using Apple® CarPlay®* Here are some useful tips for using CarPlay®. • Update your iPhone with the latest version of iOS operating system and ensure that the apps have been updated. • In the event of a problem with CarPlay, disconnect the telephone from the USB port and reconnect. Otherwise, try to close the app on the telephone that is not working and then restart the app, or try closing all apps and restart your phone. Apple • Tick the box - CarPlay starts automatically when the USB cable is connected. • Untick the box - CarPlay does not start automatically when the USB cable is connected. • If the apps do not appear when CarPlay starts (black screen), try minimising and expanding the tile for CarPlay. A maximum of 20 Apple devices can be stored in the list. When the list is full and a new device is connected the oldest one is deleted. • Using apps that are not compatible with CarPlay may sometimes mean that the connection between the phone and the car is broken. Information about supported apps and compatible telephone models can be found on Apple's website. You can also search for CarPlay in the App Store to find information about apps that are compatible with CarPlay on your market. • CarPlay only works with iPhone12. To delete the list, the settings must be reset in the centre display (factory reset). System volumes 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Tap on Sound System Volumes and make the settings for the following: • Voice Control • Navi Voice Guidance • Phone Ringtone 11 12 Apple and CarPlay are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc. Apple, CarPlay and iPhone are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc. NOTE Availability and functionality may vary depending on market. }} * Option/accessory. 485 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || Related information • Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 483) Android Auto* NOTE Android Auto gives you the option to listen to music, make phone calls, get directions and use car-adapted apps from an Android device. Android Auto works with selected Android devices. When a phone is connected to Android Auto it is possible to stream via Bluetooth to another media player. Bluetooth is active while Android Auto is being used. When using map navigation via Android Auto there is no guidance in the driver display, but only in the centre display. Android Auto can be controlled via the centre display using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad or voice control. A long press on the steering starts voice recognition control wheel button and a short press deactivates. Information about which apps are supported and which phones are compatible is available on the website: www.android.com/auto/. For third-party apps, see Google Play. Please note that Volvo is not responsible for the content in Android Auto. Android Auto is started from the app view. After Android Auto has been started once, the app will be started automatically the next time the device is connected. Automatic start can be deactivated under settings. 486 By using Android Auto, you acknowledge the following: Android Auto is a service provided by Google Inc. under its terms and conditions. Volvo Cars is not responsible for Android Auto or its features or applications. When you use Android Auto, your car transfers certain information (including its location) to your connected Android phone. You are fully responsible for your and any other person’s use of Android Auto. Related information • • Using Android Auto* (p. 487) Settings for Android Auto* (p. 487) * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Using Android Auto* 3. To use the app Android Auto, the telephone must be connected to the car's USB port. The first time an Android is connected 1. Connect the Android phone to the USB port. In the cases where there are two USB ports, the one with the white frame around the port must be used. 2. Read the information in the pop-up window and then tap on OK. 3. Tap on Android Auto in the app view. 4. Read the terms and conditions and then tap on Accept to connect. > The tile with Android Auto is opened and compatible apps are shown. 5. Tap on the desired app. > The app starts. Previously connected Android 1. Connect the phone to the USB port. > If the setting for automatic start is selected - the name of the phone is shown. 2. Tap on the phone name - the tile with Android Auto is opened and compatible apps are shown. 4. If the setting for automatic start is not selected - open the Android Auto app from the app view. > The tile with Android Auto is opened and compatible apps are shown. Tap on the desired app. > The app starts. Settings for Android Auto* Settings for a phone that has been connected the first time with Android Auto. Automatic start 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press Communication and select setting: Android Auto runs in the background if another app is started in the same tile. To show Android Auto in the tile again - tap on the Android Auto icon in the app view. Related information • • • • Android Auto* (p. 486) Settings for Android Auto* (p. 487) Connecting a device via USB port (p. 481) Voice recognition (p. 128) Android Auto • Tick the box - Android Auto starts automatically when the USB cable is connected. • Untick the box - Android Auto does not start automatically when the USB cable is connected. A maximum of 20 Android devices can be stored in the list. When the list is full and a new device is connected the oldest one is deleted. A factory reset has to be executed in order to clear the list. System volumes 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Tap on Sound System Volumes and make the settings for the following: • Voice Control • Navi Voice Guidance • Phone Ringtone }} * Option/accessory. 487 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || Related information • • • Android Auto* (p. 486) Using Android Auto* (p. 487) Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 121) Tips for using Android Auto* Phone Here are some useful tips for using Android Auto. • Ensure that your apps are updated. A phone with Bluetooth can be connected wirelessly to the car's built-in hands-free system. • When starting the car, wait until the centre display has started, connect the telephone and then open Android Auto from the app view. • The audio and media system acts as hands-free, with the facility to remotely control a selection of the phone's functions. The phone can still be operated with its own keys even if it is connected to the car. In the event of problems with Android Auto, disconnect your Android phone from the USB port and then reconnect via USB. Otherwise, try closing the app on the phone and then restarting the app. When a phone has been connected online and connected with the car, it can be used make calls, send/receive messages, play back media wirelessly and be used as an Internet connection. • When a telephone is connected to Android Auto it is still possible to playback media via Bluetooth to another media player. The Bluetooth function is on when Android Auto is used. Related information • 488 The phone is operated from the centre display, but some operations are also available via voice recognition and the app menu, which are accessed from the right-hand steering wheel keypad. Android Auto* (p. 486) * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Overview Microphone. Phone. Wireless phone charger. Phone operation from centre display. Keypad for operating phone functions that are shown in the driver display and voice recognition. Driver display. Related information • • • • Managing phone calls (p. 493) Managing the phone book (p. 496) • Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth automatically (p. 491) Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time • Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth manually (p. 492) • Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 492) • Switch between Bluetooth-connected phones (p. 493) • Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 493) • • • • Wireless phone charger* (p. 497) Connect a phone with Bluetooth activated to then be able to make calls from the car, send/ receive messages, play back media wirelessly and connect the car to the Internet. It is possible to have two Bluetooth devices connected at once, in which case one of them can only play back wirelessly. The most recently connected phone will automatically be connected to make calls, send/receive messages, play back media and provide an Internet connection. It is possible to change the use of the phone in the settings for Bluetooth Devices. • • Settings for phone (p. 496) Voice recognition (p. 128) Handling the application menu in the driver display (p. 90) Audio settings (p. 464) Connecting the car to the Internet via a mobile device (Bluetooth) (p. 499) After the device has been connected/registered a first time via Bluetooth, it no longer needs to be visible/discoverable, but only have Bluetooth activated. To connect the car to the Internet via a phone, tethering must also be activated on the phone. A maximum of 20 connected Bluetooth devices can be stored in the car. There are two options for connecting. Either search the phone from the car or search the car from the phone. Option 1 - search phone from car 1. Make the phone searchable/visible via Bluetooth. Managing text messages (p. 494) Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 489) }} * Option/accessory. 489 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || 2. 3. To connect the car to the Internet via the phone’s Bluetooth, activate tethering (portable/personal hotspot) via Bluetooth on the phone. Option 2 - search car from phone 1. • Open the tile for the phone. • If there is no phone connected to the car, tap on Add phone. • • If there is a phone connected to the car, . In the pop-up wintap on Change dow, tap on Add phone. > Available Bluetooth devices are listed. The list is updated as new devices are detected. 4. 5. 6. Tap on the name of the phone to be connected. Check that the specified number code in the car matches that in the phone. In which case, choose to accept in both places. On the phone, choose to accept or reject any options for phone contacts and messages. NOTE • • 490 The message function must be activated in certain phones. Not all mobile phones are fully compatible and may therefore not show contacts and messages in the car. NOTE Open the tile for the phone. If there is no phone connected to the car, tap on Add phone Make car discoverable. If there is a phone connected to the car, tap on Change . In the pop-up window, tap on Add phone Make car discoverable. 2. Activate Bluetooth on the phone. 3. To connect the car to the Internet via the phone’s Bluetooth, activate tethering (portable/personal hotspot) via Bluetooth on the phone. 4. Search on the phone for Bluetooth devices. > Available Bluetooth devices are listed. 5. Select the name of the car on the phone. 6. A pop-up window for the connection is shown in the car. Confirm the connection. 7. Check that the specified number code in the car matches that in the external device. In which case, choose to accept in both places. 8. On the phone, choose to accept or reject any options for phone contacts and messages. • The message function must be activated in certain phones. • Not all mobile phones are fully compatible and may therefore not show contacts and messages in the car. NOTE If the phone's operating system is updated then the connection may be broken. In which case, delete the phone from the car and then connect again. Compatible phones Many phones on the market now have wireless Bluetooth technology, but not all of them are fully compatible with the car. For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com. Related information • • Phone (p. 488) Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth automatically (p. 491) • Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth manually (p. 492) • Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 492) • Switch between Bluetooth-connected phones (p. 493) SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET • • • Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 493) Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth automatically • Connecting the car to the Internet via a mobile device (Bluetooth) (p. 499) Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 497) It is possible to connect a phone to the car automatically via Bluetooth. The phone has to have been connected to the car for the first time. It is only the two last connected phones that can be connected automatically. • Ignition positions (p. 398) Connecting the car to the Internet via a mobile device (Bluetooth) (p. 499) 1. Activate Bluetooth in the phone before setting the car in ignition position I. To connect the car to the Internet at the same time, tethering (portable/personal hotspot) in the phone must be activated. 2. Set the car in ignition position I or higher. > The phone will connect. Related information • • Phone (p. 488) Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 489) • Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth manually (p. 492) • Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 492) • Switch between Bluetooth-connected phones (p. 493) • Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 493) • Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 497) 491 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth manually It is possible to connect a phone to the car manually via Bluetooth. The phone has to have been connected to the car for the first time. 1. Activate Bluetooth on the phone. To connect the car to the Internet at the same time, tethering (portable/personal hotspot) in the phone must be activated. 2. Open the tile for the phone. > Connected phones are listed. 3. Tap on the name of the phone to be connected. > The phone will connect. Related information • • 492 Phone (p. 488) Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 489) • Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth automatically (p. 491) • Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 492) • Switch between Bluetooth-connected phones (p. 493) • Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 493) • Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 497) • Connecting the car to the Internet via a mobile device (Bluetooth) (p. 499) Disconnecting a Bluetoothconnected phone Disconnect a Bluetooth-connected phone from the car by deactivating Bluetooth on your phone. When the phone is out of range of the car it is automatically disconnected. If disconnection occurs during an active call then the call can be continued on the phone. Related information • • • Phone (p. 488) Settings for phone (p. 496) Switch between Bluetooth-connected phones (p. 493) • Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 493) • Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 497) SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Switch between Bluetoothconnected phones Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone It is possible to switch between a number of Bluetooth-connected phones. 1. Open the tile for the phone. It is possible to remove phones from the list of registered Bluetooth devices. 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. 3. Tap on Change or drag down the top view and tap on Settings Communication Bluetooth Devices Add device. > Available Bluetooth devices are listed. Tap on the phone to be connected. 2. Press Communication Bluetooth Devices. > Registered Bluetooth devices are listed. 3. Tap on the phone to be removed. 4. Tap on Remove device and confirm your selection. > The phone is no longer registered to the car. Related information • • • • • Phone (p. 488) Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 489) Related information Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 497) • • Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 492) • Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 493) Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 492) • Switch between Bluetooth-connected phones (p. 493) • Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 497) Phone (p. 488) Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 489) Managing phone calls Call handling in the car for a Bluetooth-connected phone. Generic illustration. Making phone calls 1. Open the tile for the phone. 2. Select call from: call history, enter number using the keypad or via the contact list. It is possible to search or browse in the contact list. Tap on in the contact list in order to add a contact under Favourites. 3. Press 4. Tap on . to end the call. You can also make calls from the call log via the app menu, which is accessed from the right-hand steering wheel keypad . }} 493 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || Making multi-party calls During a call: 1. Press Add call. 2. Choose to make a call from the call log, favourites or the contact list. 3. Tap on an entry/row in the call log, or tap on alongside the contact in the contact list. 4. Tap on Swap call to switch between the parties. to end the active call. 5. Tap on Conference calls During an active multi-party call: 1. Tap on Join calls to merge the active multiparty call. 2. Tap on to end the call. Incoming phone calls Incoming phone calls are shown in the driver display and the centre display. Manage the call on the right-hand steering wheel keypad or in the centre display. 1. Tap on Answer/Reject. 2. Tap on to end the call. Incoming phone call during an active call 1. Tap on Answer/Reject. 2. 494 Tap on to end the call. Private call Managing text messages – Message handling in the car for a Bluetoothconnected phone. In some phones, the message function must be activated. Not all phones are compatible. In such cases, they cannot display contacts and messages in the car. For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com. During the current call, press Privacy and select setting: • Switch to mobile phone - the hands- free function is disconnected and the call continues on your mobile phone. • Driver focused - the microphone in the roof on the passenger side is switched off and the call continues with the car's handsfree function. Related information • • Phone (p. 488) Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 489) • Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 130) • Handling the application menu in the driver display (p. 90) • Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display (p. 115) • • • Managing the phone book (p. 496) Managing text messages (p. 494) Audio settings (p. 464) Managing text messages in the centre display Text messages are only shown in the centre display if the setting is selected. Press Messages in the app view to manage text messages in the centre display. Reading text messages in the centre display Press the icon to get the message read aloud. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Sending text messages in the centre display13 1. You can reply to a message or create a new message. • • Reply to message — tap on the contact whose message you wish to reply to, then tap on Answer. Create new message - tap on Create new. Select a contact or enter a number. 2. Compose the message. 3. Press Send. Managing text messages in the driver display Text messages are only shown in the driver display if the setting is selected. Message notification Settings for text messages It is possible to activate and deactivate notifications in the text message settings. Settings for text messages on connected phone. 1. Press Settings in the top view. Related information 2. • • • • • Phone (p. 488) Settings for text messages (p. 495) • Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 489) Dictating a reply in the driver display After the text message has been read out, it is possible to reply briefly with dictation if the car is connected to the Internet. 13 • Notification in driver display - displays Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 130) Reading a new text message in the driver display – To have the message read aloud – select Read out with the steering wheel keypad. – message notifications in the centre display's status bar. Internet-connected car* (p. 498) Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display (p. 115) Text Messages • Notification in centre display - shows Settings for phone (p. 496) • Press Communication and select settings: notifications in the driver's display and incoming messages can be managed using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. • Text message tone - select tone for incoming text messages. Related information • • • • Phone (p. 488) Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 489) Managing text messages (p. 494) Settings for phone (p. 496) Press Answer with the steering wheel keypad. A dictation dialogue starts. Only certain phones can broadcast messages from the car. For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com. * Option/accessory. 495 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Managing the phone book Contact handling in the car for a Bluetooth-connected phone. Sorting The contact list is sorted in alphabetical order where special characters and numbers are sorted . It is possible to sort by first name or under surname, and this setting is adjusted in the telephone setup. Related information • • • Browse between the letters and to find a matching contact. Depending on existing contacts in the phone book, only matching letters are shown. Search contacts - tap on to search for a phone number of name in the contact list. Favourites - tap on to add/remove a contact to/from the favourites list. NOTE Only contacts from an active Bluetooth-connected phone are shown in the centre display. Up to 3000 contacts can be shown. 496 Settings for phone When the telephone is connected to the car, the following settings can be made: 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press Communication select settings: Phone (p. 488) • Ringtones - select ringtone. It is possible Settings for phone (p. 496) to use a ringtone from the phone or the car. Some phones are not fully compatible and their ringtones may therefore not be available for use in the car. For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com. Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 130) • Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display (p. 115) • Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 489) Phone and • Sort order - select sort order of contact list. Related information • • • • • Phone (p. 488) Settings for text messages (p. 495) Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 497) Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 489) Audio settings (p. 464) SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Settings for Bluetooth devices Wireless phone charger* Settings for Bluetooth-connected devices. 1. Press Settings in the top view. There is a charging plate for wireless phone charging located under the centre display. A condition for being able to charge the phone is that it supports wireless charging (Qi). Phones not equipped with wireless charging receivers can often be supplemented with a shell that makes wireless charging possible. 2. Press Communication Bluetooth Devices and select settings: • Add device - starts the pairing of a new device. • Previously paired devices - lists connected devices. • Remove device - removes the connected device. • Allowed services for this device - sets device usage options: calling, sending/ receiving messages, streaming media and as Internet connection. • Internet connection - connects the car to the Internet via the device's Bluetooth connection. Related information • • • • Phone (p. 488) Settings for phone (p. 496) Internet-connected car* (p. 498) Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 489) Using the wireless telephone charger* The rubber plate under the centre display makes it possible to charge phones without the need to use the phone's cable. Related information • • Phone (p. 488) Using the wireless telephone charger* (p. 497) Wireless phone charger in front of gear lever. – Position the phone in the centre of the charging plate. > Phone charging is started. If phone charging does not start, check that the phone supports wireless charging (Qi). If the phone is positioned incorrectly, or if objects prevent charging on the charging plate, a message is shown in the centre display. }} * Option/accessory. 497 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || WARNING Keep the phone and charging plate free of other objects while charging to avoid overheating. Related information • • Phone (p. 488) Wireless phone charger* (p. 497) Internet-connected car* When the car is connected to the Internet, it is possible – for example – to use web radio and music services via apps, download software and contact your retailer from the car. The car is connected via Bluetooth, Wi-Fi or with the car's built-in modem*. When the car is online, its Internet connection (Wi-Fi hotspot) can be shared to allow other devices to use the Internet connection14. Connection status is indicated by a symbol in the centre display's status bar. NOTE Data is transferred when using the internet (data traffic), which can have a cost. Activation of data roaming can result in further charges. Contact your network operator about the cost for data traffic. NOTE When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possible to connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi or the car modem*. NOTE When using Android Auto, it is possible to connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth or the car modem*. Read Terms and Conditions for Services and Customer Privacy Policy at support.volvocars.com before connecting the car to the Internet. 14 498 This does not apply in the case of connection with Wi-Fi. * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Related information • Symbols in the centre display's status bar (p. 110) • Connecting the car to the Internet via a mobile device (Bluetooth) (p. 499) • Connecting the car to the Internet via a mobile device (Wi-Fi) (p. 500) • Connect the car to the Internet via car modem (SIM card) (p. 500) • • • Apps (p. 465) • • • • Connecting the car to the Internet via a mobile device (Bluetooth) Create an Internet connection via Bluetooth by sharing your phone's Internet access and access several online services in the car. The phone and network operator must support tethering (sharing the Internet connection) and the subscription plan must include data. 1. No or poor Internet connection (p. 503) Sharing Internet access from the car via a Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 502) Remove Wi-Fi network (p. 503) 2. If the phone has been connected via Bluetooth previously, press Settings in the centre display top view. 3. In the centre display: Press Communication Bluetooth Devices. 4. Tick the box for Bluetooth Internet connection under the heading Internet connection. > Your car is now connected to the Internet via the Bluetooth-connected phone. Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 504) Volvo ID (p. 26) User terms and conditions and data sharing (p. 504) To be able to connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-connected phone, the phone has to have already been connected to the car via Bluetooth for a first time. Ensure that the personal hotspot (portable/personal hotspot) is activated in your phone. Related information • • Internet-connected car* (p. 498) Connect the car to the Internet via car modem (SIM card) (p. 500) • Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 489) • Connecting the car to the Internet via a mobile device (Wi-Fi) (p. 500) • • • Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 483) No or poor Internet connection (p. 503) Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 497) NOTE When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possible to connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi or the car modem*. * Option/accessory. 499 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Connecting the car to the Internet via a mobile device (Wi-Fi) Create an Internet connection via Wi-Fi by sharing your phone's Internet access and access several online services in the car. The phone and network operator must support tethering (sharing the Internet connection) and the subscription plan must include data. 500 Note that certain phones switch off tethering after the contact with the car has been disconnected, e.g. when leaving the car and until the next time it is used. The tethering in the phone therefore needs to be reactivated the next time it is used. When a phone is connected to the car, it is saved for future use. When the maximum number of saved phones (50) is reached, the first connected phones are deleted. To show a list of saved networks or manually delete saved networks, go to Settings Communication Wi-Fi Saved networks. Connect the car to the Internet via car modem (SIM card) For cars equipped with Volvo On Call*, it is possible to establish an Internet connection via the car modem and a personal SIM card (P-SIM). When the car is connected to the Internet via the car modem, Volvo On Call services will use this connection. 1. Technical and safety requirements for Wi-Fi connection, are described in a separate section. 1. Activate tethering (portable/personal hotspot) on the phone. 2. Press Settings in the top view. 3. Continue to Communication 4. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the box for Wi-Fi. 5. Tap on the network name of the network to be connected. 6. Enter the network password. 2. Press Settings in the top view. 7. If another connection source has been used in the past - confirm the option to change connection. > The car connects to the network. 3. Press Communication Internet. 4. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the box for Car modem Internet. Wi-Fi. Related information • • • • Internet-connected car* (p. 498) Remove Wi-Fi network (p. 503) No or poor Internet connection (p. 503) Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 504) Fit a personal SIM card into the holder under the cargo area floor. Car Modem * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET 5. 6. If another connection source has been used in the past - confirm the option to change connection. Enter the SIM card's PIN code. > The car connects to the network. Related information • • • • Internet-connected car* (p. 498) Folding up the cargo area floor (p. 553) No or poor Internet connection (p. 503) Settings for car modem (p. 501) Settings for car modem15 The car is equipped with a modem that can be used to connect the car to the Internet. It is also possible to share the Internet connection via Wi-Fi. 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press Communication Car Modem Internet and select settings: • Send request code — used e.g. to top up or check the balance on a prepaid card. Functionality depends on the provider. Related information • Connect the car to the Internet via car modem (SIM card) (p. 500) • No or poor Internet connection (p. 503) • Car modem Internet - select whether to use the car modem as Internet connection. • Data usage - tap on Reset resets the counters for received and sent data volume. • Network Select network operator - automatic or manual selection of network operator. Data roaming - if the box is ticked, the car modem will attempt to connect to the Internet when the car is abroad and outside its home network. Note that this may result in heavy costs. Check your roaming agreement for data traffic abroad with your network provider in your home country. • SIM card PIN Change PIN - a maximum of 4 digits can be entered. Disable PIN - select whether the PIN code shall be required for access to the SIM card. 15 Only cars with Volvo On Call. * Option/accessory. 501 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Sharing Internet access from the car via a Wi-Fi hotspot 2. Press Communication Hotspot. When the car is online, its Internet connection can be shared to allow other devices to use the Internet connection16. 3. Tap on Network name and name the shared connection. Car Wi-Fi 4. Tap on Password and select a password to be entered on connecting devices. 5. Tap on Frequency band and select the frequency on which the hotspot is to transmit data. Note that selection of frequency band is not available in all markets. 6. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the box for Car Wi-Fi Hotspot. 7. If Wi-Fi has previously been used as a connection source, confirm the option to change connection. > It is now possible for external devices to connect to the car's tethering (Wi-Fi hotspot). Press Connected devices to see a list of the currently connected devices. Related information • • • Symbols in the centre display's status bar (p. 110) Internet-connected car* (p. 498) No or poor Internet connection (p. 503) NOTE Activation of Wi-Fi-hotspot can result in further charges from your network operator. The network operator (SIM card) must support tethering (sharing of the Internet connection). 502 1. Press Settings in the top view. 16 Does not apply when the car is online via Wi-Fi. Contact your network operator about the cost for data traffic. Connection status is indicated by the symbol in the centre display's status bar. * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET No or poor Internet connection Factors that affect the Internet connection. The amount of data transferred is dependent on the services or apps in use in the car. For example, streaming audio can require large amounts of data which requires a good connection and good signal strength. Phone to car The speed of the Internet connection may vary depending on the location of the phone in the car. Move the phone closer to the centre display in order to increase the signal strength. Ensure that there is no source of interference in between. Phone to network operator The speed of the mobile network varies depending on the coverage in the present location. Poor network coverage may occur, for example in tunnels, in mountainous country, in deep valleys or indoors. The speed also depends on the agreement you have with your network. NOTE In the event of problems with data traffic, contact your network operator. Related information • • Internet-connected car* (p. 498) Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 504) Remove Wi-Fi network Removing a network that is not to be used. 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Continue to Communication Saved networks. 3. Tap on Forget alongside the network to be removed. 4. Confirm the selection. > The car will no longer connect to the network in future. Wi-Fi Remove all networks All networks can be removed simultaneously by restoring factory settings. Please note that all user data and system settings are reset to original factory settings. Related information • • • • Internet-connected car* (p. 498) No or poor Internet connection (p. 503) Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 121) Connecting the car to the Internet via a mobile device (Wi-Fi) (p. 500) Restarting the phone If there are problems with the Internet connection then it may help to restart the phone. * Option/accessory. 503 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Wi-Fi technologies and security Possible network types to connect to. It is only possible to connect to the following types of network: • • • Frequency — 2.4 or 5 GHz17. Standards — 802.11 a/b/g/n. Security type - WPA2-AES-CCMP. The car’s Wi-Fi system is designed to handle Wi-Fi devices inside the car. If several devices operate on the frequency at the same time then it may result in reduced performance. Related information • Internet-connected car* (p. 498) User terms and conditions and data sharing Activating and deactivating data sharing The first time certain services and apps are started, a pop-up window with the headings Terms and conditions and Data sharing may be shown. The purpose is to inform about Volvo's user terms and conditions and policy for data sharing. By accepting data sharing, the user accepts that certain information is sent from the car. This is required so that certain services and apps can have full functionality. Data sharing for services and apps required can be set in the centre display's settings menu. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. Data sharing can be set from the centre display's settings menu. Related information • Activating and deactivating data sharing (p. 504) 2. Press System 3. Select Data sharing to activate or deactivate data sharing. 4. When data sharing is activated, settings for individual services and apps can be changed in the list below. When data sharing is deactivated, the earlier settings for individual services and apps remain available when data sharing is reactivated. Related information • 17 504 Privacy and data. User terms and conditions and data sharing (p. 504) Selection of frequency is not available on all markets. * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Compatible media formats Format File extension Max file size 4 GB The following file formats must be used for media playback. AVI .avi Audio codec MP3, AC3 Audio files AVI (DivX) .avi, divx Subtitles XSUB ASF .asf, .wmv MKV .mkv Special functions Multiple subtitles, multiple audio, resume play Reference Meets all requirements of the DivX Home Theater profile. Visit divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX Home Theater video. Format File extension Codec MP3 .mp3 MPEG1 Layer III, MPEG2 Layer III, MP3 Pro (mp3 compatible), MP3 HD (mp3 compatible) AAC .m4a, .m4b, .aac AAC LC (MPEG-4 part III Audio), HE-AAC (aacPlus v1/v2) WMA .wma WMA8/9, WMA9/10 Pro WAV .wav LPCM FLAC .flac FLAC Video files Subtitles Format File extension SubViewer .sub SubRip .srt SSA .ssa DivX® DivX certified devices have been tested for highquality DivX (.divx, .avi) video playback. When you see the DivX logo, you have the freedom to play DivX films. Profile DivX Home Theater Video codec DivX, MPEG-4 Format File extension Resolution 720x576 MP4 .mp4, m4v Bit rate 4.8Mbps MPEG-PS .mpg, .mp2, .mpeg, .m1v Frame rate 30 fps File extension .divx, .avi Related information • • • Media player (p. 474) Video (p. 478) Playing back DivX® (p. 479) 505 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Technical specifications for USB devices Voltage supply 5 V Storage space on hard disk Current supply max. 3.0 A Max number It is possible to view how much free space there is on the car's hard disk. Storage information for the car's hard disk, including total capacity, available capacity and how much space is used for installed apps can be shown. The information is available under Settings System System Information Storage. Files 15 000 Related information Folders 1 000 Folder levels 8 Playlists 100 Items in a playlist 1 000 Subfolders No limit The following specifications must be met to allow the contents of the USB devices to be read. No folder structure will be shown in the centre display during playback. Technical specification for USB A connector • • • • Type A socket Version 2.0 Voltage supply 5 V Current supply max. 2.1 A Technical specification for USB C connector • • 506 • • Type C socket Version 3.1 Related information • Media via USB port (p. 480) • Apps (p. 465) SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET License agreement for audio and media DivX® Gracenote® A license is an agreement for the right to operate a certain activity or the right to use someone else's entitlement according to the terms and conditions in the agreement. The following texts are Volvo's agreements with manufacturers/ developers. Dirac Unison® DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logotypes are trademarks belonging to DivX, LLC and are used under licence. Dirac Unison co-optimises the loudspeakers in frequency, time and space for the best possible bass integration and clarity. It enables a faithful reproduction of the acoustic characteristics of specific performance venues. Using advanced algorithms, Dirac Unison controls all loudspeakers digitally based on acoustic high-precision measurements. Like a conductor of an orchestra, it guarantees that the loudspeakers perform in perfect unison. This DivX Certified® device can play back DivX® Home Theater video files up to 576p (including .avi, .divx). Download free software on www.divx.com to create, play back and stream digital video. Parts of the content are copyright © of Gracenote or its suppliers. Gracenote,Gracenote logo and logotype, "Powered by Gracenote" and Gracenote MusicID are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote, Inc. in the USA and/or other countries. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play back purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) films. Get the registration code by locating the DivX VOD section in the device's settings menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete the registration. Patent numbers Protected by one or more of the following US patents. 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 8,656,183; 8,731,369; RE45,052. }} 507 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || Gracenote® End User License Agreement This program or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California, USA ("Gracenote"). The software from Gracenote ("Gracenote software") activates this program to perform disc and/or file identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track and title ("Gracenote data") from online servers or embedded databases (together called "Gracenote servers") and in order to perform other actions. You may only use Gracenote data in accordance with the intended end-user functions for this program or this device. You agree to only use Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Gracenote servers for your own personal non-commercial use. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit this Gracenote software or any Gracenote data to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED IN THIS AGREEMENT. You agree that your non-exclusive right to use Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Gracenote servers will be terminated if you violate these restrictions. If your license is terminated you agree to cease all use of Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Gracenote servers. Gracenote holds exclusive rights to all Gracenote data, all Gracenote software and all Gracenote servers, including all ownership rights. Gracenote will under no circumstances have any obligation 508 to pay you for any information you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce the company's rights under this agreement against you directly in its own name. The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track enquiries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to enable the Gracenote service to count enquiries without knowing anything about who you are. Additional information is available on the web page for Gracenote's privacy policy for the Gracenote service. The Gracenote software and everything included in Gracenote data are licensed to you "as is". Gracenote provides no undertakings or warranties, express or implied, as to the accuracy of the Gracenote data contained in the Gracenote servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote servers or to change data categories for any reason that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is provided that the Gracenote software or Gracenote servers are fault-free or that the Gracenote software or Gracenote servers will operate without interruption. Gracenote has no obligation to provide you with new, improved or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future, and the company reserves the right to discontinue its services at any time. GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. GRACENOTE DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE RESULTS OBTAINED THROUGH YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR A GRACENOTE SERVER. GRACENOTE WILL IN NO EVENT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGE OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR REVENUES. © Gracenote, Inc. 2009 Sensus software This software uses parts of sources from clib2 and Prex Embedded Real-time OS - Source (Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994), and Quercus Robusta (Copyright (c) 1990, 1993), The Regents of the University of California. All or some portions are derived from material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. Neither the name of the <ORGANIZATION> nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. This software uses parts of sources from "libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL Sample Implementation, Version 1.2.1, released January 26, 2000, developed by Silicon Graphics, Inc. The Original Code is Copyright (c) 1991-2000 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Copyright in any portions created by third parties is as indicated elsewhere herein. All Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [1991-2000] Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice including the dates of first publication and either this permission notice or a reference to http:// oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc. This software is based in parts on the work of the FreeType Team. This software uses parts of SSLeay Library: Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]). All rights reserved Linux software This product contains software licensed under GNU General Public License (GPL) or GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL), etc. You have the right of acquisition, modification, and distribution of the source code of the GPL/ LGPL software. You may download Source Code from the following website at no charge: http:// www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/ download/TVM_8351_013 The website provides the Source Code "As Is" and without warranty of any kind. By downloading Source Code, you expressly assume all risk and liability associated with downloading and using the Source Code and }} 509 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || complying with the user agreements that accompany each Source Code. NTT (Nippon Telegraph and Telephone Corporation). All rights reserved. PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE Please note that we cannot respond to any inquiries regarding the source code. camellia:1.2.0 Copyright (c) 2006, 2007 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer as the first lines of this file unmodified. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY NTT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL NTT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, 510 Unicode: 5.1.0 Copyright c 1991-2013 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data files and any associated documentation (the "Data Files") or Unicode software and any associated documentation (the "Software") to deal in the Data Files or Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software, and to permit persons to whom the Data Files or Software are furnished to do so, provided that (a) the above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear with all copies of the Data Files or Software, (b) both the above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in associated documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in each modified Data File or in the Software as well as in the documentation associated with the Data File(s) or Software that the data or software has been modified. THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in these Data Files or Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Declaration of Conformity }} 511 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || Country/ Area Brazil: Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário isto e, náo tem direito a protecão contra interferéncia prejudicial, mesmo tipo, e não pode causar interferéncia a sistemas operando em caráter primário. Para consultas, visite: www.anatel.gov.br EU: Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works 2-3-33, Miwa, Sanda-city. Hyogo, 669-1513, Japan Mitsubishi Electric Corporation hereby declares that this type of radio equipment [Audio Navigation Unit] conforms with directive 2014/53/EU. For more information, see support.volvocars.com. The United Arab Emirates: 512 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Country/ Area Kazakhstan: Model name: NR 0V Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Exporting country: Japan }} 513 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || Country/ Area China: 1. ■ 使用频率 2.4 - 2.4835 GHz ■ 等效全向辐射 ■ 最大 率(EIRP) 率谱密度 天线增益 天线增益 ≤100 mW 或≤20 dBm ① ≤20 dBm / MHz(EIRP) ① ■ 载频容限 20 ppm ■ 帯外发射 率(在 2.4-2.4835GHz 頻段以外) ≤-80 dBm / Hz (EIRP) ■ 杂散发射(辐射) • • • • • 率(对应载波±2.5 倍信道带宽以外) ≤-36 dBm / 100 kHz (30 - 1000 MHz) ≤-33 dBm / 100 kHz (2.4 - 2.4835 GHz) ≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (3.4 - 3.53 GHz) ≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (5.725 - 5.85 GHz) ≤-30 dBm / 1 MHz (其它 1 - 12.75 GHz) 2.不得擅自更改发射频率 大发射 率(包括额外 3.使用时不得对各种合法的无线电通信业 使用 4.使用微 率无线电设备,必须忍 5.不得在飞机和机场附近使用 514 10dBi 时 10dBi 时 装射频 产生有害干扰 各种无线电业 率放大器),不得擅自外接天线或改用其它发射天线 一旦发现有干扰现象时,应立即停止使用,并采 的干扰或工业 科学及医疗应用设备的辐射干扰 措施消除干扰后方可继续 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Country/ Area Korea: B 급 기기 (가정용 방송통신기자재) 이 기기는 가정용(B 급) 전자파적합기기로서 주로 가정에서 사용하는 것을 적으로 하며, 든 지역에서 사용할 수 있습니다. 해당 무선설비는 전파혼신 가능성이 있으므로 인명안전과 관련된 서비스는 할 수 없습니다. Malaysia This device has been certified under the Communications & Multimedia Act of 1998, Communications and Multimedia (Technical Standards) Regulations 2000.To retrieve your device’s serial number, please visit (support.volvocars.com) and search for “SIRIM Label Verification”. Device category: Navigation equipment for vehicle (Bluetooth) Model: NR-0V Type Approval No.: RBAY/18A/1015S(15-4067) }} 515 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || Country/ Area Mexico: Taiwan: 低功率電波輻射性電機管理辦法 第十二條 經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機,非經許可,公司 變更頻率 商號或使用者均不得擅自 加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能 第十四條 低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信;經發現有干擾現象時,應 立停用,改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用 電通信 前項合法通信,指依電信法規定作業之無線 低功率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業 科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備 之干擾 Related information • • • • • 516 Sound, media and Internet (p. 464) Internet-connected car* (p. 498) Media player (p. 474) Gracenote® (p. 478) Sensus - online connectivity and entertainment (p. 32) * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TYRES WHEELS AND TYRES Tyres New tyres Amongst other things, the function of the tyres is to carry load, provide grip on the road surface, dampen vibration and protect the wheel from wear. The tyres greatly affect the car's driving characteristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pressure and speed rating are important for how the car performs. Tyre economy • • The car is fitted with tyres according to the tyre information sticker found on the driver's side door pillar (between the front door and the rear door). WARNING A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control over the car. Recommended tyres On delivery, the car is equipped with Volvo original tyres that have the VOL1 marking on the side of the tyres. These tyres are carefully adapted to the car. In the event of changing tyres, it is therefore important that the new tyres also have this marking in order for the car's driving characteristics, comfort and fuel consumption to be maintained. 1 518 There may be deviations for certain tyre dimensions. are stored for future use. Examples of external signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are cracks or discolouration. Tyres are perishable. After a few years they begin to harden at the same time as the friction capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as possible when you replace them. This is especially important with regard to winter tyres. The last four digits in the sequence mean the week and year of manufacture. This is the tyre's DOT marking (Department of Transportation), and this is stated with four digits, for example 0717. The tyre is then manufactured in week 07, year 2017. Tyre age All tyres older than 6 years old should be checked by an expert even if they seem undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even if they are hardly ever or never used. The function can therefore be affected. This applies to all tyres that Maintain the correct tyre pressure. Avoid fast starts, heavy braking and squealing tyres. • • • Tyre wear increases with speed. • The tyres must have the same direction of rotation during their entire service life. • When you change tyres, the tyres with the best tread must be fitted on the rear wheels to reduce the risk of oversteer during heavy braking. • If you drive over kerbstones or deep holes you can damage the tyres and/or wheel rims permanently. Correct wheel alignment is very important. Unbalanced wheels worsen tyre economy and travelling comfort. Tyre rotation The car has no mandatory tyre rotation. Driving style, tyre pressure, climate and road condition affect how quickly the tyres age and wear. Correct tyre pressure results in more even wear. To avoid differences in tread depth and to prevent wear patterns forming on the tyres, the front WHEELS AND TYRES and rear wheels should be switched with each other. A suitable distance for the first change is approx. 5000 km (approx. 3100 miles) and then at 10000 km (approx. 6200 miles) intervals. Volvo recommends the an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted for checking if you are uncertain about tread depth. If significant differences in wear (> 1 mm difference in tread depth) between tyres have already occurred, then the least worn tyres must always be fitted on the rear. Understeer is normally easier to correct than oversteer, and leads to the car continuing forwards in a straight line rather than having the rear end skidding to one side, resulting in possible complete loss of control over the car. This is why it is important for the rear wheels never to lose grip before the front wheels. Storing wheels and tyres When you store complete wheels (tyres fitted on wheel rims) they should be hung up or positioned lying on their sides on the floor. Tyres not fitted on rims must be stored lying on their sides or standing upright, but not hung up. IMPORTANT Tyres should be stored in a cool, dry and dark place, and should never be stored close to solvents, petrol, oils, etc. • • WARNING Dimension designation for tyre Wheel rim size and tyre size for your Volvo are specified to meet stringent requirements for stability and driving characteristics. Unapproved combinations of wheel rim size and tyre size may have a negative effect on the car's stability and driving characteristics. Designations for tyre dimension, load index and speed rating. Any damage caused by the fitting of unapproved combinations of wheel rim size and tyre size is not covered by the new car warranty. Volvo accepts no liability for death, personal injury or any costs caused by such installations. Related information • • • • • • • • Checking tyre pressure (p. 522) Tyres' rotation direction (p. 521) Tread wear indicators on the tyres (p. 521) Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 524) Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 537) Dimension designation for tyre (p. 519) Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 628) Recommendations for loading (p. 550) The car has an approval for the complete vehicle with certain combinations of wheel rims and tyres. Designation of dimensions All tyres have a dimension designation, for example: 235/55 R18 100V. 235 Tyre width (mm) 55 Ratio between tyre wall height and tyre width (%) R Radial ply 18 Rim diameter in inches 100 Codes for the maximum permitted tyre load, tyre load index (LI) V Speed rating for maximum permitted speed, speed rating (SS). (In this case 240 km/h (149 mph).) Load index Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load, a load index (LI). The car's weight determines the load capacity required of the tyres. }} * Option/accessory. 519 WHEELS AND TYRES || Speed rating Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum speed. Tyre speed rating, SS (Speed Symbol), must at least correspond with the car's top speed. The table below shows the maximum permitted speed for each speed rating (SS). The only exception to these regulations is winter tyres2, where a lower speed rating may be used. If such a tyre is chosen, the car must not be driven faster than the speed rating of the tyre (for example, class Q can be driven at a maximum of 160 km/h (100 mph).) The top speed at which the car can be driven depends on road conditions, not the speed rating of the tyres. NOTE The maximum permitted speed is specified in the table. 2 520 Q 160 km/h (100 mph) (used only on winter tyres) T 190 km/h (118 mph) H 210 km/h (130 mph) V 240 km/h (149 mph) W 270 km/h (168 mph) Y 300 km/h (186 mph) Both those with metal studs and those without. WARNING The lowest permitted tyre load index (LI) and speed rating (SS) for the tyres for each respective engine variant are shown in the specifications, which can be found in the printed owner's manual. If a tyre with too low a load index or speed rating is used, it may overheat and be damaged. Related information • • • • Tyres (p. 518) Dimension designation for wheel rim (p. 520) Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 628) Lowest permitted tyre load index and speed rating for tyres (p. 629) Dimension designation for wheel rim Wheel and rim dimensions are designated in accordance with the examples in the table below. The car has an approval for the complete vehicle with certain combinations of wheel rims and tyres. All wheel rims have a dimension designation, for example: 7.5Jx18x50.5. 7,5 Rim width in inches J Rim flange profile 18 Rim diameter in inches 50,5 Off-set in mm (distance from wheel centre to wheel contact surface against the hub) Related information • • • Tyres (p. 518) Dimension designation for tyre (p. 519) Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 628) WHEELS AND TYRES Tyres' rotation direction NOTE Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed to only turn in one direction have the direction of rotation marked with an arrow. Make sure that both pairs of wheels have the same type and dimension, and also the same make. Tread wear indicators on the tyres Tread wear indicators show the status of the tyre's tread depth. Related information • The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation. • The tyre must always rotate in the same direction throughout its lifespan. • Tyres should only be switched between front and rear positions, never between left and right-hand sides, or vice versa. • If the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car's braking characteristics and capacity to force rain and slush out of the way are adversely affected. • Tyres with the greatest tread depth should always be fitted to the rear of the car (to decrease the risk of skidding). Tyres (p. 518) A tread wear indicator is a narrow elevation across the longitudinal grooves of the tyre's tread pattern. On the side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down to 1.6 mm (1/16 inch), the tread will be level in height with the tread wear indicators. Change to new tyres as soon as possible. Remember that tyres with little tread depth provide very poor grip in rain and snow. Related information • Tyres (p. 518) 521 WHEELS AND TYRES Checking tyre pressure Correct tyre pressure helps to improve driving stability, saves fuel and extends the service life of the tyres. Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies depending on ambient temperature. Driving on tyres with tyre pressure that is too low could result in the tyres overheating and being damaged. Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort, road noise and driving characteristics. Check the tyre pressures monthly. Use the tyre pressure recommended for cold tyres in order to achieve optimal tyre performance and optimal wear. Tyre pressure that is too low or too high may cause uneven wear on the tyres. WARNING • • Tyre pressure that is too low is the most common cause of tyre failure and may result in serious cracks in the tyre, the tread loosening or the tyre exploding, with unexpected loss of control of the car and increased risk of personal injury. Tyres with pressure that is too low reduce the load capacity of the car. Cold tyres The tyre pressure must be checked when the tyres are cold. 522 Tyres are considered cold when they have the same temperature as the surrounding air. This temperature is normally reached when the car has been parked for at least three hours. After having driven approximately 1.6 km (1 mile) these tyres are considered as warm. If you have to drive further than this to inflate the tyres, first check and record the tyre pressure and inflate to a suitable tyre pressure when you arrive at the pump. When the outside temperature changes, the tyre pressure also changes. A decrease in temperature of 10 degrees causes the tyre pressure to decrease 1 psi (7 kPa). Check the tyre pressure regularly and adjust to the correct pressure, which is specified on the car's tyre information plate or certification label. If you check the tyre pressure when the tyres are warm then you must never release any air. The tyres are warm due to driving and it is normal for the pressure to increase above the recommended pressure for cold tyres. A warm tyre with tyre pressure equal to or below the recommendation for cold tyres may have a pressure that is far too low. Adjusting tyre pressure Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natural phenomenon. The tyre pressure must therefore sometimes be adjusted in order to maintain the recommended tyre pressure. Use the tyre pressure recommended for cold tyres in order to achieve optimal tyre performance and optimal wear. NOTE To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pressure should be checked on cold tyres. "Cold tyres" means the tyres are the same temperature as the ambient temperature (approx. 3 hours after the car has been driven). After a few kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the pressure increases. 1. Remove the cap from the valve on one tyre and then press the tyre pressure gauge firmly down onto the valve. 2. Inflate to the recommended pressure. Related information • • • • Adjusting tyre pressure (p. 522) Recommended tyre pressure (p. 523) Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 524) Tyres (p. 518) * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TYRES 3. Refit the dust cap. NOTE • After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc. • Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew. 4. Check the tyres visually for any implanted nails or other objects that could puncture the tyre and cause leakage. 5. Check the sidewalls for any cavities, cuts, bumps or other irregularities. 6. Repeat this for all tyres, including the spare tyre*. NOTE If you have over-inflated, release air by pressing in the metal pin in the centre of the valve. Then check the pressure again using the tyre pressure gauge. Some spare tyres require a higher tyre pressure than other tyres. Check in the tyre pressure table or on the tyre pressure plate. Related information • • • • Recommended tyre pressure (p. 523) Checking tyre pressure (p. 522) Inflating tyres with the compressor from the puncture repair kit (p. 542) Recommended tyre pressure The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door pillar (between frame and rear door) shows which pressures the tyres should have at different loads and speed conditions. Approved tyre pressures (p. 630) The plate displays the designation for the factoryfitted tyres on the car, as well as load limits and tyre pressure. Improved fuel economy with ECO pressure For a light load (max. 3 people) and a speed of up to 160 km/h (100 mph), the ECO pressures can be chosen for optimum fuel economy. However, the lower comfort pressures are recommended instead if optimum noise and travelling comfort are desired. Related information • • Checking tyre pressure (p. 522) Approved tyre pressures (p. 630) * Option/accessory. 523 WHEELS AND TYRES Tyre pressure monitoring system* The tyre pressure monitoring system, Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS), gives a warning with an indicator symbol in the driver display when the pressure in one or more of the car's tyres is too low. Symbol Explanation The symbol illuminates to indicate low tyre pressure. If there is a fault in the system the tyre pressure warning symbol flashes for approximately one minute and then remains illuminated. System description The tyre pressure monitoring system measures differences in rotation speed between the different wheels via the ABS system in order to be able to determine whether they have the correct tyre pressure. If the tyre pressure is too low, the tyre's diameter is changed and, as a result, so is its rotation speed. By comparing the tyres with each other the system can determine whether one or more tyres have pressure that is too low. General information on the tyre monitoring system In the information below, the tyre monitoring system is referred to generically as TPMS. 524 Each tyre, including the spare tyre*, should be checked once a month. When checking, the tyre should be cold and have the air pressure recommended by the car manufacturer specified on the tyre pressure label or in the tyre pressure table. If the car has tyres of a different size than that recommended by the manufacturer, find out what the correct air pressure level is for these. As an extra safety feature, the car is equipped with a tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS), which shows when the air pressure in one or more tyres is too low. When the indicator symbol for low air pressure is lit, stop and check the tyres as soon as possible and inflate to the correct air pressure. Driving with tyres that have tyre pressure that is too low may cause the tyre to overheat, which can cause a puncture. Low tyre pressure also reduces fuel efficiency as well as tyre service life, and can affect car handling and stopping ability. Note that TPMS does not replace regular tyre maintenance. It is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tyre pressure, even if the limit for low tyre pressure has not been reached so that the indicator symbol illuminates. The car is also equipped with a TPMS system fault indicator, which indicates when the system is not functioning correctly. The TPMS system fault indicator is combined with the indicator symbol for low tyre pressure. When the system detects a fault, the symbol in the driver display will flash for about one minute and then remain illuminated. This procedure will be repeated when the car is started until the fault has been rectified. When the symbol is illuminated, the system's ability to detect or warn of low tyre pressure may be affected. A TPMS system fault can occur for several reasons, such as after changing to a spare tyre, or changing tyres or wheels that prevent TPMS from functioning correctly. Always check the indicator symbol for TPMS after changing one or more tyres in order to ensure the new tyre or wheel is working correctly with TPMS. Messages on the instrument panel When the tyre pressure is too low, the indicator symbol for low tyre pressure is illuminated in the driver display and a message is shown. • Tyre pressure low Check tyres, calibrate after fill • Tyre pressure system Temporarily unavailable • Tyre pressure system Service required To bear in mind • Always calibrate the system after a wheel change or tyre pressure adjustment. See the tyre pressure label on the driver's side door * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TYRES pillar for Volvo's recommended tyre pressures. • If you change to tyres of a different size to the ones fitted at the factory, the system must be calibrated for these tyres to avoid false warnings. • If a spare wheel* is used, it is possible that the tyre pressure monitoring system does not work correctly due to the differences between the wheels. • The system does not replace the need for regular tyre inspection and maintenance. • It is not possible to switch off the tyre pressure monitoring system. WARNING • • Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre failure, which could result in the driver losing control of the car. The system cannot indicate sudden tyre damage in advance. • Calibrate the system for tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 525) Calibrate the system for tyre pressure monitoring* In order for the system for tyre pressure monitoring, Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS) to work correctly, a reference value for the tyre pressure must be determined. This must be performed each time the tyres are changed or the tyre pressure is changed. For example, when driving with a heavy load or at high speed above 160 km/h (100 mph), the tyre pressure should be adjusted in accordance with Volvo's recommended tyre pressure values. Following which, the system must be recalibrated. 1. Switch off the car. 2. Inflate the tyres to the desired pressure in accordance with the tyre pressure label on the door pillar on the driver's side. 3. Start the car. 4. Open the Car status app in the app view. Related information • • • Recommended tyre pressure (p. 523) See tyre pressure statue in the centre display* (p. 527) Action in the event of warning for low tyre pressure (p. 528) }} * Option/accessory. 525 WHEELS AND TYRES || 5. Press TPMS. NOTE The car must be stationary when calibration is started. 6. Press Calibrate. 7. Tap on OK to confirm that the tyre pressure in all four tyres has been checked and adjusted. 8. Run the car until calibration is complete. NOTE Calibration is performed when the car is driven at a speed above 35 km/h (22 mph). > When sufficient data has been collected to enable the system to detect low tyre pressure, the tyres in the centre display change colour from grey to green. The system provides no additional confirmation that the calibration is complete. Remember to always calibrate the tyre pressure monitoring system when you have changed a wheel or if the tyre pressure has been changed according to the tyre pressure label or tyre pressure table. If correct reference values have not been set, the system may not warn correctly about low tyre pressure. If the car's ignition is switched off before calibration is complete, the tyres in the centre display change colour from grey to green upon next start-up, even if calibration is not complete. Perform calibration again and allow it to complete within the same operating cycle to ensure that the calibration is carried out correctly. The car must be stationary with the engine running for you to have access to the calibration button and start the calibration process. WARNING The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, which is invisible and odourless, but highly toxic. For this reason, calibration must always be performed outside or in a workshop with exhaust extraction. If start-up of calibration fails, the following message appears: Calibration unsuccessful. Try again.. Related information • • • 526 Recommended tyre pressure (p. 523) Adjusting tyre pressure (p. 522) See tyre pressure statue in the centre display* (p. 527) • Action in the event of warning for low tyre pressure (p. 528) • Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 524) * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TYRES See tyre pressure statue in the centre display* All tyres grey: • • With the system for tyre pressure monitoring, Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS), tyre pressure status can be viewed in the centre display. Several minutes driving above 35 km/h (22 mph) may be required for the system to become active. All tyres grey and a message: Checking status 1. • Tyre pressure system Temporarily Open the Car status app in the app view. Green tyre: • 2. Tap on TPMS to show the status of the tyres. The tyre pressure is above the limit value for a warning. • • 3 4 unavailable. The indicator symbol flashes and changes to constant glow after approx. 1 minute. The system is currently unavailable, activated shortly. • Tyre pressure system Service required. The indicator symbol flashes and changes to constant glow after approx. 1 minute. The system is not working correctly, contact a workshop4. Yellow tyre: The tyre's pressure is too low. Stop and check/rectify the tyre pressure by inflating as soon as possible. Calibrate the system after the tyre pressure has been adjusted. All tyres yellow: Status indication The graphics in the centre display show the status for each tyre3. Calibration in progress. Unknown status. The pressure is too low in two or more tyres. Stop and check/rectify the tyre pressures by inflating as soon as possible. Calibrate the system after the tyre pressures have been adjusted. Related information • Calibrate the system for tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 525) • Action in the event of warning for low tyre pressure (p. 528) • • Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 524) Car status (p. 562) The figure is schematic. Layout may vary depending on car model or updated software. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. * Option/accessory. 527 WHEELS AND TYRES Action in the event of warning for low tyre pressure NOTE To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pressure should be checked on cold tyres. "Cold tyres" means the tyres are the same temperature as the ambient temperature (approx. 3 hours after the car has been driven). After a few kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the pressure increases. When the tyre pressure monitoring system, Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS) gives a warning, the tyre pressure in one or more of the car's tyres is too low and action is required. Check and rectify the tyre pressure when the indicator symbol for the system is illuminated and the Tyre pressure low message is shown. 1. Switch off the car. 2. Check the tyre pressure in all four tyres with a tyre pressure gauge. 3. Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure as indicated on the tyre pressure label on the door pillar on the driver's side. 4. Perform calibration of the system via the centre display after tyre pressure adjustment. • Calibrate the system for tyre pressure monitoring* (p. 525) • See tyre pressure statue in the centre display* (p. 527) • • Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 524) Inflating tyres with the compressor from the puncture repair kit (p. 542) NOTE • After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc. • Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew. WARNING Note that the indicator symbol does not extinguish until the low tyre pressure has been rectified and new calibration has been performed. • Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre failure, which could result in the driver losing control of the car. • The system cannot indicate sudden tyre damage in advance. Related information • • 528 Recommended tyre pressure (p. 523) Adjusting tyre pressure (p. 522) * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TYRES When changing wheels Tool kit Jack* The car's wheels can be changed, e.g. to winter wheels or a spare wheel. Follow the relevant instructions for removing and fitting wheels. Tools that can be useful during towing, wheel changes or similar are found in the car's cargo area. The jack can be used to raise the car, for example, to change to the spare wheel. When changing to another tyre dimension Check that the tyre dimension is approved for use on the car. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for updating the software at each change of tyre dimension. A software download may be necessary both when changing to larger and smaller dimensions, and also when switching between summer and winter wheels. Related information • • • • • • • Removing a wheel (p. 531) Fitting the wheels (p. 533) Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 628) Tool kit (p. 529) Winter wheels (p. 536) Spare wheel* (p. 534) Wheel bolts (p. 530) The foam block under the cargo area floor contains the car's towing eye, puncture repair kit, tool for removing the plastic caps from the wheel bolts and a socket for the lockable wheel bolts. The figure is schematic - the version may vary. If the car is equipped with spare wheel* then a jack and wheel wrench are included, as well as a package with disposable gloves and a bag for the damaged wheel. Related information • • • Folding up the cargo area floor (p. 553) When changing wheels (p. 529) Jack* (p. 529) }} * Option/accessory. 529 WHEELS AND TYRES || IMPORTANT • When the jack* is not in use it must be stored in its storage space under the cargo area floor. • The jack included with the car is only designed for occasional, short-term use, such as when changing a wheel after a puncture. Only the jack belonging to the specific model is to be used to jack up the car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or for a longer time than is required just to change a wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the instructions for use that come with the equipment. The jack needs to be cranked together to the correct position in order to have space. Related information • • Folding up the cargo area floor (p. 553) Tool kit (p. 529) Wheel bolts Wheel bolts are used to attach the wheels to the hubs. Related information • • Removing a wheel (p. 531) Fitting the wheels (p. 533) IMPORTANT The wheel bolts must be tightened to 140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.). Overtightening or loose tightening may damage the nuts and the bolts. Only use rims that are tested and approved by Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accessories. Check the tightening torque of the wheel bolts with a torque wrench. Do not use lubricant on the threads of the wheel bolts. WARNING The wheel bolts may need to be re-tightened several days after the change. Temperature differences and vibration may mean that they are not attached equally as tightly. Locking wheel bolts* In the foam block under the cargo area floor there is space for the sleeve for the lockable wheel bolts. 530 * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TYRES Removing a wheel Instructions for removing a wheel when changing wheels. Wheel changes must always be performed correctly. IMPORTANT WARNING • Apply the parking brake and set the gear selector in Park position (P). • Chock the wheels standing on the ground using solid wood blocks or large stones. • When the jack* is not in use it must be stored in its storage space under the cargo area floor. • • Check that the jack is not damaged, that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt. The jack included with the car is only designed for occasional, short-term use, such as when changing a wheel after a puncture. Only the jack belonging to the specific model is to be used to jack up the car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or for a longer time than is required just to change a wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the instructions for use that come with the equipment. • Check that the jack is resting on a firm, level surface that is not slippery and is not slanted. • The jack must be correctly attached in the jack's bracket. • Never position anything between the ground and the jack, nor between the jack and the car's jacking point. • Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack. • If a wheel must be changed in a trafficked environment, passengers must stand in a safe place. • Use a jack designed for the car when changing tyres. Use supports to secure the car for all other work. • Never crawl under the car or reach under with a part of your body when it is raised on a jack. 1. Set up the warning triangle and activate the hazard warning lights if a tyre is being changed in a trafficked location. 2. Apply the parking brake and engage gear position P, or engage first gear if the car has a manual gearbox. 3. Take out the jack*, wheel wrench* and tools for the wheel bolts' plastic caps that are fitted in the foam block. Tool for removing the plastic caps on the wheel bolts. 4. Chock in front of and behind the wheels that remain on the ground. Use, for example, heavy wooden blocks or large stones. }} * Option/accessory. 531 WHEELS AND TYRES || 5. Screw together the towing eye with the wheel wrench* until the stop position as per the instructions. 8. When raising the car, it is important that the jack* or lifting arms are fitted in the intended points on the car's underbody. The triangle markings in the plastic cover indicate the locations of the jacking/lifting points. There are two jacking points on each side of the car. There is a recess for the jack at each point. 11. Turn the jack so that the crank is as far away from the side of the car as possible, at which point the jack's arms are perpendicular to the direction of the car. 12. Raise the car high enough to allow the wheel to be removed to move freely. Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the wheel. Related information • • • • • IMPORTANT The towing eye must be screwed into the wheel bolt wrench* as far as possible. 532 6. Remove the plastic caps from the wheel bolts with the intended tool. 7. With the car still on the ground, use the wheel bolt wrench/towing eye to undo the wheel bolts ½-1 turn by pressing downwards (anticlockwise). 9. When changing wheels (p. 529) Raise the car (p. 565) Jack* (p. 529) Tool kit (p. 529) Fitting the wheels (p. 533) Position the jack on level, firm and non-slippery ground under the jacking point that will be used. 10. Crank up until it is correctly aligned and so that it makes contact with the car's jacking point. Check that the head of the jack (or the lift arms at a workshop) is correctly positioned in the jacking point so that the bump in the centre of the head fits into the jacking point hole and the base is positioned vertically below the jacking point. * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TYRES Fitting the wheels Instructions for fitting a wheel when changing wheels. NOTE The jack included with the car is only designed for occasional, short-term use, such as when changing a wheel after a puncture. Only the jack belonging to the specific model is to be used to jack up the car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or for a longer time than is required just to change a wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the instructions for use that come with the equipment. WARNING 1. • Apply the parking brake and set the gear selector in Park position (P). Clean the contact surfaces between wheel and hub. 2. • Chock the wheels standing on the ground using solid wood blocks or large stones. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts thoroughly. • Check that the jack is not damaged, that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt. • Check that the jack is resting on a firm, level surface that is not slippery and is not slanted. • The jack must be correctly attached in the jack's bracket. • Never position anything between the ground and the jack, nor between the jack and the car's jacking point. • Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack. • If a wheel must be changed in a trafficked environment, passengers must stand in a safe place. • Use a jack designed for the car when changing tyres. Use supports to secure the car for all other work. • Never crawl under the car or reach under with a part of your body when it is raised on a jack. Do not use lubricant on the threads of the wheel bolts. 3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot rotate. 4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is important that the wheel bolts are tightened properly. Tighten to 140 Nm (103 ft.lbs.). Check the tightening torque with a torque wrench. 5. Refit the plastic caps on the wheel bolts. }} 533 WHEELS AND TYRES || WARNING The wheel bolts may need to be re-tightened several days after the change. Temperature differences and vibration may mean that they are not attached equally as tightly. NOTE • After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc. • Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew. Related information • • • • • 534 When changing wheels (p. 529) Raise the car (p. 565) Jack* (p. 529) Tool kit (p. 529) Removing a wheel (p. 531) Spare wheel* The spare wheel, the Temporary spare type, can be used to temporarily replace a punctured normal wheel. The spare tyre is only designed for temporary use. Replace it with a normal wheel as soon as possible. The car's driving characteristics can be changed when the spare wheel is used and the ground clearance is reduced. Do not wash the car in an automatic car wash if the Temporary Spare is being used. Recommended tyre pressure must be maintained regardless of the position of the temporary spare wheel on the car. If the spare tyre is damaged then a new one can be purchased from a Volvo dealer. WARNING • Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph) with a spare wheel fitted on the car. • The car must never be driven fitted with more than one spare wheel of the type "Temporary Spare" at the same time. • The car may have different driving characteristics while driving with the spare wheel. The spare wheel must be replaced with a normal wheel as soon as possible. • The spare wheel is smaller than the normal wheel, which affects the car's ground clearance. Look out for high kerbs and do not machine-wash the car. • Follow the manufacturer's recommended tyre pressure for the spare wheel. • On all-wheel drive cars, the drive on the rear axle can be disengaged. • If the spare wheel is fitted to the front axle then it is not possible to use snow chains at the same time. • The spare wheel must not be repaired. * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TYRES IMPORTANT The car must not be driven with tyres of different sizes or with a spare tyre other than the one supplied with the car. Using differentsized wheels can cause serious damage to the car's transmission. Taking out the spare wheel Follow these instructions for handling the spare wheel. 1. Fold up the cargo area floor, from the rear and forwards. 2. Lift out the foam block with its tools. 3. Undo the retaining screw. 4. Lift out the spare wheel. Related information • • Spare wheel* (p. 534) Folding up the cargo area floor (p. 553) Storing the punctured tyre 1. Take out the wheel bag enclosed in the foam block and put the wheel in the bag. 2. Put the tools back in their right place in the foam block and lift it back into the car. 3. Screw in the foam block using the mounting screws and then fold down the cargo area floor. 4. Place the punctured tyre in the cargo area. The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel well with the outside down. The foam block contains all the tools for changing a wheel. Storing the punctured tyre 1. Take out the wheel bag enclosed in the foam block and put the wheel in the bag. Related information 2. Screw back the mounting screw that held the tyre in place. 3. Put the tools back in their right place in the foam block and lift it back into the car. 4. Then fold down the cargo area floor and place the punctured tyre in the cargo area. • • When changing wheels (p. 529) Recommended tyre pressure (p. 523) * Option/accessory. 535 WHEELS AND TYRES Winter wheels Tread depth Snow chains Winter wheels are adapted for winter road conditions. Road conditions with ice, slush and low temperatures place considerably higher demands on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo therefore recommends not to drive on winter tyres that have a tread depth of less than 4 mm (0.15 inches). Use of snow chains and/or winter tyres can help to improve the traction in winter conditions. Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent on engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, the correct type of tyres must be fitted to all four wheels. NOTE Contact a Volvo dealer for advice about which wheel rim and type of tyre are most suitable. Tips for changing to winter tyres When summer and winter wheels are changed, mark which side of the car they were mounted on, for example L for left and R for right. Studded tyres Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for 500-1000 km (300-600 miles), so the studs settle properly into the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the studs, a longer service life. NOTE The legal provisions for the use of studded tyres vary from country to country. 536 Related information • • • When changing wheels (p. 529) Winter driving (p. 429) Tread wear indicators on the tyres (p. 521) WARNING Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equivalent chains designed for the car model, and tyre and rim dimensions. Only single-sided snow chains are permitted. In the event of uncertainty about the show chain, Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted. The wrong snow chains may cause serious damage to the car and lead to an accident. WHEELS AND TYRES • IMPORTANT Snow chains can be used on the car with the following restrictions: • Volvo does not recommend the use of show chains on wheel dimensions greater than 18 inches. • Always follow the mounting instructions from the manufacturer carefully. Fit the chains as tensioned as possible and tension them at regular intervals. • Snow chains must only be used on the front wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars). • In some cases, snow chains must NOT be used, such as if accessory, aftermarket or "special" tyres and wheels are fitted that have a different size to the original tyres and wheels. Sufficient distance must be maintained between the chains and brakes, suspension and body components. • Check local regulations with regard to using snow chains before fitting them. • Never exceed the chain manufacturer's specified maximum speed. You must never exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) under any circumstances. • • • Avoid driving on bare ground as this wears out both the snow chains and tyres. Driving with snow chains may have a negative effect on the car's driving characteristics. Avoid fast or sharp turns, as well as braking with locked wheels. Some types of chain that are firmly tensioned affect brake components and must therefore NOT be used. You can obtain more information on snow chains from a Volvo retailer. Related information • Winter driving (p. 429) Emergency puncture repair kit The emergency puncture repair kit5, is used to seal a puncture as well as to check and adjust the air pressure in the tyre. Cars equipped with spare tyre* do not have the puncture repair kit. The puncture repair kit consists of a compressor and a bottle with sealing fluid. The sealing works as a temporary repair. NOTE The sealing fluid is effective at sealing tyres with tread punctures but has limited ability to seal tyres with sidewall punctures. Do not use the emergency puncture repair kit on tyres displaying larger slits, cracks or similar damage. NOTE The compressor is intended for temporary emergency puncture repair and is approved by Volvo. Location The puncture repair kit is located in the foam block under the floor in the cargo area. Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns when driving with snow chains. }} * Option/accessory. 537 WHEELS AND TYRES || Using a puncture repair kit Sealing fluid bottle Seal a puncture with the emergency puncture repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK). Switch Overview Connecting Sealing fluid bottle The bottle of sealing fluid must be replaced if the bottle's expiry date has passed (see the decal on the bottle). Treat the old bottle as environmentally hazardous waste. The sealing fluid bottle must be replaced after use. Volvo recommends that the replacement is performed by an authorised Volvo workshop. Related information • • Using a puncture repair kit (p. 538) • Tyres (p. 518) 5 538 Inflating tyres with the compressor from the puncture repair kit (p. 542) Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK) Electrical cable Air hose Pressure reducing valve Protective cap Label, maximum permitted speed Bottle holder (orange cap) Pressure gauge NOTE Do not break the bottle's seal before use. The seal is broken automatically when the bottle is screwed in. WHEELS AND TYRES WARNING Please keep the following points in mind when using the tyre sealing system: • The sealing fluid bottle contains 1) rubber latex, natural and 2) ethanediol. These substances are harmful if swallowed. • The contents of this bottle may cause allergic skin reactions or otherwise be potentially harmful to the respiratory tract, the skin, the central nervous system, and the eyes. Precautions: • • • • Store out of the reach of children. Harmful if ingested. Avoid prolonged or repeated contact with the skin. If sealing fluid has come into contact with your clothes, remove them. • Inhalation: Move the exposed person to fresh air. If irritation persists, get medical attention. 3. Check that the switch is in position 0 (Off), and locate the electrical cable and the air hose. • Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting unless directed to do so by medical personnel. Get medical attention. 4. Unscrew the orange-coloured cap from the compressor, and unscrew the cork from the sealing fluid bottle. • Disposal: Dispose of this material and its container at a hazardous or special waste collection point. 5. Screw in the bottle to the bottom of the bottle holder. WARNING • Do not remove the bottle when the puncture repair kit is being used. • Do not remove the air hose when the puncture repair kit is being used. 1. Wash thoroughly after handling. First aid: • Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with soap and water. Get medical attention if symptoms occur. • Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least 15 minutes, occasionally lifting the upper and lower eyelids. Get medical attention if symptoms occur. The bottle and the bottle holder are equipped with a reverse catch to prevent sealant leakage. When the bottle is screwed in it cannot be unscrewed from the bottle holder again. Bottle removal must be performed at a workshop, Volvo recommends an authorised Volvo workshop. Set up the warning triangle and activate the hazard warning lights if a tyre is being sealed in a trafficked location. If the puncture was caused by a nail or similar, allow this to remain in the tyre. It helps to seal the hole. 2. Detach the decal for maximum permitted speed that is affixed on one side of the compressor. Affix it visibly on the windscreen as a reminder to observe the speed limit. You should not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph) after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. WARNING Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage. 6. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap and screw in the air hose's valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve. Check that the pressure reducing valve on the air hose is fully screwed in. }} 539 WHEELS AND TYRES || 7. Connect the electrical cable to the closest 12 V socket and start the car. 8. NOTE Make sure that none of the other 12 V sockets is in use when the compressor is operating. WARNING Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to position I (On). WARNING Never stand next to the tyre when the compressor is running. If cracks or unevenness arise then the compressor must be switched off immediately. The journey should not be continued. Call roadside assistance for recovery to a tyre centre. Volvo recommends an authorised tyre centre. NOTE When the compressor starts, the pressure can increase up to 6 bar (88 psi) but the pressure drops after approximately 30 seconds. 9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes. IMPORTANT The compressor must not be operated for longer than 10 minutes - risk of overheating. 540 10. Switch off the compressor to check the pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum pressure is 1.8 bar (22 psi) and maximum is 3.5 bar (51 psi). Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high. WARNING If the bottle is removed in the wrong order, sealing fluid could spill out. WARNING If the pressure is below 1.8 bar (22 psi) then the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey should not be continued. Call roadside assistance for recovery to a tyre centre. Volvo recommends an authorised tyre centre. 11. Switch off the compressor and detach the electrical cable. 12. Unscrew the air hose from the tyre valve and refit the dust cap on the tyre. 13. Fit the protective cap on the air hose in order to avoid leakage of the remaining sealing fluid. Place the equipment in the cargo area. WHEELS AND TYRES 14. As soon as possible, drive at least 3 km (2 miles) at a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) so that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre, and then perform a follow-up check. 16. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure gauge. • If it is below 1.3 bar (19 psi) then the tyre is insufficiently sealed. The journey should not be continued. Call roadside assistance for recovery. • If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar (19 psi), the tyre must be inflated to the pressure specified in accordance with the tyre pressure label on the driver's side door pillar (1 bar = 100 kPa = 14.5 psi). Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high. NOTE Sealant will spurt out of the puncture during the first few rotations of the tyre. WARNING Make sure that nobody is standing near the car and gets the sealing fluid splashed onto them when the car is driven away. The distance should be at least 2 metres (7 feet). 15. Follow-up inspection Connect the air hose on the tyre valve and screw in the valve connection to the bottom of the tyre valve's thread. The compressor must be switched off. NOTE The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must be replaced after use. Volvo recommends that this replacement is performed by an authorised Volvo workshop. WARNING Maximum mileage with tyres containing sealing fluid is 200 km (120 miles). NOTE The compressor is an electrical device. Follow local regulations related to waste management. Related information • • • • Folding up the cargo area floor (p. 553) Recommended tyre pressure (p. 523) Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 537) Inflating tyres with the compressor from the puncture repair kit (p. 542) WARNING Check the tyre pressure regularly. Volvo recommends that the car is driven to the nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the replacement/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise the workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid. 541 WHEELS AND TYRES Inflating tyres with the compressor from the puncture repair kit The car's original tyres can be inflated using the compressor in the emergency puncture repair kit. 1. The compressor must be switched off. Make sure that the switch is in position 0 (Off), and take out the electrical cable and the air hose. 2. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap and screw in the air hose's valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve. Check that the pressure reducing valve on the air hose is fully screwed in. 3. Connect the electrical cable to the closest 12 V socket and start the car. WARNING Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in danger to life. Never leave the engine running in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient ventilation. WARNING Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running. 4. 542 Start the compressor by flicking the switch to position I (On). IMPORTANT Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes. 5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on the tyre pressure label on the driver side door pillar. Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high. 6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air hose and the electrical cable. 7. Refit the dust cap on the tyre. NOTE • After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc. • Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew. NOTE The compressor is an electrical device. Follow local regulations related to waste management. Related information • • • Recommended tyre pressure (p. 523) Using a puncture repair kit (p. 538) Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 537) LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Passenger compartment interior WARNING Overview of the passenger compartment's interior and storage locations. Keep loose objects such as mobile phones, cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc. in the glove compartment or other compartments. Otherwise they may injure people in the car in the event of sudden braking or a collision. Front seat IMPORTANT Keep in mind that high gloss surfaces, for example, are easily scratched by metal objects. Do not place keys, phones and other items on sensitive surfaces. Storage compartment for legroom, electrical socket and USB port above the wireless phone charger*, cup holder and storage under armrest in tunnel console. Rear seat Storage compartment in door panel, card holder on left of steering wheel, storage under driver's seat1, glovebox with extensible hook and sun visor. Related information • • • • • • • • Emptying the ashtray* (p. 546) Using the cigarette lighter* (p. 545) Electrical sockets (p. 546) Using the glovebox (p. 548) Sun visors (p. 549) Tunnel console (p. 545) Wireless phone charger* (p. 497) Connecting a device via USB port (p. 481) Storage compartment in the door panel, cup holder* in the centre seat backrest, storage pocket* on the front seat backrest and also USB ports* in the tunnel console. 1 544 A maximum of 1 kg (2.2 lbs) can be stored here. * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Tunnel console WARNING The tunnel console is located between the front seats. Keep loose objects such as mobile phones, cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc. in the glove compartment or other compartments. Otherwise they may injure people in the car in the event of sudden braking or a collision. Using the cigarette lighter* The cigarette lighter can be a complement to the 12 V socket in the front section of the tunnel console. NOTE One of the detectors for the alarm* is located under the tunnel console's cup holder. Avoid leaving coins, keys and other metal objects in the cup holder, since this may trigger the alarm. Storage compartment with cup holder for driver and passenger. IMPORTANT Waste bin*2 that can be removed and emptied. Keep in mind that high gloss surfaces, for example, are easily scratched by metal objects. Do not place keys, phones and other items on sensitive surfaces. Storage compartment under the armrest. Climate controls for the rear seat climate functions* or storage compartment. There is also a USB port underneath*. 2 Only in cars with automatic gearbox. Related information • • • • • Emptying the ashtray* (p. 546) Using the cigarette lighter* (p. 545) Passenger compartment interior (p. 544) Electrical sockets (p. 546) Climate controls (p. 190) Cigarette lighter in tunnel console, front seat. 1. Press the button on the lighter. > The button jumps up when the lighter starts to glow. 2. Pull the lighter out from the socket and use the glow to give a light. 3. Refit the lighter in the socket. WARNING Take care when the lighter is activated so that the glowing part does not, for example, damage the interior or injure passengers. }} * Option/accessory. 545 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT || Related information • • Passenger compartment interior (p. 544) Emptying the ashtray* (p. 546) Emptying the ashtray* Electrical sockets When there is a cigarette lighter fitted in the car there is a detachable ashtray in the tunnel console. There is one 12 V electrical socket in the tunnel console and one 12 V electrical socket* in the cargo area. If a problem occurs with an electrical socket, contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. 12 V electrical socket 1. Detach the ashtray by pulling it straight up and empty the contents. 2. Refit the ashtray in the tunnel console. WARNING Exercise caution with smouldering glow and ash so that they do not damage the interior or injure passengers, for example. Only extinguish cigarettes on the intended surface. 12 V electrical socket in tunnel console, front seat. The 12 V sockets can be used for various accessories designed for this, such as music players, cooler boxes and mobile phones. Related information • • 546 Passenger compartment interior (p. 544) Using the cigarette lighter* (p. 545) * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Using electrical sockets 12 V sockets can be used for various accessories designed for this, such as music players, cooler boxes and mobile phones. For the sockets to supply current, the car's electrical system must be set in the lowest ignition position I. The sockets are then active as long as the starter battery level does not become too low. 12 V electrical socket in cargo area*. Related information • • Passenger compartment interior (p. 544) Using electrical sockets (p. 547) If the engine is switched off and the car is locked, the sockets are deactivated. If the engine is switched off and the car is not locked, or is locked with double lock temporarily deactivated, then the sockets continue to be active for a further seven minutes. NOTE WARNING • Do not use accessories with large or heavy connectors - they can damage the socket or come loose when driving. • Do not use accessories that can cause interference to the car's radio receiver or electrical system for example. • Position the accessory so that it is not at risk of injuring the driver or passengers in the event of heavy braking or collision. • Keep an eye on connected accessories as they can generate heat that can burn passengers or the interior. Using 12 V sockets Remember that use of the electrical socket with the engine switched off entails a risk of discharging the starter battery, which can limit functionality. 1. Remove the blanking plug (tunnel console) or fold down the cover (cargo area) in front of the socket and plug in the accessory's connector. Accessories that are connected to the electrical sockets may be activated even when the car's electrical system is disconnected or if preconditioning is used. For this reason, disconnect the connectors when they are not in use in order to avoid the starter battery being discharged. 2. Unplug the accessory's connector and refit the blanking plug (tunnel console) or fold up the cover (cargo area) when the socket is not in use or if the socket is left unattended. IMPORTANT Maximum socket output is 120 W (10 A) per socket. }} * Option/accessory. 547 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT || Related information • • Electrical sockets (p. 546) Passenger compartment interior (p. 544) Using the glovebox The glovebox is located on the passenger side. The printed owner's manual and maps can be kept in the glovebox, for example. There is also space for a pen and card holder. The key's designated storage space. The figure is schematic - the design may vary. Glovebox with extensible hook. The hook on the glovebox can be extended when the glovebox is open so that it can be used after the glovebox has been closed. Locking and unlocking the glovebox* The glovebox can be locked, e.g. when the car is taken in for service, left at a hotel or similar. The glovebox can only be locked/unlocked with the accompanying key. 548 * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Sun visors There are sun visors in the roof in front of the driver and the front seat passenger which can be folded down and angled out to the side when necessary. The figure is schematic - the design may vary. The figure is schematic - the design may vary. Locking the glovebox: Insert the key in the glovebox lock cylinder. Turn the key 90 degrees clockwise. Activating cooling Deactivating cooling – Pull out the key. – Unlock by carrying this out in reverse order. Using the glovebox as a cooled area* The glovebox can be used for cooling of e.g. drinks or food. The cooling works when the climate control system is active (i.e. when the car is set in ignition position II or when the engine is running). Activate or deactivate the cooling by moving the control to the end position toward the passenger compartment/glovebox. Related information • • Passenger compartment interior (p. 544) Private locking (p. 253) The figure is schematic - the design may vary. The mirror lighting* is switched on automatically when the lid is lifted. The mirror frame incorporates a holder for e.g. cards or tickets. Related information • Passenger compartment interior (p. 544) * Option/accessory. 549 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Cargo area Recommendations for loading The car has a flexible cargo area that makes it possible to transport and secure large objects. By folding down the backrests in the rear seat, the cargo area can become quite spacious. Use the load retaining eyelets or bag holders available for holding the load securely in place. The parcel shelf can be both easily removed and stored under the cargo area floor to make space for bulky loads. There are a number of things to remember when loading the car. Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories reduces the car's payload by a corresponding weight. The car's towing eye and puncture repair kit or spare wheel* are stored under the cargo area floor. Related information • • • • Recommendations for loading (p. 550) Bag hooks (p. 551) Load retaining eyelets (p. 552) WARNING The car’s driving properties change depending on the weight and positioning of the load. Loading in the cargo area • Position the load firmly against the rear seat's backrest. • • Centre the load. Folding up the cargo area floor (p. 553) Heavy objects should be placed as low as possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on lowered backrests. • Cover sharp edges with something soft to avoid damaging the upholstery. • Secure all loads to the load retaining eyelets with straps or web lashings. WARNING A loose object weighing 20 kg (44 pounds) can, in a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h (30 mph) carry the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg (2200 pounds). 550 WARNING Leave 10 cm (4 inches) space between the load and the side windows if the car is loaded to above the top edge of the door windows. Otherwise, the intended protection of the inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the headlining, may be compromised. WARNING Always secure the load. During heavy braking the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to the car's occupants. Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with something soft. Switch off the engine and apply the parking brake when loading/unloading long items. Otherwise you may accidentally knock the gear lever or gear selector with the load into a drive position - and the car could then move off. Increasing the space in the cargo area To expand the cargo area and simplify loading, the rear seat's backrest can be lowered. Note that objects must not prevent the function of the WHIPS system for the front seats if any of the rear seat's backrests is folded down. A through-load hatch* in the rear seat can be folded down for carrying long and narrow loads. * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Related information • • Load retaining eyelets (p. 552) Lowering the backrests in the rear seat (p. 171) • Through-load hatch in the rear seat* (p. 552) • Roof load and loading on load carriers (p. 551) • • Level control* and shock absorption (p. 423) Weights (p. 617) Roof load and loading on load carriers For loading on the car's roof, the load carriers that Volvo have developed are recommended. This is in order to avoid damage to the car and in order to achieve the maximum possible safety during a journey. Volvo's load carriers are available for purchase at authorised Volvo retailers. Bag hooks Bag hooks keep carrier bags in place and prevent them from overturning and spreading their contents across the cargo area. Along the sides Carefully follow the installation instructions supplied with the carriers. • Check periodically that the load carriers and load are properly secured. Lash the load securely with retaining straps. • Distribute the load evenly over the load carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the bottom. • The size of the area exposed to the wind, and therefore fuel consumption, increase with the size of the load. • Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, heavy braking and hard cornering. WARNING The car's centre of gravity and driving characteristics are altered by roof loads. There is a bag hook in the side panel on each side of the cargo area. IMPORTANT The bag hooks may be loaded with a maximum of 5 kg (11 lbs). Follow the car's specifications with regard to weights and maximum permitted load. Related information • • Recommendations for loading (p. 550) Weights (p. 617) }} * Option/accessory. 551 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT || Under the floor hatch* 1. Lift the handle in the centre of the cargo area floor and fold up the floor. 2. Move the cargo area floor forward to upright position and fit it in the adjustment groove on each side. > It is now possible to hang bags with handles at a suitable height on the hooks. Load retaining eyelets Through-load hatch in the rear seat* The load retaining eyelets are used to fasten straps in order to anchor items in the cargo area. The hatch in the rear seat's backrest can be opened to transport long narrow items, e.g. skis. Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which protrude may cause injury under violent braking. 552 Recommendations for loading (p. 550) Fitting and removing the safety net* (p. 553) In the cargo area, grip the hatch's handle and fold down the hatch. 2. Fold forward the armrest in the rear seat. 3. Adjust the centre seat's head restraint upwards so that the steel tubes do not block the hatch opening. Always secure large and heavy objects with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps. Related information • • 1. WARNING Related information • • Recommendations for loading (p. 550) Weights (p. 617) If the private locking* function is used then the hatch must be closed. Related information • • • Recommendations for loading (p. 550) Private locking (p. 253) Load retaining eyelets (p. 552) * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Folding up the cargo area floor Fitting and removing the safety net* The cargo area floor can be secured in raised position using the support arm. The safety net prevents loads from being thrown forward in the passenger compartment in the event of sudden braking. The safety net is fitted into four mounting points. 1. Grip the handle to fold up the cargo area floor. 2. Fold up the support arm and secure the end in the socket on the underside of the cargo area floor. Fitting the safety net WARNING It is necessary to ensure that the upper securing points of the safety net are fitted correctly and that the puller-straps are hooked in properly. Damaged safety nets must not be used. NOTE With forward mounting, the safety net is most easily mounted via one of the rear doors. 1. Unfolding the safety net. For reasons of safety, the safety net must always be fastened and anchored as described below. > The cargo area floor remains in raised position. Related information • Cargo area (p. 550) The net is made of a strong nylon fabric and can be secured two different locations in the car: • • Rear fitting - behind the rear seat. Front fitting - behind the front seats. WARNING Loads in the luggage compartment must be anchored well, and also using a correctly fitted safety net. }} * Option/accessory. 553 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT || 2. Hook one retaining hook of the net into the front or rear roof mounting with the anchoring strap locks turned towards you. Remove any clothing hooks from the roof bracket by turning it a quarter turn clockwise on the left-hand side and a quarter turn anticlockwise on the right-hand side respectively. 4. Rear fitting: With the net fitted in the rear roof mountings, hook the safety net's anchoring straps into the front floor eyes in the cargo area. Front fitting. Pay attention to make sure that you do not press the seat and backrest hard against the net when they are moved back again - only adjust until the seat or backrest makes contact with the net. Rear fitting. 3. Hook the net's other retaining hook into the roof mounting on the opposite side - the telescopic spring-loaded retaining hooks facilitate alignment. Take care to press forward the net's retaining hooks for each respective roof mounting's front end position. Front fitting: With the net fitted in the front roof mountings, hook the anchoring straps into the outer eyes on the rear of the seat slide rails - it is easier if the backrests are straightened and the seats are moved forward slightly. IMPORTANT If a seat or backrest is pushed backwards hard into the safety net, the net and roof mounts may be damaged. 5. 554 Tension the safety net with the anchoring straps. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Removing the safety net The safety net can be easily removed and folded up. 1. Reduce safety net tension by pressing the button in the anchoring strap lock and feeding out a little of the anchoring strap on each side. 2. Press in the catches and detach both of the anchoring strap's hooks. 3. Undo the upper attachments and release the net from the roof mountings. 4. Fold up the net and store it in its case. Removing and storing the parcel shelf in the car The parcel shelf can be removed to increase the size of the cargo area. Removing parcel shelf The removed parcel shelf can be stored under the cargo area floor. Refit any clothing hook if required. Related information • • Fold up the cargo area floor and secure it in raised position with the support arm. Recommendations for loading (p. 550) Load retaining eyelets (p. 552) Storing the parcel shelf Detach the parcel shelf's lifting eyes on both sides. Unhook the parcel shelf at the front edge and remove it. Turn the upper side of the parcel shelf downwards and lower it into the space with the rear part facing forwards. }} 555 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT || With folding cargo area floor: First aid kit Warning triangle 1. The first aid kit contains first aid equipment. Store the first aid kit behind the elastic strap on the right-hand side of the cargo area. Use the warning triangle to warn other road users if the car is stationary in traffic. Also activate the hazard warning flashers. Related information Storage spaces • Cargo area (p. 550) The warning triangle is located in the compartment on the inside of the tailgate. Folding up the warning triangle Fold up the folding cargo area floor forwards to be able to lower the parcel shelf downwards with the upper side turned down and the rear part facing forwards. 2. Fold the cargo area floor back to level position. Related information • 556 Cargo area (p. 550) LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Open the hatch by first turning the knob a quarter turn and then pulling the hatch from its brackets in the top and bottom edges. Press the latch that secures the warning triangle slightly to the right and remove the case. Remove the warning triangle from the case, unfold it and put the ends together. Fold out the warning triangle's support legs. Follow the regulations for the use of a warning triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suitable place with regard to traffic. Make sure that the warning triangle and case are properly secured in their storage space and that the hatch is fully closed after use. Related information • • Cargo area (p. 550) Hazard warning flashers (p. 143) 557 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Volvo service programme To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service programme as specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo workshop to perform the service and maintenance work. Volvo workshops have the personnel, special tools and service literature to guarantee the highest quality of service. IMPORTANT For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and follow the instructions in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Related information • • • 560 Data transfer between car and workshop via Wi-Fi Volvo's workshops have a specific Wi-Fi network for secure data transfer between your car and the workshop. Your workshop visit will be simpler and more efficient when the transfer of diagnostic information and software can take place via the workshop's network. When you reach the workshop for your visit, your technician may want to connect your car to the workshop's network via Wi-Fi to perform faulttracing and software download. For this type of communication, the car only connects to the workshop's network. It is therefore not possible to connect the car to another Wi-Fi network, such as at home, but only the workshop's specific network. Car status (p. 562) Manual connection to the workshop Book service and repair (p. 562) Manual connection is normally handled by the service technician. The technician uses your remote control key's buttons to connect the car, which is why it is important to bring a key with buttons with you for the workshop visit. Press three times on the lock button on the remote control key to connect the car to the workshop's network via Wi-Fi. Connection of equipment to the car's diagnostic socket (p. 38) • Servicing the climate control system (p. 568) • • Brake system maintenance (p. 403) Engine compartment overview (p. 569) When the car is connected to a Wi-Fi network, symbol appears in the centre display. the WARNING The car must not be driven when connected to the workshop's networks and systems. Related information • Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 561) • Book service and repair (p. 562) MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Download Center Several of the car's systems can be updated from the centre display with an online car1. The Download Centre app is started from app view in the centre display and enables: • • • searching for and updating system software updating map data for Sensus Navigation* downloading, updating and uninstalling apps. Related information • Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 561) • • • • • Downloading apps (p. 466) Updating apps (p. 467) Deleting apps (p. 467) Internet-connected car* (p. 498) Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 101) Managing system updates via the Download Centre NOTE Data download may affect other services that transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect on other services is experienced as disruptive then the download can be interrupted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate to switch off or interrupt other services. System updates are intended for the online and infotainment components in the car. If system software updates are available, the updates can be made all at once or one at a time. Searching for update For system updates to be possible, the car must be connected to the Internet2. System updates are handled via the Download Centre app in the centre display's application view. If no search for available updates has been performed since the last time the infotainment system was started, a search is performed. No search is performed if a software installation is in progress. A number on the System updates button shows how many updates are available. A tap on the button shows a list of the updates that can be installed in the car. If an update is available, the New software updates available message is also shown in the centre display's status bar. NOTE An update can be interrupted when the ignition is switched off and the car is left. However, the update does not have to be completed before the car is left, this is because the update is resumed the next time the car is used. Update all system software – Update individual system software programs – 1 2 Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost. Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost. Select Install all at the bottom of the list. If no list is desired, then the Install all option can be selected at the System updates button instead. Select Install for the software required. }} * Option/accessory. 561 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || Cancelling software download Car status – Book service and repair4 The car's general status can be shown in the centre display along with the opportunity to book service3. This service provides a convenient way to book a service and workshop visit directly in the car. When it is time for service, and in some cases when the car is in need of repair, a message will appear in the driver display and at the top of the centre display. The service date is determined by how much time has passed, hours that the engine has been running, or distance driven since the last service. Tap on X in the activity indicator that has replaced the button Install at the start of the download. Note that only the download can be cancelled, when the installation phase has started, this cannot be cancelled. The Car status app is started from app view in the centre display and has four tabs: Deactivating the background search for software update Automatic background search for software updates is activated when the car is delivered from the factory, but this function can be deactivated. 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Press System 3. Deselect Auto Software Update. Download Centre. Related information • • • 3 4 562 • • • • Download Center (p. 561) Internet-connected car* (p. 498) Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 101) Messages - status messages Status - checking the oil level TPMS - checking the tyre pressure Appointments - appointment information and car information3. Related information • Handling a message saved from the driver display (p. 94) • Checking and filling with engine oil (p. 571) • • • Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 524) • Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 101) Book service and repair (p. 562) Sending car information to a workshop (p. 564) Applies to certain markets. Applies to certain markets. * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Before the service can be used • Create a Volvo ID and register the Volvo ID to the car. • Select the Volvo retailer you would like to contact by going to www.volvocars.com and logging in. • To send and receive booking information, the car must be connected to the Internet5. 3. Press the Request appointment button. 4. Make sure that the correct Volvo ID is filled in. 5. Make sure that the desired Workshop is filled in. 6. Fill in the field Tap to write information to the workshop if there is anything you would like done during the workshop visit or any other important information to your workshop. Book a service When you decide to book a service from your car, the information will be sent via you Internet connection5. 7. Fill in the appointment request when desired or when a message stating that service or repairs are needed is shown in the driver display and at the top of the centre display. Press the Send appointment request button. > You will receive an appointment suggestion to your car within a couple of days6. You will also receive the same communication via e-mail and when you go to www.volvocars.com and log in. In certain markets, once you have sent the appointment request, the message that the car needs service is extinguished in the driver display. 8. 1. Open the Car status app from the app view in the centre display. 2. Press the Appointments button. 5 6 7 Press the Cancel request button to cancel your request. The booking enquiry sent from the car includes car information that facilitates workshop planning. The retailer comes back with a digital booking proposal. You also have information on your retailer available in the car and can contact your workshop at any time. Accept the appointment suggestion When the car has received an appointment suggestion, a message will be shown at the top of the centre display. 1. Tap the message. 2. If the suggested booking is acceptable, tap on the Accept button. Otherwise press either of the Send new proposal or Decline buttons. For certain markets, the system reminds you of a scheduled appointment time as it approaches and the navigation system7 can also guide you to the workshop when the time comes. Related information • • Car status (p. 562) Sending car information to a workshop (p. 564) • Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 101) • • Volvo ID (p. 26) Internet-connected car* (p. 498) Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost. This time frame may vary depending on market. Applies to Sensus Navigation*. * Option/accessory. 563 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Sending car information to a workshop8 It is possible to send information for the car at any time, e.g. if you book a workshop appointment and want to help your workshop by providing them with better data so that your visit can be planned. Sending car information is not the same as booking a service appointment. 1. Open the Car status app from the app view in the centre display. 2. Press the Appointments button. 3. Press the Send car data button. > A message that vehicle data are being sent is shown at the top of the centre display. You can cancel data transmission by tapping the X in the activity indicator. Car information content The data sent is the last information saved (the last time the car was running) and includes information in the following areas: • • • • • • service requirement • • the car's software version time since last service function status fluid levels meter reading the car's vehicle identification number (VIN10) the car's diagnostics data. Related information • • • • Book service and repair (p. 562) Car status (p. 562) Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 101) Internet-connected car* (p. 498) The information is sent via the car's Internet connection9. This car information can be accessed by any retailer if they have the car's identification number (VIN10). 8 Applies to certain markets. 9 Data is transferred (data traffic) when 10 Vehicle Identification Number. 564 using the Internet, and this may involve a cost. * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Raise the car When raising the car it is important that the car jack or the workshop/garage jack is fitted to the intended points on the car’s underbody. WARNING If the car is raised using a workshop jack, this must be placed beneath one of the four jacking points. Take care to position the workshop jack so that the car cannot slip off. Make sure that the jack plate is fitted with a rubber guard so that the car remains stable and is not damaged. Always use axle stands or similar. NOTE Volvo recommends only using the jack that belongs to the car model in question. If a jack is selected other than the one recommended by Volvo, follow the instructions supplied with the equipment. The normal car jack is only designed for occasional, short-term use, such as when changing a wheel after a puncture. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or for a longer time than is required just to change a wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the instructions for use that come with the equipment. }} 565 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || The triangles in the plastic cover indicate the locations of the lifting points (marked in red). Related information • • 566 Removing a wheel (p. 531) Jack* (p. 529) * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Opening and closing the bonnet Warning - bonnet not closed The bonnet can be opened using the handle in the passenger compartment and a handle under the bonnet. When the bonnet is released, the warning symbol and the graphics in the driver display will light up and an acoustic reminder will sound. If the car starts rolling, an acoustic warning signal will repeat. Open the bonnet NOTE Move the handle under the bonnet upwards to release the bonnet from the lock catch and lift the bonnet. If the warning symbol is lit or the warning signal is heard despite the bonnet being closed properly, contact an authorised Volvo workshop. Close the bonnet 1. Detach the support pin and secure it in its place. Pull the handle near the foot pedals to release the bonnet from its fully closed position. Use the support pin to hold the bonnet raised and attach it securely. }} 567 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || 2. Lower the bonnet manually. Servicing the climate control system 3. When the bonnet stops against the lock catch, push the bonnet to close it completely. The air conditioning system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop. Troubleshooting and repair WARNING The air conditioning system contains fluorescent tracing agents. Ultraviolet light must be used during leak detection. Risk of crushing! Ensure that the closing path under the bonnet is not obstructed, otherwise there is a risk of personal injury. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted. WARNING Check that the bonnet locks properly when closed. The bonnet must engage at both sides audibly. Cars with R134a refrigerant Bonnet completely closed. The figure is schematic parts may vary depending on car model. WARNING Never drive with an open bonnet! If there are any signs that the bonnet is not properly closed whilst driving, stop immediately and close it. Related information • • Bonnet not completely closed. The figure is schematic parts may vary depending on car model. 568 Engine compartment overview (p. 569) Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 47) WARNING The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R134a. This system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop. Cars with R1234yf refrigerant WARNING The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe Service and Containment of Refrigerants Used in Mobile A/C System), service and repair of the refrigerant system must only be performed by trained and certified technicians in order to ensure the safety of the system. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Related information • Volvo service programme (p. 560) Engine compartment overview WARNING The overview shows some service-related components. Remember that the radiator fan (located at the front of the engine compartment, behind the radiator) may start or continue to operate automatically for up to approx. 6 minutes after the engine has been switched off. Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot. WARNING The ignition system works at a very high and hazardous voltage. The car's electrical system must always be in ignition position 0 when work is being performed in the engine compartment. The appearance of the engine compartment may differ depending on model and engine variant. Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil when the car's electrical system is in ignition position II or when the engine is hot. Coolant expansion tank Washer fluid filler pipe11 Reservoir for brake fluid (located on the driver's side) Central electrical unit Air filter Engine oil filler pipe Related information • • • • • • 11 Opening and closing the bonnet (p. 567) Filling washer fluid (p. 609) Topping up coolant (p. 572) Fuses in engine compartment (p. 586) Checking and filling with engine oil (p. 571) Ignition positions (p. 398) Fill the washer fluid at regular intervals, e.g. when refuelling. 569 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Engine oil An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals and warranty can be applied. If the engine oil cannot be checked on a regular basis and the level falls too low, there is a risk that this will cause serious damage to the engine. IMPORTANT In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact. Volvo recommends: An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change, otherwise there is a risk of the service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact of the car being affected. If engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used, engine related components may become damaged. Volvo Car Corporation disclaims any liability for any such damage. Volvo recommends that oil changes are carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop. Volvo uses different systems to warn about the oil level if it is too low/high, or in the event of low oil pressure. Certain engine variants have an oil pressure sensor, and then the driver display's 570 is warning symbol for low oil pressure used. Other variants have an oil level sensor, when the driver is informed via the driver display's warning symbol and display texts. Certain variants have both systems. Contact a Volvo retailer for more information. Change the engine oil and oil filter in accordance with the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Using oil of a higher than specified grade is permitted. If the car is driven in adverse conditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a higher grade than the one specified. Related information • • • Checking and filling with engine oil (p. 571) Engine oil — specifications (p. 621) Adverse driving conditions for engine oil (p. 622) MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Checking and filling with engine oil The oil level is detected with the electronic oil level sensor. IMPORTANT If this symbol is shown together with a message about low oil level, such as Engine oil level low Refill 1 litre for example, then only fill the volume specified, e.g. 1 litre (1 quart). WARNING Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire. See oil level in the centre display Filler pipe12. In some cases, oil may need to be topped up between service intervals. The oil level is visualised using the electronic oil level gauge in the centre display when the car has been started. The oil level should be checked regularly. No action with regard to engine oil level needs to be taken until a message is shown in the driver display. Graphics for oil level in the centre display. NOTE The system cannot directly detect changes when the oil is filled or drained. The car must have been driven approx. 30 km (approx. 20 miles) and have been stationary for 5 minutes with the engine switched off and on level ground before the oil level indication is correct. WARNING If this symbol is shown together with the message Engine oil level Service required, visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The oil level may be too high. 12 Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick. 1. Open the Car status app from the app view in the centre display. 2. Press Status to show the oil level. }} 571 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || NOTE If the right conditions for measuring the oil level (time after engine shutdown, the car's inclination, outside temperature, etc.) are not met, then the message No value available will be shown in the centre display. This does not mean that there is something wrong in the car's systems. Related information • • Engine oil (p. 570) • • • Engine oil — specifications (p. 621) Adverse driving conditions for engine oil (p. 622) Ignition positions (p. 398) Topping up coolant The coolant cools the internal combustion engine to the correct operating temperature. The heat that is transferred from the engine to the coolant can be used to heat the passenger compartment. When topping up the coolant, follow the instructions on the packaging. Never top up with water only. The risk of freezing increases with both too little and too much coolant concentrate. If there is coolant under the car, if there is coolant smoke, or if more than 2 litres (approx. 2 quarts) have been filled, always call for recovery to avoid the risk of engine damage due to a defective cooling system when attempting to start the car. Car status (p. 562) WARNING The coolant may be very hot. Never open the cap when the coolant is hot. If a top-up is required, unscrew the expansion tank cap slowly to allow any overpressure to disappear. 572 Coolant expansion tank. – Screw off the cap and top up with coolant if necessary. The coolant level must not exceed the MAX mark inside the expansion tank. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE IMPORTANT Bulb replacement • Mix the coolant with approved quality water. In the event of any doubt about water quality, used ready-mixed coolant in accordance with Volvo recommendations. The bulbs for the rear direction indicator, brake light bulb and rear fog lamp can be replaced without assistance from a workshop. • Make sure that the coolant mixture is 50% water and 50% coolant. • Always use coolant with anti-corrosion agent as recommended by Volvo. • Only new coolant should be used when replacing major cooling system components to ensure the system has sufficient corrosion protection. • • The engine must only be run with a wellfilled cooling system. Otherwise, temperatures that are too high may occur resulting in the risk of damage (cracks) in the cylinder head. A high content of chlorine, chlorides and other salts may cause corrosion in the cooling system. Related information • • 13 14 Engine compartment overview (p. 569) Coolant — specifications (p. 623) LED (Ligth Emitting Diode) An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. IMPORTANT Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with your fingers. Grease from your fingers is vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector and then causing damage. Halogen headlamps are not available for all models and markets. Contact a Volvo retailer for more information. NOTE An LED13 type lamp must be replaced by a workshop. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. If an error message remains after the broken bulb has been replaced then we recommend visiting an authorised Volvo workshop. NOTE NOTE For information about bulbs not covered in this article, contact a Volvo dealer or a certified Volvo service technician. Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp housing when the lamp has been switched on for a time. Contact a workshop14 if faults other than bulbs occur in lamps. If a fault occurs in LED13 lamps, the entire lamp unit usually must be replaced. WARNING The car's electrical system must be in ignition position 0 when replacing bulbs. Related information • • • Exterior lamp positions (p. 574) Replacing the rear direction indicator bulb (p. 575) Changing brake light bulb (p. 576) }} 573 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE • • Replacing the rear fog lamp bulb (p. 577) Exterior lamp positions Bulb specifications (p. 578) The exterior lighting of the car uses a number of different lamps. An LED15 type lamp must be replaced by a workshop. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Lamps, rear Lamps, front Brake light - central, high-level (LED15) Fog lamp Position lamps (LED) Direction indicators Daytime running lights/position lamps/direction indicators (LED)15 Brake lights Main beam (LED) Dipped beam (LED) Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (LED) 15 574 Reversing lamps (LED) Related information • • • Bulb replacement (p. 573) Bulb specifications (p. 578) Lighting control (p. 134) LED (Light Emmitting Diod) * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Replacing the rear direction indicator bulb Bulbs for rear direction indicators are located behind the panel in the side of the cargo area. 3. Unscrew the spring bolt anticlockwise and remove the supporting bridge. It is easiest to allow the screw to remain in the supporting bridge. 4. Undo the grey bulb holder by turning it anticlockwise and pulling it out. 5. Remove the bulb by pressing it in and turning anticlockwise. 1. Press in the panel hatch at the upper edge to detach it. 6. Fit a new bulb by pressing it in and turning it clockwise. 2. Move the insulation aside to access the supporting bridge. 7. Attach the bulb holder by turning it clockwise. 8. Fit the supporting bridge with associated spring bolt and make sure that the clips align in the correct position. Tighten the spring bolt until it stops (max. 2 Nm). 9. Move back the insulation and then hook in the panel and press it back into place. }} 575 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || IMPORTANT Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with your fingers. Grease from your fingers is vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector and then causing damage. Changing brake light bulb Bulbs for brake lights are located behind the panel in the side of the cargo area. Related information • • • Exterior lamp positions (p. 574) Bulb specifications (p. 578) Bulb replacement (p. 573) 3. Undo the black bulb holder by turning it anticlockwise and pulling it out. 4. Remove the bulb by pressing it in and turning anticlockwise 1. Press in the panel hatch at the upper edge to detach it. 5. 2. Move the insulation aside to access the brake light bulb. Fit a new bulb by pressing it in and turning it clockwise. 6. Attach the bulb holder by turning it clockwise. 7. Move back the insulation and then hook in the panel and press it back into place. IMPORTANT Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with your fingers. Grease from your fingers is vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector and then causing damage. 576 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Related information • • Exterior lamp positions (p. 574) Bulb specifications (p. 578) Replacing the rear fog lamp bulb 7. Plug in the connector. The rear foglight is fitted in the rear bumper on the driver's side. 8. Insert the hook on the wide part of the foglight unit in the rear bumper and rotate the unit inwards so that the clips engage. Related information • • Exterior lamp positions (p. 574) Bulb specifications (p. 578) The rear fog light is only fitted on the driver's side. 1. Loosen the foglight unit on the driver's side by inserting a flat object, such as a table knife or a screwdriver, on the bulb kit's narrower short side of the keypad and then prize the foglight unit out. 2. Unplug the connector. 3. Undo the bulb holder by turning it anticlockwise and pulling it out. 4. Remove the bulb by pressing it in and turning anticlockwise. 5. Fit a new bulb by pressing it in and turning it clockwise. 6. Attach the bulb holder by turning it clockwise. 577 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Bulb specifications The specifications apply to the bulbs for the rear direction indicator bulbs brake light bulb and rear fog light bulb. Contact a workshop16 if faults occur in other lamps. Function WA Type Rear direction indicators 24 PY24W Brake lights 21 H21W LL Rear fog lamp 21 H21W LL A Watt Related information • • 16 578 Exterior lamp positions (p. 574) Bulb replacement (p. 573) An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Starter battery The electrical system is single-pole and uses the chassis and engine casing as a conductor. WARNING • The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can be formed if a jump lead is connected incorrectly, and this can be enough for the battery to explode. The starter battery should be replaced by a workshop17. • The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator. Do not connect the jump leads to any fuel system component or any moving part. Be careful of hot engine parts. • The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns. • If sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes - seek medical attention immediately. The starter battery is used to start up the electrical system and drive the starter motor as well as other electrical equipment in the car. The starter battery is a 12 V battery, designed for the carbon dioxide reducing functions Start/Stop and regenerative charging, and to support the functionality of the car's different systems. The service life and function of the starter battery is influenced by factors such as the number of starts, discharging, driving style, driving conditions, climatic conditions etc. • Never disconnect the starter battery when the engine is running. • Check that the cables to the starter battery are correctly connected and properly tightened. 17 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. • Never smoke near the battery. Charging points When connecting an external starter battery or battery charger, use the car's charging points in the engine compartment. Negative charging point Positive charging point IMPORTANT When charging the starter battery and the support battery, only use a modern battery charger with controlled charging voltage. Fast charging function must not be used since it may damage the battery. During charging, both the starter battery and the support battery are charged. }} 579 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || IMPORTANT If the following instruction is not observed then the energy saving function for infotainment may be temporarily disengaged, and/or the message in the driver display about the starter battery's state of charge may be temporarily inapplicable, following the connection of an external starter battery or battery charger: • The negative battery terminal on the car's starter battery must never be used for connecting an external starter battery or battery charger - only the car's negative charging point may be used as the grounding point. NOTE Location The life of the battery is shortened if it becomes discharged repeatedly. The life of the battery is affected by several factors, including driving conditions and climate. Battery starting capacity decreases gradually with time and therefore needs to be recharged if the car is not used for a longer time or when it is only driven short distances. Extreme cold further limits starting capacity. To maintain the battery in good condition, at least 15 minutes of driving/week is recommended or that the battery is connected to a battery charger with automatic trickle charging. A battery that is kept fully charged has a maximum service life. The starter battery is located in the engine compartment. WARNING If the starter battery is disconnected, the automatic opening and closing function must be reset to work properly. A reset must take place for pinch protection to work. IMPORTANT On certain models, the battery is attached with a retaining strap. Make sure the retaining strap is properly tightened. 580 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Specifications Battery H6 AGM Voltage (V) H7 AGM 12 12 12 760 720 800 Size, L×B×H 278×175×190 mm (10.9×6.9×7.5 inches) 278×175×190 mm (10.9×6.9×7.5 inches) 315×175×190 mm (12.4×6.9×7.5 inches) Capacity (Ah) 70 70 80 Cold start A B H6 EFB capacityA - CCAB (A) According to EN standard. Cold Cranking Amperes. Volvo recommends entrusting battery replacement to an authorised Volvo workshop. NOTE The starter battery's container size must be consistent with the dimensions for the original battery. IMPORTANT When replacing the starter battery or support battery, a battery of the same type must be fitted. IMPORTANT If the starter battery is replaced, make sure you replace it with a battery with the same cold starting capacity and type as the original battery (see the label on the battery). Related information • • • Symbols on the batteries (p. 583) Support battery (p. 582) Using jump starting with another battery (p. 443) 581 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Support battery NOTE Cars with Start/Stop function, in addition to the starter battery, are equipped with a support battery. Cars with the Start/Stop function are equipped with two 12 V batteries - one extra powerful starter battery for starting and one support battery that helps during the Start/Stop function's starting sequence. • If the following instruction is not observed then the Start/Stop function may temporarily cease to work after the connection of an external starter battery or battery charger: • When the capacity of the starter battery has fallen below the lowest permissible level then the Start/Stop function is disengaged. • Temporarily reduced Start/Stop function due to high current take-off means: • The engine auto-starts without the driver lifting his/her foot from the foot brake pedal. The support battery normally requires no more service than the normal starter battery. A workshop should be contacted in the event of questions or problems - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The support battery is located down in the engine compartment. The starter battery is also shown here (top). 582 IMPORTANT The higher the current take-off in the car, the more the alternator must be working and the batteries charging = Increased fuel consumption. The negative battery terminal on the car's starter battery must never be used for connecting an external starter battery or battery charger - only the car's negative charging point may be used as the grounding point. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE NOTE If the starter battery has been discharged so much that the car has no normal electrical functions and the engine is then jump-started with an external battery or a battery charger, the Start/Stop function may continue to be activated. If the Start/Stop function then auto-stops the engine shortly after, there is a great risk that engine auto-start will fail due to insufficient battery capacity, because the battery has not had the opportunity to recharge. If the car has been jump-started, or if there is insufficient time to charge the battery with a battery charger, the recommendation is to temporarily deactivate the Start/Stop function until the battery has been recharged by the car. In an outside temperature of approx. +15 °C (approx. 60 °F), the battery needs to be charged for at least 1 hour by the car. In a lower outside temperature, the charging time may increase to 3-4 hours. The recommendation is to charge the battery using an external battery charger. Size, L×B×H 150×90×130 mm (5.9×3.5×5.1 inches) Capacity (Ah) 10 A B According to EN standard. Cold Cranking Amperes. Symbols on the batteries There are information and warning symbols on the batteries. Use protective goggles. IMPORTANT When replacing the starter battery or support battery, a battery of the same type must be fitted. Related information • • • Further information in the owner's manual for the car. Starter battery (p. 579) Start/Stop function (p. 419) Symbols on the batteries (p. 583) Store the battery out of the reach of children. The battery contains corrosive acid. Specifications Voltage (V) 12 Cold start capacityA CCAB (A) 170 }} 583 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Fuses and central electrical units || Avoid sparks and naked flames. All electrical functions and components are protected by a number of fuses in order to protect the car's electrical system from damage by short circuiting or overloading. WARNING Risk of explosion. Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when replacing a fuse. This could cause significant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire. Must be taken for recycling. If an electrical component or function does not work, it may be because the component's fuse was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in the circuit. Volvo recommends contacting an authorised Volvo workshop for checking. NOTE An expended starter battery or support battery must be recycled in an environmentally safe manner since it contains lead. Related information • • 584 Starter battery (p. 579) Support battery (p. 582) Location of central electrical units Engine compartment Under the left-hand front seat Related information • • • Replacing a fuse (p. 585) Fuses in engine compartment (p. 586) Fuses under the left-hand front seat (p. 590) MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Replacing a fuse All electrical functions and components are protected by a number of fuses in order to protect the car's electrical system from damage by short circuiting or overloading. 1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse. 2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side to see whether the curved wire has blown. 3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse of the same colour and amperage. • Fuses under the left-hand front seat (p. 590) WARNING Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when replacing a fuse. This could cause significant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire. WARNING Contact an authorised Volvo workshop about the fuses not mentioned in the owner's manual. If this is not performed correctly, it can cause serious damage to the electrical systems. Related information • • Fuses and central electrical units (p. 584) Fuses in engine compartment (p. 586) 585 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Fuses in engine compartment Fuses in the engine compartment protect engine and brake functions, amongst other things. 586 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses. The fuse box also provides space for several spare fuses. Positions On the inside of the cover is a label that shows the location of the fuses. }} 587 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || • Fuses 1-30, 46-50 and 54-56 are of the "Micro" type. • Fuses 31-45, 51-53 are of the "MCase" type and should be replaced by a workshop18. Function AA USB port, tunnel console, rear* 5 12 V socket in tunnel console, front 15 – – 12 V socket in cargo area* 15 Engine Control Module (ECM) 20 Ignition coils; Spark plugs 15 Solenoids (petrol); Valve; Thermostat for engine cooling system (petrol); EGR cooling pump (diesel); Glow control module (diesel) 15 Engine Control Module (ECM) Solenoids (petrol); Valve; Thermostat for engine cooling system (petrol); Cooling pump for EGR (diesel); Glow control module (diesel); Vacuum regulators; Valve; Valve for output pulse (diesel) 18 588 10 Function AA Function AA Lambda probe, centre (petrol); Lambda probe, rear (diesel) 15 – – Sensor for nitrous oxides (diesel) 15 Sensor for brake pedal 5 – – Brake pedal – – 5 20 Control module for actuator for engagement/change of automatic gearbox gear positions Airbags 5 Transmission control module 15 Accelerator pedal sensor 5 Engine Control Module (ECM) 5 Supplied when the ignition is switched on: Engine control module; Transmission components; Electric steering servo; Central electronic module; Control module for brake system 5 – – – – Electric additional heater*; OBD II firewall 5 Alcohol lock 5 – – Internal relay coils 5 Right-hand headlamp 20 Left-hand headlamp Horn 20 Siren* 5 Windscreen wipers 30 Control module for brake system (valves, parking brake) 40 Control unit for brake system (ABS pump) 40 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Function AA Function AA – – Fuel filter heater (diesel) 30 25 Heated windscreen*, left 40 – Heated windscreen*, right 40 Control function for support battery 5 Left-hand headlamp 20 Right-hand headlamp 20 Actuator for transmission – Right-hand headlamp; Left-hand headlamp 30 – – – – A Towbar control module* 25 Towbar control module* 40 – Power driver seat* – Ampere Related information • • Fuses and central electrical units (p. 584) Replacing a fuse (p. 585) 20 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – * Option/accessory. 589 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Fuses under the left-hand front seat Fuses under the left-hand front seat protect, amongst other things, electrical sockets, displays and door modules. 590 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE The fuse box in the engine compartment provides space for several spare fuses. On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses. • AA Function AA Control module for reduction of nitrous oxides (diesel) 30 Driver display 5 Keypad in centre console 5 Sun sensor Positions • Function Fuses 1-8, 40-42 and 55-58 are of the "MCase" type and should be replaced by a workshop19. Fuses 9-34, 50-54 and 60-91 are of the "Micro" type. Function AA Audio control module (amplifier) (certain variants) 40 Central Electric Module A: Sensors, radar units, power seats*. 40 Central Electric Module B: Sensors, radar units, power seats*. 40 Fan module for climate control system, front 40 Power operated tailgate* 25 Power seat*, right 20 Parking heater* 25 Door module in right-hand rear door 20 Steering wheel module 5 20 Module for start knob and for parking brake control 5 Door module in left-hand rear door Door module in left-hand front door 20 Centre display 5 Control module for online car; Control module for Volvo On Call 5 – Door module in right-hand front door 20 Module for multi-band antenna 5 Seat heating, rear* 15 Relay coils 5 Module for detecting foot movement* (for opening the power operated tailgate) 5 Sensus control module 15 – – – – Control module for reduction of nitrous oxides (diesel) 15 Steering lock 7,5 Diagnostic socket OBDII 10 Control module for climate control system 7,5 Alcohol lock 5 Lock motor for backrest on rear left-hand side 15 Movement detector* 19 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. – TV* (certain markets) 5 }} * Option/accessory. 591 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || Function AA Function AA Function AA Lock motor for backrest on rear right-hand side 15 – – 7,5 Rear window defroster 30 – – Seatbelt pretensioner module, lefthand side 40 Seatbelt pretensioner module 5 Interior lighting; Dimming of interior rearview mirror*; Rain and light sensor*; Control panels in rear doors and cargo area 5 Seatbelt pretensioner module, right-hand side 40 Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*: control module, exterior reversing sound Humidity sensor 5 – Control module for fuel pump 20 Coolant pump Steering wheel module for heated steering wheel* – 592 – – Control module for driver support functions 5 – Alcohol lock 5 Sun sensor 5 Wireless mobile charger*; USB port 5 10 All Wheel Drive (AWD) control module* 15 – – 15 Coolant pump 10 – – Parking camera* 5 – – Control module for airbags and seatbelt tensioners 5 A – Headlamp washers* 25 Rear window washer 25 – – Rear window wiper 15 – – Panorama roof with sun blind* 20 – – – – – Ampere Related information • • Fuses and central electrical units (p. 584) Replacing a fuse (p. 585) – * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Cleaning the interior Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents. IMPORTANT • Certain items of coloured clothing (e.g. dark jeans and suede garments) may stain the upholstery. If this occurs, it is important to clean and treat these parts of the upholstery as soon as possible. • Never use strong solvents such as washer fluid, pure petrol or white spirit or concentrated alcohol to clean the interior, since this may damage the upholstery as well as other interior materials. • Never spray the cleaning agent directly onto components that have electrical buttons and controls. Wipe them instead using a moistened cloth containing the cleaning agent. • • • • • Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 595) Cleaning the centre display Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 596) Dirt, stains and grease from fingers can affect the centre display's performance and readability. Clean the screen frequently with a microfibre cloth. Cleaning the leather steering wheel (p. 596) Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts (p. 597) To clean the centre display: 1. Turn off the centre display with a long press on the home button. 2. Wipe the screen with the microfibre cloth supplied or use another microfibre cloth of equivalent quality. The screen should be wiped with a clean and dry microfibre cloth with small circular movements. If necessary, lightly moisten the microfibre cloth with clean water. 3. Activate the display with a short press on the home button. Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the fabric upholstery. Related information • • • Cleaning the centre display (p. 593) Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining (p. 594) Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 595) }} 593 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || IMPORTANT The microfibre cloth used to clean the centre display must be free from sand and dirt. IMPORTANT When cleaning the centre display, only use gentle pressure on the screen. Heavy pressure can damage the screen. IMPORTANT Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals directly on the centre display. Do not use window cleaning agent, other cleaning agents, aerosol spray, solvents, alcohol, ammonia or cleaning agent containing abrasive. Never use abrasive cloths, paper towels or tissue paper, these can scratch the centre display. Related information • • • • • 594 Cleaning the interior (p. 593) Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining (p. 594) Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 595) Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 595) Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 596) • Cleaning the leather steering wheel (p. 596) Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining • Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts (p. 597) Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents. Fabric upholstery and ceiling upholstery Never scrape or rub a stain since this risks destroying the upholstery. Never use strong stain removers since this risks destroying the colour of the upholstery. Related information • • • • • • • Cleaning the interior (p. 593) Cleaning the centre display (p. 593) Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 595) Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 595) Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 596) Cleaning the leather steering wheel (p. 596) Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts (p. 597) MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Cleaning the seatbelts Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents. Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents. Seatbelts Inlay mats and floor mat Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special textile cleaning agent is available from Volvo retailers. Ensure that the seatbelt is dry before allowing it to retract. Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt. Each inlay mat is secured with pins. Related information Remove the inlay mat by taking hold of the inlay mat at each pin and lifting the mat straight up. • • • • • • • Cleaning the interior (p. 593) Cleaning the centre display (p. 593) Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining (p. 594) Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining (p. 594) • • • Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 595) • Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 596) Cleaning the leather steering wheel (p. 596) Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts (p. 597) Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at each pin. WARNING Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 595) Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and check before setting off that the mat by the driver's seat is firmly affixed and secured in the pins so that it does not get caught adjacent to and under the pedals. Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 596) Cleaning the leather steering wheel (p. 596) Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts (p. 597) • A special textile cleaner is recommended for stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor mats should be cleaned with agents recommended by Volvo retailers. Related information • • Cleaning the interior (p. 593) Cleaning the centre display (p. 593) 595 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Cleaning leather upholstery Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents. Leather upholstery* Volvo's leather upholstery is treated to preserve its original appearance. Leather upholstery is a natural product that changes and acquires a beautiful patina over time. Regular cleaning and treatment are required in order that the properties and colours of the leather shall be preserved. Volvo offers a comprehensive product – Volvo Leather Care Kit/ Wipes – for the cleaning and treatment of leather upholstery which, when used in accordance with the instructions, preserves the leather's protective coating. To achieve best results, Volvo recommends cleaning and application of the protective cream one to four times per year (or more if required). Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is available from Volvo retailers. Cleaning the leather upholstery 1. Apply the leather cleaner to a damp sponge and squeeze until a foam is created. 2. 596 Use the sponge on the stain in a circular motion. 3. 4. Thoroughly dampen the stain using the sponge, allow the sponge to absorb the stain without scrubbing. Wipe the stain with a soft cloth and allow the leather to dry thoroughly Protecting the leather upholstery 1. Apply a small amount of leather protective agent to a cloth and then apply it to the leather in light circular motions. 2. Allow to dry for about 20 minutes. Protecting the leather upholstery makes it more resistant to the stresses from the sun's UV radiation. Cleaning the leather steering wheel Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents. Leather steering wheel Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the leather steering wheel with protective plastic. We recommend Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes for cleaning the leather steering wheel. First remove dirt, dust, etc. with a damp sponge or cloth. IMPORTANT Sharp objects, e.g. rings, can damage the leather on the steering wheel. Related information • • • • • • • Cleaning the interior (p. 593) Cleaning the centre display (p. 593) Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining (p. 594) Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 595) Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 595) Cleaning the leather steering wheel (p. 596) Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts (p. 597) Related information • • • • • • • Cleaning the interior (p. 593) Cleaning the centre display (p. 593) Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining (p. 594) Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 595) Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 595) Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 596) Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts (p. 597) * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts • Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and treat stains at once for best results. • • • • Interior plastic, metal and wood parts A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly moistened with water, available from Volvo retailers, is recommended for cleaning interior parts and surfaces. Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong stain removers. IMPORTANT Do not use solvent that contains alcohol when cleaning the glass for the driver display. IMPORTANT Keep in mind that high gloss surfaces are easily scratched. Clean these surfaces with a clean, dry microfibre cloth using small, circular motions. If needed, dampen the microfibre cloth with a little clean water. Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining (p. 594) Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 595) Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 595) Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 596) Cleaning the leather steering wheel (p. 596) Cleaning the exterior The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly. It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator. Use car shampoo. Related information • • • • • • • • • Cleaning the exterior (p. 597) Polishing and waxing (p. 598) Handwashing (p. 598) Automatic car wash (p. 600) High-pressure washing (p. 601) Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 601) Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 602) Cleaning wheel rims (p. 603) Rustproofing (p. 603) Related information • • Cleaning the interior (p. 593) Cleaning the centre display (p. 593) 597 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Polishing and waxing IMPORTANT Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull or to give the paintwork extra protection. The car does not need to be polished until it is at least one year old. However, the car can be waxed during this time. Do not polish or wax the car in direct sunlight, the surface being polished should be a maximum of 45 °C (113 °F). • • Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt and tar stains using tar remover or white spirit. More stubborn stains can be removed using fine rubbing paste designed for car paintwork. The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly. It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator. Use car shampoo. Handwashing Cleaning the exterior (p. 597) The following steps are good to remember when washing the car: Handwashing (p. 598) • Avoid washing the car in direct sunlight. This can cause the detergent or wax to dry and have an abrasive effect. • Remove bird droppings from the paintwork as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork very quickly. For example, use soft paper or sponge soaked in plenty of water. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended for the removal of any discolouration. Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber. • Wash the underbody, including wheel housings and bumpers. When using degreasant on plastic and rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is necessary. Use a soft washing sponge. • Rinse the entire car until the dissolved dirt has been removed so as to reduce the risk of scratches from washing. Do not spray directly onto the locks. • If necessary, use cold degreasing agent on very dirty surfaces. Note that in this case, the surfaces must not be hot from the sun. Polish first with a polish and then wax with liquid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the packaging carefully. Many preparations contain both polish and wax. IMPORTANT Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface layer. Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used. 598 Only paint treatment recommended by Volvo should be used. Other treatment such as preserving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or similar could damage the paintwork. Paintwork damage caused by such treatments is not covered by Volvo warranty. Handwashing Related information • • • • • • • • Automatic car wash (p. 600) High-pressure washing (p. 601) Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 601) Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 602) Cleaning wheel rims (p. 603) Rustproofing (p. 603) MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE • Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and plenty of lukewarm water. • Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo. • Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a water scraper. If you avoid allowing drops of water to dry in strong sunlight, you reduce the risk of water drying stains which may need to be polished out. • After the car has been washed, tar from asphalt may remain. Use tar remover to get rid of the last spots after the car has been washed. NOTE Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp housing when the lamp has been switched on for a time. • • • • Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 601) Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 602) Cleaning wheel rims (p. 603) Rustproofing (p. 603) IMPORTANT WARNING Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot. • Make sure that the panoramic roof and sun visor are closed before washing the car. • Never use polishing agent with abrasive properties on the panoramic roof. • Never use wax on the rubber mouldings around the panoramic roof. IMPORTANT IMPORTANT Dirty headlamps have impaired functionality. Clean them regularly, e.g. when refuelling. Remember to remove dirt from the drain holes in the doors and in the sills after washing the car. Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents but use water and a non-scratching sponge instead. Related information • • • • Cleaning the exterior (p. 597) Polishing and waxing (p. 598) Automatic car wash (p. 600) High-pressure washing (p. 601) 599 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Automatic car wash IMPORTANT The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly. It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the car fresh. For car washes where the car is pulled forward with rolling wheels, the following applies: 1. Automatic car wash An automatic car wash is a simple and quick way of washing the car, but it cannot reach everywhere. Washing the car by hand is recommended to achieve a good result, or to supplement automatic car washes with washing by hand. NOTE Volvo recommends that the car is not washed in an automatic car wash during the first few months (this is because the paintwork has not fully hardened). IMPORTANT Before driving the car into an automatic car wash, deactivate the functions for automatic braking when stationary and automatic parking brake application. If these functions are not deactivated, the brake system will jam when the car is stationary and the car will not be able to move. 2. Make sure that the door mirrors are retracted, any auxiliary lamps secured, antennas retracted or removed, otherwise they risk being damaged by the automatic car wash. 3. Drive into the car wash. 4. Switch off the "Automatic braking at standstill" function using the switch on the tunnel console. 5. Switch off the "Automatic parking brake application" function via the top view of the centre display. 6. Switch off the engine by pressing the start button next to the steering wheel. Hold the button depressed for at least 2 seconds. The car is ready for the car wash. Related information • • 600 Before washing the car, make sure that the automatic rain sensor is deactivated, otherwise there is the risk of it starting and damaging the wiper arms. Cleaning the exterior (p. 597) Polishing and waxing (p. 598) • • • • • • Handwashing (p. 598) High-pressure washing (p. 601) Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 601) Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 602) Cleaning wheel rims (p. 603) Rustproofing (p. 603) MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE High-pressure washing Cleaning the wiper blades The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly. It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator. Use car shampoo. The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly. It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator. Use car shampoo. High-pressure washing Wiper blades When using high-pressure washing, use sweeping movements and make sure that the nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm (13 in.) to the surface of the car. Do not spray directly onto the locks. Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen, impair the service life of wiper blades. • • NOTE Cleaning the exterior (p. 597) Polishing and waxing (p. 598) Wash the wiper blades and windscreen regularly with a lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo. Do not use any strong solvents. Handwashing (p. 598) Automatic car wash (p. 600) Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 601) Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 602) Cleaning wheel rims (p. 603) Rustproofing (p. 603) Rustproofing (p. 603) When cleaning, set the wiper blades in service position. Related information • • • • • • • Related information • • • • • • • Cleaning the exterior (p. 597) Polishing and waxing (p. 598) Handwashing (p. 598) Automatic car wash (p. 600) High-pressure washing (p. 601) Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 602) Cleaning wheel rims (p. 603) 601 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components IMPORTANT Avoid washing the car with cleaning agent with a pH value lower than 3.5 or higher than 11.5. This may result in discolouration of anodised aluminium parts such as roof rack and around the side windows. The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly. It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator. Use car shampoo. Never use metal polishing agent on anodised aluminium parts, this can result in discolouration and destroy the surface treatment. Exterior plastic, rubber and trim components A special cleaning agent available from Volvo retailers is recommended for the cleaning and care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim components, e.g. glossy trim mouldings. When using such a cleaning agent the instructions must be followed carefully. Avoid washing the car with detergent with a pH value below 3.5 or above 11.5. This can cause discolouration of anodised aluminium components*, as illustrated. We advise against use of abrasive polishing agents, as illustrated. Parts that should be washed using a cleaning agent with a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5. IMPORTANT Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber. When using degreasant on plastic and rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is necessary. Use a soft washing sponge. Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface layer. Related information • • • • • • • • Cleaning the exterior (p. 597) Polishing and waxing (p. 598) Handwashing (p. 598) Automatic car wash (p. 600) High-pressure washing (p. 601) Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 601) Cleaning wheel rims (p. 603) Rustproofing (p. 603) Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used. 602 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Cleaning wheel rims Rustproofing The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly. It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator. Use car shampoo. The car has effective protection against corrosion. Rims Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by Volvo. Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the surface and cause stains on chrome-plated aluminium rims. Related information • • • • • • • • Cleaning the exterior (p. 597) Polishing and waxing (p. 598) Handwashing (p. 598) Automatic car wash (p. 600) High-pressure washing (p. 601) Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 602) Cleaning wheel rims (p. 603) Rustproofing (p. 603) • Cleaning wheel rims (p. 603) Anti-corrosion protection for the body consists of metallic protective coatings on the sheet metal, a high-quality painting process, corrosion-protected and minimised metal overlap, and shielding plastic components, abrasion protection and supplemental rust inhibitor on exposed areas. In the chassis, exposed components of the wheel suspension are made of corrosion-resistant cast aluminium. Inspection and maintenance The car's anti-corrosion protection normally requires no maintenance, but a good way to further reduce the risk of corrosion is to keep the car clean. Strong alkaline or acidic cleaning solutions must always be avoided on glossy trim components. Any stone chips should be rectified as soon as they are discovered. Related information • • • • • • • Cleaning the exterior (p. 597) Polishing and waxing (p. 598) Handwashing (p. 598) Automatic car wash (p. 600) High-pressure washing (p. 601) Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 601) Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 602) 603 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Car paintwork The paintwork consists of several layers and is an important part of the car's rustproofing, and should therefore be checked regularly. The most common types of paintwork damage are stone chips, scratches, and marks on the edges of wings, doors and bumpers. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork should be rectified immediately. Related information • Touching up minor paintwork damage (p. 604) • Colour codes (p. 605) Touching up minor paintwork damage Paint is an important part of the car's rustproofing and should therefore be checked regularly. The most common types of paintwork damage are stone chips, scratches, and marks on the edges of wings, doors and bumpers. When repairing paint damage, the car must be clean, dry and have a temperature of over 15 °C. Touching up minor paintwork damage To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork should be rectified immediately. NOTE When repairing the paintwork, it must be clean and dry and at a temperature of at least 15°C. Materials that may be needed • Primer20 - a special adhesive primer in a spray can is available for e.g. plastic-coated bumpers. 20 21 604 • Basecoat and clearcoat - available in spray cans or as touch-up pens/sticks21. • • Masking tape. fine sand paper20. If required. Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick. If the damage has not reached down to the metal, the touch-up paint can be applied directly after the surface has been cleaned. NOTE When paint is repaired the surface must be clean and dry. The temperature of the surface should be at least 15 °C (60 °F). MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE 1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the damaged surface. Then remove the tape to remove any loose paint. If the damage is down to the metal, use of a primer is appropriate. In the event of damage to a plastic surface, an adhesive primer should be used to give better results - spray into the lid of the spray can and brush on thinly. 2. Before painting, gentle polishing using a very fine polishing agent may be carried out locally if required (e.g. if there are any uneven edges). The surface is cleaned thoroughly and left to dry. 3. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine brush, a matchstick or similar. Finish off with a basecoat and clearcoat once the primer has dried. For scratches, proceed as described above, but mask around the damaged area to protect the undamaged paintwork. Touch-up pens and spray paints are available from Volvo retailers. NOTE If the stone chip has not penetrated down to the meal and an undamaged layer of paint remains in place, fill in with base coat and clear coat as soon as the surface has been cleaned. Related information • • Car paintwork (p. 604) Colour codes (p. 605) Colour codes Colour code The colour code label is located on the car's right-hand rear door pillar and becomes visible when the right-hand rear door is opened. Exterior colour code Any secondary exterior colour code It is important that the correct colour is used. Related information • • Car paintwork (p. 604) Touching up minor paintwork damage (p. 604) 605 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Replacing the wiper blade, rear window 1. The wiper blades sweep water away from the windscreen and rear window. Together with the washer fluid they clean the windows and ensure visibility for driving. Windscreen and rear window wiper blades can be replaced. Grip the centre of the wiper arm and lift it from the windscreen to lock position. NOTE There is a lock position at half extension angle that may feel like resistance, this lock prevents the arm from falling back against the windscreen. The wiper arm must be pulled past the lock for wiper blade replacement. Replacing the wiper blade, rear window 2. Grip the lower part of the blade and pull to the right until the blade loosens from the arm. 3. Press the new wiper blade into place. You should hear a click. Check that it is firmly installed. 4. Lower the wiper arm. • • Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 160) • Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 163) • • • Filling washer fluid (p. 609) • Using windscreen wipers (p. 159) Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 161) Wiper blades in service position (p. 608) Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 607) IMPORTANT Lift the wiper arm from the window and pull the lower section of the blade to the right. Check the blades regularly. Neglected maintenance shortens the service life of the wiper blades. Related information • • • 606 Using the rain sensor (p. 160) Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 162) Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 164) * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Replacing windscreen wiper blades Fold up the wiper arm when it is in service position. Service position is activated/deactivated via the function view in the centre display when the car is stationary and the windscreen wipers are not on. Press the button located on the wiper blade mounting and pull straight out parallel with the wiper arm. The wiper blades sweep water away from the windscreen and rear window. Together with the washer fluid they clean the windows and ensure visibility for driving. Windscreen and rear window wiper blades can be replaced. Replacing a windscreen wiper blade Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click" is heard. 3. Check that the blade is firmly installed. 4. Fold the wiper arm back towards the windscreen. Related information • • Using the rain sensor (p. 160) Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 162) • Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 164) • • Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 160) • Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 163) • • • Filling washer fluid (p. 609) • Using windscreen wipers (p. 159) Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 161) Wiper blades in service position (p. 608) Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 606) The wiper blades are different lengths. NOTE The wiper blades are different lengths. The blade on the driver's side is longer than on the passenger side. * Option/accessory. 607 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Wiper blades in service position The windscreen wiper blades must be in service position (vertical position) when, for example, they are being replaced. are not on. Service mode is activated/deactivated via the function view in the centre display: Press the Wiper Service Position button. The light indicator in the button illuminates when the service position is activated. Upon activation, the wipers move to standing straight up. To deactivate the service mode, press Wiper Service Position again. The light indicator in the button extinguishes when the service position is deactivated. The wiper blades also exit service position if: Wiper blades in service position. In order to change, clean or lift the wiper blades (e.g. for scraping off ice from the windscreen) they must be in service position. IMPORTANT Before placing the wiper blades in the service position, make sure that they are not frozen down. Activating/deactivating service mode • • • • Windscreen wiping is activated. Windscreen washing is activated. Rain sensor activated. The car is driven away. Related information • • Using the rain sensor (p. 160) Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 162) • Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 164) • • Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 160) • Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 163) • • • Filling washer fluid (p. 609) • Using windscreen wipers (p. 159) Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 161) Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 607) Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 606) IMPORTANT If the wiper arms in service position have been folded up from the windscreen, they must be folded back down onto the windscreen before the activation of wiping, washing or the rain sensor, as well as before driving. This is to avoid scraping the paint on the bonnet. Service mode can be activated/deactivated when the car is stationary and the windscreen wipers 608 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Filling washer fluid Washer fluid is used for cleaning the headlamps as well as the windscreen and rear window. Washer fluid with antifreeze must be used when the temperature is under the freezing point. Prescribed grade: Washer fluid recommended by Volvo - with frost protection during cold weather and below freezing point. IMPORTANT Use Volvo genuine washer fluid or equivalent with a recommended pH of between 6 and 8, in working dilution (e.g. 1:1 with neutral water). • Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 161) • Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 163) • • • Wiper blades in service position (p. 608) • Using windscreen wipers (p. 159) Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 607) Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 606) IMPORTANT Use washer fluid with antifreeze when the temperature is below freezing to avoid freezing in the pump, reservoir and hoses. Volume: Filling of washer fluid takes place in the reservoir with a blue cap. The reservoir is used for windscreen washer, rear window washer and headlamp washers* NOTE When approx. 1 litre (1 qt) of washer fluid remains in the reservoir, the message Washer fluid Level low, refill is shown in the driver display, together with the symbol. • Cars with headlamp washing: 5.5 litres (5.8 qts). • Cars without headlamp washing: 3.5 litres (3.7 qts). Related information • • Using the rain sensor (p. 160) Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 162) • Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 164) • Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 160) * Option/accessory. 609 SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS Type designations The decals in the car contain information such as chassis number, type designation, colour code, etc. Label location The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on market and model. Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle identification and engine numbers can facilitate all contact with an authorised Volvo retailer regarding the car and when ordering spare parts and accessories. 612 SPECIFICATIONS Decal for type designation, vehicle identification number, permissible maximum weights and code designation for exterior colour and type approval number. The decal is positioned on the door pillar, and will be visible when the right-hand rear door is opened. Decal A/C system for cars with refrigerant R134a. Label for parking heater. Decal for engine code and the engine's serial number. Label for engine oil. Decal A/C system for cars with refrigerant R1234yf. }} 613 SPECIFICATIONS || NOTE It is not intended that the decals illustrated in the owner's manual should be exact replicas of those in the car. They are included to show their approximate appearance and locations in the car. The information that applies to your particular car can be found on the decal on the car. Decal for gearbox type designation and serial number. Decal for the car's identification number - VIN (Vehicle Identification Number). Further information on the car is presented in the registration document. 614 Related information • Air conditioning — specifications (p. 624) SPECIFICATIONS Dimensions Measurement of car length, height, etc. can be read in the table. Dimensions mm inches Dimensions mm inches A Ground clearanceA 205 8.1 E Load length, floor 887 34.9 B Wheelbase 2702 106.4 F Height 1658 65,3 C Length 4425 174.2 G Load height 733 28.9 D Load length, floor, folded seat 1670 65.7 H Front track 1601 63.0 I Rear track 1626 64.0 J Load width, floor 1059 41.7 A B Dimensions mm inches K Width 1873 (1863B) 73,7 (73,3B) L Width including door mirrors 2034 80,1 M Width including folded-in door mirrors 1910 75.2 For kerb weight + 1 person. Varies slightly depending on tyre dimension, chassis alternative, etc.). Body width. }} 615 SPECIFICATIONS || 616 Related information • Weights (p. 617) SPECIFICATIONS Weights Max. gross vehicle weight, etc. can be read on a label in the car. Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank 90% full and all fluids. The weight of passengers and accessories, and towball load (when a trailer is hitched) influence the load capacity and are not included in the kerb weight. Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight Kerb weight. NOTE The documented kerb weight applies to cars in the standard version - i.e. a car without extra equipment or accessories. This means that for every accessory added the loading capacity of the car is reduced correspondingly by the weight of the accessory. Examples of accessories that reduce load capacity are the different equipment levels (e.g. Kinetic, Momentum, Summum), as well as other accessories such as towbar, load carrier, space box, audio system, auxiliary lamps, GPS, fuel-driven heater, safety grille, carpets, cargo cover, power seats, etc. The decal is positioned on the door pillar, and will be visible when the right-hand rear door is opened. Max. gross vehicle weight Weighing the car is a certain way of ascertaining the kerb weight of your own particular car. Max. train weight (car+trailer) Max. front axle load Max. rear axle load WARNING The car's driving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed. Equipment level Max. load: See registration document. Max. roof load: 75 kg. Related information • • Type designations (p. 612) Towing capacity and towball load (p. 618) 617 SPECIFICATIONS Towing capacity and towball load Max. weight braked trailer Towing capacity and towball load for driving with a trailer can be read in the tables. NOTE Use of vibration dampers on the towbar is recommended for trailers heavier than 1800 kg. A Engine Engine codeA Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg) T5 AWD B4204T14 Automatic 2100 110 T5 AWD B4204T18 Automatic 2100 110 T5 AWD B4204T36 Automatic 2100 110 D4 AWD D4204T12 Automatic 2100 110 The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine. IMPORTANT When driving with a trailer, it is permitted to exceed the vehicle's gross vehicle weight (including towball load) by a maximum of 100 kg (220 lbs), provided that speed is limited to 100 km/h (62 mph). National legal requirements for the vehicle combination, such as speed, etc. must be observed. 618 SPECIFICATIONS Max. weight unbraked trailer Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg) 750 50 Related information • • • • Type designations (p. 612) Weights (p. 617) Driving with a trailer (p. 448) Trailer stability assist* (p. 449) * Option/accessory. 619 SPECIFICATIONS Engine specifications NOTE Engine specifications (power, etc.) for each respective engine alternative can be found in the table below. Engine Engine codeA Output Output Max. rated power Max. rated power Torque (kW/rpm) (hp/rpm) (kW/rpm) (hp/rpm) (Nm/rpm) No. of cylinders T5 AWD B4204T14 182/5500 247/5500 – – 350/1800-4800 4 T5 AWD B4204T18 185/5500 252/5500 206/5500 280/5500 350/1500–4800 4 T5 AWD B4204T36 183/5500 249/5500 – – 350/1800-4500 4 D4 AWD D4204T12 140/4000 190/4000 – – 400/1750-2500 4 A The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine. Related information • • • 620 Not all engines are available in all markets. Type designations (p. 612) Engine oil — specifications (p. 621) Coolant — specifications (p. 623) SPECIFICATIONS Engine oil — specifications Engine oil grade and volume for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table. Volvo recommends: Engine Engine codeA Oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter (litres) A T5 AWD B4204T14 Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20 T5 AWD B4204T18 approx. 5.6 T5 AWD B4204T36 approx. 5.6 D4 AWD D4204T12 Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20 approx. 5.6 approx. 5.2 The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine. Related information • • • • Type designations (p. 612) Adverse driving conditions for engine oil (p. 622) Checking and filling with engine oil (p. 571) Engine oil (p. 570) 621 SPECIFICATIONS Adverse driving conditions for engine oil IMPORTANT In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact. Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnormally high oil temperature or oil consumption. Below are some examples of adverse driving conditions. Check the oil level more frequently for long journeys: • • • • An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change, otherwise there is a risk of the service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact of the car being affected. towing a caravan or trailer in mountainous regions at high speeds in temperatures colder than -30 °C (-22 °F) or hotter than +40 °C (+104 °F). The above also apply to shorter driving distances at low temperatures. If engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used, engine related components may become damaged. Volvo Car Corporation disclaims any liability for any such damage. Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse driving conditions. It provides extra protection for the engine. Volvo recommends that oil changes are carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop. Volvo recommends: Related information • • 622 Engine oil — specifications (p. 621) Engine oil (p. 570) SPECIFICATIONS Coolant — specifications Transmission fluid — specifications Brake fluid — specifications Prescribed grade: Coolant recommended by Volvo mixed with 50% water1, see the packaging. Consult a Volvo retailer if unsure. Under normal driving conditions, the transmission fluid does not need to be changed during its service life. However, it may be necessary in adverse driving conditions. The medium in a hydraulic brake system is called brake fluid, and it is used to transfer pressure from e.g. a brake pedal via a master brake cylinder to one or more slave cylinders, which in turn act on a mechanical brake. To avoid health risks, different types of glycol must not be mixed. Related information • Automatic gearbox Prescribed transmission fluid: AW1 Prescribed grade: Volvo Original Dot 4 class 6 or equivalent. Topping up coolant (p. 572) NOTE It is recommended that brake fluid is changed or filled by an authorised Volvo workshop. Related information • 1 Engine compartment overview (p. 569) Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1. 623 SPECIFICATIONS Fuel tank - volume The fuel tank's filling capacity can be read in the table below. All models Litres (approx.) US gallons (approx.) 54 Tank capacity for AdBlue®2 Air conditioning — specifications The refillable tank capacity for the additive AdBlue is approx. 14.5 litres. The car's climate control system uses a freonfree refrigerant, either R1234yf or R134a depending on market. Information about which refrigerant the car's climate control system uses is printed on a decal located on the inside of the bonnet. Related information • Checking and filling with AdBlue® (p. 438) 14.2 Related information • Filling fuel (p. 431) Prescribed grades and volumes of fluids and lubricants in the air conditioning system can be read in the tables below. A/C decal Decal for R134a 2 624 Registered trademark that belongs to Ver-band der Automobilindustrie e.V. (VDA) SPECIFICATIONS Decal for R1234yf Symbol WARNING Meaning The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe Service and Containment of Refrigerants Used in Mobile A/C System), service and repair of the refrigerant system must only be performed by trained and certified technicians in order to ensure the safety of the system. A trained and certified technician is required in order to service the mobile air conditioning system (MAC) Flammable refrigerants Symbol explanation R1234yf Symbol Meaning Caution Mobile air conditioning system (MAC) Lubricant type Compressor oil Refrigerant Cars with R134a refrigerant Weight Prescribed grade 540 g (1.19 lbs) R134a Volume Prescribed grade 130 ml (4.40 fl. oz.) VC100yf Evaporator IMPORTANT WARNING The A/C system's evaporator must never be repaired or replaced with a previously used evaporator. A new evaporator must be certified and labelled in accordance with SAE J2842. The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R134a. This system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop. Cars with R1234yf refrigerant Weight Prescribed grade 480 g R1234yf Related information • Servicing the climate control system (p. 568) 625 SPECIFICATIONS Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions The fuel consumption for a vehicle is measured in litres per 100 km and CO2 emissions are measured in gram CO2 per km. litres/100 km The fuel consumption and emission values in the above table are based on special EU driving cycles (see below), which apply for cars with kerb weight in basic version and without extra equip- 626 motorway driving automatic gearbox NOTE Tyre rating for rolling resistance according to EU directive no. 1222/2009 gram CO2/km D4 AWD (D4204T12) manual gearbox mixed driving Explanation T5 AWD (B4204T14) urban driving N/A If the consumption and emission data is missing then it is included in the enclosed supplement. Not applicable A – – – – – – B – – – – – – C – – – – – – A – – – – – – B – – – – – – C – – – – – – ment. The car's weight may increase depending on its equipment level. This, along with how heavily the car is loaded, increases its fuel consumption and CO2 emissions. There are several reasons for fuel consumption that is higher than the values in the table. Examples of these include: SPECIFICATIONS • If the car is equipped with extra equipment that affects its weight. • • Driving style. • • High speed causes increased air resistance. If the customer chooses wheels other than those mounted as standard on the basic version of the model, as this could increase rolling resistance. Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions, weather and the condition of the car. A combination of the examples above could increase consumption considerably. There may be huge deviations in fuel consumption if comparing to the EU driving cycles (see below), which are used in the certification of the car and on which consumption figures in the table are based. For further information, please refer to the referenced regulations. NOTE Extreme weather conditions, driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes in combination with fuel quality are factors that considerably increase the car's fuel consumption. EU driving cycles The official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles"), all in accordance with EU Regulation no 692/2008 and 715/2007 (Euro 5 / Euro 6), 2017/1151 and 2017/1153. Since the driving cycles are also used for quality control, there are stringent requirements for test repeatability. Testing is therefore conducted in a controlled manner and only with the car's basic functions (e.g. air conditioning, radio, etc. switched off). The results of the official figures are therefore not naturally representative of what the customer sees in actual use. Related information • • • Type designations (p. 612) Weights (p. 617) Economical driving (p. 428) The regulations cover the driving cycles "Urban driving" and "Motorway driving": • Urban driving – the measurement starts with a cold start of the engine. The driving is simulated. • Motorway driving – the car is accelerated and braked at speed of 0-120 km/h (0-75 mph). The driving is simulated. The official value for mixed driving, which is shown in the table, is a combination of the results from the "Urban driving" and "Motorway driving" driving cycles in accordance with legal requirements. To determine the carbon dioxide emissions (CO2 emissions) during the two driving cycles, the exhaust gases were collected. These were then analysed to determine the value for CO2 emissions. 627 SPECIFICATIONS Approved wheel and tyre sizes In certain countries not all approved sizes are indicated by the registration document or other Engine ✓ = Approved man/ 235/60R17 235/55R18 235/50R19 245/45R20 245/40R21 aut 7,5x17x50,5 7,5x18x50,5 7,5x19x50,5 8x20x50.5 8x21x50.5 T5 AWD (B4204T14) aut ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ T5 AWD (B4204T18) aut ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ T5 AWD (B4204T36) aut ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ D4 AWD (D4204T12) aut ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Related information 628 documents. The following table shows all approved combinations of wheel rims and tyres. • Lowest permitted tyre load index and speed rating for tyres (p. 629) • • • Type designations (p. 612) Dimension designation for tyre (p. 519) Dimension designation for wheel rim (p. 520) SPECIFICATIONS Lowest permitted tyre load index and speed rating for tyres The table below shows the minimum permitted load index (LI) and speed rating (SS). Engine man/ Minimum permitted load index (LI)A Minimum permitted speed rating (SS)B aut T5 AWD B4204T14 aut 96 V T5 AWD B4204T18 aut 96 V T5 AWD B4204T36 aut 96 V D4 AWD D4204T12 aut 96 V A B The tyre's load index must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table. The tyre's speed rating must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table. Related information • • • • • Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 628) Approved tyre pressures (p. 630) Type designations (p. 612) Dimension designation for tyre (p. 519) Dimension designation for wheel rim (p. 520) 629 SPECIFICATIONS Approved tyre pressures NOTE Approved tyre pressures for each engine alternative can be found in the table. Engine Tyre size 235/60 R17 All engines, tyres or combinations of these are not always available in all markets. Speed Load, 1-3 persons Max. load ECO pressureA Front Rear Front Rear Front/rear (kPa)B (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) (kPa) 0-160 km/h (0-100 mph) 230 230 260 260 260 160+ km/h (100+ mph) 240 240 260 260 – max 80 km/h (max 50 mph) 420 420 420 420 – 235/55 R18 All engines 235/50 R19 245/45 R20 245/40 R21 Temporary Spare Tyre A B Economical driving. In certain countries the "bar" unit is used alongside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa. Related information • • • 630 Type designations (p. 612) Checking tyre pressure (p. 522) Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 628) ALPHABETICAL INDEX ALPHABETICAL INDEX 413 function managing speed overtaking radar sensor setting the time interval 281 284, 285 289, 290 311 286, 287 A/C (Air conditioning) 202 ABS anti-lock brakes 401 AdBlue filling operation Symbols and messages tank volume 436 438 437 440 624 ACC – Adaptive cruise control 281, 283, 284, 285, 286, 287, 289, 290, 291, 292, 294 Additional heater (Auxiliary heater) 213 Adjusting the steering wheel 175 Accessories and extra equipment installation Aerial location 244 1, 2, 3 ... 4WD A 37 37 Active bending lights 140 Active main beam 138 Active Park Assist 387, 388, 391, 392, 393, 394 function 387, 388, 392, 393, 394 Limitations 392 operation 388, 391 Symbols and messages 394 Active Yaw Control Adapting driving characteristics 264 262, 414 Adaptive Cruise Control 281, 283, 284, 285, 286, 287, 289, 290, 291, 292, 294 change cruise control functionality 292 fault tracing 292 Airbag Activating/deactivating driver's side passenger side Airbag, see Airbag 49 52 49 50, 52 49 Recirculation table of options Air quality allergies and asthma passenger compartment filter 195 187 181, 182 182 183 Air recirculation 195 Alarm deactivation motion and tilt sensors reduced alarm level 255 256 255 258 Alcohol lock 399, 400 Allergy and asthma inducing substances. 182 All Wheel Drive (AWD) 413 Ambience lights 146 Android Auto Apple CarPlay 486, 487, 488 483, 485 Approach lighting 144 Apps 465 Air conditioning 202 Ashtray 546 Air conditioning, fluid volume and grade 624 Assistance at risk of collision 365, 366, 367, 368, 369, 370, 372 Air conditioning system repair 178, 190 568 Air distribution Air vents change defrosting 184 184, 185 185 196 Audio and media 464 Audio settings phone play media Text message 464, 495 496 475, 476 495 631 ALPHABETICAL INDEX Auto climate control 195 Auto hold 407 Automatic brake activate and deactivate after collision 407 407 408 Automatic car wash 600 Automatic car washes 600 Battery jump starting maintenance overload start support symbols on the battery warning symbols Automatic engine stop auto-stop 419 Bicycle rack towbar mounted Automatic gearbox kickdown oil trailer 410 413 623 448 Automatic locking 248 Automatic relocking Automatic speed limiter Auxiliary heater AWD, All Wheel Drive Bag holder 632 brake light brake system emergency brake lights handbrake maintenance on gritted roads on wet roads 142 401 142 403 403 403 402 Brake system fluid 623 451 bulbs, specifications 578 339, 340, 341 bypass alcohol lock 400 Bluetooth connect connect car to Internet phone settings 480 499 488 497 Camera sensor 334 Bonnet, opening 567 Camera unit 322 213 Book service and repair 562 413 Brake assist after collision Car care 597, 598, 600, 601, 602, 603 Leather upholstery 596 408 Brake fluid grade Car functions in centre display 108 623 Brake functions 401 Brake light 142 Brakes Anti-lock braking system, ABS automatic when stationary brake assist system, BAS 401 401 407 402 Cargo area electrical socket lighting mounting points parcel shelf protective net 550 546, 547 145 552 555 553 219, 242 272, 274, 275 B Backrest front seat, adjusting rear seat, lowering BLIS 443, 579 443 579 443 579 582 583 583 166, 167, 169, 170 171 551 C Cargo area floor 553 ALPHABETICAL INDEX Car holiday 428 Child safety Car key battery low 222 Child safety locks Car modem connect car to Internet settings 500 501 Car status Tyre pressure 562 527 Car upholstery Car washing 593, 594, 595, 596, 597 597, 598, 600, 601, 602, 603 57 Clean Zone Interior Package 182 247 Climate control auto-regulation centre display experienced temperature fan control Parking rear seat sensors temperature control voice control zones 178, 190 195 190 179 200 203 190 179 201, 202 180 178 Child seat 57, 58, 60, 62 i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points 60 lower mounting points 59 overview table 63 positioning/fitting 60, 62 table for location 64 table of i-Size 66 table of ISOFIX 67 Upper mounting points 58 Catalytic converter Recovery 453 Cigarette lighter central locking 245 City Safety in crossing traffic 545 332, 333 Centre display change appearance 117 cleaning 593 climate control 190 function view 108 Keyboard 112 messages 126, 127, 128 operation 98, 101, 105, 110 overview 95 settings 118, 119, 120 switch off and change volume 117 symbols in status bar 110 views 101 City Safety with obstructed evasive manoeuvre Cleaning wheel rims 603 Change of owner 120 Cleaning wiper blades 601 Checking the engine oil level 571 Clean Zone 181 City Safety™ 333 326, 327, 329, 330, 334, 337 Cleaning 595, 596, 597 automatic car wash 600 car washing 597, 598, 600, 601, 602, 603 centre display 593 Fabric upholstery 593, 594, 596 rims 603 Seatbelts 595 upholstery 593, 594, 595, 596, 597 Climate control system Refrigerant Clock, adjustment CO2 emissions Coat hanger Collision Collision warning Collision warning system Pedestrian detection Radar sensor 624 82 626 553 42, 44, 49, 55 326, 338 330 311 Colour code, paint 605 Colour codes 605 Combined instrument panel settings 75 77 633 ALPHABETICAL INDEX Compass calibration 459, 460 460 Condensation in headlamps 598, 600, 601, 602 Connect car to Internet no or poor connection via a mobile device (WiFi) via car modem via mobile device (Bluetooth) 503 500 500 499 Connect phone Data recording transfer between car and workshop Data link connector 35 560 38 Drive-E Environmental philosophy Driver Alert Control operation 151, 153 152 153 28 355 356, 357 Data sharing 504 Daytime running lights 136 489 Deadlock deactivation 258 259 Driver display application menu messages Controls lighting 146 Defrosting 196 Driver performance Coolant 623 Coolant, filling 572 Diesel run out of fuel 434 435 Cooling system overheating Diesel particle filter 436 Driver profile edit select 123 125 124 442 Digital radio (DAB) 473 driver support system 262 Cornering lights 141 Corner Traction Control 264 Dimensions Towbar 615 445 Drivetrain Gearbox 409 42 dipped beam 137 344, 345, 346, 348 Dipstick, electronic 571 Driving cooling system with a tailer 442 448 276, 277 280 277, 278 279 Direction indicator 139 Driving economy 428 Direction indicators 139 Driving in water 430 direction of rotation 521 Display lighting 146 Driving mode change 414 416 DivX® 479 Driving with a trailer towball load towing capacity 618 618 Crash, see Collision Cross Traffic Alert – CTA Cruise control deactivate managing speed temporary deactivation CTA – Cross Traffic Alert 634 Door mirrors Dipping resetting D 344, 345, 346, 348 Cyclist detection 330 CZIP (Clean Zone Interior Package) 182 90 91 80, 81 ALPHABETICAL INDEX E ECO climate 416 ECO mode activate with function button 416 418 Engine braking, automatic 426 F Engine compartment coolant Engine oil overview 572 570 569 Fan Air distribution Air vents Control 185 185 200 Fault tracing for the camera sensor 323 Ferry transport 423 First aid 556 First aid kit 556 Economical driving 416, 428 Engine drag control ECO pressure 523, 630 Engine oil adverse driving conditions filling filter grade and volume Electrical socket using 546 547 Electrical system 579 Electric parking brake 403 emergency brake lights 142 Emergency equipment first aid kit warning triangle 556 556 Emergency puncture repair kit implementation, follow-up inspection location overview Pump up tyre sealing fluid 538 538 537 537 542 537 Emissions of carbon dioxide 626 Engine deactivate overheating start Start/Stop 397 442 396 419 264 570, 622 622 571 570 621 Engine specifications 620 Engine temperature high 442 Environment Error messages Adaptive Cruise Control see Messages and symbols 28 294 294, 309 Error messages in BLIS 343 Ethanol content maximum 10 percent by volume 432 Exhaust system 436 External dimensions 615 Flooded road 430 Fluids, capacities 609, 624 Fluids and oils 623, 624 Fog lamp front rear 141 141 Foot brake 401 Four-C 423 Front seat Climate control Fan heating Temperature Ventilation 190 200 191, 192 201 193 Front seat, manual 166 Front seat, power adjusting seat 167 167 635 ALPHABETICAL INDEX Lumbar support massage memory function multi-function control FSC, ecolabelling Fuel fuel consumption identifier fuel gauge 170 169 168, 169 169, 170 23 432, 434 626 432, 434 77 Fuelling filling fuel filler flap 431 430 Fuel tank volume 624 Fuel vapour 432 Fuse box 584 Fuses changing General in engine compartment under glovebox 585 584 586 590 G Heated washer nozzles 160 Gearbox automatic 409 410 Heater auxiliary heater parking heater 211 213 212 Gear positions automatic gearbox 410 Gear selector inhibitor 412 Gear shift indicator 413 Heating seats steering wheel Windows 191, 192 194 198, 199 Glass laminated/reinforced High engine temperature 442 148 High-pressure washing 601 Glovebox 548 Gracenote® 478 Hill descent control activate with function button 426 427 Gross vehicle weight 617 Hill Descent Control 413 Hill start assist Hill Start Assist (HSA) 408 Hill Start Assist 408 HomeLink® program using 456 456 458 Home safe light duration 143 Horn 174 GSI - Gear selector assistance H Handbrake 403, 404 Handwash 598 Hard disk space 506 Hazard warning flashers 143 HDC Headlamp control head restraint 636 426 134, 146 173 425, 426, 427 I IAQS (Interior Air Quality System) IC (Inflatable Curtain) 182 55 ALPHABETICAL INDEX ID, Volvo 26 Identification number 39 Ignition position 398, 399 Immobiliser 230 Immobilizer Immobiliser 230 Indicator symbols 83 Individual drive mode 55 Inflatable Curtain 55 Information display 75, 77 Infotainment system (Audio and media) 464 Instrument lighting 146 Instruments and controls IntelliSafe Driver support Interior Air Quality System Interior lighting 562 564 561 iPod®, connection 72 73 72, 73 612 480 Laminated glass 148 ITPMS - Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System 524 Lamps change location specifications trailer 573 574 578 450 Lane assistance operation 360 J Jack Journey statistics Jump starting 182 144, 146 Interior rearview mirror Dipping 151 152 Intermittent wiping 159 Internet, see Internet-connected car 498 529 80 443 Lane assistance – Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) 357, 359, 360, 362, 364 Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) K Kerb weight Key 31 L Labels location of 414 Inflatable curtain Instrument overview left-hand drive car right-hand drive car Internet-connected car book service and repair send car information system updates Keyboard change language Keyless Locking/unlocking settings touch-sensitive surfaces 617 217 112, 115 115 242 243 241 Keypad in the steering wheel 174 Key tag 217 357, 359, 360, 362, 364 Language 118 Leather upholstery, washing instructions 596 Level control damping 423 License agreement Lifting tool 86, 507 529 Lighting active bending lights 140 approach lighting 144 automatic lighting, passenger compartment 144 637 ALPHABETICAL INDEX Automatic main beam 138 brake light 142 bulbs, specifications 578 controls 134, 144, 146 controls lighting 146 cornering lights 141 daytime running lights 136 dipped beam 137 direction indicators 139 display lighting 146 emergency brake lights 142 fog lamp 141 Hazard warning flashers 143 home safe lighting 143 instrument lighting 146 in the passenger compartment 144, 146 lamp positions 574 main beam 137, 138 position lamps 135 rear fog lamp 141 settings 135 Lighting, bulb replacement brake light direction indicator, rear rear fog lamp 638 573 576 575 577 Loading General load retaining eyelets long load 550 552 550 Max. roof load Media player compatible file formats voice control Loading hooks 551 Load retaining eyelets cargo area 552 Messages and symbols Adaptive Cruise Control Collision Warning with Auto Brake Lock locking unlocking 219 219 Messages in BLIS 617 474, 475, 476 505, 506 131 294 337 343 Lockable wheel bolts 530 Messages in displays manage saved Lock confirmation setting 216 217 Meters fuel gauge 77 Mileage 78 Locking/unlocking tailgate 221, 243 Misting condensation in headlamps 91, 126 93, 127 94, 128 Low battery voltage Battery 443 Mobile phone, see Phone 489 Low speed control activate with function button 425 425 Mood lighting 145 Motion sensor 255 M 597, 600 N Limitations for Driver Alert Control 357 Main beam 137, 138 Limp home 409 Load carriers 551 Maintained climate comfort start/shut-off 208 208 maintenance Rustproofing 603 Net cargo area 553 ALPHABETICAL INDEX O octane rating Oil, see also Engine oil 432 621, 622 Oil level low 571 Online car no or poor connection 498 503 Option/accessory Output outside temperature gauge Overheating Overtaking Assistance Owner's manual ecolabelling in centre display in mobile Owner information 21 620 82 442, 448 289, 290, 306 21 23 17, 18 20 16 P PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch) 52 Paddle on the steering wheel Paintwork colour code damage and touch-up 174 605 604, 605 Panorama roof opening and closing pinch protection sun blind ventilation position PAP - Active Park Assist 156 148 154, 158 157 387, 388, 391, 392, 393, 394 Parcel shelf 555 Park Assist function 373, 374, 375, 376, 377 373, 374, 375 Park assist camera 378, 379, 381, 383, 384, 385, 386 383 settings Passenger compartment heater (Parking heater) 212 Passenger compartment interior ashtray cigarette lighter electrical socket glovebox Sun visor tunnel console 544 546 545 546 548 549 545 Passenger compartment lighting automatic 144 Personal information (Privacy policy) 432 433 Park assist camera's limitations 384 Petrol particle filter Park assist lines for Park assist camera 381 Parking on hill 406 Parking brake activate and deactivate automatic activation low battery voltage 403 404 405 406 Parking climate Symbols and messages 203 210 Phone Calls change to another connect connect automatically connect manually disconnect remove text message voice control Parking heater 212 Phone charger Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch Passenger compartment filter 52 36 petrol Pilot Assist 183 overtaking 488 493, 496 493 489 491 492 492 493 494 130 497 296, 299, 300, 301, 302, 304, 306, 307, 308, 309 306 639 ALPHABETICAL INDEX Pinch protection resetting 148 149 R PIN code 501 Radar sensor Limitations Pocket park assist - PAP 387, 388, 391, 392, 393, 394 Polishing 598 Position lamp 135 Power operated tailgate 248 Power panorama roof 154 Power save mode 443 Power seat Power windows pinch protection Preconditioning start/shut-off Timer Privacy policy 167 149, 150 148 204 204 205 36 Private locking Activating/deactivating 253 253 Protective net 553 Pump up tyre 542 Puncture 537 heating interior 283, 311 312 Radar unit 311 Radio change radio frequency and radio station DAB search for radio station settings start voice control 468 469 473 470 471 468 131 Radio favourites 470 Rain sensor 160, 161 Rain sensor memory function 161 Raising the car 565 Rear seat Climate control head restraint heating lowering the backrest 190 173 192 171 Rearview and door mirrors compass Dipping door electrically retractable 459, 460 152 151, 153 153 rear window heating Washers Wiper 199 163, 164 163, 164 Recommendations during driving 428 Recommendations for loading 550 Recovery 455 Red Key settings 226 227 Refrigerant climate control system 568 624 Refuelling AdBlue 431, 438 438 Regeneration 433, 436 Remote control, HomeLink® programmable 456 Remote control immobiliser 230 Remote control key battery replacement connect to driver profile detachable key blade loss range 217 222 125 227 226 222 Remote control key system, type approval 232 Remote updates 640 199 151 561 ALPHABETICAL INDEX Resetting, trip meter 80 Sealing fluid 537 Resetting the door mirrors 153 Seat, see Seats 166 Restore settings change of owner Driver profile 121 120 125 Retractable power door mirrors 153 Seatbelt buckle/unbuckle pregnancy seatbelt reminder seatbelt tensioner 44 45 42 47 46 Seatbelt, see Seatbelts 44 SIM card Seatbelt reminder 47 SIPS (Side Impact Protection System) seatbelt tensioner Resetting Skidding 429 47 Ski hatch 552 Seatbelt tensioner 46 slippery driving conditions 429 Reversing camera Reversing sensors 378, 379, 381, 383, 384, 385, 386 373, 374, 375, 376, 377 Road run-off protection Road sign information Limitations operation 366, 367, 368 349, 350, 352 354 350, 352, 353, 354 Roll Stability Control 263 Roof load, max. weight 617 RSC (Roll Stability Control) 263 Run out of fuel diesel 435 Rustproofing 603 Safety mode start/movement sensors Air quality Climate control Sensus connection and entertainment S Safety pregnancy Seats heating manual front seat memory function front seat power front seat Ventilation whiplash protection 42 42 55 56 191, 192 166 168, 169 167 193 43 183 179 32 Sensus Navigation 352 Service position 608 Service programme 560 Settings Categories contextual Resetting settings menu Side airbag Side Impact Protection System Software updates Soot filter spare wheel Speed camera 121 122 119 121 121 54 54, 55 501 54, 55 35 436 534, 535 354 Speed limiter 268, 271, 272, 275 deactivation 271 getting started 269 temporary deactivation 270 Speed ratings, tyres 519 Spin control 264 Stabiliser trailer Stability and traction control system operation 449 264, 267 265, 266 641 ALPHABETICAL INDEX Stability system Stains 264 593, 594, 595, 596, 597 Start/Stop deactivate Driving Limitations 419 420 419 421 Starting the engine after collision 396 56 Start the car 396 Steering assistance at risk of collision 365, 366, 367, 368, 369, 370, 372 Steering assistance at risk of head-on collision 369, 370 154, 158 148 Sunroof pinch protection 148 Sun visor mirror lighting 549 145 Support battery 582 Switching off the engine 397 397 262 Switch off engine Steering force level, see Steering force 262 Steering lock 175 Symbols indicator symbols Steering wheel paddles Stickers location of Stone chips and scratches Stop/start function 174, 175 194 174 174 175 411 612 604, 605 419 544 548 549 545 Sun blind panorama roof pinch protection Steering force, speed related Steering wheel heating keypad paddle steering wheel adjustment 642 Storage spaces glovebox Sun visor tunnel console 83 T Tailgate Locking/unlocking 221, 243 opening/closing with foot movement 252 power 248 unlock from inside 246 Temperature Control experienced 201, 202 179 Temporary spare spare wheel 534 Terms and conditions services user 36 504 Through-load hatch 552 Tilt detector 255 Tools 529 Symbols and messages Adaptive Cruise Control centre display status field Collision Warning with Auto Brake parking climate 294 110 337 210 Symbols and messages for Assistance at risk of collision 372 Towing system updates 561 Towing capacity and towball load 618 Towing eye 453 Traction control 264 Traffic information 471 Total airing function Towbar foldable specifications 217, 245 444 446 445 452, 455 ALPHABETICAL INDEX Trailer cable driving with a trailer Lamps snaking Trailer stability assist Transmission 449 448 448 450 449 264, 449 409 Transmission oil grade 623 Tread 521 Tread depth Tread wear indicators Trip computer 521, 536 521 78, 79 Trip meter 78 Trip meter, resetting 80 Troubleshooting Adaptive Cruise Control 292 TSA - trailer stability assist 449 TSA - Trailer stability assist 264 Tunnel console 545 Tunnel detection 137 TV 481 482 482 settings watch Type approval radar system remote control key system Type designations 524 630 536 612 Tyre dimension 519, 529 Tyre load index 519 Tyre pressure Adjust Check recommended 522 522 523 Tyre pressure label 523 Tyre pressure monitoring action Calibrate Status Tyre pressure table Tyres dimensions direction of rotation installation pressure puncture repair removal rotation specifications storage tread depth tread wear indicators tyre pressure monitoring tyre pressure table winter tyres 316 232 U Units 118 Unknown car part 259 Unlocking settings with key blade 220 229 524 528 525 527 USB jack for connecting media 481 630 V 518 628 521 533 630 537 531 518 628, 629, 630 518 536 521 Ventilation seats Vibration damper Video settings Voice control Climate control phone radio and media settings 184, 185 193 444 478, 480 479 180 130 131 131 643 ALPHABETICAL INDEX Voice recognition 128 VOL marking 518 Volvo ID create and register 26 26 Washers Headlamps rear window washer fluid, filling windscreen Waxing W Warning lamp Adaptive Cruise Control stability and traction control system Warning lamps Airbags – SRS alternator not charging Fault in brake system Low oil pressure Parking brake applied seatbelt reminder starter battery not charging Warning 644 283 264 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 162 163, 164 609 162 598 Weights kerb weight 617 Wheel bolts lockable 530 530 Wheel change 529 Wheel rim, dimensions 520 Wheel rims cleaning 603 Wheels installation removal snow chains 533 531 536 Wheels and tyres approved dimensions tyre load index and speed rating Warning sound Parking brake 406 Warning symbols Safety 85 42 Warning triangle 556 Washer fluid 609 Washer nozzles, heated 160 Wi-Fi connect car to Internet delete network 628 519, 629 whiplash protection 43 Whiplash Protection System 43 WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System) 43 500 503 share internet connection, hotspot technology and security 502 504 Windows and glass 148 Windscreen heating 198 Windscreen washing 162 Windscreen wiper rain sensor 159 160, 161 Winter driving 429 Winter tyres 536 Winter wheels 536 Wiper blades changing Service position WPC 606, 607 608 497 TP 24558 (English), AT 1746, MY18, Copyright © 2000-2017 Volvo Car Corporation
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project